C00029-5 C8 Appendix 1d - Valard JSA SOP SWP Procedures - A6V3L9

APPENDIX 1d:
Job Safety Analysis (JSA), Safe Operating Procedures (SOP)

& Safe Work Practices (SWP)
(Valard)
Document Description: JSA for Excavations / Trenching
Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.005A
Date: April 15, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Jan. 08, 2016 Revised by: D, Stykalo
This JSA is to aid the site supervisor in planning the work to be used in conjunction with other job planning tools, such as
the daily tailboard sheet and other applicable procedures, etc. This should not be viewed as the complete job plan but as a
starting point. Normal proper personnel protective equipment should be worn at all times and is not addressed in this JSA
unless there is a specific need.
Hazard Review on change of process Critically examine the areas of

8-10
1-3 Low or if circumstances change. No exposure in the process, and agree
Moderate /
1 2 3 4 5 Risk great effort required for on a timetable for completion of all
High Risk
1 1 2 3 4 5 reducing risk. agreed actions.
Exposure
2 2 4 6 8 10 4-6 Low Investigate engineering 12-25 Cease work until interim controls
3 3 6 9 12 15 / controls to minimize reliance Unaccepta are implemented, and an action
4 4 8 12 16 20 Moderat on PPE & procedures. ble Risk plan to permanently reduce the risk
5 5 10 15 20 25 e Risk to an acceptable level.
Post
Potential (Source of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard
Task / Activity Mitigation
Loss/Hazard Rating Prevention Barriers Reference
Rating
1. Excavation 1.1 Buried utilities. 5 Low/Mod 1.1 Obtain necessary SWP 26.031 3 Low/Risk
Authorization excavation, ground Excavations
disturbance clearance.
* Significant Concerns:
Workers are to insure 1.2 Permit to work 1.2 Obtain necessary
that there are no permits to work, if
underground lines of required.
any type. The local
authority must verify 1.3 Confined Space 1.3 Confined space entry
this. Entry certificate if permit must be obtained
deeper than 1.2 if workers are to enter
meters. any excavation or trench
greater than 1.2 Metres.
2. Equipment checks for 2.1 Possible fluid leaks. 3 Low/Risk 2.1 Visual inspection of SWP 26.013 1 Low/Risk
equipment prior to use. Use of
Page 1 of 4
Post
Rating
mobile and stationary Use drip pans to avoid Company
equipment. spillage of hazardous Vehicles
waste. Spill kits placed at
all equipment with a
potential to spill.
2.2 Equipment failure 2.2 Ensure equipment log
books / Check Lists are
completed daily and
checked for completion.
Ensure applicable
equipment inspection
and certifications are
current.
2.3 Ensure workers are

aware of protocol to
inform appropriate
people of spill.
3. Excavation / 3.1 Care-in/collapse of 6 Low/Mod 3.1 Benching, sloping, 4 Low/Risk
Trenching sides shoring as per standard.
3.2 Damaging the 3.2 Obtain appropriate

underground utilities locates. Hand dig in case
and cables. of doubt and close to
utilizes.
3.3 Falling of persons, 3.3 Fence or barricade

loads and mobile excavation pits and
equipment into the trenches. Use warning
excavation / trench. signs.
Page 2 of 4
Post
Rating
3.4 Engulfment. 3.4 Soil condition survey,
excavation to be done
under competent
persons supervision,
proper protection to
prevent cave in and
collapse of sides.
3.5 Access and egress. 3.5 Stair case, ladder or

ramp must be present in
excavation more than 1.2
meter deep, they must
be placed so that a
person should not have
to travel more than 25
feet (7.5 Meter) to reach
them.
3.6 Spoil Management. 3.6 Spoil piles must be

placed at least 1 meter
away from the edge of
the excavation.
3.7 Water Management 3.7 Hydro vac, pumps, dikes

and special shoring
techniques can be used
to remove water
Page 3 of 4
NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY
Page 4 of 4
Document Description: JSA for Hydro-vacing Trenches
Created by: A. Felczak Doc. Number: JSA 01.006
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision #: 7 Date Revised: April 10, 2013 Revised by: A. Felczak
the daily tailboard sheet and other applicable procedures, etc. This should not be viewed as the complete job plan but as
a starting point. Normal proper personnel protective equipment should be worn at all times and is not addressed in this
JSA unless there is a specific need.
Review on change of Critically examine the areas of
Hazard 1-3 8-10
process or if circumstances exposure in the process, and
Low Moderate /
1 2 3 4 5 change. No great effort agree on a timetable for
Risk High Risk
1 1 2 3 4 5 required for reducing risk. completion of all agreed actions.
Exposure
2 2 4 6 8 10 4-6 Investigate engineering 12-25 Cease work until interim controls

3 3 6 9 12 15 Low / controls to minimize reliance Unaccept are implemented, and an action
4 4 8 12 16 20 Modera on PPE & procedures. able Risk plan to permanently reduce the
5 5 10 15 20 25 te Risk risk to an acceptable level.
Potential (source of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard Post Mitigation
Task / Activity Loss/Hazard Rating Prevention Barriers Reference Rating
1. Set up Hydro Vac 1.1 Injury to workers and 1.1 A Spotter must be used to
Unit others move the Equipment to SWP 26.038
1.2 Slips and trips insure nothing is struck.
1.3 Noise 1.1 Level work area if required. SWP 26.027
1.4 Incorrect setup 1.1 Workers to wear the
1.5 Electrical Hazard following PPE:
1.6 Striking workers or • Hard Hats
objects. • Safety Glasses
1.6 Equipment tipping over. • Hydrovac operator to
wear Face shield
• Approved boots
• Gloves
• Hearing protection
• Hi Vis outerwear
1.2 A clear walkway must be

prepared.
1.3 Hearing protection is

mandatory.
1.4 Follow manufacturer’s
manual. SWP 26.002
1.5 Maintain Limits of Approach
from any powerline.
1.6 Setup the Hydrovac on
stable ground.
2.Trenching with Hydro- 2.1 Equipment failure 2.1 Equipment must be SWP. 26.038
Vac unit 2.2 Falling into trench inspected by supervisor prior
2.3 Struck by boom to its use.
2.4 Ground cave in. 2.1 Trench area to be protected
by barriers when leaving
area unattended.
2.3 Boom operator to advise
worker nearby to move prior
to swinging boom.
2.4 Trench over 1.2 metres deep
must be either shored or
sloped at 45° angle
2.1 Ladders must be placed
close to workers and
minimum of 25 feet apart.
3. Back filling trench 3.1 Contaminated material 3.1 Approved sand to be placed. SWP 26.027
with sand used. 3.2 Spotter must be used to
3.2 Equipment striking guide equipment near
workers or objects. trench.
3.3 Equipment slipping into 3.3 Equipment must be kept a
trench. minimum of 3 meters from
trench.
4. Clean-up 541 Tripping, falls 4.1 Area kept in a clean manner. SWP 26.043
4.1 Walk on level area if
possible.
4.1 All material left over must be

cleaned up.
4.1 Restore ground to original
condition.

Document Description: JSA for Installing Screw Anchors
Created by: HSE Doc. Number: JSA 01.009
Date: Aug. 01, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Jan. 08, 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
1. Mobilize to site 1.1 Traffic 3 Low/Risk 1.1 Four way flashers and SWP 26.013 1 Low/Risk
pull to the side if needed Use of
while opening barriers; Company
Flag persons and traffic Vehicles
control as required;
Secure loads.
Road conditions, time of
day, weather check
height of utilities.
2. Set up anchor 2.1 Equipment strikes 3 Low/Risk 2.1 Operator to identify and SWP 26.027 1 Low/Risk
installing Machine employee communicate with Spotter and
designated employee to Signaller
guide during “backing”
operation.
Page 1 of 8
Post
Rating
Operator to maintain
visual contact with
personnel.
Operator to familiarize
self with surrounding
area prior to beginning
equipment set-up.
Operator and ground
personnel to review
planned direction of
equipment movement
during “Tail-gate
meeting” and on an
ongoing basis during the
work.
2.2 Hands, fingers or 2.2 Work gloves and other

other body parts PPE to be worn.
caught in between Designate a flagger for
objects. movement control.
Keep hands and body
clear and maintain safe
distance from pole.
Do not allow personnel in
pinch points.
Recommendation of not
wearing jewelry or
excessively loose fitting
clothing.
2.3 Rigging fails. 2.3 Inspect all rigging prior to

use for damage and/or
Page 2 of 8
Post
Rating
defects.
Ensure all rigging being
applied is SWL rated for
load.
2.4 Equipment contacts 2.4 Identify all energized

energized electrical electrical equipment and
equipment and/or conductors and
conductors. determine necessary
clearance to be
maintained from
electrical conflicts.
Spotter assigned to
assist operator in
maintaining clearances.
2.5 Slips, trips, falls. 2.5 Observe work area for

hazards and eliminate
whenever possible.
Guard and/or barricade
or otherwise clearly
identify hazards that
cannot be removed.
Ensure personnel are
using appropriate
footwear, clean shoes of
mud, ice, dirt, etc. prior to
climbing on machine.
Clean equipment steps
and handgrips.
Face machine when
ascending and
Page 3 of 8
Post
Rating
descending. Maintain 3
point contact.
2.6 Equipment tips over. 2.6 Crane leveled as

required.
Outriggers are to be fully
extended.
Equipment operated
within manufacturers
load chart rating and safe
radius work zone.
All environmental factors
considered per
manufacturer
specifications.
2.7 Strains, sprains and 2.7 Keep proper body

overexertion position.
Do not extend arms or
legs beyond strength
positions.
Ask for assistance.
3. Install Anchor 3.1 Hands, fingers and 4 Low/Mod 3.1 Work gloves and other Section 10 3 Low/Risk
other body parts PPE to be worn. Personal
caught in pinch Designate a flagger for Protective
points. movement control. Equipment
Keep hands and body
clear and maintain safe
distance from pole.
pinch points.
Operator to identify and
Page 4 of 8
Post
Rating
communicate with
designated employee to
operation.
3.2 Personnel struck by 3.2 Operator to maintain

anchor or equipment. visual contact with
personnel.
road construction.
Operator and ground
personnel to review
clearing during “Tail-gate
work.
Set drive at proper angle,
check torque
requirement, check that
anchor is not deforming
during installation.
Inspect hose and fittings
for leaks, wear or
damage.
Wear all necessary PPE.
3.3 Hydraulic system 3.3 Establish the best work

failure spraying hot position possible to
fluid. minimize exposure to
Page 5 of 8
Post
Rating
high-pressure hydraulic
system bursting failure.
4. Test Anchors 4.1 Slips, trips and falls 3 Low/Risk 4.1 Observe work area for SWP 26.043 2 Low/Risk
hazards and eliminate Housekeeping
whenever possible.
cannot be removed.
Work gloves and other
PPE to be worn.
4. 2 Hands, fingers and 4.2 Designate a flagger for

other body parts movement control.
caught in pinch Keep hands and body
points. clear and maintain safe
distance from pole.
pinch points.
Recommendation of not
wearing jewelry or
clothing.
4.3 Test equipment 4.3 Check specified torque

overstressed. requirement for given
anchor.
Ensure equipment will be
operated within the
manufacturers SWL
specifications.
Page 6 of 8
Post
Rating
5. Clean up area 5.1 Slips, trips, and falls 3 Low/Risk 5.1 Observe work area for 2 Low/Risk
whenever possible.
5.2 Personnel struck by 5.2 Guard and/or barricade

equipment or otherwise clearly
cannot be removed.
Operator to identify and
communicate with
operation.
visual contact with
personnel.
clean-up operations.
Operator and ground
personnel to review
equipment movement
during “Tail-gate
work.
Page 7 of 8
Page 8 of 8
Document Description: JSA for Site Preparation (Tie-down Areas)
Created by: V. Vidakovic Doc. Number: JSA 01.010
Date: April 07, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Jan. 08, 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
1. Mobilization and 1.1 Traffic 4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Obey speed limits of the SWP 26.013 2 Low/Risk
Access to Site roads used. Use of
Four way flashers and Company
pull to the side if needed Vehicles
while opening barriers.
Flag persons and traffic SWP 26.027
control if required Spotter and
Secure loads. Signaller
1.2 Congestion and 1.2 Park clear out of work
Right of Way Limits area.
Only needed equipment
parked in work area.
Equipment and trucks to
Page 1 of 4
Post
Rating
keep to designated roads
and accesses.
Communication between
vehicles if necessary.
Wait at wide spots to
meet other vehicles.
1.3 Existing Line 1.3 Ensure operators and

Structures crew are aware of
overhead lines (limits of
* Significant Concerns: approach)
Travelling speed Use Designated Signaler
ROW boundaries (spotter) if unsure of
Equipment contact with equipment proximity.
energized lines
2. Set up Equipment 2.1 Equipment failure 5 Mod/Risk 2.1 Qualified operators Section 9 3 Low/Risk
Daily inspections Inspections-
*Significant Concerns: completed. Monitoring
Unauthorized use of Operated within the
equipment. operating instructions of
Boom truck pads the unit.
Boom Truck set up on
level ground using
outrigger pads.
Boom Truck pads
sufficient to support unit.
Be aware of site
conditions.
Radius of lift known.
3. Installation of Screw 3.1 Energized circuits 6 Mod/Risk 3.1 No person is touching the SWP 26.036 4 Mod/Risk
Type Anchors boom truck, RBD or Grounding
outriggers.
Page 2 of 4
Post
Rating
*Significant Concerns: Grounding for RBD and Bonding
Working in vicinity of installed.
energized lines. Limits of approach
Induced Voltage. Safety watch when in
May need locates to close proximity to utilities.
identify underground Lift loads away from the
services. existing ROW.
Use Disignated Signaler
(spotter) if unsure of
equipment proximity.
4. Positioning of Puller, 4.1 Rigging 4 Mod/Risk 4.1 All rigging used to SWP 26. 006 2 Low/Risk
Tensioner, Fly Rope connect the equipment to Crane and
Carrier, Small anchors shall be in good Rigging
condition and rated to
Puller, Small loads that will be applied.
Tensioner etc.
4.2 Back up of 4.2 Use Designated Signaler
Equipment during in case that equipment
positioning. needs backward
movement.
*Significant Concerns:
Un-rated and/or faulty
rigging
Back up of Equipment
5. Clean up and 5.1 Equipment Collision 3 Low/Risk 5.1 Qualified operators and 2 Low/Risk
Demobilize off the drivers.
site 5.2 Site Conditions Back up beepers.
Have signal person
*Significant Concerns: directing equipment and
Back-up of Equipment trucks when backing up
at tower locations.
Page 3 of 4
Page 4 of 4
Document Description: JSA for Installing Earth Tower Foundation / Anchors
Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.011
Date: Jan. 17, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:
Hazard Review on change of Critically examine the areas of

1-3 8-10
1 2 3 4 5 Low Moderate /
change. No great effort agree on a timetable for
1 1 2 3 4 5 Risk High Risk
required for reducing risk. completion of all agreed actions.
Exposure


1. Excavate area 1.1 Open Excavation 5 Low/Mod 1.1 Stay clear of machine SWP 26.0031 3 Low/Risk
and excavation. Excavations
1.2 Swing zone 1.2 Slope at 45 degrees or
install support
structure.
1.3 Cave in 1.3 Place rig mat if
required.
1.4 Ground stability 1.4 Spoil Pile to be 1 meter
conditions from walls of
excavation.
Significant Concerns:
- Position equipment
to maintain integrity
of excavation.
Page 1 of 4
Task / Activity Potential (source of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard Post Mitigation
Loss/Hazard Rating Prevention Barriers Reference Rating
2. Remove Water from 2.1 Backing into 3 Low/Risk 2.1 Use a spotter JSA 01.007 1 Low/Risk
Excavation with congested area Hydrovacing
Hydro-Vac 2.2 Swing zone 2.2 Ensure all attachments Trenching
are secure.
3. Enter the excavation 3.1 Access and egress 4 Mod/Risk 3.1 Ensure access and 2 Low/Risk
to construct footing egress is safe and
frame adequate (stairs,
ladder or ramp).
3.2 Excavation 3.2 Ensure the excavation
is suitability sloped
prior to entry.
3.3 Pinch points 3.3 Clear the ground of
3.4 Ground conditions any obstructions.
Significant Concerns:
- No worker shall
enter an excavation
until it is deemed
safe by the
supervisor.
- Watch person will
stand at the top of
the excavation to
watch out for the
workers in the
excavation.
4. Place gravel into the 4.1 Sling failure 3 Low/Risk 4.1 Rigging equipment SWP 26.027 1 Low/Risk
footing frame and inspected prior to use. Spotter and
pack 4.2 Swing zone 4.2 Operator to be aware Signaller
of their surroundings Practice
and the placement of
the crew.
4.3 Overhead load 4.3 All ground grew to be
clear.
Page 2 of 4
4.4 Moving equipment 4.4 One spotter to
communicate with the
operator.
4.5 Noise 4.5 Hearing protection
when using packer.
4.6 Pinch points 4.6 Ensure proper body
and had positioning.
5. Place Footing / 5.1 Rigging Failure 4 Mod/Risk 5.1 Operator to be aware SWP 26.006 2 Low/Risk
Anchor of their surroundings Crane and
and the placement of Rigging
the crew.
5.2 Moving loads 5.2 Rigging equipment to
be inspected prior to
use.
5.3 Body in the line of 5.3 One spotter to
fire communicate with the
operator.
6. Aligning Footing / 6.1 Excavation 3 Low/Risk 6.1 Ensure access and 1 Low/Risk
Anchor 6.2 Pinch points egress is safe and
adequate (stairs,
ladder or ramp)
7. Backfill and Tamp 7.1 Moving equipment 2 Low/Risk 7.1 Stay clear of swing 1 Low/Risk
zone.
7.2 Swing zone 7.2 Eye contact with
operator.
Page 3 of 4
Page 4 of 4
Document Description: JSA for Installing Tower Footings (Rock)

1-3 8-10
Exposure


1. Excavate area 1.1 Excavator swing 5 Low/Mod 1.1 Stay clear of machine SWP 26.0031 3 Low/Risk
zone within motion, Excavations
maintain eye contact
with operator.
1.2 Open Excavations 1.2 If excavation is going
to be left unattended
at any time, mark and
cover
1.3 Cave in 1.3 Slope at 45 degrees
or install support
structure
1.4 Ground stability 1.4 Position equipment to
conditions maintain integrity of
excavation
Page 1 of 4
1.5 Place a rig mat for the
equipment to set up
on if required.
2. Clear excavation of 2.1 Backing the hydro- 3 Low/Risk 2.1 Use a spotter while JSA 01.007 1 Low/Risk
any excess water vac truck into a backing up equipment. Hydro-vacing
using Hydro Vac congested area. Trenching
2.2 Swinging boom. 2.2 Ensure all
attachments are
secure to the boom.
3. Enter the excavation 3.1 Slips, trips and falls 4 Mod/Risk 3.1 Watch footing SWP 26.043 2 Low/Risk
to mark drill locations. 3.2 Ground conditions 3.2 Ensure ground Housekeeping
obstructions are
removed.
3.3 Entrance and egress 3.3 Ensure adequate
of excavation. means for entering
and exiting the
excavation are secure
and adequate (ramp,
stairs, or ladder)
4. Drill Rock 4.1 Excavation stability 4 Mod/Risk 4.1 Position equipment to 2 Low/Risk
maintain integrity of
the excavation.
4.2 Rock dust 4.2 Dust particle masks as
required.
4.3 Swing zone 4.3 All ground crew stay
4.4 Blind spots on clear of machine.
machine.
5. Cut Dewey Dag 5.1 Power rotating tools 4 Mod/Risk 5.1 Inspect cutting tool 3 Low/Risk
prior to each use.
5.2 Sparks 5.2 Full-face shield with
safety glasses must be
worn.
Page 2 of 4
6. Mixing the grout 6.1 Dust 3 Low/Risk 6.1 Appropriate PPE and 2 Low/Risk
6.2 Hazardous safety measure taken
products (WHMIS) in accordance with the
MSDS for the project.
7. Grout in the Dewey 7.1 Carrying a load 2 Low/Risk 7.1 Use a pass-off method 1 Low/Risk
Dag to move grout down
into the excavation.
7.2 Slips, trips and falls 7.2 Watch footing.
Page 3 of 4
Page 4 of 4
Document Description: JSA for Climbing Steel Poles
Created by: HS&E JSA 01.015
Date: Dec. 2, 2005 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:

1-3 8-10
Exposure


1. Check climbing tools 1.1 Equipment 5 Mod/Risk 1.1 Check equipment for SWP 26.028 3 Low Risk
& equipment breaks/falls condition and proper Fall Protection
fit.
1.2 Climber falls from 1.2 Confirm snaps are
structure properly secured
within D rings; Ensure
boots are of proper
design for climbing.
2. Climb steel 2.1 Steps break or pull 6 Mod/Risk 2.1 Check and secure SOP 27.001 3 Low/Risk
out – climber loses each step bolt before Tower Rescue
footing or grip – placing body weight
potential fall from on them. Prior to
structure or making climbing, clear steps
contact with and work boots of dirt,
structure. mud, ice, etc.
2.2 Pole strap (safety 2.2 Secure pole strap
strap) catches on ends to “idle” side D
Page 1 of 3
pole and or pole ring when pole strap is
attachments, ie: not in use.
step bolts.
3. Establish proper 3.1 Improper 4 Mod/Risk 3.1 Move into proper 2 Low/Risk
working position positioning could position as each work
result in reaching task requires.
strains or slips.
4. Descend Structure 4.1 Falling from the 5 Mod/Risk 4.1 Test each step bolt 3 Low/Risk
structure or slipping with feet before
which could result applying full body
in personal injury. weight to step bolt;
carefully descend after
checking that all safety
gear is in the clear.
5. Stepping off pole 5.1 Poor footing could 2 Low/Risk 5.1 Inspect area at base of 1 Low/Risk
cause loss of structure for the safest
balance resulting in place to step off the
personal injury. structure.
5.2 Stepping on or 5.2 Check where ground
bumping into personnel are before
ground personnel. stepping off the pole;
alert ground personnel
to relocate before
stepping off pole.
Page 2 of 3
Page 3 of 3
Document Description: JSA for Anchor Pull Testing
Hazard Review on change of

Critically examine the areas of
process or if 8-10
1 2 3 4 5 1-3 Low exposure in the process, and
circumstances change. No Moderate /
1 1 2 3 4 5 Risk agree on a timetable for
great effort required for High Risk
Exposure
2 2 4 6 8 10 completion of all agreed actions.

reducing risk.
3 3 6 9 12 15 4-6 Low / Investigate engineering 12-25 Cease work until interim controls
4 4 8 12 16 20 Moderate controls to minimize Unaccept are implemented, and an action
5 5 10 15 20 25 Risk reliance on PPE & able Risk plan to permanently reduce the
procedures. risk to an acceptable level.
1. Set up transit 1.1 Slips, trips and falls 3 Low/Risk 1.1 Watch footing and SWP 26.043 1 Low/Risk
ground conditions. Housekeeping
1.2 Wear appropriate
footwear.
2. Set up Machine 2.1 Moving equipment 4 Mod/Risk 2.1 Use a spotter when SWP 26.027 2 Low/Risk
moving equipment to Spotter and
testing position. Signaller
2.2 Clear area of
obstructions and
identify all anchors.
* Significant Concerns
Be aware of Tower
Foundation Location.
3. Rig Anchor 3.1 Slips, trips and falls 3 Low/Risk 3.1 Watch footing and SWP 26.050 1 Low/Risk
ground conditions. Manual Lifting
3.2 Heavy lifting 3.2 Use proper lifting and Handling
Page 1 of 3
3.3 Pinch points techniques and
adequate manpower.
4. Tension Anchor 4.1 Pinch points 5 Mod/Risk 4.1 Ensure proper body SWP 26.006 3 Low/Risk
positioning. Crane and
4.2 Rigging Failure 4.2 Inspect rigging prior to Rigging
each use.
4.3 Anchor Failure 4.3 Stand behind the
anchor while tension is
being applied.
5. Clean up area 5.1 Slips, trips and falls 3 Low/Risk 5.1 Watch footing and 1 Low/Risk
ground conditions.
5.2 Heavy lifting (pulls, 5.2 Use adequate
strains, sprains) manpower.
Page 2 of 3
Page 3 of 3
Document Description: JSA for Unloading Material
Created by: M. Felczak Doc. Number: JSA 01.018
Date: May 1, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: August 2018 Revised by: I.Brar

1-3 8-10
Risk High Risk
Exposure

1. Before
3 beginning
3 6 9to 12 1.1
15 Tripping
Lowhazard
/ controls3 to
Low/Risk 1.1 Keep worksite
minimize reliance Unaccept cleanare
to implemented,
SWP 26.043 and1an Low/Risk
action
unload confirm control hazard. Use Housekeeping
4 4 8 12
material is in good 16 20 securedon PPE & procedures.
Modera
1.2 Poorly contact plan to permanently reduce the
able Risk
three points
condition,
5 5 document
10 15 20 25 loads te Risk when risk to an acceptable level.
any damages with ascending/descending
photos. Inspect trailer.
material for shifting Potential
1.3 (source
Un-level of)
ground Hazard 1.2 Recommended Loss
Inspect load to ensure Standard Post Mitigation
during
Task transport and
/ Activity Loss/Hazard Rating stability before
Prevention Barriers Reference Rating
address as needed removing any
strapping.
1.3 Park equipment on
level ground to help
protect against load
shifting when straps
are removed.
* When Equipment
(Breakers, Ct’s, Pt’s) arrives
on site, make sure to check
shock meter to ensure no
damage has occurred
during transport. In cases
where a shock has been
recorded, document before
removing any strapping.
Once removed, equipment
will have to be tested to
ensure proper working
Page 1 of 5
function. Client should be
notified in this case to
expedite any need for
replacement.
2. Plan location to lay 2.1 Congestion 3 Low/Risk 2.1 Communicate with SWP 26.080 1 Low/Risk
down material, remove workers in area; flag Use of Gloves –
strapping off area if needed. Tools, Materials
2.2 Tripping Hazards Spotters to be used in
congested areas. & Cutting
2.3 Pinch Points 2.2 Keep area clear to
reduce hazard.
2.3 Be mindful of hand
placement throughout
task. Wear appropriate
gloves for hazard.
3. Using Equipment to 3.1 Heavy equipment 4 Mod/Risk 3.1 Qualified operator and SWP 26.006 2 Low/Risk
un-load truck spotters to be used Crane and
while lifting and Rigging
moving material. SWP 26.027
Inspect equipment Spotter and
daily before using. Signaller
3.2 Moving material / Ensure equipment SWP 26.077
equipment) certifications are valid Controlling and
(if applicable). Maintaining
3.2 Use caution while un- Drop Zones
loading; strap material
3.3 Congestion to equipment (if using
front end loader /
3.4 Rigging Failure skidsteer); if using
Crane - taglines to be
3.5 Drop Zone used. Signalman to be
clearly identified with
gauntlet.
3.3 Lay down area should
Page 2 of 5
be outside of work
area as best as
possible if material is
not to be installed
immediately. Material
should be placed on
dunnage to ease in
moving at later time
and kept off ground.
Additional spotter(s)
may be required in
congested areas.
3.4 Qualified rigger to
oversee task, rigging to
be inspected prior to
using, follow all safe
work practices and
procedures and review
manufacturer specs for
material weights.
Review manufacturer lift
directions if available.
3.5 Where practicable,
workers must create a
physically visible safe
control zone below or in
the roll area of a load
using flagging, ribbon or
pylons. No workers to
enter the drop/roll zone
while work is being
carried out.
Page 3 of 5
4. When completed un- 4.1 Tripping hazards 3 Low/Risk 4.1 Clear area of debris 2 Low/Risk
loading: clean area, and any unused
dispose of any debris, material when task is
barricade area if
needed. complete.
4.2 Moving equipment 4.2 Use caution - have
spotters when moving
equipment.
4.3 Moving material 4.3 Use caution, plan
route before moving.
Page 4 of 5
Date: May 1, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:
Page 5 of 5
Document Description: JSA for Tower Material Hauling
Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.023
Date: July 15, 2010 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Feb., 12 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
1. Position trailer 1.1 Overhead hazards 5 Mod/Risk 1.1 Designated Signaler if SWP 26.027 3 Low/Risk
electrical - contact near overhead lines. Spotter and
with live circuits. Signaller
1.2 Soft ground – tipping 1.2 Move trailer away from
front end loader. soft ground.
1.3 Other 1.3 If needed barrier area or
vehicular/personnel have extra workers to
traffic – striking keep others away.
vehicles/personnel
Position trailer unit as
close as possible to
steel bundles to
minimize travel distance
Page 1 of 6
Post
Rating
of front end loader.
Ideally steel was
positioned in an area
away from overhead
lines and on good
ground.
2. Load trailer 2.1 Front end loader 4 Mod/Risk 2.1 Check weight of bundle SWP 26.006 2 Low/Risk
tipping to ensure not over the lift Crane and
capacity of front end Rigging
loader.
2.2 Steel bundle falling 2.2 Check banding on

bundles so bundles do
not come apart.
2.3 Striking vehicles or 2.3 Workers clear of load,
personnel not under; use taglines if
necessary. Ensure area
clear of others. If high
traffic area get workers to
flag.
2.4 Improper secured 2.4 Position steel bundles on
steel bundles blocking and ensure
bundles are secure so as
not to slide or tip over.
Ensure hold downs are of
sufficient strength and
quantity to secure load.
2.5 Slipping, tripping, 2.5 Trailer deck to be clear of
falls tripping slipping hazards.
Page 2 of 6
Post
Rating
Ensure front end loader
operator is competent to
operate front end loader.
Check load chart
capacity of front end
loader against largest
bundle weight to be
lifted. Do not over load
trailer. Check capacity of
trailer.
3. Travel to unloading 3.1 Other vehicular 3 Low/Risk 3.1 Be wary of other drivers. SWP 26.013 1 Low/Risk
site. traffic Traffic control may be Use of
necessary at some Company
location. Vehicles
3.2 Taking poor route 3.2 Know route beforehand

and take less travelled
route to unloading site.
3.3 Right of way 3.3 Check for any road

restrictions restrictions or if special
permits required.
Determine beforehand if
there are any restriction
or other work activity
which may impede
travel.
4. Position trailer at site 4.1 Soft ground – tipping 3 Low/Risk 4.1 Move trailer away from 1 Low/Risk
front end loader soft ground.
Page 3 of 6
Post
Rating
4.2 Other vehicular / 4.2 If needed barrier area or
personnel traffic – have extra workers to
striking vehicles / keep others away.
personnel
steel bundles to
Ideally steel was
away from overhead
lines and on good
ground.
5. Clean up area 5.1 Overhead hazards - 5 Mod/Risk 5.1 Designated Signaler if 3 Low/Risk
electrical near overhead lines.
5.2 Front end loader 5.2 Check weight of bundle

tipping to ensure not over the lift
loader.

not come apart.

personnel not under, use taglines if
necessary.
Page 4 of 6
Post
Rating
5.5 Improper secured 5.5 Position steel bundles
steel bundles on blocking on the
ground and ensure
bundles are secure so
as not to slide or tip
over.
Know capacity of front
end loader and largest
bundle to be unloaded.
Page 5 of 6
Page 6 of 6
Document Description: JSA for Receiving Tower Steel at Marsh Yard
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
1.3 Other vehicular /
personnel traffic – 1.3 If needed barrier area or
striking vehicles / have extra workers to
keep others away.
personnel
close as possible to lay
down area to minimize
travel distance of front
Page 1 of 4
Post
Rating
end loader. Ideally steel
was positioned in an
area away from
overhead lines and on
good ground.
2. Releasing steel 2.1 Falling off trailer 3 Low/Risk 2.1 Use ladder to climb onto 1 Low/Risk
bundles trailer and if needed to
climb onto load. Watch
for footing. Maintain 3
point contact.
2.2 Sudden tensioned 2.2 Avoid bite when
release of tie-down releasing loads. If bear
equipment trap used, use a
controlled release. If
steel banded, may have
to use heavy gloves and
face shield as banding
may explode out .
Be aware that the load
will be under tension
and will have shifted
while being transported
3. Unload trailer 3.1 Front end loader 4 Mod/Risk 3.1 Check weight of bundle SWP 26.027 3 Low/Risk
tipping to ensure not over the lift Spotter and
capacity of front end Signaller
loader.

not come apart.
Page 2 of 4
Post
Rating
flag.
3.4 Improper secured 3.4 Position steel bundles on

3.5 Slipping, tripping, 3.5 Trailer deck to be clear of

3.6 Ensure blocking is of

quantity to keep steel off
of ground and to ease
future loading.
Check load chart
bundle weight to be
lifted.
Page 3 of 4
Page 4 of 4
Created by: Bill Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.025
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
personnel
steel bundles to
Page 1 of 6
Post
Rating
of front-end loader.
Ideally steel was
away from overhead
lines and on good
ground.
tipping to ensure not over the Crane and
lift capacity of front end Rigging
loader.

not come apart.

personnel not under, use taglines
if necessary. Ensure
area clear of others. If
high traffic area get
workers to flag.

steel bundles on blocking and ensure
over. Ensure hold
downs are of sufficient
strength and quantity to
secure load
Page 2 of 6
Post
Rating
2.5 Slipping, tripping, 2.5 Trailer deck to be clear
falling of tripping slipping
hazards.
Ensure front-end loader
operate front-end loader.
Check load chart
capacity of front-end
bundle weight to be
lifted.
Do not over load trailer.
Check capacity of trailer.
site traffic Traffic control may be Use of
location. Vehicles
3.2 Taking poor route 3.2 Know route beforehand

3.3 Right of way
restrictions 3.3 Check for road
restrictions or if special
permits are required.
there are any restrictions
Page 3 of 6
Post
Rating
that may impede travel.

personnel
steel bundles to
of front-end loader.
Ideally steel was
away from overhead
lines and on good
ground.
5. Unloading at site 5.1 Overhead hazards / 5 Mod/Risk 5.1 Designated Signaler if 3 Low/Risk
5.2 Front end loader 5.2 Check weight of bundle

capacity of front-end
loader.

Page 4 of 6
Post
Rating
not come apart.

traffic area get workers
to flag.

ground and ensure
over.
Know capacity of front-
Page 5 of 6
Page 6 of 6
Document Description: JSA for Installing Guys
Created by: HS&E Doc. Number: JSA 01.030
Date: Aug. 01, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Feb., 12 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
1. Survey Areas 1.1 Slips, trips and falls 4 Low/Mod 1.1 Observe work area for WP 26.043 2 Low/Risk
hazards and eliminate Housekeeping
whenever possible.
cannot be removed.
2. Mark out Guy lengths 2.1 Equipment strikes 8 Mod/High 2.1 Ensure the end of guy 4 Mod/Risk
employee. wire is controlled while
wire is being paid off the
reel. Properly secure
both ends of wire while
guys are being cut.
Properly secure the end
still attached to the reel
Page 1 of 7
Post
Rating
to prevent the end of the
guy wire from whipping.
2.2 Hands, fingers or 2.2 Work gloves and other

other body parts PPE to be worn;
caught in between designate a flagger for
objects. movement control; keep
hands and body clear
and maintain safe
distance from wire and
reel; do not allow
personnel in pinch
points; recommendation
of not wearing jewelry or
clothing.
2.3 Inspect all rigging prior to
2.3 Rigging fails. use for damage and/or
defects. Ensure all
rigging being applied is
SWL rated for load.
Always lock hoists in the
up position.
2.4 Equipment/guy 2.4 Identify all energized
contacts energized electrical equipment and
electrical equipment conductors and
and/or conductors. determine necessary
clearance to be
maintained from
electrical conflicts;
spotter assigned to
assist operator in
maintaining clearances.
Page 2 of 7
Post
Rating
3. Install Guys 3.1 Hands, fingers and 8 Mod/High 3.1 Work gloves and other Section 10 4 Mod/Risk
other body parts PPE to be worn; Personal
caught in pinch designate a flagger for Protective
points. movement control; keep Equipment
and maintain safe
distance from pole; do
not allow personnel in
pinch points;
recommendation of not
wearing jewelry or
clothing.
3.2 Personnel struck by 3.2 Communicate with all

guys or equipment. personnel while guys are
being hung and pulled.
the “hole” while guys are
being hung. Control
ends of preform while
wrapping the guys.
Maintain a safe distance
from guy wraps to
prevent face and other
body parts from being
injured by the preform
whipping back.
Page 3 of 7
Post
Rating
3.3 Grip on guy slips. 3.3 Check preform for proper
sizing. Fully install
preform on guy being
pulled. Use only
approved mechanical
grips.
3.4 Anchor Fails. 3.4 Check anchor test

results before pulling
guy. Reinstall anchor as
necessary or contact
engineering for
consideration of
modification of
anchoring specifications.
4. Check Guys 4.1 Slips, trips and falls. 4.1 Observe work area for 3 Low/Risk
whenever possible.
cannot be removed.
4.2 Hands, fingers and 4.2 Work gloves and other

other body parts PPE to be worn;
caught in pinch designate a flagger for
points. movement control; keep
and maintain safe
distance from guys and
Page 4 of 7
Post
Rating
associated tools and
equipment; do not allow
personnel in pinch
points; recommendation
of not wearing jewelry or
clothing.
4.3 Guy tension uneven 4.3 Make necessary

or pole not aligned corrections to guys for
correctly. balance tensioning and
properly align structure
according to engineering
specifications. Always
lock hoists in up position
when temporarily
stopping pulling action.
5. Clean up area 5.1 Slips, trips and falls 4 Mod/Risk 5.1 Observe work area for 2 Low/Risk
whenever possible.
cannot be removed.
5.2 Personnel struck by 5.2 Operator to identify and

equipment communicate with
operation. Operator to
Page 5 of 7
Post
Rating
maintain visual contact
with personnel.
clean-up operations.
Operator and ground
personnel to review
equipment during
movement .
Page 6 of 7
Page 7 of 7
Document Description: JSA for Tower Erection of Body and Arms
Date: Jan. 4, 2010 Revision #: 1 Date Revised Dec. 4, 2015. Revised by: D. Stykalo

1-3 8-10
Exposure

Potential (source of) Hazard Rating Recommended Loss Standard Post Mitigation
Task / Activity Loss/Hazard Prevention Barriers Reference Rating
1. Mobilize to site 1.1 Traffic 4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Pull equipment into SWP 26.013 2 Low/Risk
accesses where Use of
possible. Four way Company
flashers and pull to
the side if needed Vehicles
while opening
barriers. Flag persons
and traffic control as
required. Secure
loads.
Road conditions, time
of day, weather, check
Page 1 of 9
Date: B. Szumik Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:
2. Access site 2.1 Congested and 6 Mod/Risk 2.1 Park vehicles clear of 26.027 Spotter 4 Mod/Risk
right-away limits work area. and Signaller
existing line Only needed Practice
structures equipment placed in
work area.
Ensure operators and
crew are aware of
overhead lines (limits
of approach) use
Designated Signaler
Equipment and trucks
to keep to designated
roads and accesses.
Communication
between vehicles if
necessary.
Equipment contact.
Adhering to ROW
boundaries.
Page 2 of 9
3. Set up equipment 3.1 Equipment failure 8 Mod/High 3.1 Qualified operators; Section 9 6 Mod/Risk
completed; Monitoring
Operated within the
operating manual of
the unit;
Crane set up on level
ground using
outrigger pads;
Crane pad sufficient
to support unit;
3.2 Strains / sprains 3.2 Be aware of site
conditions;
Pads for man lift level;
Radius of lift known;
Three point contact;
Climb all the way to
the ground;
Look at ground
conditions before you
dismount.
4. Rig Lift 4.1 Rigging Failure 8 Mod/High 4.1 Rated and inspected SWP 26.006 6 Mod/Risk
rigging for the lift. Crane and
Softeners used if Rigging
needed.
Steel slings choked
around members.
Weight of the loads
calculated.
Weights
predetermined.
5. Attach cranes to load 5.1 Communication 6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Designated signal 4 Mod/Risk
person.
Line of site between
operators and signal
person.
Communication with
5.2 Energized circuits crew prior to starting.
Page 3 of 9
5.2 No person is touching
the crane or
outriggers.
Ground probe and
chain.
Limits of approach
Safety watch when in
close proximity to
utilities.
Lift loads away from
the existing ROW.
Weather conditions
monitored.
6. Hoist load with two 6.1 Two machine pick 8 Mod/High 6.1 Operators only take 6 Mod/Risk
cranes signals from
designated signal
person.
6.2 Energized circuit 6.2 Qualified operators.
6.3 Equipment failure 6.3 Extra spotter in place
if needed.
6.4 Falling materials 6.4 LMI monitored in
crane as load transfer
takes place.
6.5 Line of site with
signal person is
maintained.
6.6 Maintain clearances
(limits of approach)
6.7 Tag lines to control
loads.
6.8 Operator is watching
signal person.
6.9 Anyone can stop a lift
in an emergency.
6.10 Picks and crane
capacities are
predetermined.
6.11 All lift exciding 85% of
Page 4 of 9
cranes capacity will
require a lift study.
6.12 Operator is
monitoring outrigger
pads(compression)
6.13 Large enough pads
for ground conditions
6.14 No one is in the fall
zone of panel being
hoisted.
6.15 Load will be
inspected prior to lift
6.16 Hardware will be tied
to the structure.
6.17 Crew will not be
under the load.
7. Disconnect tailing 7.1 Working under 8 Mod/High 7.1 Only crew needed to 6 Mod/Risk
crane load perform the task go
into the zone.
7.2 Equipment moving 7.2 Operators are aware
of crews work
7.3 Operator only takes
direction from the
signal person
7.4 Signal person is the
only one who directs
the operator.
7.5 Tailing crane is
unhooked and
swung clear of the lift
7.6 Unneeded equipment
is parked clear of the
site.
8. Crew accepting tower 8.1. Electrical 8 Mod/High 8.1. Ground chain will be SWP 26.036 6 Mod/Risk
used to bleed off Grounding and
induction from the lift Bonding
prior to touching by
hand.
Page 5 of 9
8.2. Falling from aloft 8.2. Rated and inspected
tools (hotstick,
gloves, ground
chain).
8.3. Pinch points 8.3. 100% fall arrest. SWP 26.028
8.4. Falling tools 8.4. Qualified people for Fall Protection
the task.
8.5. Strains 8.5. Lanyards and
harnesses inspected.
8.6. One person in the air
is directing the crane.
8.7. Crew is aware of
signal person’s
intensions.
8.8. Proper tools for the
job (drifts, spuds,
hammers).
8.9. No one is below the
tower.
8.10. Nose bags in the
tower for holding
extra tools.
8.11. Proper positioning
while working.
8.12. Use correct tools for
the task at hand.
8.13. Keep hydrated.
8.14. Use electric tools to
help on task.
9. Tighten bolts 9.1. Tool failure 6 Mod/Risk 9.1. Inspection of tool. SWP 26.001 4 Mod/Risk
Safety glasses worn. Defective Tools
Tag out and give to
Foreman if defective.
Proper tool for the
job. Inspection of
tools and electrical
equipment.
9.2. Electrical 9.2. GFCI breakers on the
Page 6 of 9
power source. Tag
defective or worn
equipment. Be aware
of weather conditions.
9.3. Noise 9.3. Hearing protection
worn.
9.4. Make the crew aware
of task
9.5. Inspection of socket
and driver
10. Disconnect Rigging 10.1. Communication 6 Mod/Risk 10.1. Clear hand signals to 4 Mod/Risk
operators. Ensure
crew below is aware
of your actions.
10.2. Falling from aloft 10.2. 100% fall arrest;
Softeners tied up if
they are being used;
Unhooked rigging
sent down with the
hook.
11. Crew Descends Tower 11.1. Falling from aloft 8 High/Risk 11.1. Experienced persons. 6 Mod/Risk
Three point contact.
11.2. Falling tools 11.2. Fall zone below is
clear. Extra tools sent
down in nose bags.
12. Clean up and 12.1. Equipment 4 Mod/Risk 12.1. Qualified operators SWP 26.043 3 Low/Risk
demobilize from site Collision and drivers; Back up Housekeeping
beepers; Have signal
person directing
equipment.
12.2. Site conditions 12.2. Pile left over
materials in one
location; Mark
materials if
necessary. Trucks
and light duty
equipment is moved
from site prior to
Page 7 of 9
demobilizing the
crane.
Page 8 of 9
Page 9 of 9
Document Description: JSA for Tower Panel Erection to the Bend
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
accesses where possible Use of
pull to the side if needed
while opening barriers. Vehicles
Flag persons and traffic
control as required
Secure loads
day, weather, check
2.1 Access site 2.1 Congested and right- 5 Mod/Risk 2.1 Park clear of work area. 4 Mod/Risk
away limits. Only needed equipment
Page 1 of 8
Post
Rating
placed in work area.
2.2 Existing line 2.2 Ensure Operators and
structures crew are aware of
approach); use
Designated Signaler
Equipment and trucks to
keep to designated roads
and accesses.
Equipment contact;
Adhering to ROW
boundaries.
3. Set up equipment 3.1 Equipment failure 6 Mod/Risk 3.1 Qualified operators. Section 9 4 Mod/Risk
completed. Monitoring
Operated within the
operating instructions of
the unit.
ground using outrigger
pads.
Crane pad sufficient to
support unit.
Be aware of site
conditions.
Pads for man lift level.
Page 2 of 8
Post
Rating
4. Rig Panels 4.1 Rigging failure 6 Mod/Risk 4.1 Rated and inspected SWP 26.006 4 Mod/Risk
Steel slings choked Rigging
around members.
Weight of the loads
calculated.
Hold back rope
inspection prior to
attachment.
Shackles between rope
and choked slings.
Panel weights
predetermined.
5. Attach crane to load 5.1 Communication 6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Designated signal SWP 26.027 4 Mod/Risk
person; Line of site Spotter and
between operator and Signaller
signal person;
Communication with
crew prior to starting.
5.2 Energized circuits 5.2 No person is touching

the crane or outriggers.
Ground probe and chain;
Limits of approach;
close proximity to
utilities; Lift loads away
from the existing ROW.
6. Hoist load 6.1 Energized circuit 8 High/Risk 6.1 Maintain clearances. SWP 26.002 6 Mod/Risk
Electrical Work
Page 3 of 8
Post
Rating
6.2 Equipment failure 6.2 Tag lines to control
loads.
Operator is watching
signal person.
Anyone can stop a lift in
an emergency.
Operator is monitoring
outrigger pads.
Large enough pads for
ground conditions.
No one is in the fall zone
of panel being hoisted.
Crew only moves in to
bolt once the panel is
close to the legs
location.
7. Hold back panels 7.1 Equipment failure 5 Mod/Risk 7.1 Equipment is on stable 3 Low/Risk
ground.
7.2 Equipment being 7.2 Safety equipment on

moved equipment that is
working.
Qualified operator.
Operator stays in seat
unit final hold back
position is achieved.
Lock out procedure in
place for equipment
being left attached to
hold back ropes.
Only designated and
qualified operators will
Page 4 of 8
Post
Rating
be move the equipment.
Designated signal
person will give signals
to the hold back units if
adjustment is needed.
8. Install spiders 8.1. Rigging 7 Mod/High 8.1 Rated and inspected SWP 26.028 5 Mod/Risk
slings. Fall Protection
8.2 Proper use of rigging.
8.2. Working aloft
8.3 Stay clear from the base
8.3. Pinch points of the panel section
being erected.
Man lift training complete
(qualified persons).
Decent rope in unit.
Unit is on level ground
prior to aerial work.
Fall arrest 100%.
Others are aware of your
actions.
Gloves on at all times.
Spuds and drifts used for
lining holes.
Full nut on loose pieces.
9. Tighten bolts 9.1 Tool failure 6 Mod/Risk 9.1 Inspection of tool. SWP 26.025 4 Mod/Risk
Use of Hand
9.2 Electrical 9.2 Tag out and give to Tools
9.3 Noise 9.3 Proper tool for the job.
Inspection of tools and
electrical equipment.
GFCI breakers on the
Page 5 of 8
Post
Rating
power source.
Tag defective or worn
equipment.
Be aware of weather
conditions.
Hearing protection worn.
Make the crew aware of
task.
Inspection of socket and
driver.
10. Disconnect Rigging 10.1 Communication 8 High/Risk 10.1 Clear hand signals to 6 Mod/Risk
operators.
10.2 Falling from aloft 10.2 Second signal person on

the ground to relay if
needed.
Ensure rope fall zone is
clear.
Crew is aware of tasks.
Check that no one is
below operation.
Put shackles and steel
slings in man lift.
11. Clean up and 11.1 Equipment Collision 5 Mod/Risk 11.1 Qualified operators and SWP 26.043 3 Low/Risk
demobilize from site Site conditions drivers. Housekeeping
Back up beepers.
Have signal person
directing equipment and
trucks when backing up
at tower locations.
Corners of assembled
steel have been flagged
if they are close to
Page 6 of 8
Post
Rating
roadways.
Flagging on the end of
the arms.
Leave body as low to the
ground as possible.
Be aware of changes to
location once the pieces
have been assembled.
Leave access roads
open.
In winter, corners of
assembled steel should
be marked.
Page 7 of 8
Page 8 of 8
Document Description: JSA for Ground Assembly of Panels – Stage 1
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
possible. Company
Four way flashers and
control as required.
Secure loads.
day, weather, check
Page 1 of 9
Post
Rating
2. Access to site 2.1 Congested and right- 8 High/Risk 2.1 Park clear of work area. SWP 26.002 6 Mod/Risk
away limits Only needed equipment Electrical Work
placed in work area. ).
Use Designated Signaler
2.2 Existing line 2.2 Ensure operators and
approach. Equipment
and trucks to keep to
designated roads and
accesses.
Equipment contact.
Adhering to ROW
boundaries.
3. Layout blocking and 3.1 Site conditions 6 Mod/Risk 3.1 Assess site for walking SWP 26.043 4 Mod/Risk
bundles hazards and uneven Housekeeping
terrain. Remove tripping
hazards.
3.2 Moving Equipment 3.2 Qualified operator,

equipment checks have
been completed. Backup
beepers on equipment.
Signal person in
Page 2 of 9
Post
Rating
congested areas or
where workers are
present.
3.3 Load shifting 3.3 Make sure forks are

centered on the load.
Long pieces moved
slowly. Banding in place
on the bundles. Plan
your drops to avoid
unnecessary moving.
Designated Signaler and
workers are clear of the
fall zone
Equipment contacting
persons or vehicles.
Material handler forks
when necessary.
4. Sorting of bundles 4.1 Communication 5 Mod/Risk 4.1 Workers are aware of SWP 26.025 3 Low/Risk
plan to move steel. Be Use of Hand
aware of your partner’s Tools
hands and location prior
to moving pieces. SWP 26.050
Manual Lifting
4.2 Pinch points (hands 4.2 Wear proper PPE. Be and Handling
and eyes) aware of pinch points if
pieces shift. Do not
position yourself
Page 3 of 9
Post
Rating
between bundles when
banding is being cut.
4.3 Improper use of tools 4.3 Check your tools before

or tools not working use.
4.4 Strains and repetitive 4.4 Use proper lifting and

task bending techniques. Get
help as required for
heavier pieces.
Use equipment as
needed.
5. Set up of boom truck 5.1 Equipment set up 6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Qualified operators. SWP 26.036 4 Mod/Risk
Daily inspection of Grounding and
truck and crane. Bonding
Spotter when putting
out riggers.
Outrigger pads used at
all times.
Set up on level ground.
Equipment set up
maintaining limits of
approach to existing
lines.
Truck is grounded using
ground probe and 4/0
ground chain.
6. Layout to heavy pieces 6.1 Equipment failure 6 Mod/Risk 6.1 Rated and inspected SWP 26.006 4 Mod/Risk
rigging used. Crane and
Tag line used on loads. Rigging
Page 4 of 9
Post
Rating
Crew is aware of pieces
being moved
Stay clear of the fall
zone.
Stay within equipment
charts and limitations
Designated signal person
Operator does not leave
the unit when load is
attached to crane.
Use nylon slings
between winch line and
load.
7. Layout of small pieces 7.1 Strains 4 Mod/Risk 7.1 Use proper bending and 3 Low/Risk
lifting techniques when
carrying and placing
pieces.
7.2 Dehydration / 7.2 Drink plenty of liquids.

Fatigue Buddy system, be
aware of weather
conditions. Have proper
clothing for the changing
weather. Pieces are
blocked properly.
7.3 Pinch Points 7.3 Be aware of your

coworker’s hands and
feet prior to moving
Page 5 of 9
Post
Rating
pieces. Use spuds and
lining bars keeping digits
clear of the bite. Ensure
a full nut is on the piece
before you leave it
eliminating pieces
coming apart.
8. Assembly of pieces 8.1 Pinch points 3 Low/Risk 8.1 Use blocking to support 2 Low/Risk
pieces. Be aware of your
co-workers position.
Clear communication
between crew members.
Spuds and bars used for
lining.
8.2 Strains / repetitive 8.2 Proper lifting techniques.

motion Use machines if
necessary.
8.3 Dehydration / Fatigue 8.3 Keep hydrated.

9. Tighten panels 9.1 Tool failure, 4 Mod/Risk 9.1 Inspection of tool. Tag Section 10 3 Low/Risk
crescents, spud out and give to Foreman Personal
wrenches, impacts if defective. Proper tool Protective
for the job. Inspection of
tools and electrical Equipment
equipment. Tag
defective or worn
equipment. Inspection of
socket and driver.
9.2 Electrical 9.2 GFCI breakers on the
power source. Be aware
Page 6 of 9
Post
Rating
task.
9.3 Noise 9.3 Hearing protection worn.
9.4 Contact with eyes 9.4 Wear proper PPE.
9.5 Slips and trips 9.5 Be sure of footing. Clean

up unnecessary tools
and blocking at site.
Proper footwear for
terrain or weather
conditions.
10. Build spiders 10.1 Strains 4 Mod/Risk 10.1 Use proper bending and 3 Low/Risk
lifting techniques. Use
equipment when needed.
Buddy system for moving
pieces.
10.2 Pinch points 10.2 Use tools to line holes
and work in tight areas.
Be sure crew members
are aware of your work
(moving pieces). Have
clear communication.
Blocking used to support
pieces. Gloves worn at
all times.
11. Clean up and 11.0 Equipment Collision 5 Mod/Risk 11.0 Qualified operators and SWP 26 027 3 Low/Risk
demobilization from drivers. Spotter and
site Back up beepers Signaller
Have signal person Practice
Page 7 of 9
Post
Rating
at tower locations.
roadways.
11.1 Site conditions 11.1 Leave panels as low to

the ground as possible.
Leave access roads
open.
In winter corners of
be marked.
Page 8 of 9
Page 9 of 9
Document Description: JSA for Rider Pole Installation and Removal
Created by: L. Skinner Doc. Number: JSA 01.038
Date: Mar. 18, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Feb., 12 2016 Revised by: D.Stykalo
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
possible. Company
Secure loads.
day, weather, check
Page 1 of 6
Post
Rating
2. Access to site or set 2.1 Congested and right- 8 High/Risk 2.1 Park clear of work area. SWP 26.002 6 Mod/Risk
up Traffic Control away limits Only needed equipment Electrical
(whichever is placed in work area. ). Work
applicable) (spotter) if unsure of
approach. Equipment
accesses.
2.3 Traffic 2.3 Set up the necessary
Traffic control as per
MTO Book 7.
Vehicular Traffic
Equipment contact
Adhering to ROW
boundaries.
3. Set up equipment 3.1 Equipment failure 6 Mod/Risk 3.1 Qualified operators 4 Mod/Risk
Daily inspections
completed.
Operated within the
operating manual of the
unit.
Page 2 of 6
Post
Rating
RBD / Crane set up on
level ground using
outrigger pads.
RBD / Crane pad
Be aware of site
conditions.
4. Excavate Holes 4.1 Underground Utilities 5 Mod/Risk 4.1 Obtain Underground SWP 26.031 3 Low/Risk
locates via Ontario One Excavations
Call and or local Utilities.
4.2 Energized Electrical 4.2 Observe Limits of

circuits Approach to Electrical
apparatus. As per
Electrical Utility Safety
Rule 129. Use approved
Electrical Cover up
where required.
Gas and Electrical
contacts.
5. Install Horizontal Poles 5.1 Communication 6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Designated signal SWP 26.027 4 Mod Risk
person. Line of site Spotter and
between operators and Signaller
signal person.
Communication with
Page 3 of 6
Post
Rating
5.2 Energized Electrical 5.2 No person is touching
circuits the crane or outriggers.
Ground probe and chain.
Limits of approach.
close proximity to
utilities.
5.3 Falling Material 5.3 Stay clear of the drop

zone
See Rider Pole
Installation for weight
break downs
6. Install Vertical Poles 6.1 Pole Climbing 8 Mod/High 6.1 Approved Climbing gear SWP 26.028 6 Mod/Risk
and pole belt with fall Fall
arrest system. Protection
6.2 Strains/sprains 6.2 Rig poles to reduce
unnecessary strains.
6.3 Communication 6.3 Operators only take
signals from designated
signal person. Qualified
operators; Line of site
with signal person is
maintained.
6.4 Energized circuit 6.4 Maintain clearances
(limits of approach). Tag
lines to control
Page 4 of 6
Post
Rating
loads.Operator is
watching signal person.
6.5 Falling materials 6.5 Anyone can stop a lift in

an emergency. RBD’s
and crane capabities are
predetermined. No one
is in the fall zone of
panel being hoisted.
Hardware will be tied to
the structure. Crew will
not be under the load.
7. Rider Pole Removal 7.1 Review all hazards 4 Mod/Risk 7.1 Vehicle setup needs to 3 Low/Risk
that were be reviewed as per
documented for the above. Weights need to
be reviewed as per
Rider Pole above. Limits of
installation approach need to be
reviewed as per above.
Climbing review as per
above
Page 5 of 6
Page 6 of 6
Document Description:
JSA for Tower Dressing (Hanging of Insulators and
Travelers)
Date: Apr. 11, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Feb., 12 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
1. Mobilize and Access 1.1 Traffic 4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Obey Speed Limits of the SWP 26.013 2 Low/Risk
to Site roads used. Four-way Use of
flashers and pull to the Company
side if needed while
opening barriers. Flag Vehicles
persons and traffic
control if required.
Secure loads.
Right-of-way Limits area. Only needed
equipment parked in
work area. Equipment
accesses.
Page 1 of 7
Travelers)
Post
Rating

approach). Use
Designated Signaler
2. Set up equipment 2.1 Equipment failure 6 Mod/Risk 2.1 Qualified operators Section 9 4 Mod/Risk
Operated within the
unit.
Boom Truck set up on
level ground using
outrigger pads.
Boom Truck pads
Be aware of site
conditions.
3. Attach Boom Truck to 3.1 Communication 6 Mod/Risk 3.1 Designated signal SWP 26.027 4 Mod/Risk
Load person; line of site Spotter and
signal person;
communication with crew
prior to starting.
Page 2 of 7
Travelers)
Post
Rating
3.2 Energized circuits 3.2 No person is touching SWP 26.002
the boom truck or Electrical Work
outriggers; grounding for
Boom Truck installed;
limits of approach; safety
watch when in close
proximity to utilities; lift
loads away from the
existing ROW.
Miscommunication
Working in vicinity of
energized lines, Induced
voltage
4. Hoist Load (lift up 4.1 Energized Circuit 8 Mod/High 4.1 Maintain clearances; Tag 6 Mod/Risk
insulators and lines to control loads if
travelers) necessary; Operator is
watching signal person;
Anyone to stop a lift in an
emergency.
4.2 Equipment Failure 4.2 Operator is monitoring

outrigger pads. Pads size
suitable for any ground
conditions. No one is
standing below load being
hoisted. Crew only moves
in to bolt once the
assembly is close to the
Page 3 of 7
Travelers)
Post
Rating
attachment point.
4.3 Rigging Failure 4.3 Rated and inspected

rigging for the lift. Weight
of the loads calculated.
Hold back rope inspection
prior to attachment (if
used). No one is standing
bellow load being hoisted.
Crew only moves in to bolt
once the assembly is
close to the attachment
point.
5. Climbing onto 5.1 Fall from Height 8 High/Risk 5.1 Use double hook lanyard SWP 26.028 6 Mod/Risk
Tower/Moving with or other approved means Fall Protection
Tower of attachment, at all times
once above 3 meters from
the ground level.
Proper PPE to be used at
all times (safety footwear
to be in good condition,
hard hat, gloves).
Inspect Safety Harness
every time prior to
climbing onto the tower.
In wet weather conditions
and if tower is slipperty,
use man lift for climbing
onto the tower.
In wet weather conditions
Page 4 of 7
Travelers)
Post
Rating
and if tower is slipperty,
use man lift for climbing
onto the tower.
Slippery tower steel
(climbing path for the
lineman)
Improper use of PPE
(safety harness)
Damaged PPE (safety
harness, safety footwear)
Note: if using a crane
basket, the revised load
chart must be at the
operator controls
6. Disconnect Rigging 6.1 Communication 8 High/Risk 6.1 Clear hand signals to 6 Mod/Risk
operators; second signal
person on the ground to
relay if needed.
6.2 Falling from aloft 6.2 Ensure rope fall zone is
clear; crew is aware of
tasks; check that no one
is below operation; put
shackles and steel slings
in man lift (if used).
demobilize off the site drivers; back up beepers; Housekeeping
have signal person
trucks when backing up at
Page 5 of 7
Travelers)
Post
Rating
lower locations.
7.2 Site Conditions 7.2 Ensure good

housekeeping practices
are maintained.
Page 6 of 7
Travelers)
Page 7 of 7
Document Description: JSA for Pulling Hard Line
Date: Aug. 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by; D. Stykalo

1-3 8-10
Exposure

1. Survey Pull Out Area 1.1 Personnel falling or 6 Mod/Risk 1.1 Observe environment 4 Mod/Risk
tripping for hazards and
arrange to have
moved where
possible.
1.2 Contact with 1.2 Install rider poles to
energized lines; protect powerlines,
damage to roadways, waterways,
conductors, and and other obstacles or
public safety conflicts.
1.3 Rope contacts 1.3 Obtain permits
vehicles, vessels, required for railroad,
trains, pedestrians roadways, and
and/or other waterway crossings.
conflicts. Have all
traffic/pedestrian
control devices placed
Page 1 of 7
Date: Aug. 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:
as required.
2. Set up equipment 2.1 Overexertion – 4 Mod/Risk 2.1 Keep proper body SWP 26.050 3 Low/Risk
strains and sprains position; do not extend Manual Lifting
arms or legs beyond and Handling
strength positions.
Ask for assistance.
2.2 Fingers / hands and 2.2 Maintain proper work Section 10
other body parts position outside of Personal
caught in pinch “bite” of any rigging; Protective
points. wear all necessary Equipment
PPE; maintain focus
on task being
performed. Maintain
eye contact and
communication with
equipment operators
regarding task being
performed.
2.3 Fall from 2.3 Maintain equipment;
equipment. steps clear from all
obstructions i.e. mud,
ice, oil, grease, etc.;
clean work boot soles
of mud, oil, etc.;
observe placement of
feet onto steps,
maintain firm grip on
grab devices.
Observe and maintain
condition of all
provided fall protection
devices. (handrails
etc.)
3. Set up Radio 3.1 Loss of/or poor 3 Low/Risk 3.1 Confirm all radios 2 Low/Risk
Communication communications function properly;
that will disrupt or vehicles and
prevent equipment are in
Page 2 of 7
coordination of assigned locations;
pulling operation. establish and
communicate
emergency stop
signal; stop pull if
communications are
lost.
4. Attach rope to pulling 4.1 Overexertion 4 Mod/Risk 4.1 Keep proper body 3 Low/Risk
machine position; do not extend
arms or legs beyond
strength positions.
Ask for assistance.
4.2 Hands/Fingers and 4.2 Maintain proper work
other body parts position outside of
caught between “bite” of any rigging;
objects and pinch wear all necessary
points. PPE, maintain focus
on task being
performed.
4.3 Falls from 4.3 Maintain eye contact
equipment. and communication
with equipment
operators regarding
task being performed.
Make sure all
equipment is
adequately anchored
where required.
4.4 Cross-phasing. 4.4 Maintain equipment
steps clear from all
obstructions i.e. mud,
ice, oil, grease, etc.
clean work boot soles
Page 3 of 7
of mud, oil, etc.;
observe placement of
feet onto steps,
maintain firm grip on
grab devices.
Observe and maintain
condition of all
provided fall protection
devices. (hand-rails
etc.).
4.5 Hardline comes 4.5 Confirm that rope goes
loose from grip; through the same
swivel breaks or phase block as on the
does not spin previous structure.
properly. Check prints for
phasing. Check
phasing schematic
and both adjacent
structures when
phasing rolls. Check
for proper size grip
before installation.
Inspect swivel for
proper operation and
defects, replace as
necessary.
4.6 Equipment strikes 4.6 Ensure that back up
personnel. alarms are working,
and employees
understand safety
rules for backing up
equipment. Maintain
eye contact and
Page 4 of 7
communications with
operators; observe
walking areas and
remove/avoid
obstacles.
5. Attach Rope to 5.1 Swivel breaks. 6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Inspect swivel for Section 9 4 Mod/Risk
Conductor proper operation and Inspections-
defects and replace as Monitoring
required.
5.2 Grip slips. 5.2 Confirm grip is proper SWP 26.043
size for conductor and Housekeeping
that it is installed and
secured properly.
5.3 Incorrect phasing of 5.3 Ensure that rope goes
rope. through the same
phase block as on
previous structure.
5.4 Slips, Trips, and 5.4 Keep proper body
Falls. position, do not extend
arms or legs beyond
strength positions.
Observe environment
for hazards and
arrange to have
removed where
possible. Ensure
employees are using
proper footwear.
5.5 Cuts, punctures, and 5.5 Wear all necessary
pinched body parts. PPE. Keep hands,
fingers and all body
parts clear of pinch
points. Maintain eye
Page 5 of 7
contact and
communications with
operators. Avoid /
remove sharp objects
wear possible.
Carefully handle
Kellum Grips and
avoid/remove the
sharp ends of broken
wires.
Page 6 of 7
Page 7 of 7
Document Description: JSA for Pulling Conductor
Date
Date: Aug. 2011 Revision #: 1 Revised by: D. Stykalo Dec. 4, 2015
Revised:

1-3 8-10
Exposure

1. Job Assignments 1.1 Lack of 3 Low/Risk 1.1 Conduct Tailboard to 2 Low/Risk

communications confirm hand signals
could lead to to be used; confirm
improper personnel personnel assigned
positioning. locations.
1.2 Lack of skills 1.2 Supervisor assigns
exposes responsibilities
inexperienced or according to
unqualified person experience, displayed
to injury. skills, and specific
certifications.
2. Adjust and prepare 2.1 Wire reel not in 6 Mod/Risk 2.1 Adjust brake tension Section 9 4 Mod/Risk
equipment control as required; insert pins Inspections-
and engagement dogs Monitoring
in rope puller.
Page 1 of 9
3. Pull Conductor 3.1 Pole or structure 8 High/Risk 3.1 Observe line tension; 6 Mod/Risk
member bending observe rope-
or breaking conductor connection
point as it goes
through travelers;
operators shall
concentrate on line
tension indications;
maintain
communication
between ground crews
and equipment
operators; personnel
stay clear of
structures.
3.2 Equipment failure. 3.2 Preventative
Maintenance is to be
current; pre-job
inspection; operator
observation during
work; communicate all
problems that arise
during operations
ASAP with mechanic.
3.3 Wire bird cages or 3.3 Check travelers for
otherwise deforms. proper function; keep
conductor clear from
rocks, brush, or other
obstacles that could
damage conductor.
3.4 Stringing breaks. 3.4 Recheck traveler
installation; observe
travelers during pull
Page 2 of 9
for excessive strain
and non-rotating
sheaves.
3.5 Conductor comes 3.5 Ensure that travelers
out of traveler. have been properly
installed prior to pull;
check that doors are
facing proper direction
and latches are
properly secured.
3.6 Clearance 3.6 Stop operations until
structure leaning structures are
or falling. secured; Check
medium that structure
is set in (mud, soft
soil) and secure with
necessary guying
and/or bracing.
3.7 Public exposed in 3.7 Check all warning and
the work zone. information signs.
Check for
effectiveness of
channeling devices.
Add or reconfigure
channeling devices to
accommodate the
necessary level of
public safety.
Implement the use of
a “Safety Watch” or
“Flag Persons” as
necessary to assist
the public and prevent
Page 3 of 9
exposure to workplace
hazards. Implement
the use of barriers
and/or barricades as
necessary.
3.8 Hardline breaks. 3.8 Maintain proper
tension; stop
operation when
hardline or conductor
hangs up.
3.9 Machines 3.9 Maintain proper
inadvertently move tension; anchor and
or pull over. chock equipment as
necessary.
3.10 Communication 3.10 Confirm all radios
breakdown. function properly;
ensure that vehicles
and equipment are at
assigned locations;
establish and
communicate
emergency stop
signal; stop operations
if communications are
lost.
3.11 Conductor winds 3.11 Operator to observe
off reel. wrap count and
communicate that
information with puller
operator and
Foreman. Both ends
of this operation shall
maintain continuous
Page 4 of 9
communication.
3.12 Hands, fingers and 3.12 Maintain focus on task
other body parts being performed.
caught between Maintain
objects or in pinch communication
points. regarding task being
performed. Wear all
necessary PPE.
4. Protect Conductor 4.1 Conductor gets 6 Mod/Risk 4.1 Observe line tension; 4 Mod/Risk
damaged observe rope-
conductor-connection
point as it goes
through travelers;
operators shall
concentrate on line
tension indications;
maintain
communication
between ground crews
and equipment
operators; personnel
stay clear of
structures. Check
travelers for proper
function; keep
conductor clear from
rocks, brush, or other
obstacles that could
damage conductor.
4.2 Public 4.2 Check all warning and
information signs.
Check for
effectiveness of
Page 5 of 9
channeling devices.
Add or reconfigure
channeling devices to
accommodate the
necessary level of
public safety.
Implement the use of a
“Safety Watch” or
“Flag Persons” as
necessary to assist the
public and prevent
exposure to workplace
hazards. Implement
the use of barriers
and/or barricades as
necessary. Observe
any low hanging wire
or rope and make
necessary adjustment
to abate hazards to
the public.
5. Secure Conductor 5.1 Conductor slips 6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Check grips size and 4 Mod/Risk
through grip. verify the correct size
for the conductor to
which it is being
applied. Check grip
for functional
effectiveness. Check
grip for any damage
and/or defects and
make necessary
corrections.
5.2 Hands, fingers and 5.2 Maintain focus on task
Page 6 of 9
other body parts being performed.
caught/pinched Maintain
between objects. communication
regarding task being
performed. Wear all
necessary PPE. Do
not work/position
personnel in the “bite”
of any angles or areas
of stored kinetic
energy.
5.3 Personnel struck by 5.3 Personnel to avoid
conductor. standing/working
within the inside of any
angle created by the
conductor at either the
pulling or payout ends
of the “pull”.
5.4 Personnel struck by 5.4 Remain alert and
equipment. focused at all times
that work is ongoing.
Maintain eye contact
and communication
with operators.
Observe
working/walking areas
and remove/avoid
obstacles. Ensure
back-up alarms are
functioning properly.
Review worksite
equipment backing
procedures with
Page 7 of 9
personnel prior to
each shift.
Page 8 of 9
Page 9 of 9
Document Description: JSA for Tension Stringing (General)
Date: Feb. 13, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by: D. Stykalo

1-3 8-10
Exposure

1. Lay out travelers and 1.1 Traffic, slips, trips 3 Low/Risk a. Signs / cones 2 Low/Risk
P-line and falls b. Buddy systems
Grounded travelers
must be used at the
first and last structure
of the pull & at
structures on either
side of live line
crossings.
2. Hang travelers and P- 2.1 Falling objects 8 High/Risk 2.1 Stay clear of tower SWP 26.028 6 Mod/Risk
line 2.2 Working at heights 2.2 Full fall protection and Fall Protection
PPE, 100% tie off.
3. Pull hard line using 3.1 Communication 8 High/Risk 3.1 Two-way radio, radio SWP 26.036 6 Mod/Risk
dozer checks. Grounding and
Page 1 of 5
Date: Feb. 13, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:
3.2 Loss of Load 3.2 Inspect connections Bonding
and rigging.
3.3 Moving lines on the 3.3 Stay clear of spreader
ground bar; stay clear of the
bite.
3.4 Induction 3.4 Proper grounding must
be used where
required. EP zone
must be set up around
puller with barriers and
grounding mats.
4. Thread pull ropes 4.1 Falling debris 4 Mod/Risk 4.1 Stand away from SWP 26.043 3 Low/Risk
through travelers tower when pulling Housekeeping
ropes. SWP 26.050
4.2 Slips, trips and falls 4.2 Ensure debris is Manual Lifting
picked up. and Handling
4.3 Body strains 4.3 Ensure proper body
positioning.
5. Grip hard line at slug 5.1 Rigging failure 8 High/Risk 5.1 Check grips for ice SWP 26.006 6 Mod/Risk
sites and debris. Inspect Crane and
rated grips and slings. Rigging
5.2 Pinch points 5.2 Ensure proper body
positioning. Rubber
gloves must be used
when handling the
hard line.
be used as required.
6. Load reels on stands 6.1 Hoisting heavy 8 High/Risk 6.1 Proper rated rigging SWP 26 027 6 Mod/Risk
and thread tensioner loads Spotter and
6.2 Moving equipment 6.2 Spotters Signaller
6.3 Rigging failure 6.3 Tag lines
Page 2 of 5
6.4 Induction 6.4 Proper grounding must Practice
be used where
required. If reels are
required to be
changed out during a
pull, the boom truck
must be bonded into
the EP Zone
7. Hook conductor to 7.1 Rigging failure 8 High/Risk 7.1 Use and inspect Section 9 6 Mod/Risk
hard line proper rigging and Inspections-
connectors. Monitoring
7.2 Induction 7.2 Inspect tools. Proper
grounding must be
used where required.
EP zone must be set
up around tensioner
with barriers and
grounding mats.
8. Pull conductor back to 8.1 Communication 6 Mod/Risk 8.1 Ensure 4 Mod/Risk
puller and grip failure communication, radio
checks
8.2 Personnel 8.2 Qualified personnel
8.3 Load limits 8.3 Stay out of the bite
exceeded
8.4 Limits of Approach 8.4 Ensure limits of
(LoA) approach are reviewed
and adhered to while
performing work.
9. Splice / high energy 9.1 Blasting 8 High/Risk 9.1 Pre-blast warning, 6 Mod/Risk
joining, let up and sag hearing protection,
9.2 Noise clear blasting area.
9.2 Hearing protection.
9.3 Debris 9.3 All vulnerable
Page 3 of 5
personnel and
equipment in safe
9.4 Tension location.
9.4 Stay out of bite zone.
9.5 Communication 9.5 Radio checks, clear
failure communication.
9.6 Working at heights 9.6 Fall protection – 100%
tie off.
9.7 Induction 9.7 Rubber gloves to be
worn when handling
wire for joining.
10. Tie in 10.1 Working at heights 8 High/Risk 10.1 Full fall protection, 6 Mod/Risk
100% tie off
10.2 Falling objects 10.2 All workers stay clear
from fall zone.
10.3 Communication 10.3 Proper hand signals
with operator with operator.
10.4 Pinch points 10.4 Proper body
positioning.
be used where
required.
Ground boom truck to
the tower. Bond the
upper boom to the
phase conductor
being worked on.
Skywire/OPGW is to
be grounded as well.
Page 4 of 5
Page 5 of 5
Document Description: JSA for Sagging Conductors and Sky Wires
Date: April 11, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by: D. Stykalo

1-3 8-10
Exposure

1. Mobilization and 1.1 Traffic 4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Obey speed limits of SWP 26.013 2 Low/Risk
Access to Site the roads used. Four Use of
way flashers and pull Company
to the side if needed
Flag persons and
traffic control if
required. Secure loads
Right-of-Way Limits area. Only needed
equipment parked in
work area. Equipment
accesses.
Communication
between vehicles if
Page 1 of 7
Date: April 11, 2011 Revision #: Date Revised: Revised by:
necessary. Wait at
wide spots to meet
other vehicles.
of approach). Use
Designated Signaler
Traveling Speed
ROW boundaries
Equipment contact
with energized lines.
2. Set up equipment 2.1 Equipment failure 6 Mod/Risk 2.1 Qualified operators. Section 9 4 Mod/Risk
Operated within the
operating instructions
of the unit.
Dozer set up on hard
ground.
Be aware of site
conditions.
Sagging tension
known.
Man Lift set on level
ground and radius
known (if used).
Unauthorized use of
equipment;
Pulling capacity of
dozer.
Page 2 of 7
3. 3.1 Communication / 8 High/Risk 3.1 Designated signal SWP 26.027 6 Mod/Risk
Miscommunication person. Spotter and
Continuous radio Signaller
communication at all SWP 26.006
times during sagging. Crane and
Communication with
crew prior to starting. Rigging
3.2 Energized circuits 3.2 No person is touching
(working in vicinity
of energized lines) the dozer and other
equipment.
Running grounds to
be installed.
Limits of approach.
close proximity to
utilities.
Pulling away from the
existing lines.
(sagging wire, rigging for the pull
single sheave) (sagging wire, sagging
sheave).
Sagging Tension of
the section known.
Hand line rope
inspection prior to use.
No one is standing
below the wire being
pulled.
3.4 Operator is monitoring
3.4 Equipment Failure
path of pulling
equipment
Pads of man lift (if
used) monitored
No one is standing
within range of the
Page 3 of 7
wire pulled
3.5 Equipment properly
3.5 Induction grounded
Running grounds
installed during
sagging
Grounds installed onto
the traveler at every
3km maximum
3.6 Personnel Standing 3.6 All personnel to stand
in a Way of Wire clear from the wire
Being Sagged being sagged and not
standing in a bite.
Miscommunication
Working in vicinity of
energized lines
Object falling from
height
Failure of sagging
wire, sheave
Induced current
(especially within tie-in
areas)
4. Climbing onto 4.1 Falling from Height 8 High/Risk 4.1 Use double hook SWP 26.028 6 Mod/Risk
Tower/Moving within lanyard or other Fall Protection
Tower approved means of
attachment, at all
times once above 3
meters from the
ground level.
Proper PPE to be
used at all times
Page 4 of 7
(safety footwear to be
in good condition,
hard hat, gloves).
Inspect Safety
Harness every time
prior climbing onto the
tower.
In wet weather
conditions and if tower
is slippery, use man
lift for climbing onto
the tower.
Stop work if wind
speed is over
10m/sec.
Slippery tower steel
(climbing path for the
lineman).
Improper use of PPE
(safety harness).
Damaged PPE (safety
harness, safety
footwear).
Note if using a crane
basket, the revised
load chart must be at
the operator controls.
Adverse weather
conditions.
5. Clean up and 5.1 Equipment Collision 4 Mod/Risk 5.1 Qualified operators SWP 26.043 3 Low/Risk
Demobilize off the Site and drivers. Housekeeping
Back up beepers.
Have signal person
Page 5 of 7
directing equipment
and trucks when
backing up at tower
locations.
5.2 Site Conditions,
5.2 Ensure all material,
slips, trips, falls
debris is picked up
prior to moving
equipment.
Backing up of
equipment
Page 6 of 7
Page 7 of 7
Document Description: JSA for Sagging and Dead-Ending Conductor
Date: Aug. 11, 2011 Revision #: 2 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by: D. Stykalo

1-3 8-10
Exposure

access where Use of
* Significant Concerns: possible. Company
Road conditions, Four way flashers and
time of day, pull to the side if Vehicles
weather check needed while opening
height of utilities barriers.
Flag persons and
traffic control as
required.
Secure loads.
2. Install Sag Boards 2.1 Falls from elevated 8 High/Risk 2.1 Maintain 100% SWP 26.028 6 Mod/Risk
position. connection to a fall Fall Protection
arrest system while
using aerial lifts.
2.2 Over-tensioning 2.2 Ensure proper sag has
causing damage to been derived from
Page 1 of 12
Created by: H. McNeil Doc.Number: JSA 01.045
Date: Aug. 11,2011 Revision#: 1 Date Revised: Revised by:
Task / Activity Potential (source of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard Post
Loss/Hazard Rating Prevention Barriers Reference Mitigation
Rating
structures, structure engineering
members and/or specifications.
anchoring devices. Check calculations
regarding sag
* Significant Concerns: measurement
Review JSA on technique –
climbing Poles or dynamometer, timing
Towers returns, or sagging
sticks with targets.
3. Install Slack Dead End 3.1 Hoist slips striking 6 Mod/Risk 3.1 Inspect and maintain Section 10 4 Mod Risk
(Soft Side) personnel. hoists prior to use. Personal
Keep handle in the Protective
“UP” position in order Equipment
to lock it (keep it from SWP 26.050
ratcheting) and
position hoist so that Manual Lifting
handle is away from and Handling
worker.
3.2 Cuts from broken 3.2 Inspect insulators prior
glass on insulators.
to lifting into work
zone.
Wear work gloves and
other necessary PPE.
Rig insulator string in
such a manner that
units do not strike
structure or other
objects that will cause
breakage.
3.3 Material and/or 3.3 Secure step bolts,
tools falling on hand-lines, material
ground personnel. bags, and other tools
and material to be
used aloft.
Do not throw items to
the ground from the
Page 2 of 12
Rating
structure.
Ground personnel
shall no stand directly
under employees
working aloft.
3.4 Conductor slips 3.4 Check the grip size
and verify the correct
size for the conductor
to which it is being
applied.
Check grip for
functional
effectiveness.
Check grip for any
damage and/or
defects and make
necessary corrections.
3.5 Strains & Sprains 3.5 Keep proper body
due to position; do not extend
overextension. arms or legs beyond
strength positions.
Ask for assistance.
4. Sag Wire 4.1 Conductor slips in 4 Mod/Risk 4.1 Check the grip size Section 9 3 Low/Risk
grip. and verify the correct Inspections-
size for the conductor Monitoring
applied.
Check grip for
functional
effectiveness.
Check grip for any
damage and/or
defects and make
4.2 Ensure proper sag has
Page 3 of 12
Rating
been derived from
4.2 Excessive tension engineering
resulting in damage specifications.
material structures, Check calculations
anchoring devices regarding sag
or structure measurement
members. technique –
dynamometer, timing
returns, or sagging
sticks with targets.
4.3 Conductor strikes 4.3 Personnel to avoid
personnel. standing/working
within the inside of
any angle created by
the conductor.
4.4 Loss of 4.4 Confirm all radios
communication. function properly;
ensure that vehicles
assigned locations;
Establish and
communicate
emergency stop
signal;
Stop operations if
communications are
lost.
4.5 Hands, fingers and 4.5 Keep hands/fingers
other body parts clear of press head.
caught in pinch Linemen maintain eye
points. contact and verbal
communications to
actuate press head.
Wear all proper PPE.
4.6 Tools and/or 4.6 Secure step bolts,
material falling on hand-lines, material
Page 4 of 12
Rating
ground personnel. bags, and other tools
and material to be
used aloft.
the ground from the
structure.
Ground personnel
under employees
working aloft.
4.7 Personnel fall from 4.7 Maintain 100%
pole / tower or connection to a fall
crane basket. arrest system while
using aerial lifts.
4.8 Crane/man lift tips 4.8 Crane leveled.
Outriggers fully
over. extended;
Proper stiff leg pads
positioned under stiff
legs.
Crane operated within
manufacturers’ load
chart rating and safe
radius work zone.
Environmental factors
considered per
manufacturer
specifications - i.e.
high winds.
5. Adjust guys 5.1 Grip slips while re- 4 Mod/Risk 5.1 Check the grip size 3 Low/Risk
tensioning guys. and verify the correct
applied.
Check grip for
Page 5 of 12
Rating
functional
effectiveness.
Check grip for any
damage and/or
defects and make
When using preforms
ensure that preform
has been fully
installed (wrapped).
5.2 Preform “releases” 5.2 Check preforms for
and cuts/bruises correct size.
soft tissue Control ends while
installing.
Check preform for
damage/defects prior
to use.
other body parts clear of pinch points.
caught between Linemen maintain eye
objects. contact and verbal
communications to
with one another.
Maintain focus on task
at hand. Wear all
proper PPE.
5.4 Strains and/or 5.4 Keep proper body
sprains from position.
overexertion. Do not extend arms or
legs beyond strength
positions.
Ask for assistance.
6. Final Conductor Sag 6.1 Conductor slips. 8 High/Risk 6.1 Check the grip size 6 Mod/Risk
and verify the correct
Page 6 of 12
Rating
applied.
Check grip for
functional
effectiveness.
Check grip for any
damage and/or
defects and make
Maintain tension within
determined limits.
6.2 Sag tension 6.2 Check measurements
exceeded. for target placement,
timing, or tension
tables when using
dynamometers.
watch on pressure.
Assign a watch to
observe conductor
during sagging
operations.
6.3 Personnel to avoid
6.3 Conductor strikes standing/working
personnel. within the inside of
the conductor.
6.4 Confirm all radios
6.4 Loss of or poor function properly.
communication Ensure that vehicles
disrupting and equipment are at
coordination of assigned locations.
sagging operations. Establish and
communicate
emergency stop
signal.
Stop operations if
communications are
Page 7 of 12
Rating
lost.
other body parts clear of pinch points.
caught between Linemen maintain eye
objects. contact and verbal
communications to
with one another.
at hand. Wear all
proper PPE.
6.6 Materials or tools 6.6 Secure step bolts,
falling on ground hand-lines, material
personnel. bags, and other tools
and material to be
used aloft.
the ground from the
structure.
Ground personnel
under employees
working aloft.
6.7 Personnel falling 6.7 Maintain 100%
from heights. connection to a fall
arrest system while
using aerial lifts.
6.8 Crane/aerial lift tips 6.8 Crane leveled as
over. required.
Outriggers fully
extended.
legs.
radius work zone.
Page 8 of 12
Rating
All environmental
factors considered per
manufacturer
high winds.
6.9 Slips, trips and falls. 6.9 Ensure employees are
wearing proper
footwear.
Observe walkways
and working surfaces
for hazards and
remove and/or avoid
hazards.
7. Cutting in the Dead 7.1 Conductor slips in 8 High/Risk 7.1 Check the grip size 6 Mod/Risk
End the grip. and verify the correct
applied.
Check grip for
functional
effectiveness.
Check grip for any
damage and/or
defects and make
Maintain tension within
determined limits.
7.2 Sag tension 7.2 Check measurements
exceeded; for target placement,
equipment and/or timing, or tension
material damaged; tables when using
structures and/or dynamometers.
structure members Operator to maintain
damaged. watch on pressure.
Assign a watch to
observe conductor
Page 9 of 12
Rating
during sagging
operations.
7.3 Conductor strikes 7.3 Personnel to avoid
personnel. standing/working
within the inside of
the conductor.
7.4 Loss of 7.4 Confirm all radios
communication. function properly.
Ensure that vehicles
assigned locations.
Establish and
communicate
emergency stop
signal.
Stop operations if
communications are
lost.
7.5 Keep hands/fingers
7.5 Hands, fingers and
clear of pinch points.
other body parts Linemen maintain eye
caught in pinch contact and verbal
points or crushing communications to
zones. with one another.
at hand.
7.6 Secure step bolts,
7.6 Material and/or
hand-lines, material
tools falling on
bags, and other tools
ground personnel.
and material to be
used aloft.
the ground from the
Page 10 of 12
Rating
structure.
Ground personnel
under employees
working aloft.
7.7 Personnel falling 7.7 Maintain 100%
form structures connection to a fall
and/or aerial lifts. arrest system while
using aerial lifts.
7.8 Crane/aerial lift 7.8 Crane leveled as
turns over. required.
Outriggers fully
extended.
legs.
radius work zone.
All environmental
manufacturer
high winds.
7.9 Check required
7.9 Conductor cut
measurement for the
short.
insulator string
specified at given
structure.
Page 11 of 12
Date: Aug. 11, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Revised by:
Page 12 of 12
Document Description: JSA for Dead End Aloft

1-3 8-10
Exposure

Access to Site the roads used. Use of
pull to the side if Vehicles
needed while opening
barriers.
Flag persons and
traffic control if
required.
Secure loads.
Right-of-Way Limits area.
Only needed
equipment parked in
work area.
Page 1 of 6
* Significant Concerns: Equipment and trucks
Travelling Speed to keep to designated
ROW boundaries roads and accesses.
Communication
between vehicles if
necessary.
meet other vehicles
2. Set up Equipment 2.1 Equipment Failure 8 High/Risk 2.1 Qualified / Section 9 6 Mod/Risk
experienced Inspections-
operators. Monitoring
Daily inspections SWP 26.036
completed. Grounding and
Operated within the Bonding
of the unit.
Be aware of site
conditions.
Crane set on level
ground and pads
secured.
2.2 No equipment
2.2 Energized Circuits positioned/parked
close to energized
* Significant Concerns: circuits.
Unauthorized use of
equipment. Crane-ground installed
Equipment contact Crane-movement
with energized lines. radius known.
3. Dead / Ending Aloft 3.1 Communication 8 High/Risk 3.1 Continuous hand- SWP 26.006 6 Mod/Risk
ground-lineman at signal or radio Crane and
the top of tower communication at all Rigging
times during
operation.
Page 2 of 6
Communication with
crew prior to starting
(slings, chain hoist) rigging for the lifting
(slings/ chain hoists).
Hand line rope
No one is standing
below the load being
lifted.
3.3 Equipment Failure 3.3 Pads of crane
monitored during
lifting of insulators.
No one is standing
below the load.
3.4 Induction
3.4 Equipment properly
grounded.
* Significant Concerns: Temporary grounds
Miscommunication installed between
Object falling from conductors and tower
height prior to start operation.
Failure of sling
wire/chain hoists
Object falling from
height
Induced voltage
4. Installation of 4.1 Transportation 8 High/Risk 4.1 Driver trained- 6 Low/Risk
Implosive Sleeves Transport of
Dangerous Goods.
Implosive sleeves-in
Day Box-at the back
of the truck.
4.2 Radio 4.2 Detonators-in Type 6
communication Magazine, separated
Page 3 of 6
from implosive
sleeves & chained to
the vehicle.
Clearance between
implosive sleeves and
steel sling minimum
16”(45cm).
Clearance between
implosive sleeves and
chain hoist minimum
24”(60cm).
Unused sleeves
and/or detonators-
returned to licensed
magazine at the end
of day.
4.3 Flying / Falling 4.3 Radios switched off
Materials During when blasting.
Blasting Keep well
clear/sufficient
distance from the blast
area during detonation
* Significant Concerns: (approx 150’).
Explosive detonators Nylon slings are not to
Flying debris be used in rigging
Injuries caused by configuration.
blasing No one on the tower
or man lift during
detonation.
Sound horn 3 times
prior detonation.
Page 4 of 6
5. Climbing onto Tower / 5.1 Fall from Height 8 High/Risk 5.1 Use double hook SWP 26.028 6 Mod/Risk
Moving within Tower lanyard or other Fall Protection
* Significant Concerns: approved means of
Slippery tower steel attachment, at all
(climbing path for the times once above 3
lineman) meters from the
Improper use of PPE ground level.
(safety harness) Proper PPE to be
Damaged PPE used at all times
(safety harness, (safety footwear to be
safety footwear) in good condition,
Note if using a crane hard hat, gloves).
basket, the revised Inspect Safety
load chart must be at Harness every time
the operator controls prior climbing onto the
Adverse weather tower
conditions In wet weather
conditions and if tower
is slippery, use man
the tower
Stop work if wind
speed is over 10m/sec
6. Clean up and 6.1 Equipment Collision 4 Mod/Risk 6.1 Qualified operators SWP 26 027 3 Low/Risk
Demobilize off the Site / Site conditions and drivers. Spotter and
Back up beepers. Signaller
* Significant Concerns: Have signal person
Back up of directing equipment
Equipment and trucks when
backing up at tower
locations.
Page 5 of 6
Date: April 13, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:
Page 6 of 6
Document Description: JSA for Installing Line Jumpers
Date: Aug. 11, 2011 Revision #: 2 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by: D. Stykalo

1-3 8-10
Exposure

1. Mobilize to Site 1.1 Traffic 4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Pull equipment into SWP 26.013 3 Low/Risk
Significant Concerns: possible. Company
Road conditions, time of Four-way flashers and
day, weather, check pull to the side if Vehicles
height of utilities. needed while opening
barriers.
Flag persons and
traffic control as
required.
Secure loads
2. Job Assignments 2.1 Lack of 4 Mod/Risk 2.1 Conduct Tailboard Section 6 3 Low/Risk
communications meeting. Hazard Analysis
could lead to Confirm
improper personnel communications to be
positioning. used.
Confirm personnel
Page 1 of 9
assigned locations
and duties.
2.2 Lack of skills 2.2 The supervisor
exposes assigns
inexperienced or responsibilities
unqualified person according to
to injury. experience, displayed
skills and specific
certifications.
3. Set up Aerial Lift 3.1 Falls from an 8 High/Risk 3.1 Maintain 100% SWP 26.028 6 Mod/Risk
elevated position. connection to a fall Fall Protection
arrest system while
using aerial lifts.
3.2 Crane tips over or 3.2 Crane leveled as
becomes unstable. required.
Outriggers fully
extended;
legs.
manufacturer’s load
radius work zone.
All environmental
manufacturer
high winds.
3.3 Hydraulic hose 3.3 Inspect hose and
ruptures. fittings for leaks, wear
or damage.
Wear all necessary
PPE.
Page 2 of 9
Establish the best work
position possible to
minimize exposure to
high-pressure
hydraulic system
bursting failure.
3.4 Equipment strikes 3.4 Visually observe stiff
personnel or
employees get legs making contact
caught in pinch with pads.
points and/or Keep hands/fingers
crushing zones. clear of pinch points;
Employees should
maintain eye contact
and verbal
communications with
one another.
at hand.
Page 3 of 9
4. Install Support 4.1 Hand / finger or 6 Mod/Risk 4.1 Keep hands/fingers Section 10 4 Mod/Risk
Insulators other body part clear of pinch points. Personal
caught in press. Linemen maintain eye Protective
contact and verbal Equipment
communications when
moving insulators into
position.
4.2 Sprains, Strains and 4.2 Keep proper body
Overexertion. position, do not extend
arms or legs beyond
strength positions.
Ask for assistance.
4.3 Cuts and puncture 4.3 Wear work gloves and
wounds. all necessary PPE.
Maintain
communications with
other workers in the
immediate area.
4.4 Falls from elevated 4.4 Maintain 100%
position. connection to a fall
arrest system while
using aerial lifts.
5. Measure Jumper 5.1 Material and/or 6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Employees shall wear 4 Mod/Risk
Conductors tools falling on approved hard hats
ground personnel. and other required
PPE.
Secure step bolts,
Page 4 of 9
handlines, material
and material to be
used aloft.
the ground from the
structure.
Ground personnel
under employees
working aloft.
5.2 Strains and sprains. 5.2 Keep proper body
position, do not extend
arms or legs beyond
strength positions.
Ask for assistance.
5.3 Wear work gloves and
5.3 Cuts and
all necessary PPE.
lacerations. Maintain
communications with
other workers in the
immediate area.
5.4 Falls from 5.4 Review JSA on
elevations. climbing wood & steel
poles.
Maintain 100%
connection to a fall
arrest system while
using aerial lifts.
5.5 Slips and tripping. 5.5 Ensure employees are
wearing proper
footwear.
Observe walkways
and working surfaces
for hazards and
remove and/or avoid
Page 5 of 9
hazards.
6. Cut Conductor and 6.1 Hydraulic failure in 6 Mod/Risk 6.1 Inspect hose and Section 9 4 Mod/Risk
Press Jumper press motor/press fittings for leaks, wear Inspections-
Terminals head system. or damage. Monitoring
Wear all necessary
PPE.
Establish the best
work position possible
to minimize exposure
to high-pressure
hydraulic system
bursting failure.
6.2 Hand, fingers or 6.2 Keep hands/fingers
other body parts clear of press head.
caught in press Linemen maintain eye
head. contact and verbal
communications to
actuate press head.
6.3 Fire or burns from 6.3 Position press motor to
press motor. establish best work
area that minimizes
exposure to burns
from a potential fire.
Maintain an active fire
extinguisher of the
proper class in the
basket or on the
6.4 Sprains and strains structure.
from overexertion 6.4 Keep proper body
arms or legs beyond
strength positions.
Page 6 of 9
Ask for assistance.
7. Hang Jumpers 7.1 Falling objects 8 High/Risk 7.1 Employees shall wear 6 Mod/Risk
approved hard hats
and other required
PPE.
Secure step bolts,
handlines, material
and material to be
used aloft.
the ground from the
structure.
Ground personnel
under employees
working aloft.
7.2 Strains, sprains due
7.2 Keep proper body
to overexertion
arms or legs beyond
strength positions.
Ask for assistance.
8 Hanging the hook 8.1 Slips and/or trips. 6 Mod/Risk 8.1 Ensure employees are SWP 26.043 4 Mod/Risk
ladder (when using wearing proper Housekeeping
hook ladder) footwear. SWP 26 027
Observe walkways Spotter and
and working surfaces Signaller
for hazards and
remove and/or avoid
hazards.
8.2 Personnel caught 8.2 Drivers and ground
between objects personnel to be alert
and/or backed over to equipment
by equipment. movement.
Back up alarms shall
Page 7 of 9
be functional.
Operators shall be
aware of all operations
in the work zone.
A safety watch for
backing operations
should be assigned as
necessary.
8.3 Ladder falls. 8.3 Inspect
hoisting/rigging
equipment prior to
raising the ladder.
Inspect the ladder and
attachments prior to
raising the ladder.
Secure ladder properly
using ladder hoods
and safety chains.
8.4 Lineman falls from 8.4 Utilize a retractable
ladder. lanyard with an
anchorage on the
structure and the
personnel attachment
to an approved full
body harness D-ring.
8.5 Ladder fails. 8.5 Ensure ladder is free
of damage or defects;
ensure ladder is
approved for load and
horizontal use.
Page 8 of 9
Page 9 of 9
Document Description: JSA for Tie in Tangent (Clamping in)

1-3 8-10
Exposure

Access to Site the roads used. Use of
pull to the side if
needed while opening Vehicles
barriers.
Flag persons and
traffic control if
required.
Secure loads
Right-of-Way Limits area.
Only needed
equipment parked in
work area.
Page 1 of 5
* Significant Concerns: roads and accesses.
Travelling Speed Communication
ROW boundaries between vehicles if
necessary.
2. Set up Equipment 2.1 Equipment failure 8 High/Risk 2.1 Qualified / Section 9 6 Mod/Risk
experienced Inspections-
operators. Monitoring
Daily inspections
completed.
Operated within the
of the unit.
Be aware of site
conditions.
Man Lift set on level
ground and radius
known (if used).
2.2 Energized Circuits 2.2 No equipment
positioned/parked
* Significant Concerns: close to energized
Unauthorized use of circuits.
equipment.
Equipment contact
with energized lines.
Page 2 of 5
3. Tie in (Clamping 3.1 Communication 8 High/Risk 3.1 Continuous radio SWP 26.006 6 Mod/risk
operation) ground->lineman at communication at all Crane and
the top of tower time during clamping. Rigging
Communication with SWP 26.036
crew prior to starting Grounding and
3.2 Rigging Failure 3.2 Rated and inspected Bonding
(chain hoists, shoes rigging for the lifting
with slings, capstan (chain hoists, slings,
on crew truck) shoes).
Lifting Tension of the
wire known.
Hand-line rope
No one is standing
below the wire being
clamped in.
3.3 Induction 3.3 Equipment properly
grounded.
Temporary grounds
* Significant Concerns: installed during
Miscommunication clamping
Object falling from Grounds installed onto
height the travelers at every
Failure of chain hoist, 3km. maximum
sling wire, shoes, (ahead of clamping
capstan in).
Induced current
4. Climbing onto Tower / 4.1 Fall from Height 8 High/Risk 4.1 Use double hook SWP 26.028 6 Mod/Risk
Moving within Tower lanyard or other Fall Protection
approved means of
attachment, at all
Page 3 of 5
* Significant Concerns: times once above 3
Slippery tower steel meters from the
(climbing path for the ground level.
lineman) Proper PPE to be
Improper use of PPE used at all times
(safety harness) (safety footwear to be
Damaged PPE in good condition,
(safety harness, hard hat, gloves).
safety footwear) Inspect Safety
Note if using a crane Harness every time
basket, the revised prior climbing onto the
load chart must be at tower.
the operator controls In wet weather
Adverse weather conditions and if tower
conditions is slippery, use man
the tower.
Stop work if wind
speed is over
10m/sec.
Lineman to move
within tower using
double lanyard
technique.
5. Clean up and 5.1 Equipment Collision 4 Mod/Risk 5.1 Qualified operators SWP 26 027 2 Low/Risk
Demobilize off the Site / Site conditions and drivers. Spotter and
Back up beepers Signaller
* Significant Concerns: Have signal person
Backup of Equipment directing equipment
and trucks when
backing up at tower
locations.
Page 4 of 5
Page 5 of 5
Document Description: JSA for Installing Spacer Dampers
Date: July 26, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by: D. Stykalo

1-3 8-10
Exposure

1. Transporting carts to 1.1 Equipment damage 3 Low/Risk 1.1 Carts tied to a vehicle 2 Low/Risk
worksite to pulley upright with wheels.
2. Cart inspection at 2.1 Equipment damage 3 Low/Risk 2.1 Inspection of: Section 9 2 Low/Risk
work site or prior to or repairs / Unsafe Pulley wheels for wear Inspections-
use equipment or cracks. If cracked, Monitoring
no use.
Safety clips function
properly. If defective,
replace.
Main welds on rails &
cart frame. No use if
defects, effect certified
repairs.
All bolts tight, torqued,
if not, effect repairs or
replacement by
engineering specs.
Page 1 of 7
Date: July 26, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:
3. Equipment selection 3.1 Defective 3 Low/Risk 3.1 Inspection of: 2 Low/Risk
and inspection equipment Fall arrest system and
3.2 Wear or Damage harness inspected up
3.3 Forgetting to date and daily.
Equipment Double lanyards
installed correctly for
support.
Rescue rope (min 75’)
attached securely to
cart.
15’ brake rope ½” or
5/8” attached secured
in cart.
Cloth bag secured for
small tools.
Tether strap for
portable tools.
Radio checks for
designated radio on
crew for
communication or
emergency.
Engineering specs in
vehicle at site.
4. Transporting cart from 4.1 Job communication 8 High/Risk 4.1 Morning meeting to Section 6 6 Mod/Risk
ground to conductor not covered include working Hazard Analysis
location via boom location.
trucks
4.2 Unstable load 4.2 Boom trucks set up
with out-rigger pads.
4.3 Overloading 4.3 Swing and radius
within chart for
equipment.
4.4 Improper rigging 4.4 Cart attached by
proper rope or rigging
for approx 42-50lbs
cart weight.
Page 2 of 7
4.5 Falling material 4.5 Lift area clear using
ground man
4.6 No control of lift 4.6 Workers in basket to
zone signal for lift.
4.7 Lack of signals 4.7 Lost signals, operator
STOPS.
4.8 Falls from elevation 4.8 Basket workers 100%
tie-off as per basket
procedure.
5. Attaching cart to 5.1 Falling material 8 High/Risk 5.1 Cart to remain secured 6 Mod/Risk
conductor to boom basket or
rigging lines till pulleys
and safety clips
attached.
5.2 Pinch points 5.2 Hands clear of pinch
point between basket
and cart Use Gloves.
5.3 Heavy loads 5.3 Two men used in
basket.
6. Workers transfer from 6.1 Fall 8 High/Risk 6.1 100% tie-off using SWP 26.028 6 Mod/Risk
boom-truck basket to double lanyard Fall Protection
cart system.
6.2 Distance beyond 6.2 Conductor tie off
working length of exceeds 5000lbs as
double lanyards. per procedures.
6.3 Hard hat blocking 6.3 Tie-off point is
view conductor only
6.4 Not following 6.4 Chin-strap for
procedure operators.
6.5 Basket and cart must
be less than 1’ apart
and rope used for
safety.
Page 3 of 7
7. Removal of basket 7.1 Miscommunication 7.1 Forman in attendance. SWP 26 027
from cart area 7.2 Basket strikes cart 7.2 Signal-man in basket Spotter and
7.3 Hand pinches to call direction to Signaller
swing or boom down.
7.3 Cart operator
establishes conductor
brake.
8. Loading spacers on 8.1 Overloading cart 6 Mod/Risk 8.1 Using hooks to hang 4 Mod/Risk
cart via boom-truck spacers.
basket or hand-line 8.2 Falling material 8.2 Unit to handle span
spacers (6) [approx
15 lbs each maximum
with hardware.
8.3 Hand pinch 8.3 Ground-man clears
area below.
8.4 Hand-line to ground to
hoist additional
spacers as required.
9. Installing spacers and 9.1 Pinch points at 6 Mod/Risk 9.1 Gloves and spare- Section 10 4 Mod/Risk
traveling on conductor pulleys gloves to be available. Personal
9.2 Friction on hands 9.2 Brake rope used in Protective
front of cart on Equipment
conductor attached to
insulators.
9.3 Uncontrolled cart 9.3 Rope available to
movement anchor cart.
10. Pulling carts via 10.1 Uncontrolled speed 6 Mod/Risk 10.1 Slow speed only. 4 Mod/Risk
vehicle (if required) 10.2 Miscommunication 10.2 Radio communication.
10.3 Lack of signal-man 10.3 Extra ground-man
assigned.
10.4 Rope attachment to 10.4 Rope connected to
basket unstable mid rail only, no
connection to pulley
Page 4 of 7
arms.
11. Installing spacers with 11.1 Falling material 4 Mod/Risk 11.1 Work area clear SWP 26.025 3 Low/Risk
hand tools or impact below. Use of Hand
tools 11.2 Falling tools 11.2 Impact gun on tether. Tools
11.3 Hand tools in cloth
bucket.
12. Operator leaving the 12.1 Fall potential 8 High/Risk 12.1 Boom truck basket 6 Mod/Risk
cart signals to cart location.
12.2 Pinch points 12.2 Cart secured for
transfer.
12.3 Collisions 12.3 Double lanyard system
12.4 Cart movement when leaving cart to
basket.
13. All steps rescue plan 13.1 Poor 8 High/Risk 13.1 Cart secured to Section 12 6 Mod/Risk
communication conductor or insulator Emergency
overweight. Preparedness
13.2 Time factor for man 13.2 EMT notified and Policy
in harness positioned near work
area.at morning
meeting
13.3 Availability of 13.3 Morning meeting will
medical services notify who is to
respond to a help call.
4 men (operator, 3
lineman/operator)
13.4 Retrieval of 13.4 Boom trucks
equipment positioned, complete
with outrigger portable
pads.
13.5 Muskeg area boom-
trucks have extra-large
outriggers (Nodwell
Page 5 of 7
boom can be
available).
13.6 Emergency rescue
rope hung on cart for
operator use.
13.7 Ground-man signals
via radio for
assistance and team
mobility.
13.8 Calls to 780-748-1911
and location relayed to
local EMT for
assistance anytime
rescue is called.
13.9 Supervisor to clear
ROW of obstructions
via radio for possible
transport off site.
Page 6 of 7
Page 7 of 7
Document Description: JSA for Conductor Removal
Date: May 1, 2011 Revision #: 2 Date Revised:
May 11, 2017 Revised by:
Mitch MacKenzie

1-3 8-10
Exposure


1. Travel to 1.1 Road cond./weather 3 Low/Risk 1.1 Preplan routes. Check SWP 26.013 1 Low/Risk
Jobsite weather. Drive according to Use of
road conditions. Company
1.2 Traffic 1.2 Obey traffic laws. Check
10 High/Risk weather reports. Preplan Vehicle 2 Low/Risk
routes. Drive to road
conditions. Drive defensively. SWP.26.001
1.3 Defective/Faulty Equip. 10 High/Risk 1.3 Do vehicle/equipment walk Defective Tools 2 Low/Risk
around and checklist prior to
use.
Page 1 of 4
May 11, 2017 Mitch MacKenzie
2. Inspect Tools and 2.1 Defective/damaged 3 Low/Risk 2.1 Inspect all tools and rigging SWP# 26.043 1 Low/Risk
Rigging tools or rigging. prior to use. Tag and Housekeeping
remove damaged item.
2.2 Keep area clear to reduce
2.2 Tripping Hazards 8 Mod/Risk hazard. 2 Low/Risk
3. Operating Equipment 3.1 Heavy equipment 4 Mod/Risk 3.1 Qualified competent operators SWP# 26.027 2 Low/Risk
and spotters to be used when Spotter and
operating equipment. Inspect Signaler
equipment daily before using.
3.2 Congestion 6 Mod/Risk 3.2 Use laydown area outside of 2 Low/Risk
immediate work area and
practice good housekeeping.
Use spotter. SWP# 25.036
3.3 Induction 12 High/Risk 3.3 Use proper bonding and Grounding & 2 Low/Risk
grounding techniques. Bonding
Maintain limits of approach.
3.4 Aerial Work 12 High/Risk 3.4 Identify drop zone. 100% tie- SWP# 26.077 2 Low/Risk
off of all workers, tools and Control Drop
material while aloft. Inspect all Zone
harness, tools and material
before leaving the ground. Safe Working
Always position the basket out Procedure for
of the bite. conductor
3.5 Crush Points 10 High/Risk 3.5 Stay clear of the bite, position removal on 2 Low/Risk
hands and body clear from 739L-1 138kv
the line of fire. Identify line of
fire hazard. Watch out for
eachother in man basket.
3.6 Inadequate 10 High/Risk 3.6 Maintain tension of the 2 Low/Risk
Tension conductor when gripping to
install or cut. Good
communication with everyone.
Page 2 of 4
4. De-Mobilize 4.1 Tripping hazards 3 Low/Risk 4.1 Clear area of debris SWP# 26.043 2 Low/Risk
and any unused Housekeeping
material when task is
complete. SWP# 26.027
4.2 Moving equipment 10 High/Risk 4.2 Use caution - have Spotter and 2 Low/Risk
spotters when moving Signaler
equipment.
4.3 Removing leftover 6 Mod/Risk 4.3 Use caution, plan SWP# 26.025
material route before moving. Use of Hand Tool 2 Low/Risk
Use correct tools for
the job. SWP#26.050
Manual Lifting
Page 3 of 4
Page 4 of 4
Date: Jan. 15, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: March 18, 2017 Revised by: Mitch MacKenzie

process or if 8-10
1 2 3 4 5 1-3 Low exposure in the process, and
circumstances change. No Moderate /
1 1 2 3 4 5 Risk agree on a timetable for
great effort required for High Risk
Exposure
2 2 4 6 8 10 completion of all agreed actions.

reducing risk.
1. Position
3 3 anchor
6 tester
9 12 1.115 Positioning
4-6 Low on/ side 3 Low/Risk
Investigate engineering1.1 Use extra 12-25
caution when Cease SWP 26.027
work 1 Low/Risk
until interim controls
over top
4 of4 anchor
8 12 to be16 hill.
20 Moderate controls to minimize placing equipment on side Spotter and
Unaccept are implemented, and an action
tested. hill. Place stops on lower
5 5 10 15 20 25 Risk reliance on PPE & able Risk plan Signaler
to permanently reduce the
side of equipment to control
procedures. movement if required. Use
risk to an acceptable level.
Potential (source of) Hazard truckRecommended
boom to lift into Loss
place. Standard Post Mitigation
1.2 Crane, digger set up. 3 Low/Risk 1.2 Ensure level set up, 1 Low/Risk
outrigger pads, crane radius
and boom angle. Use
proper rigging. Competent
operator required.
1.3 Stay clear of suspended 2 Low/Risk

1.3 Suspended loads. 6 Mod/Risk loads, use tag line if
required to position over
anchor.
1.4 Use a spotter when 2 Low/Risk

1.4 Moving Equipment 4 Mod/Risk moving equipment to testing
position. Clear area of
obstructions and identify all
anchors.
Page 1 of 4
Date: Jan. 15, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: May 18, 2017 Revised by: Mitch MacKenzie
* Significant Concerns
Be aware of Tower
Foundation Location.
2. Lower anchor tester to 2.1 Pinch points 4 Mod/Risk 2.1 Use caution Lowering to 2 Low/Risk
ground on top of anchor to ground. Keep fingers, toes
be tested. out of pinch points, ensure
proper body positioning.
2.2 uneven ground 3 Low/Risk 2.2 Ensure proper footing 1 Low/Risk

on uneven ground.
2.3 Suspended loads 8 Mod/Risk 2.3 Stay clear of suspended 2 Low/Risk

loads.
3. Attach anchor tester to 3.1 Slips, trips and falls 3 Low/Risk 3.1 Watch footing and SWP 26.050 1 Low/Risk
the anchor. Mark anchor ground conditions. Manual Lifting
rod at ground level with and Handling
felt pen. 3.2 Use proper lifting
3.2 Heavy lifting 4 Mod/Risk techniques and adequate 1 Low/Risk
manpower.
3.3 Wear Gloves, keep

3.3 Pinch points 4 Mod/Risk fingers, toes out of pinch 1 Low/Risk
points.
Page 2 of 4
4. Tension Anchor 4.1 Pinch points 5 Mod/Risk 4.1 Ensure proper body SWP 26.006 3 Low/Risk
positioning. Crane and
*Slowly increase pressure Rigging
to the required pull test 4.2 Rigging Failure 5 Mod/Risk 4.2 Inspect rigging prior to 3 Low/Risk
tension using the anchor each use.
tester pressure gauge and
anchor tester chart. 4.3 Anchor Failure 5 Mod/Risk 4.3 Stand behind the anchor 3 Low/Risk
while tension is being
applied.
5. Once tension is 5.1 Rigging/Anchor 5 Mod/Risk 5.1 Continue to remain at a 3 Low/Risk
reached hold for 2 – 3 Failure safe distance from anchor
minutes. Release tension tester. Stay out of bite.
when pull test is
completed.
6. Remove rigging from 6.1 Slips, trips and falls 3 Low/Risk 6.1 Watch footing and 1 Low/Risk
anchor. Attach lifting sling ground conditions.
and remove tester from
anchor. Clean up area. 6.2 Heavy lifting (pulls, 3 Low/Risk 6.2 Use adequate 1 Low/Risk
strains, sprains) manpower.
Page 3 of 4
NAME (print) INITIAL DATE (dd/mm/yy) COMPANY
Page 4 of 4
Date: July 15, 2010 Revision #: 2 Date Revised: May 11, 2017 Revised by: Mitch MacKenzie
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
front end loader. 5 Mod/Risk soft ground. 3 Low/Risk
1.3 Other 1.3 If needed barrier area or

vehicular/personnel 5 Mod/Risk have extra workers to 3 Low/Risk
traffic – striking keep others away.
vehicles/personnel
tipping to ensure not over the lift Crane and
Page 1 of 7
Post
Rating
capacity of front end Rigging
loader.
4 Mod/Risk 2 Low/Risk
not come apart.
2.3 Striking vehicles or 4 Mod/Risk 2.3 Workers clear of load, 2 Low/Risk
personnel not under; use taglines if
flag.
2.4 Improper secured 4 Mod/Risk 2.4 Position steel bundles on DOT Regs 2 Low/Risk
Ensure hold downs are of
2.5 Slipping, tripping, 4 Mod/Risk 2.5 Trailer deck to be clear of 2 Low/Risk
Check load chart
bundle weight to be
Page 2 of 7
Post
Rating
lifted. Do not over load
trailer. Check capacity of
trailer.
site. traffic Traffic control may be Use of
location. Vehicles
3.2 Taking poor route 3 Low/Risk 3.2 Know route beforehand 1 Low/Risk
3.3 Right of way 3 Low/Risk 3.3 Check for any road 1 Low/Risk
restrictions restrictions or if special
permits required.
there are any restriction
which may impede
travel.
4.2 Other vehicular / 3 Low/Risk 4.2 If needed barrier area or 1 Low/Risk

personnel
Page 3 of 7
Post
Rating
steel bundles to
Ideally steel was
away from overhead
lines and on good
ground.
5. Clean up area 5.1 Overhead hazards - 5 Mod/Risk 5.1 Designated Signaler if 3 Low/Risk
5.2 Front end loader 5 Mod/Risk 5.2 Check weight of bundle 3 Low/Risk
loader.
5.3 Steel bundle falling 5 Mod/Risk 5.3 Check banding on 3 Low/Risk

not come apart.

necessary.
5.5 Improper secured 5 Mod/Risk 5.5 Position steel bundles 3 Low/Risk
ground and ensure
Page 4 of 7
Post
Rating
over.
Know capacity of front
Page 5 of 7
Page 6 of 7
Page 7 of 7
Document Description: JSA for Receiving Tower Steel
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
front end loader 5 Mod/Risk soft ground. 3 Low/Risk
1.3 Other vehicular /
personnel traffic – 5 Mod/Risk 1.3 If needed barrier area or 3 Low/Risk
striking vehicles / have extra workers to
keep others away.
personnel
close as possible to lay
down area to minimize
travel distance of front
Page 1 of 6
Post
Rating
end loader. Ideally steel
was positioned in an
area away from
overhead lines and on
good ground.
2. Releasing steel 2.1 Falling off trailer 3 Low/Risk 2.1 Use ladder to climb onto 1 Low/Risk
bundles trailer and if needed to
climb onto load. Watch
for footing. Maintain 3
point contact.
2.2 Sudden tensioned 4 Low/Risk 2.2 Avoid bite when
release of tie-down releasing loads. If bear 1 Low/Risk
equipment trap used, use a
controlled release. If
steel banded, may have
to use heavy gloves and
face shield as banding
may explode out .
Be aware that the load
will be under tension
and will have shifted
while being transported
3. Unload trailer 3.1 Front end loader 4 Mod/Risk 3.1 Check weight of bundle SWP 26.027 3 Low/Risk
tipping to ensure not over the lift Spotter and
capacity of front end Signaller
loader.
3.2 Steel bundle falling 4 Mod/Risk 3.2 Check banding on 3 Low/Risk

not come apart.
Page 2 of 6
Post
Rating
flag.
3.4 Improper secured 4 Mod/Risk 3.4 Position steel bundles on 3 Low/Risk

3.5 Slipping, tripping, 4 Mod/Risk 3.5 Trailer deck to be clear of 3 Low/Risk

3.6 Ensure blocking is of

quantity to keep steel off
of ground and to ease
future loading.
Check load chart
bundle weight to be
lifted.
Page 3 of 6
Page 4 of 6
Page 5 of 6
Page 6 of 6
Document Description: JSA for Tower Erection
Date: Jan. 4, 2010 Revision #: 2 Date Revised April 30, 2017 Revised by: M. MacKenzie

1-3 8-10
Exposure

1. Mobilize
3 3 6 to site 9 12 1.1
15 Traffic 4 Mod/Risk 1.1
Low / controls to minimize reliancePull equipment into SWP 26.013 and2an
Unaccept are implemented, Low/Risk
action
4 4 8 12 16 20 Modera on PPE & procedures. able Risk
possible. Four way plan to permanently reduce the
Company
flashers and pull to the
side if needed while Vehicles
opening barriers. Flag
Potential (source of) Hazard Rating Recommended
persons and Losstraffic Standard Post Mitigation
Task / Activity Loss/Hazard Prevention Barriers
control as required. Reference Rating
Secure loads.
of day, weather, check
2. Access site 2.1 Congested and 5 Mod/Risk 2.1 Park clear of work 4 Mod/Risk
right-away limits. area. Only needed
equipment placed in
work area.
2.2 Existing line
structures 2.2 Ensure Operators and
crew are aware of
of approach); use
Designated Signaler
Page 1 of 9
Date: B. Szumik Revision #: 2 Date Revised: April 30, 2017 Revised by: M. MacKenzie
roads and accesses.
Communication
between vehicles if
necessary. Wait at
wide spots to meet
other vehicles.
Equipment contact;
Adhering to ROW
boundaries.
3. Set up equipment 3.1 Equipment failure 8 Mod/High 3.1 Qualified operators; Section 9 6 Mod/Risk
Operated within the
operating manual of
the unit;
ground using
outrigger pads;
Crane pad sufficient
6 Mod/Risk to support unit; SWP 26.050 3 Low/Risk
3.2 Strains / sprains 3.2 Be aware of site
conditions; Manual Lifting
Pads for man lift level; and Handling
Radius of lift known;
Climb all the way to
the ground;
Look at ground
dismount.
4. Rig Lift 4.1 Rigging Failure 8 Mod/High 4.1 Rated and inspected SWP 26.006 6 Mod/Risk
Softeners used if Rigging
needed.
Steel slings choked
Page 2 of 9
around members.
Weight of the loads
calculated.
Weights
predetermined.
5. Attach cranes to load 5.1 Communication 6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Designated signal SWP 26.027 4 Mod/Risk
person. Spotter and
Line of site between Signaler
person. Practice
Communication with
5.2 Energized circuits 7 Mod/Risk 5.2 No person is touching 3 Low/Risk
the crane or
outriggers.
Ground probe and
chain.
Limits of approach
close proximity to
utilities.
Lift loads away from
the existing ROW.
Weather conditions
monitored.
Page 3 of 9
6. Hoist load with two 6.1 Two machine pick 8 Mod/Risk 6.1 Operators only take SWP 26.027 6 Mod/Risk
cranes signals from Spotter and
designated signal Signaler
person.
Qualified operators. Practice
Extra spotter in place
if needed.
LMI monitored in
crane as load transfer
takes place.
Line of site with
signal person is
maintained.
Maintain clearances
(limits of approach)
Tag lines to control
loads.
Operator is watching
signal person.
Anyone can stop a lift
in an emergency.
Picks and crane
capacities are
predetermined.
6.2 All lift exciding 75% of
8 Mod/High cranes capacity will 6 Mod/Risk
6.2 Equipment failure require a lift study.
Operator is
monitoring outrigger
pads(compression)
Large enough pads
for ground conditions
6.3 No one is in the fall

6.3 Falling materials 8 Mod/High zone of panel being hoisted. SWP 26.077 4 Mod/Risk
Load will be Controlling &
inspected prior to lift Maintaining
Page 4 of 9
Hardware will be tied Drop Zones
to the structure.
Crew will not be
under the load.
7. Disconnect tailing 7.1 Working under 8 Mod/High 7.1 Only crew needed to SWP 26.027 6 Mod/Risk
crane load perform the task go Spotter and
into the zone. Signaler
7.2 Equipment moving 7.2 Operators are aware
8 Mod/High of crews work Practice 6 Mod/Risk
Operator only takes
direction from the
signal person SWP 26.077
Signal person is the Controlling &
only one who directs Maintaining
the operator. Drop Zones
Tailing crane is
unhooked and
swung clear of the lift
Unneeded equipment
is parked clear of the
site.
8. Crew accepting tower 8.1. Electrical 8 Mod/High 8.1. Ground chain will be SWP 26.036 6 Mod/Risk
used to bleed off Grounding and
induction from the lift Bonding
prior to touching by
hand.
Page 5 of 9
Rated and inspected
tools (hotstick,
gloves, ground
chain).
8.2. 100% fall arrest. SWP 26.028
8.2. Falling from aloft 6 Mod/Risk Qualified people for Fall Protection 3 Low/Risk
the task.
Lanyards and
harnesses inspected.
One person in the air
is directing the crane.
Crew is aware of
signal person’s
intensions.
8.3. Proper tools for the
8.3. Pinch points 6 Mod/Risk job (drifts, spuds, 3 Low/Risk
hammers).
8.4. No one is below the
8.4. Falling tools tower. SWP 26.077
8 Mod/High Nose bags in the 4 Mod/Risk
Controlling &
tower for holding Maintaining
extra tools. Drop Zones
8.5. Proper positioning
8.5. Strains 6 Mod/Risk while working. SWP 26.050 3 Low/Risk
Use correct tools for Manual Lifting
the task at hand.
Keep hydrated. and Handling
Use electric tools to
help on task.
9. Tighten bolts 9.1. Tool failure 6 Mod/Risk 9.1. Inspection of tool. SWP 26.001 4 Mod/Risk
Safety glasses worn. Defective Tools
Tag out and give to
Proper tool for the
job. Inspection of
Page 6 of 9
tools and electrical
equipment.
9.2. Electrical 5 Mod/Risk 9.2. GFCI breakers on the 2 Low/Risk
power source. Tag
defective or worn
equipment. Be aware
9.3. Noise 4 Mod/Risk 9.3. Hearing protection 2 Low/Risk
worn.
Make the crew aware
of task
10. Disconnect Rigging 10.1. Communication 6 Mod/Risk 10.1. Clear hand signals to 4 Mod/Risk
operators. Ensure
crew below is aware
of your actions. SWP 26.028
10.2. Falling from aloft 6 Mod/Risk 10.2. 100% fall arrest; 3 Low/Risk
Fall Protection
Softeners tied up if
they are being used;
Unhooked rigging
sent down with the
hook.
11. Crew Descends Tower 11.1. Falling from aloft 8 High/Risk 11.1. Experienced persons. SWP 26.077 6 Mod/Risk
Three point contact. Controlling &
11.2. Falling tools 11.2. Fall zone below is Maintaining
clear. Extra tools sent Drop Zones
down in nose bags.
12. Clean up and 12.1. Equipment 4 Mod/Risk 12.1. Qualified operators SWP 26.027 3 Low/Risk
demobilize from site Collision and drivers; Back up Spotter and
beepers; Have signal Signaler
person directing
equipment. Practice
12.2. Site conditions 4 Mod/Risk 12.2. Pile left over 2 Low/Risk
materials in one SWP 26.043
location; Mark
Page 7 of 9
materials if Housekeeping
necessary. Trucks
and light duty
equipment is moved
from site prior to
demobilizing the
crane.
Page 8 of 9
Page 9 of 9
Date: July 27, 2010 Revision #: 2 Date Revised: April 30, 2017 Revised by: M. MacKenzie
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
accesses where possible Use of
pull to the side if needed
control as required
Secure loads
day, weather, check
Page 1 of 9
Post
Rating
structures (240 kV) 8 High/Risk crew are aware of SWP 26.027 6 Mod/Risk
overhead lines (limits of Use of Spotter
approach. Equipment
accesses. Use Spotters
as needed.
Equipment contact.
Adhering to ROW
boundaries.
Set up equipment 3.1 Equipment failure 8 Mod/High 3.1 Qualified operators; Section 9 6 Mod/Risk
Operated within the
unit;
ground using outrigger
pads;
Crane pad sufficient to
Page 2 of 9
Post
Rating
support unit;
6 Mod/Risk 3.2 Be aware of site SWP 26.050
3.2 Strains / sprains conditions; Manual Lifting 3 Low/Risk
Pads for man lift level;
Radius of lift known; and Handling
Climb all the way to the
ground;
Look at ground
dismount.
4. Rig Panels 4.1 Rigging failure 6 Mod/Risk 4.1 Rated and inspected SWP 26.006 4 Mod/Risk
Steel slings choked Rigging
around members.
Weight of the loads
calculated.
Hold back rope
inspection prior to
attachment.
Shackles between rope
and choked slings.
Panel weights
predetermined.
5. Attach crane to load 5.1 Communication 6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Designated signal SWP 26.027 4 Mod/Risk
person; Line of site Spotter and
signal person;
Communication with
5.2 No person is touching
Page 3 of 9
Post
Rating
5.2 Energized circuits 8 Mod/Risk the crane or outriggers. 6 Mod/Risk
Ground probe and chain;
Limits of approach;
close proximity to
utilities; Lift loads away
from the existing ROW.
6. Hoist load 6.1 Energized circuit 8 High/Risk 6.1 Maintain clearances. SWP 26.002 6 Mod/Risk
Electrical Work
6.2 Equipment failure 5 Mod/Risk 6.2 Tag lines to control 3 Low/Risk
loads.
Operator is watching SWP 26.077
signal person. Controlling &
Anyone can stop a lift in Maintaining
an emergency. Drop Zones
Operator is monitoring
outrigger pads. SWP 26.027
Large enough pads for Use of Spotter
ground conditions.
No one is in the fall zone
Crew only moves in to
bolt once the panel is
close to the legs
location.
7. Hold back panels 7.1 Equipment failure 5 Mod/Risk 7.1 Equipment is on stable 3 Low/Risk
ground.
7.2 Equipment being 5 Mod/Risk 7.2 Safety equipment on 3 Low/Risk

moved equipment that is
working.
Qualified operator.
Page 4 of 9
Post
Rating
Operator stays in seat
unit final hold back
position is achieved.
Lock out procedure in
place for equipment
being left attached to
hold back ropes.
Only designated and
qualified operators will
be move the equipment.
Designated signal
person will give signals
to the hold back units if
adjustment is needed.
8. Install spiders 8.1. Rigging 7 Mod/High 8.1 Rated and inspected 5 Mod/Risk
slings.
8.2 Proper use of rigging.
8.2. Working aloft 6 Mod/Risk 3 Low/Risk
8.3 Stay clear from the base
8.3. Pinch points 6 Mod/Risk of the panel section 3 Low/Risk
being erected.
Man lift training complete
(qualified persons).
Decent rope in unit. SWP 26.028
Unit is on level ground
prior to aerial work. Fall Protection
Fall arrest 100%.
Others are aware of your
actions.
Gloves on at all times.
Spuds and drifts used for
lining holes.
Page 5 of 9
Post
Rating
Full nut on loose pieces.
9. Tighten bolts 9.1 Tool failure, 4 Mod/Risk 9.1 Inspection of tool. Tag Section 10 3 Low/Risk
equipment. Tag SWP 26.001
defective or worn Defective
equipment. Inspection of Tools
socket and driver.
5 Mod/Risk SWP 26.002 2 Low/Risk
9.2 Electrical 9.2 GFCI breakers on the Electrical Work
task.
4 Mod/Risk 9.3 Hearing protection worn. 2 Low/Risk

9.3 Noise
9.4 Wear proper PPE.
9.4 Contact with eyes 4 Mod/Risk 2 Low/Risk
9.5 Be sure of footing. Clean
9.5 Slips and trips 4 Mod/Risk up unnecessary tools 2 Low/Risk
Proper footwear for
terrain or weather
conditions.
10. Disconnect Rigging 10.1 Communication 8 High/Risk 10.1 Clear hand signals to SWP 26.027 6 Mod/Risk
operators. Spotter and
Signaler
10.2 Second signal person on
the ground to relay if
10.2 Falling from aloft 8 High/Risk needed. SWP 26.028 6 Mod/Risk
Page 6 of 9
Post
Rating
Ensure rope fall zone is Fall Protection
clear.
Crew is aware of tasks.
Check that no one is
below operation.
Put shackles and steel
slings in man lift.
demobilize from site Site conditions drivers. Housekeeping
Back up beepers.
Have signal person
at tower locations.
roadways.
the arms.
Leave body as low to the
ground as possible.
Leave access roads
open.
Page 7 of 9
Page 8 of 9
Page 9 of 9
Document Description: JSA for Tower Assembly of Panels
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
possible. Company
Secure loads.
day, weather, check
Page 1 of 12
Post
Rating
approach. Equipment
as needed.
Equipment contact.
Adhering to ROW
boundaries.
hazards.
3.2 Moving Equipment 5 Mod/Risk 3.2 Qualified operator, 3 Low/Risk

equipment checks have
been completed. Backup
beepers on equipment.
Page 2 of 12
Post
Rating
Signal person in SWP 26.027
congested areas or Use of Spotter
where workers are
present.
3.3 Load shifting 6 Mod/Risk 3.3 Make sure forks are 3 Low/Risk
centered on the load. SWP 26.077
Long pieces moved Controlling &
slowly. Banding in place Maintaining
on the bundles. Plan Drop Zones
your drops to avoid
unnecessary moving.
fall zone
when necessary.
to moving pieces.
4.2 Pinch points (hands 6 Mod/Risk 4.2 Wear proper PPE. Be SWP 26.050 3 Low/Risk
& body) aware of pinch points if Manual Lifting
pieces shift. Do not and Handling
Page 3 of 12
Post
Rating
position yourself SWP 26.001
between bundles when Defective
banding is being cut. Tools
4.3 Improper use of tools 6 Mod/Risk 4.3 Check your tools before SWP 26.025 2 Low/Risk
or tools not working use. Use of Hand
Tools
4.4 Strains and repetitive 5 Mod/Risk 4.4 Use proper lifting and 3 Low/Risk
task bending techniques. Get SWP 26.050
help as required for Manual Lifting
heavier pieces. and Handling
Use equipment as
needed.
5. Set up & Operate 5.1 Equipment set up 6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Qualified/competent SWP 26.036 4 Mod/Risk
boom truck/Crane operators. Grounding and
Daily inspection of Bonding
truck and crane.
Spotter when putting SWP 26.027
out riggers. Use of Spotter
all times.
Equipment set up
lines.
ground chain.
Page 4 of 12
Post
Rating
5.2 Rigging Failure 8 High/Risk 5.2 Rated and inspected SWP 26.006 5 Mod/Risk
rigging for the lift. Softeners Crane and
used if needed. Steel slings Rigging
choked around members.
Weight of the loads calculated.
5.3 Communication 6 Mod/Risk 5.3 Designated signal person. 3 Low//Risk

Line of site between SWP 26.027
operators and signal Use of Spotter
person.
Communication with
5.4 Energized Circuits 12 High/Risk 5.4 No person is touching the 3 Low/Risk

crane or outriggers.
Limits of approach
Safety watch when in close
proximity to utilities.
Lift loads away from the
existing ROW.
Weather conditions
monitored.
Page 5 of 12
Post
Rating
5.5 Falling Material/Load 8 Mod/Risk 5.5 No one is in the fall zone SWP 26.077 3 Low/Risk
of panel being hoisted. Controlling &
Load will be inspected prior to Maintaining
lift.
Hardware will be tied to the Drop Zones
structure.
Crew will not be under the
load.
being moved
zone.
Designated signal person SWP 26.027
Operator does not leave Use of Spotter
attached to crane.
Use nylon slings
load.
7. Layout of small pieces 7.1 Strains 4 Mod/Risk 7.1 Use proper bending and SWP 26.050 3 Low/Risk
lifting techniques when Manual Lifting
carrying and placing and Handling
pieces.
Page 6 of 12
Post
Rating
7.2 Dehydration / 3 Low/Risk 7.2 Drink plenty of liquids. 2 Low/Risk

aware of weather
weather. Pieces are
blocked properly.
7.3 Pinch Points 6 Mod/Risk 7.3 Be aware of your 3 Low/Risk

before you leave it
eliminating pieces
coming apart.
8. Assembly of pieces 8.1 Pinch points 6 Mod/Risk 8.1 Use blocking to support SWP 26.050 3 Low/Risk
pieces. Be aware of your Manual Lifting
co-workers position. and Handling
Clear communication
lining.
8.2 Strains / repetitive 4 Mod/Risk 8.2 Proper lifting techniques. 3 Low/Risk

necessary.
Page 7 of 12
Post
Rating
8.3 Dehydration / Fatigue 3 Low/Risk 8.3 Keep hydrated. Buddy 2 Low/Risk
system, be aware of weather
weather.
9. Tighten panels 9.1 Tool failure, 4 Mod/Risk 9.1 Inspection of tool. Tag Section 10 3 Low/Risk
socket and driver.
task.

9.3 Noise
Proper footwear for
terrain or weather
conditions.
10. Build spiders 10.1 Strains 4 Mod/Risk 10.1 Use proper bending and SWP 26.050 3 Low/Risk
lifting techniques. Use Manual Lifting
equipment when needed. and Handling
Page 8 of 12
Post
Rating
pieces.
10.2 Pinch points 6 Mod/Risk 10.2 Use tools to line holes 3 Low/Risk
all times.
demobilization from drivers. Spotter and
site Back up beepers Signaler
Have signal person Practice
at tower locations.
roadways.
11.1 Site conditions 4 Mod/Risk 11.1 Leave panels as low to 2 Low/Risk

the ground as possible.
Leave access roads
open.
Page 9 of 12
Post
Rating
be marked.
Page 10 of 12
Page 11 of 12
Page 12 of 12
Document Description: JSA for Tower Assembly Boxing In
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
possible. Company
Secure loads.
day, weather, check
Page 1 of 12
Post
Rating
approach. Equipment
as needed.
Equipment contact.
Adhering to ROW
boundaries.
hazards.
3.2 Moving Equipment 5 Mod/Risk 3.2 Qualified/Competent 3 Low/Risk

operator, equipment
checks have been
completed. Backup
Page 2 of 12
Post
Rating
beepers on equipment. SWP 26.027
Signal person in Use of Spotter
congested areas or
where workers are
present.
3.3 Load shifting 6 Mod/Risk 3 Low/Risk
3.3 Make sure forks are SWP 26.077
centered on the load. Controlling &
Long pieces moved Maintaining
slowly. Banding in place Drop Zones
on the bundles. Plan
your drops to avoid
unnecessary moving.
fall zone
when necessary.
to moving pieces.
4.2 Pinch points (hands 6 Mod/Risk 4.2 Wear proper PPE. Be SWP 26.050 3 Low/Risk
& body) aware of pinch points if Manual Lifting
Page 3 of 12
Post
Rating
pieces shift. Do not and Handling
position yourself SWP 26.001
between bundles when Defective
banding is being cut. Tools
4.3 Improper use of tools 6 Mod/Risk 4.3 Check your tools before SWP 26.025 2 Low/Risk
or tools not working use. Use of Hand
Tools
4.4 Strains and repetitive 5 Mod/Risk 4.4 Use proper lifting and 3 Low/Risk
task bending techniques. Get SWP 26.050
help as required for Manual Lifting
heavier pieces. and Handling
Use equipment as
needed.
5. Set up & Operate 5.1 Equipment set up 6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Qualified/competent SWP 26.036 4 Mod/Risk
boom truck/Crane operators. Grounding and
Daily inspection of Bonding
truck and crane.
Spotter when putting SWP 26.027
out riggers. Use of Spotter
all times.
Equipment set up
lines.
ground chain.
Page 4 of 12
Post
Rating
5.2 Rated and inspected
rigging for the lift. Softeners
5.2 Rigging Failure 8 High/Risk used if needed. Steel slings SWP 26.006 5 Mod/Risk
choked around members. Crane and
Weight of the loads calculated. Rigging
5.3 Designated signal person.

Line of site between
5.3 Communication 6 Mod/Risk operators and signal 3 Low//Risk
person.
Communication with SWP 26.027
crew prior to starting. Use of Spotter
5.4 No person is touching the

crane or outriggers.
5.4 Energized Circuits 12 High/Risk Limits of approach 3 Low/Risk
Safety watch when in close
proximity to utilities.
Lift loads away from the
existing ROW.
Weather conditions
monitored.
5.5 No one is in the fall zone

Load will be inspected prior to
5.5 Falling Material/Load 8 Mod/Risk lift. SWP 26.077 3 Low/Risk
Page 5 of 12
Post
Rating
Hardware will be tied to the Controlling &
structure. Maintaining
Crew will not be under the Drop Zones
load.
being moved
zone.
Designated signal person SWP 26.027
Operator does not leave Use of Spotter
attached to crane.
Use nylon slings
load.
7. Layout of small pieces 7.1 Strains 4 Mod/Risk 7.1 Use proper bending and SWP 26.050 3 Low/Risk
lifting techniques when Manual Lifting
carrying and placing and Handling
pieces.
7.2 Dehydration / 3 Low/Risk 7.2 Drink plenty of liquids. 2 Low/Risk

Page 6 of 12
Post
Rating
aware of weather
weather. Pieces are
blocked properly.
7.3 Pinch Points 6 Mod/Risk 7.3 Be aware of your 3 Low/Risk

before you leave it
eliminating pieces
coming apart.
8. Assembly of pieces 8.1 Pinch points 6 Mod/Risk 8.1 Use blocking to support SWP 26.050 3 Low/Risk
pieces. Be aware of your Manual Lifting
co-workers position. and Handling
Clear communication
lining.
8.2 Strains / repetitive 4 Mod/Risk 8.2 Proper lifting techniques. 3 Low/Risk

necessary.
8.3 Dehydration / Fatigue 3 Low/Risk 8.3 Keep hydrated. Buddy 2 Low/Risk

system, be aware of weather
Page 7 of 12
Post
Rating
weather.
9. Tighten body 9.1 Tool failure, 4 Mod/Risk 9.1 Inspection of tool. Tag Section 10 3 Low/Risk
socket and driver.
task.

9.3 Noise
Proper footwear for
terrain or weather
conditions.
10. Assemble Arms 10.1 Strains 4 Mod/Risk 10.1 Use proper bending and SWP 26.050 3 Low/Risk
lifting techniques. Use Manual Lifting
equipment when needed. and Handling
pieces.
10.2 Pinch points 6 Mod/Risk 10.2 Use tools to line holes 3 Low/Risk
Page 8 of 12
Post
Rating
all times.
11. Tighten Arms 11.1 Tool failure, 4 Mod/Risk 11.1 Inspection of tool; Tag Section 10 2 Low/Risk
wrenches, impacts if defective; Proper tool Protective
tools and electrical Equipment 2 Low/Risk
equipment. Tag defective
or worn equipment. SWP 26.001
Make the crew aware of Defective
task. Inspection of socket Tools
and driver.
11.2 Electrical 11.2 GFCI breakers on the
power source. Be aware Electrical Work
11.3 Noise / Contact with 4 Mod/Risk 11.3 Hearing protection worn. 2 Low/Risk
eyes Wear proper PPE
(gloves, safety glasses
and hearing protection)
11.4 Slips, trips and fall 4 Mod/Risk 11.4 Be sure of footing 2 Low/Risk
Clean up unnecessary
tools and blocking at
site. Proper footwear for
terrain or weather
conditions
Page 9 of 12
Post
Rating
12. Clean up and 12.1 Equipment Collision 5 Mod/Risk 12.1 Qualified/competent SWP 26.027 3 Low/Risk
demobilization from operators Use of Spotter
site and drivers.
Back up beepers
Have signal person
at tower locations.
roadways.
the wings.
12.2 Site conditions 12.2 Leave panels as low to SWP 26.043
the ground as possible. Housekeeping
Leave access roads
open.
be marked.
Page 10 of 12
Page 11 of 12
Page 12 of 12
Document Description: JSA for Installation of Dead Ends
Mitch
Created by: Doc. Number: JSA 01.067
MacKenzie
Date: May 14, 2017 Revision #: 0 Date Revised Revised by:

1-3 8-10
Exposure

1. Mobilize
3 3 to 6 site9 121.115Traffic Low / controls 4 Mod/Risk 1.1
to minimize reliance -Obey speed limits
Unaccept are of implemented,
SWP 26.013 2 Low/Risk
and an action
the roads used. Use of
4 4 8 12 16 20 Modera on PPE & procedures. -Four way flashers
able Risk plan to permanently reduce the
5 5 10 15 20 25 te Risk and pull to the siderisk Company
if to an acceptable level.
needed while opening Vehicles
barriers.
Potential (source of) Hazard Rating Recommended
-Flag persons Lossand Standard Post Mitigation
Task / Activity Loss/Hazard traffic control
Prevention as
Barriers Reference Rating
required.
-Secure loads.
of day, weather,
check height of
utilities, ROW
Boundaries
2. Access to site 2.1 Congested and right- 8 High/Risk 2.1 -Park clear of work 6 Mod/Risk
away limits area. -Only needed
equipment placed in
work area.
-Use Designated
Signaler (spotter) if
unsure of equipment
proximity.
Communication
between vehicles if
necessary. Wait at
Page 1 of 7
Document Description: JSA for Installation of Dead End
Mitch
MacKenzie
wide spots to meet
other vehicles.
2.2 Existing line structures 8 High/Risk 2.2 -Ensure operators and SWP 26.027 6 Mod/Risk
(240 kV) crew are aware of Use of Spotter
of approach.
-Equipment and trucks
roads and accesses.
Use Spotters as
needed.
Equipment contact.
Adhering to ROW
boundaries.
3. Set up Equipment 3.1 Equipment set up 6 Mod/Risk 3.1 -Qualified/competent SWP 26.036 4 Mod/Risk
operators. Grounding
-Daily inspection of truck and Bonding
and crane.
-Spotter when putting out SWP 26.027
riggers. Spotter &
-Outrigger pads used at all Signaler
times.
-Set up on level ground.
-Equipment set up
approach to existing lines.
-Truck is grounded using
ground chain.
Page 2 of 7
Mitch
MacKenzie
3.2 Equipment Failure 8 High/Risk 3.2 -Qualified/Competent SWP 26.006 5 Mod/Risk

operators. Crane and
-Daily Inspections Rigging
completed.
-Operated within the
operating instructions of the
unit.
-Be aware of site
conditions. Crane set on
level ground and pads
secured.
3.3 Communication 6 Mod/Risk SWP 26.027 3 Low//Risk

3.3 -Designated signal Spotter &
person. Signaler
-Line of site between
person.
-Communication with crew
prior to starting.
3.4 Energized Circuits 12 High/Risk 3 Low/Risk
3.4 -No person is touching
the crane or outriggers.
-Ground probe and chain.
-Limits of approach
-Safety watch when in
close proximity to utilities.
-Lift loads away from the
Page 3 of 7
Mitch
MacKenzie
existing ROW.
-Weather conditions
monitored.
-Crane movement radius
known.
3.5 Falling Material/Load 8 Mod/Risk SWP 26.077 3 Low/Risk
3.5 -No one is in the fall Controlling &
zone of panel being Maintaining
hoisted.
-Load will be inspected Drop Zones
prior to lift.
-Hardware will be tied to
the structure.
-Crew will not be under the
load.
4. Dead/Ending Aloft 4.1 Communication 6 Mod/Risk 4.1 Continuous hand signal Procedure for 2 Low/Risk
ground-lineman at or radio communication at Installation of
the top of tower
all times during operation. Dead Ends
4.2 Rigging Failure 10 High/Risk 4.2 Rated and inspected 3 Low/Risk

rigging for the lifting
(Slings/Chain Hoists)
-Hand line rope inspection
prior to use
-No One is standing below
the load being lifted.
4.3 Equipment Failure 10 High/Risk 4.3 Pads of Crane SWP 26.077 2 Low/Risk
monitored during lifting of Controlling &
insulators. Maintaining
-No one standing below the Drop Zones
Page 4 of 7
Mitch
MacKenzie
load.
4.4 Induction 12 High/Risk 4.4 Equipment properly AltaLink EQ 3 Low/Risk

grounded Bonding &
-Temporary grounds Grounding
installed between
conductors and tower prior
to starting operation.
-Follow bonding and
grounding plan in place.
Page 5 of 7
Mitch
MacKenzie
5. Climbing onto 5.1 Fall from Height 12 High/Risk 5.1 Use double hook SWP 26.028 2 Low/Risk
Tower/Moving within lanyard or other approved Fall Protection
Tower
means of attachment, at all
times once above 6 feet
from ground level
- Proper PPE to be used at
all times (Safety Footwear
to be in good condition,
hard hat, gloves)
- Inspect safety harness
every time prior to climbing
onto tower.
- In wet weather conditions
and if tower is slippery, use
man lift for climbing onto
the tower.
- Stop work if wind speed is
over 36Km/hr
6. Clean up and 6.1 Equipment collision/ 8 Mod/Risk 6.1 Qualified/Competent 2 Low/Risk
Demobilize off the Site Conditions drivers.
site
- Have signal person
trucks when backing up at
tower locations.
Page 6 of 7
Mitch
Created by: Doc. Number: JSA
MacKenzie
Page 7 of 7
Document Description: Setting up Material Lay Down
Date: June 15, 2014 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: May 12, 2017 Revised by: Mitch MacKenzie
1-3 Low process or if circumstances 8-10 Moderate exposure in the process, and
1 2 3 4 5 Risk change. No great effort / High Risk agree on a timetable for
Exposure
3 3 6 9 12 15 Moderate controls to minimize Unacceptable are implemented, and an action
4 4 8 12 16 20 Risk reliance on PPE & Risk plan to permanently reduce the
5 5 10 15 20 25 procedures. risk to an acceptable level.
Post
Rating
1. Discuss with client 1.1 Placed in wrong 4-Low/Mod 1.1. Communicate with client 1- Low
area best used for area. and locate a convenient
material lay down. area close to work site for
use.
2. Level area using skid 2.1. Congestion/site 5- Low/Mod 2.1. Use spotter SWP 26.027 2- Low
steer or loader traffic 2.2. Qualified operator to run
2.2. Heavy equipment equipment.
3. Organize material into 3.1 Time wasted looking 4-Low/Mod 3.1 Group material in sensible SWP 26.043 1- Low
task specific groups for material piles. i.e. keep grounding
where possible. material together, bolts in SOP 27.011
one area, reels separate Material
(not spread out, high Placement in
voltage connections Laydown
together. Etc… Yard
Page 1 of 4
Post
Rating
4. Ensure area is clean 4.1 Tripping hazards 4-Low/Mod 4.1 Always be on top of 1- Low
and any house that may have been ongoing site cleanup.
keeping is complete. created during Remove any waste as you
Area should look unpacking of go.
presentable and material.
organized.
Page 2 of 4
Page 3 of 4
Page 4 of 4
JSA for Camp set up-Installation of gas fired heating
systems
Created by: J. Friesen Doc. Number: Health, Safety & Environmental Policy Form
Date: April 2018 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Revised by:
This analysis is intended to identify broad scope of work hazards and does not replace the need for specific JSAs and
Tailboards. Once all the hazards have been identified and recorded, a risk assessment shall be conducted.

8-10
1 2 3 4 5 process or if circumstances
1-3 Low exposure in the process, and
Moderate /
change. No great effort
Risk agree on a timetable for
1 1 2 3 4 5 High Risk
Exposure
2 2 4 6 8 10
4-6 Low Investigate engineering 12-25 Cease work until interim controls
3 3 6 9 12 15
/ controls to minimize Unaccept are implemented, and an action
4 4 8 12 16 20 Moderat reliance on PPE & plan toSWP
permanently reduce the
1. Excavation
5 5 10 15 20 1.1 25 Buried utilities. 12-25 1.1 Obtainable Risk
necessary 26.031 1-3 Low risk
Authorization e Risk procedures.
Unacceptable excavation, ground risk to Excavations
an acceptable level.
risk disturbance clearance, Workers to be
* Significant Concerns: utility locates. trained in Ground
Workers are to insure 1.2 Permit(source
Potential to work of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard
Disturbance Post Mitigation
that /there are no 1.2 Obtain necessary level Reference
2
Task Activity Loss/Hazard Rating Prevention
permits toBarriers
work, if Rating
underground lines of
any type. The local required.
authority must verify
this. 1.3 All workers involved in
the installation gas
distribution shall work
under the direction of a
journeyman gasfitter
with the appropriate
class as per provincial
regulations.
2 Excavate trenches for 2.1 Contact with existing 8-10 2.1 Ensure proper ground SWP 26,038 4-6 Low/moderate
installation of underground utilities. Moderate/High locates are performed JSA 01.005A risk.
underground gas lines. risk before ground disturbance Excavation and
begins. trenching
Consult existing drawings JSA 01.007
of worksite or local Hydrovacing
landowners for trenching
information of buried Natural gas and
utilities. propane
Determine the safest installation code
Page 1 of 5
systems
VALARD Created by: Doc. Number: Health, Safety & Environmental Policy Form
Date: Revision #: Date Revised: Revised by:
method to remove soil; B-149
excavator or hydrovac. Minimum depth of
Journeyman to obtain trench-24”
proper gas permit for
installation and ensure all
gas piping systems are
approved by an inspector.
3 Equipment checks for 3.1 Equipment failure 4-6 3.1 Inspect all equipment prior Section 25 HSE 1-3 Low risk
mobile and stationary 3.2 Fluid leaks Low/Moderate to use. manual
equipment. risk 3.2 Ensure spill kit is on hand. Vehicle/Equipment
policy-inspections
4 Remove soil to required 4.1 Pipe failure due to 8-10 4.1 Sand creates a protective Natural gas and 4-6 Low/moderate
depth and add a layer of uneven terrain, rocks, Moderate/High layer between gas line and propane risk.
sand above and below etc. risk hard packed soil. installation code
piping. 4.2 3.2 Failure to add a 4.2 During backfill a layer of B-149
sufficient layer of sand sand must be added Check provincial
may result in puncture above and below piping. jurisdiction for
of gas line from rocks level of sand for
or hard surface. backfill.
Workers operating
equipment shall
have PME
training.
5 Install gas pipe in 5.1 Failure to detect leaks 12-25 5.1 Air test must be Natural gas and 4-6 Low/moderate
trench. Charge piping will create hazardous Unacceptable conducted before burial. propane risk.
with air test. Use pipe condition. risk Journeyman gasfitter to installation code
threader for above 5.2 Damaged or worn contact local inspector for B-149
ground installations only. thread dies causing inspection.
poor pipe connection. 5.2 Competent worker to
operate threading
machine.
6 Before back fill install 6.1 Failure to install tracing 12-25 6.1 Install tracing wire and Natural gas and 4-6
electronic tracing wire wire and identification Unacceptable identification tape during propane Low/moderate
and identification tape tape may result in utility risk backfill. installation code risk.
Page 2 of 5
systems
strike B-149
7 Connect all rigid and 7.1 Improper installation of 12-25 7.1 All workers to be under the Natural gas and 4-6
flexible gas piping gas piping systems. Unacceptable direction of a journeyman propane Low/moderate
systems from propane Fire/explosion, loss of risk gasfitter with appropriate installation code risk.
distribution to dorms. property and life. class as per provincial B-149
7.2 Gas leaks from jurisdiction.
improper pipe 7.2 All pipe joints to be soap
connections. tested for gas leaks.
7.3 Damage to gas piping 7.3 All gas piping shall be
adequately protected from
Contact from vehicles and
incidental contact from
workers. Ensure all gas
fired appliances are fully
operational before turning
camp over to maintenance
crews.
8 Paint all rigid gas piping. 8.1 Failure of pipe due to 12-25 8.1 Ensure all rigid gas pipe is Natural gas and 4-6
rust and corrosion. Unacceptable painted (yellow). propane Low/moderate
risk installation code risk.
B-149
9 Install protective barriers 9.1 Contact with trucks and 8-10 9.1 Install effective barriers Natural gas and 4-6
for above ground piping. equipment Moderate/High around above ground propane Low/moderate
risk piping. installation code risk.
B-149
10 Create plan drawing of 10.1 Contact with 12-25 10.1 A hardcopy or SWP 26.031 4-6 Low/moderate
all underground utilities underground utilities Unacceptable electronic plan of all Excavations risk.
to be turned over camp risk. underground utilities for to
maintenance post new be developed for camp set
construction. up. Plans will also be
turned over to camp
maintenance after new
construction.
Page 3 of 5
systems
Page 4 of 5
systems
NAME (print) SIGNATURE DATE COMPANY
Page 5 of 5
Document Description: Camp Setup General Plumbing
Created by: R. Gaudet Doc. Number: JSA
8-10
1-3 Low process or if circumstances exposure in the process, and agree
Moderate /
1 2 3 4 5 Risk change. No great effort on a timetable for completion of all
High Risk
1 1 2 3 4 5 required for reducing risk. agreed actions.
Exposure
3 3 6 9 12 15 Moderate controls to minimize reliance Unacceptable are implemented, and an action
4 4 8 12 16 20 Risk on PPE & procedures. Risk plan to permanently reduce the risk
5 5 10 15 20 25 to an acceptable level.
Post
Rating
1. Mobilize to Site 1.1 Slippery or uneven roads 6 Low/ 1.1.1 Drive to road conditions SWP 3 Low
Moderate 1.1.2 Follow radio protocol 26.013 Risk
Risk 1.1.3 Equipment check daily Use of
Company
1.2 Wildlife Interaction 1.2.1 Scan side to side/ahead Vehicles
1.2.2 Use passenger as second
set of eyes Section 9
HSE
1.3 Other Vehicle Interaction 1.3.1 Use defensive driving Inspections
1.3.2 Follow radio protocol and
Monitoring,
Hazard
Awareness
Page 1 of 5
Post
Rating
2. Walk in work area 2.1 Slips, trips and falls due to 4 Low/ 2.1.1 Observe work area for hazards SWP 2 Low
wet/slippery/uneven Moderate and eliminate whenever possible. 26.043 Risk
conditions. Risk Guard and/or barricade or Housekeep
otherwise clearly identify hazards
that cannot be removed. ing
Section 10,
HSE
Manual,
PPE
3. Connect Interior 3.1 Hands, fingers and other 5 Low / 3.1.1 Work gloves and other PPE SWP 2 Low
Water Lines body parts caught in pinch Moderate to be worn; designate a flagger 26.043 Risk
points. Risk for movement control; keep Housekeep
hands and body clear while ing
maintaining safe distance from
equipment; do not allow Section 10,
personnel in pinch points; HSE
recommendation of not wearing Manual,
jewelry or excessively loose PPE
fitting clothing.
SWP
3.2 Tool failure while connecting 3.2.1 All tools are to be inspected prior 26.001
fittings. to use. Tools that are not in good Defective
condition to be tagged out. Tools
4. Connect Outdoor 4.1 Awkward or heavy lifts while 5 Low / 4.1.1 If over 50 lbs., use of two workers SWP 2 Low
Sewage Lines moving material. Bending/ Moderate is required. Use machines with 26.050 Risk
(heat trace install, twisting in awkward positions Risk taglines to assist as necessary. Manual
insulation wrap, when installing heat trace Lifting
connect ABS pipe) and insulation wrap.
Page 2 of 5
Post
Rating
4.2 Hands, fingers and other 4.2.1 Work gloves and other PPE SWP
body parts caught in pinch to be worn; designate a flagger 26.043
points. Cuts when preparing for movement control; keep Housekeep
insulation wrap. hands and body clear while ing
maintaining safe distance from
equipment; do not allow Section 10,
personnel in pinch points; HSE
recommendation of not wearing Manual,
jewelry or excessively loose PPE
fitting clothing.
SWP
26.080
Use of
Gloves
5. 5.1 5.1.
6. 6.1 6.1.
7. 7.1 7.1.
7. 8.1 8.1.
8. 9.1 9.1.
9. 10.1 10.1.
Page 3 of 5
Post
Rating
Page 4 of 5
Page 5 of 5
Document Description: Camp Trailer Setup
This JSA is to aid the site supervisor in planning the work to be used in conjunction with other job planning tools, such as the daily
tailboard sheet and other applicable procedures, etc. This should not be viewed as the complete job plan but as a starting point. Normal
proper personnel protective equipment should be worn at all times and is not addressed in this JSA unless there is a specific need.
1-3 Low or if circumstances change. No 8-10 Moderate exposure in the process, and agree
1 2 3 4 5 Risk great effort required for / High Risk on a timetable for completion of all
Exposure
3 3 6 9 12 15 Moderate controls to minimize reliance Unacceptable are implemented, and an action
4 4 8 12 16 20 Risk on PPE & procedures. Risk plan to permanently reduce the risk
Post
Rating
1. Mobilize to Site 1.1 Slippery or uneven roads 6 1.1.1 Drive to road conditions SWP 26.013 3 Low
Low/ 1.1.2 Follow radio protocol Use of Risk
Mod 1.1.3 Equipment check daily Company
1.2 Wildlife Interaction Risk Vehicles
1.2.1 Scan side to side/ahead
1.2.2 Use passenger as second Section 9 HSE
set of eyes Inspections
1.3 Other Vehicle Interaction and
1.3.1 Use defensive driving Monitoring,
1.3.2 Follow radio protocol Hazard
Awareness
2. Walk in work area 2.1 Slips, trips and falls due to 4 Low/ 2.1.1 Observe work area for hazards SWP 26.043 2 Low Risk
wet/slippery/uneven Mod and eliminate whenever possible. Housekeeping
conditions. Risk Guard and/or barricade or
otherwise clearly identify hazards Section 10,
that cannot be removed. HSE Manual,
PPE
Page 1 of 5
Post
Rating
3. Unload from flatbed 3.1 Overhead hazards 8-10 3.1.1 Be aware line height (overhead SWP 26.002 1-3 Low
trailers at site. electrical - contact with Moderate / power line signs) and use a spotter Electrical Work Risk
Position trailer(s) at live circuits. High Risk when necessary. Canadian
site and make level Electrical Code
with blocking.
3.2 Working under suspended 3.2.1 Workers to identify hazards and Section 9 HSE
loads (loader use to raise note on tailboard/FLHA. Use Inspections
trailer). extreme caution when lifting and
trailers; always be aware of Monitoring,
surroundings. Use chains where Hazard
necessary. Awareness
3.3 Backing Incidents. 3.3.1 Use a spotter for backing. If SWP.027

working alone, do a walk around to Spotter and
ensure no hazards or obstructions Signaler
are in the area. Practice
3.4 Hands, fingers and other 3.4.1 Work gloves and other PPE SWP 26.043
body parts caught in pinch to be worn; designate a flagger for Housekeeping
points. movement control; keep hands
and body clear and maintain safe Section 10,
distance from equipment; do not HSE Manual,
allow personnel in pinch points; PPE
recommendation of not wearing
jewelry or excessively loose fitting. SWP 26.013
clothing. Use of
Company
3.5 Improper setup of trailer 3.6.1 Make sure ground is level and Vehicles
stands when off-loading inspect stands before use.
or loading trailers
Page 2 of 5
Post
Rating
3.6 Trailers improperly 3.6.1 Check all straps/chains before use.
secured while traveling Follow load securement
to and from sites procedures to prevent load shift.
4. Connect Trailers 4.1 Saw kickback when 8-10 4.1.1 Maintain a firm grip with both SWP 26.045 1-3 Low
(install floors, attach cutting wood. Moderate / hands on the saw and position SWP.046 Risk
roof, build stairs, High Risk your arms to resist kickback Operate Skill
install skirting). forces. Position your body to Saw or Table
either side of the blade, but not in Saw
line with the blade.
4.1.2 Inspect all fall arrest equipment SWP 26.028
4.2 Falling from heights when (harness, lanyard, etc.) before Fall Protection
attaching roof. use. Tie off ladder. Inspect and
attach lanyard to approved
locations.
4.1.3 Work gloves and other PPE

4.3 Hands, fingers and other to be worn; designate a flagger for SWP 26.043
body parts caught in pinch movement control; keep hands Housekeeping
points. and body clear and maintain safe
distance from equipment; do not Section 10,
allow personnel in pinch points; HSE Manual,
recommendation of not wearing PPE
jewelry or excessively loose fitting.
clothing.
5. Clean Up Work Area 6.1 Slips, trips and falls 4 Low/ 6.1.1 Observe work area for SWP 26.043 2 Low Risk
Mod Risk hazards and eliminate Housekeeping
whenever possible. Guard
and/or barricade or that
otherwise clearly identify
hazards cannot be removed.
Page 3 of 5
Post
Rating
6.1.2 Work gloves & other PPE

to be worn; designate a SWP 26.080
flagger for movement
control; keep hands and Use of Gloves
body clear and maintain
safe distance from hazards; do not Section 10,
allow personnel in pinch points; HSE Manual,
recommendation of not PPE
wearing jewelry or excessively
loose fitting clothing.
Page 4 of 5
Page 5 of 5
Document Description: Camp Fuel Tank Setup
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
1. Mobilize to Site 1.1 Slippery or uneven 5 1.1.1. Drive to road conditions SWP 26.013 3 Low
roads Low/ 1.1.2. Follow radio protocol Use of Risk
Mod 1.1.3. Equipment check daily Company
Risk Vehicles
1.2 Wildlife Interaction 1.2.1 Scan side to side/ahead
1.2.2 Use passenger as second set of Section 9 HSE
eyes Inspections
and
1.3 Other Vehicle 1.3.1 Use defensive driving Monitoring,
Interaction 1.3.2 Follow radio protocol Hazard
Awareness
2. Unload Tank(s) from 2.1 Rigging Failure 8-10 2.1.1 Inspect all rigging and use SWP 26.006 4 Low /
Delivery Trailer using Moderate taglines to control movement. crane and Moderate
Rig lift with appropriate sized
Page 1 of 5
Post
Rating
Heavy Equipment / High slings/shackles. Rigging Risk
and Install on Risk
Foundation. 2.2 Worker crushed by 2.2.1 Communicate with workers in Section 9 HSE
falling load. area; flag off area if needed.
Keep area clear to reduce Inspections
hazard. and
Monitoring,
2.3 Heavy equipment 2.3.1 Qualified operator and spotters Hazard
failure. to be used while lifting and Awareness
moving material. Inspect
equipment daily before using. SWP.027
Use caution while un-loading; strap Spotter and
material to equipment (if using front Signaler
end loader / skidsteer); if using Practice
Crane - taglines to be used.
Signalman to be clearly identified SWP 26.043
with gauntlet. Housekeeping
2.4 Hands, fingers and 2.4.1 Work gloves and other PPE Section 10,
other body parts to be worn; designate a flagger HSE Manual,
caught in pinch for movement control; keep PPE
points. hands and body clear and
maintain safe distance from Refer to
equipment; do not allow JSA 01.014
personnel in pinch points; Concrete
recommendation of not wearing Installation
jewelry or excessively loose
fitting clothing.
2.5.1 Observe work area for hazards and
2.5 Slips, trips and falls eliminate whenever possible.
due to wet or
slippery or uneven Guard and/or barricade or
Page 2 of 5
Post
Rating
conditions. otherwise clearly identify hazards
that cannot be removed.
3. Inspect tank for 3.1 Slips, trips and falls 1-3 Low 3.1.1 Observe work area for hazards and SWP 26.043 1 low Risk
damage/leaks or due to wet or Risk eliminate whenever possible. Housekeeping
missing components. slippery or uneven Guard and/or barricade or
conditions. otherwise clearly identify hazards Section 10,
that cannot be removed. HSE Manual,
PPE
4. Install Ground Rod(s) 4.1 Hand injury from 5 Low / 4.1.1 Use post pounder for ground rod Section 9 HSE 2 Low
being struck by Moderate to safely insert in ground and Inspections Risk
hammer. Flying Risk reduce chances of flying and
fragments of projectiles. Monitoring,
ground rod in eye. Hazard
Awareness
4.2 Awkward or heavy 4.2.1 Use buddy system or machinery to
lifting while moving Avoid unnecessary strain SWP 26.050
ground rod. Manual Lifting
and Carrying
5 Install Electrical and 5.1 Electrical shock. 4-6 Low / 5.1.1 Test to make sure isolation/de- SWP 26.002 2 Low
Grounding Moderate energization completed. Check all Electrical Work Risk
Risk extension cords for damage.
Inspect gensets for defects. SWP 26.021
Electrical
Extension
5.2 Tripping over loose 5.2.1 Elevate, bury, or install cable Cords
wire/debris. Slips, cover over electrical cord to
trips and falls due to eliminate tripping hazard. SWP 26.043
wet or slippery or Observe work area for hazards Housekeeping
Page 3 of 5
Post
Rating
uneven conditions. and eliminate whenever possible.
Guard and/or barricade or Section 10,
otherwise clearly identify hazards HSE Manual,
that cannot be removed. PPE
6 Clean Up Work Area 6.1 Slips, trips and falls 4 Low/ 6.1.1 Observe work area for hazards and SWP 26.043 2 Low
Mod eliminate whenever possible. Housekeeping Risk
Risk Guard and/or barricade or that
otherwise clearly identify hazards
that cannot be removed. SWP 26.080
Use of Gloves
6.1.2 Use appropriate PPE, including
dust masks to minimize hazards. Section 10,
HSE Manual,
PPE
7 Install No Smoking 7.1 Pinch points 4 7.1.1 Use appropriate PPE, be aware of SWP 26.080 2 Low
Signage Low/Mod hand placement. Use of Risk
Risk Gloves
Page 4 of 5
Page 5 of 5
Document Description: General Carpentry
process or if
1-3 Low 8-10 Moderate exposure in the process, and agree
1 2 3 4 5 circumstances change.
Risk / High Risk on a timetable for completion of all
1 1 2 3 4 5 No great effort required
agreed actions.
Exposure
2 2 4 6 8 10 for reducing risk.

3 3 6 9 12 15 4-6 Low / Investigate engineering 12-25 Cease work until interim controls are
4 4 8 12 16 20 Moderate controls to minimize Unacceptable implemented, and an action plan to
5 5 10 15 20 25 Risk reliance on PPE & Risk permanently reduce the risk to an
procedures. acceptable level.
Post
Rating
1. Mobilize to Site 1.1 Slippery or uneven roads 6 1.1.1 Drive to road conditions SWP 26.013 3 Low
Low/ 1.1.2 Follow radio protocol Use of Risk
Mod 1.1.3 Equipment check daily Company
Risk Vehicles
1.2 Wildlife Interaction 1.2.1 Scan side to side/ahead
1.2.2 Use passenger as second Section 9 HSE
set of eyes Inspections
and
1.3 Other Vehicle Interaction 1.3.1 Use defensive driving Monitoring,
1.3.2 Follow radio protocol Hazard
Awareness
2. Walk in work area 2.1 Slips, trips and falls due to 4 Low/ 2.1.1 Observe work area for SWP 26.043 2 Low
Page 1 of 5
Post
Rating
wet/slippery/uneven Moderate hazards and eliminate Housekeeping Risk
conditions. Risk whenever possible. Guard
and/or barricade or Section 10,
otherwise clearly identify
hazards that cannot be HSE Manual,
removed. PPE
3. Build decks, stairs, 3.1 Tool failure, missing 5 Low / 3.1.1 Check guards on saws, use SWP 26.043 2 Low
and other framing guards, cords frayed or Moderate GFI protection on grounded Housekeeping Risk
projects. broken. Risk equipment. All tools are to
be inspected prior to use. Section 10,
Tools that are not in good HSE Manual,
condition to be tagged out. PPE
3.2 Hands placed in line of fire, 3.2.1 Hands are not to be placed
or in pinch points as framing in line of fire of any power SWP 26.028
material cut or fastened or hand tool. Fall Protection
together.
3.3 Awkward or heavy lifts 3.3.1 If over 50 lbs., use of two SWP 26.050
while moving material. workers is required. Use Manual Lifting
machines with taglines to
assist as necessary. SWP 26.045
3.4 Slips, trips, falls due to 3.4.1 Housekeeping to be Operate Table
slippery or uneven addressed 100% of the Saw
conditions; also due to time; tripping hazard to be
scrap material not cleaned removed. Sand/grade as SWP 26.046
up. necessary to prevent poor Operate
site conditions. Circular Saw
SWP 26.001
Defective
Tools
Page 2 of 5
Post
Rating
4. Connecting Boot 4.1 Falling from heights when 6 Low / 4.1.1 Inspect all fall arrest Section 10, 2 Low
Rooms to Dorms. working aloft. Moderate equipment (harness, HSE Manual, Risk
Risk lanyard, etc.) before use. PPE
Tie off ladder. Inspect and
attach lanyard to approved SWP 26.028
locations. Fall Protection
4.2 Tool failure, missing guards, 4.2.1 All tools are to be SWP 26.050
cords frayed or broken. inspected prior to use. Manual Lifting
Tools that are not in good
condition to be tagged out. SWP 26.001
4.3 Hands placed in line of fire, 4.3.1 Hands are not to be placed Defective
or in pinch points as framing in line of fire of any power Tools
material cut or fastened or hand tool.
together.
4.4 Awkward or heavy lifts while 4.4.1 If over 50 lbs., use of two
moving material. workers is required. Use
machines with taglines to
assist as necessary.
5. Clean Up Work Area 5.1 Slips, trips and falls 4 Low/ 5.1.1 Observe work area for SWP 26.043 2 Low
Mod Risk hazards and eliminate Housekeeping Risk
whenever possible. Guard
and/or barricade or that SWP 26.080
otherwise clearly identify Use of Gloves
hazards cannot be
removed. Section 10,
5.2 Caught in pinch Points HSE Manual,
when lifting/moving PPE
Page 3 of 5
Post
Rating
material and equipment 5.2.1 Work gloves & other PPE
to be worn; designate a
flagger for movement
control; keep hands and
body clear and maintain
safe distance from
hazards; do not allow
personnel in pinch points;
recommendation of not
wearing jewelry or
excessively
loose fitting clothing.
6 6.1 6.1.1
7 7.1 7.1.1
7. 8.1 8.1.1
8. 9.1 9.1.1
9. 10.1 10.1.1
Page 4 of 5
Page 5 of 5
Document Description: JSA for Installation of Electrical utilities for Camp set up.
Created by: J. Friesen Doc. Number: JSA

1-3 Low process or if circumstances 8-10 Moderate exposure in the process, and
1 2 3 4 5 Risk change. No great effort / High Risk agree on a timetable for
Exposure
3 3 6 9 12 15 Moderate controls to minimize Unacceptable are implemented, and an action
4 4 8 12 16 20 Risk reliance on PPE & Risk plan to permanently reduce the
5 5 10 15 20 25 procedures. risk to an acceptable level.
Post
Rating
1. Excavation 1.1 Buried utilities. 12-25 1.1 Obtain necessary SWP 26,038 4-6
Authorization Unacceptable excavation, ground JSA 01.005A Low/moderate
risk disturbance clearance, utility Excavation and risk.
* Significant Concerns: locates. trenching
Workers are to insure JSA 01.007
that there are no 1.2 Obtain necessary permits Hydrovacing
underground lines of to work, if required. trenching
1.2 Permit to work
any type. The local 1.3 Lack of skill Canadian
authority must verify 1.3 All workers involved in the electrical code
this. installation electrical utilities
shall work under the
direction of a journeyman
Electrician with the
appropriate class as per
provincial regulations.
2 Excavate trenches for 2.1 Contact with existing 8-10 2.1 Ensure proper ground locates Canadian 4-6
installation of electrical underground utilities. Moderate/High are performed before ground electrical Low/moderate
feed from generators to 2.2 Noncompliance with risk disturbance begins. code risk.
dorms. local building codes Consult existing drawings of
Page 1 of 4
Post
Rating
worksite or local landowners
for information of buried
utilities.
Determine the safest method
to remove soil; excavator or
hydrovac.
2.2 Journeyman to obtain proper
electrical permit for
installation and ensure all
work is approved by an
inspector.
3 Equipment checks for 3.1 Equipment failure 4-6 3.1 Inspect all equipment prior to Section 25 4-6
mobile and stationary Fluid leaks Low/Moderate use. HSE manual Low/moderate
equipment risk 3.2 Ensure spill kit is on hand. Vehicle/Equipm risk.
ent policy-
inspections
4 Remove soil to required 4.1 Insulation of electrical 8-10 4.1 Add a layer of sand above Canadian 4-6
depth and install cable damaged due to Moderate/High and below, check local electrical code Low/moderate
electrical cable in trench. due to uneven terrain, risk electrical codes for details of JSA T-015 risk.
rocks, etc. depth of sand Pulling cable
4.2 Refer to JSA for pulling cable.
5 Install identification tape 5.1 Failure to install 12-25 5.1 Install identification tape Canadian 4-6
during backfill. identification tape may Unacceptable during backfill. electrical Low/moderate
result in utility strike risk code risk.
6 Connect all electrical 6.1 Fire or electrical fault 12-25 6.1 Ensure appropriately sized Canadian 1-3 Low risk
cables to dorms Unacceptable electrical cable for voltage electrical
risk from distribution sea-can. code
6.2 Ensure all wiring terminates
in properly rated electrical
panels.
7 Install protective barriers 7.1 Contact with trucks and 12-25 7.1 Install effective barriers Canadian 1-3 Low risk
for above ground piping equipment Unacceptable around above ground piping electrical
Page 2 of 4
Post
Rating
risk code
8 Install grounds and 8.1 Ungrounded system; 12-25 8.1 Ensure all electrical panels Canadian 4-6
bonding electrical shock, touch Unacceptable and dwellings are adequately electrical Low/moderate
potential risk grounded and bonded. code risk.
9 Check operation of Fire 9.1 Failure of alarms 12-25 9.1 Perform required checks Canadian 4-6
alarm and CO systems Unacceptable before buildings are electrical Low/moderate
risk occupied. code risk.
10 Trouble shooting 10.1 Electrical shock 12-25 10.1 Use lock out tag out SWP 26.032 4-6
electrical problems on Unacceptable 10.2 Inspect and use insulated Lockouts Low/moderate
start up. risk tools before use. SWP 26.002 risk.
10.3 Use non-contact voltage Electrical
detectors. work
11 Create plan drawing of 11.1 Contact with 12-25 11.1 A hardcopy or electronic Canadian 4-6
all underground utilities underground utilities Unacceptable plan of all underground electrical Low/moderate
to be turned over camp risk utilities for to be developed code risk.
maintenance post new for camp set up. Plans will
construction. also be turned over to camp
maintenance after new
construction.
10
11
12
Page 3 of 4
Page 4 of 4
Document Description: JSA for Camp set up-Plumbing service drain lines
Created by: J. Friesen Doc. Number: Health, Safety & Environmental Policy Form
This analysis is intended to identify broad scope of work hazards and does not replace the need for specific JSAs and
Tailboards. Once all the hazards have been identified and recorded, a risk assessment shall be conducted.
Review on change of Critically examine the areas of

Hazard 1-3
process or if circumstances
8-10
exposure in the process, and
Low Moderate /
1 2 3 4 5 change. No great effort agree on a timetable for
Risk High Risk
Investigate engineering Cease work until interim controls
Exposure
2 2 4 6 8 10 4-6 12-25
Low / controls to minimize reliance Unaccept are implemented, and an action
3 3 6 9 12 15
1.1 Modera on PPE & procedures. 1.1 Obtainable Risk plan toSWP permanently reduce therisk
1. Excavation
4 4 Authorization
8 12 16 20Buried utilities. 5 Low/Mod necessary 26.031 1-3 Low
te Risk excavation, ground risk to Excavations
an acceptable level.
5 5 10 15 20
25 disturbance clearance, Workers to be
Workers are to insure that utility locates. trained in Ground
there are no underground 1.2 Permit to work level 2
1.2 Obtain necessary permits
lines of any type. The local Potential (source of) Hazard Recommended Loss
to work, if required.
Standard Post Mitigation
authority
Task must verify this.
/ Activity Loss/Hazard Rating Prevention Barriers Reference Rating
2. Excavate trenches for 2.1 Contact with existing 8-10 2.1 Ensure proper ground JSA 01.007 1-3 Low risk
installation of service underground utilities. Moderate/High locates are performed Hydrovacing
drain. risk before ground trenching
disturbance begins. SWP 26.031
Consult existing drawings Excavations
of worksite or local
landowners for
information of buried
utilities.
Determine the safest
method to remove soil;
excavator or hydrovac.
2.2 Journeyman to obtain
proper plumbing permit
for installation and ensure
all drainage piping
systems are approved by
an inspector.
3. Equipment checks for 3.1 Equipment failure 4-6 3.1 Inspect all equipment prior Section 25 HSE 1-3 Low risk
mobile and stationary Low/Moderate to use. manual
Page 1 of 4
Document Description: JSA for
Created by: Doc. Number: Health, Safety & Environmental Policy Form
VALARD
equipment. 3.2 Fluid leaks risk 3.2 Ensure spill kit is on hand. Vehicle/Equipment
policy-inspections
4 Rough in of drainage 4.1 Back, arm, shoulder 4-6 4.1 Use buddy system when SWP 26.050 1-3 Low risk
service piping from strain from lifting drain Low/moderate handling long awkward Manual lifting and
dorms to lift stations. piping. risk pipe. handling.
Use appropriate power 4.2 Pinch points when 4.2 Wear appropriate gloves SWP 26.025 Use
tools as required for working with for task. of hand tools.
task. tools/materials and 4.3 Be aware of pinch/crush SWP 080 Tools
camlocks on pipe hazards when using materials and
connections. hammers, saws, etc. cutting
4.3 Hand injury from 4.4 Lay out plumbing MSDS inventory
drill/orbital bit. materials in an orderly Alberta Plumbing
4.4 Slips and trips on fashion to prevent trip code
uneven surfaces. hazards.
4.5 Exposure to plumbing 4.5 MSDS information on
glue hand to prevent
unnecessary exposure.
5 Connect service drain 5.1 Poor drainage leads to 8-10 5.1 All plumbing drain piping Provincial 1-3 Low risk
piping to lift stations/ blockages and possible Moderate/high to be installed with plumbing code.
sewage holding tanks. drainage system risk. appropriate grade. See
failure. Exposure to local plumbing code to
effluent. application.
6 Ensure all drainage, lift 6.1 Drainage system 8-10 6.1 All plumbing drain piping Provincial 1-3 Low risk
stations, and holding failure. Exposure to Moderate/high to be protected from plumbing and
tanks are protected from effluent. risk. freezing with the use of building code.
freezing. heat tracing, insulation,
etc.
7 Install protective barriers 7.1 Contact with trucks and 8-10 7.1 Install effective barriers Provincial 4-6
for above ground piping. equipment Moderate/high around above ground plumbing and Low/moderate
risk. piping. building code. risk.
8 Create plan drawing of 8.1 Contact with 8-10 8.1 A hardcopy or electronic SWP 26.031 4-6 Low/moderate
all underground utilities underground utilities Moderate/high plan of all underground Excavations risk.
to be turned over camp risk. utilities for to be developed
maintenance post new for camp set up. Plans will
Page 2 of 4
VALARD
construction. also be turned over to
camp maintenance after
new construction.
NAME (print) SIGNATURE DATE COMPANY
Page 3 of 4
VALARD
Page 4 of 4
Document Description: JSA for Snow Removal with Equipment
Created by: B.Dawson Doc. Number:
Date: Dec 11, 2018 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:
8-10
1-3 Low or if circumstances change. exposure in the process, and agree
Moderate /
1 2 3 4 5 Risk No great effort required for on a timetable for completion of all
High Risk
Exposure
3 3 6 9 12 15 Moderate controls to minimize reliance Unaccepta are implemented, and an action
4 4 8 12 16 20 Risk on PPE & procedures. ble Risk plan to permanently reduce the risk
Post
Rating
1. Inspect Equipment 1.1 Slips/Trips 8-Mod/High 1.1. 3 point of contact when 26.013 2- Low
1.2 Pinch Points entering/exiting equipment Company
1.3 Equipment Failure 1.2. Proper gloves. Proper Vehicles
1.4 Environmental hand and finger 26.080
1.5 Poor Lighting placement around open Gloves
panels or doors 26.029 Cold
1.3. Complete daily inspection. Weather
Document any
deficiencies.
1.4. Ensure hydraulics are
warmed and exercised.
Watch for leaks when
starting. Use spill tray.
Have spill kit available
Page 1 of 4
Post
Rating
1.5. Ensure adequate lighting
2. Assess Site to be 2.1. Electrical Contact 6-Low/Mod 2.1. Trace back any cords or 26.050 2- Low
cleared 2.2. Trip Hazards lines from generators. Manual Lifting
2.3. Hidden Hazards Identify using rope, 26.021
delineators, ribbon, etc Extension
Cords
2.2. Ensure proper footing
while walking area.
Careful planned steps
2.3. Probe area upon
entering. Identify
obstructions.
3. Clearing Snow 3.1 Operating 8-Mod/High 3.1 Ensure operator is 26.050 4- Low
equipment qualified and competent Manual Lifting
3.2 Property Damage 3.2 Assign spotter. Spotter 26.025 Hand
3.3 Miscommunication must be used within 1m of Tools
any facility or structure. 26.027
3.4 Crush Points
(3m inside substation). Spotters
3.5 Electrical Contact 3.3 Establish communication
between spotter and
operator. If operator loses
sight of spotter,
equipment must stop until
re-established
3.4 Spotter to stay out from
fixed and moving objects.
3.5 Hand expose cables using
a shovel.
Page 2 of 4
Post
Rating
4 Clean up work area 5.1 Environmental 6-Low/Mod 5.1 Place spill tray under 26.050 3- Low
once complete task 5.2 Housekeeping equipment Manual Lifting
5.3 Slips/Trips/Falls 5.2 Return tools and 26.025
equipment Hand Tools
5.3 3 point of contact exiting 26.043
equipment Housekeepin
g
Page 3 of 4
Page 4 of 4
Document Description: JSA High Pressure Washing Vehicles & Equipment
Created by: J. Howie Doc. Number: JSA
8-10
Moderate /
High Risk
Exposure
Post
Rating
1. Mobilize to site 1.1 Equipment failure 5 Low/Mod 1.1 Complete walk around HSE manual - 2 Low Risk
and equipment checklists Section 25
(pre-trip inspections) “Vehicle
1.2 Poor driving
conditions 1.2 Be prepared for all Policy”
conditions, drive to them
1.3 Wildlife and traffic 1.3 Use tire chains where
necessary
1.4 Wrong directions/ 1.4 Pay attention to the road
Miscommunications –no distracted driving
1.5 Do not use cell phones
while driving
Page 1 of 4
Post
Rating
1.6 Plan the route before

leaving, call for
assistance
2. Set up of Pressure 2.1 Exhaust fumes 6 Low – 2.1 Set up in a well ventilated HSE Manual – 2 Low Risk
Washer & Moderate area (outdoors) Section 7
Vehicle/Equipment 2.2 Fuel spill, fire Risk 2.2 Use a spill tray when Environmental
fueling. Allow engine to
cool for 10 minutes before Policy
refueling.
2.3 Slips, Trips & Falls 2.3 Set up where there is no
pedestrian traffic
2.4 Cone off area around
washing set up
3. Operate High 3.1 Hose Failure 8 Mod. – High 3.1 Inspect hoses for kinks, HSE Policy 3 Low Risk
Pressure Washer Risk crushing, stretching or Sect. 10 “PPE”
blistering, rusted or
broken reinforcing wires
3.2 Fittings and couplers 3.2 Inspect fittings and
(connection) failure couplers for damage,
proper assembly and
proper connector type.
Use whip checks.
3.3 Nozzle failure 3.3 Inspect nozzle for
damage
Page 2 of 4
Post
Rating
3.4 Pressure gun/wand 3.4 Inspect gun/wand for
failure damage
3.5 Exposure to extreme 3.5 Ensure gun/wand has
water pressure trigger/deadman switch.
3.6 Exposure to noise 3.6 Wear hearing protection
3.7 Injuries from flying 3.7 Eye protection, gloves and
debris CSA boots
3.8 Reaction to cleansers 3.8 Review MSDS (SDS)
Page 3 of 4
Page 4 of 4
Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA

1-3 8-10
Exposure

1. Transporting carts to 1.1 Equipment damage 3 Low Risk 1.1 Carts tied to a vehicle 3 Low Risk
worksite to pulley upright with wheels.
2. Cart inspection at 2.1 Equipment damage 3 Low Risk 2.1 Inspection of: 1 Low Rick
work site or prior to or repairs / Unsafe - Pulley wheels for
use equipment wear or cracks. If
cracked, no use.
- Safety clips function
properly. If
defective, replace.
- Main welds on rails
& cart frame. No
use if defects, effect
certified repairs.
- All bolts tight,
torqued, if not,
effect repairs or
Page 1 of 5
replacement by
engineering specs.
3. Equipment selection 3.1 Defective 8 – Moderate 3.1 Inspection of: 3 Low Risk
and inspection equipment to High Risk - Fall arrest system
and harness
3.2 Wear or Damage inspected up to
date and daily.
3.3 Forgetting - Double lanyards
Equipment installed correctly
for support.
- Rescue rope (min
75’) attached
securely to cart.
- 15’ brake rope ½”
or 5/8” attached
secured in cart.
- Cloth bag secured
for small tools.
- Tether strap for
portable tools.
- Radio checks for
designated radio on
crew for
communication or
emergency.
- Engineering specs
in vehicle at site.
4. Hoist cart to structure 4.1 Job communication 10 – Moderate 4.1 Morning meeting to 3 Low Risk
not covered to High Risk include working
location.
4.2 Cart attached by
4.2 Improper rigging proper rope or rigging
for approx 42-50lbs
cart weight.
Page 2 of 5
4.3 Lift area clear using
4.3 Falling material ground man
4.4 Lost signals, ground
4.4 Lack of signals man at the hoist
STOPS.
4.5 Falls from elevation 4.5 Tie off at heights
5. Attaching cart to 5.1 Falling material 10 – Moderate 5.1 Cart to remain secured 3 Low Risk
conductor to High Risk to rigging lines untill
pulleys and safety
clips attached.
5.2 Hands clear of pinch
5.2 Pinch points point between basket
and cart Use Gloves.
5.3 Ensure adequate
5.3 Heavy loads manpower
6. Workers transfer from 6.1 Fall 10 – Moderate 6.1 100% tie-off using 3- Low Risk
tower to cart to High Risk double lanyard
system.
6.2 Distance beyond 6.2 Conductor tie off
working length of exceeds 5000lbs as
double lanyards. per procedures.
6.3 Tie-off point is
6.3 Hard hat blocking conductor only
view
7. Installing spacers and 7.1 Pinch points at 10 – Moderate 7.1 Gloves and spare- 3 - Low Risk
traveling on conductor pulleys to High Risk gloves to be available.
7.2 Friction on hands 7.2 Brake rope used in front
Page 3 of 5
7.3 Uncontrolled cart of cart on conductor
movement attached to insulators.
7.3 Rope available to
anchor cart.
8. Installing spacers with 8.1 Falling material 10 – Moderate 8.1 Work area clear below. 3 – Low risk
hand tools or impact 8.2 Falling tools to High Risk 8.2 Impact gun on tether.
tools 8.3 Hand tools in cloth
bucket.
9 Operator leaving the 9.1 Fall potential 10 – Moderate 9.1 Boom truck basket 3 Low Risk
cart 9.2 Pinch points to High Risk signals to cart location.
9.3 Collisions 9.2 Cart secured for
9.4 Cart movement transfer.
9.3 Double lanyard system
when leaving cart to
basket.
Page 4 of 5
Page 5 of 5
Doc.
Created by: Bill Szumik JSA 01.2011.001
VALARD Number:
Date: July 28, 2010 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Reviised by:
the daily tailboard sheet and other applicable procedures, etc. This should not be viewed as the complete job plan but as
a starting point. Normal proper personnel protective equipment should be worn at all times and is not addressed in this
JSA unless there is a specific need.
Job Steps Major Hazards Barriers/Controls/Fixes Significant Concerns

Position trailer Over head hazards • Designated Signaller if near overhead lines. Position trailer unit as close as
electrical - contact with • Move trailer away from soft ground. possible to steel bundles to
live circuits. • If needed barrier area or have extra workers to keep minimize travel distance of front end
Soft ground – tipping others away. loader. Ideally steel was positioned
front end loader in an area away from overhead
Other lines and on good ground.
vehicular/personnel
traffic – striking
vehicles/personnel
Load trailer Front end loader tipping • Check weight of bundle to ensure not over the lift Ensure front end loader operator is
Steel bundle falling capacity of front end loader. competent to operate front end
Striking vehicles or • Check banding on bundles so bundles do not come loader.
personnel apart. Check load chart capacity of front
Improper secured steel • Workers clear of load, not under, use taglines if end loader against largest bundle
bundles necessary. weight to be lifted.
• Position steel bundles on blocking and ensure Do not over load trailer.
bundles are secure so as not to slide or tip over. Check capacity of trailer.
• Trailer deck to be clear of tripping slipping hazards.
• Ensure area clear of others. If high traffic area get
workers to flag.
• Ensure hold downs are of sufficient strength and
Page 1 of 2
Doc.
Created by: Bill Szumik JSA 01.2011.001
VALARD Number:

Travel to unloading site Other vehicular traffic • Be wary of other drivers. A pre job drive to site by tractor
Taking poor route • Traffic control may be necessary at some location. trailer operator may be warranted.
Right of way restrictions • Know route beforehand and take less travelled route May need special permits.
to unloading site.
• Check for any road restrictions or are special
permits required.
• Determine beforehand if there are any restriction or
other work activity which may impede travel.
Position trailer at site Soft ground – tipping • Move trailer away from soft ground. Position trailer unit as close as
front end loader • If needed barrier area or have extra workers to keep possible to steel bundles to
Other others away. minimize travel distance of front end
vehicular/personnel loader. Ideally steel was positioned
traffic – striking in an area away from overhead
vehicles/personnel lines and on good ground.
Unloading at site Over head hazards • Designated Signaller if near overhead lines. Know capacity of front end loader
electrical • Check weight of bundle to ensure not over the lift and largest bundle to be unloaded.
Front end loader tipping capacity of front end loader.
Steel bundle falling • Check banding on bundles so bundles do not come
Striking vehicles or apart.
personnel • Workers clear of load, not under, use taglines if
Improper secured steel necessary.
bundles • Position steel bundles on blocking on the ground
and ensure bundles are secure so as not to slide or
tip over.
• Ensure area clear of others. If high traffic area get
workers to flag.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Tower Rescue Procedure
Created By: Work Methods Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.001
Date: Mar. 24, 2015 Revision: 2 Revised by: D. Page Date: June 5, 2018
27.001 Tower Rescue Procedure
Purpose
The purpose of this document is to provide our employees with a Safe procedure to be
used in the event that a fall from height has occurred, leaving the worker suspended by
their fall arrest system. Only qualified trained personnel who have completed and
passed Valard’s Rescue Training Program or equivalent are considered competent to
perform rescue training. This training exercise shall be used in conjunction with a
documented Fall Protection Plan (FPP). All applicable rescue and escape methods
must be practiced annually.
Note: Prior to the commencement of any work requiring the use of a Fall Protection
System, the supervisor on site must ensure that all staff requiring the use of a Fall
Protection System has completed up to date Fall Protection Training. A Fall Protection
Plan (FPP) MUST be completed, reviewed and signed by ALL crew members
completing this rescue exercise. All rescue plans should be based on the premise that
the victim is injured, unresponsive and/or unable to help with the rescue. Victims must
be rescued promptly. If the victim is not breathing, you will have approximately 4
minutes before permanent brain damage can occur due to lack of oxygen. If the victim
is breathing but suspended motionless in a fall restraint system, you have approximately
15 minutes before restricted blood circulation causes injury as well.
Completing a rescue plan will assist to ensure that a rescuer can quickly and safely
reach the victim by assessing the condition of the victim, ability to apply appropriate first
aid and safely lower the victim to the ground.
The “plan” should also factor in any equipment, which may be available on site, to aid in
the rescue, such as a Helicopter, Man lift, Crane basket or Bucket truck.
Remember these may be the primary means of rescue however, during the
discussions of your FPP you need to identify, document and practice “how” they will be
used PRIOR to the commencement of any work.
Whenever working at heights exceeding 3m (10ft.), a FPP and fall protection system is
required. It must be understood that in the event of a fall, there is always the possibility
that a victim may strike an object during the fall, or that the injury itself may have been
the cause of the fall. In either case, the worker may or may not be able to return to their
work position without your assistance and you will need to assess the situation to
identify what the causal factors are that may have caused the worker to be arrested in
the first place (equipment failure, human error, electrocution, etc.), in order to ensure
that you are not injured in the attempt to rescue the victim.
Once the injured worker reaches the ground, first aid will be applied as required and the
worker will be transported to the hospital. Tower rescue must be practiced and
documented annually, at a minimum.
Page 1 of 8
Rescue Equipment
A dedicated rescue rope is preferred for emergency rescue. Note: This should only be
used if a helicopter, man lift or crane basket cannot reach the injured worker. The
presently available Rescue Rope Kits use 11 mm (7/16 in.) kernmantle rope 500 feet,
breaking strength of 7200 lbs. The following accessories are also in the rescue kit.
CMI RC103 Pulley Anchor Sling Rescue 8
Page 2 of 8
Large karabiner Small karabiner
Rigging the Figure 8 Device

To brake with the right hand, stand with the rope on the right side. Hold the figure 8 in
your left hand with the large hole away from you. Rig the Figure 8 device as shown in
the steps below.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Push a loop through the large Pull the loop over the small Connect the small hole of the
hole of the Figure 8. end of the Figure 8. Figure 8 to your harness with a
karabiner.
Rigging the Figure 8
Controlling Rate of Descent
The rate of descent is based on the position and amount of tension on the tail of the
rope. To decrease speed of the descent, do any one of the following:
• Hold the rope tighter with your breaking hand,
• Push the rope tighter against the body,
• Wrap the rope around more body surface (buttocks), or
• Have ground personnel tension on the rope (this is particularly useful should the
person aloft slip or become unconscious).
Page 3 of 8
Controlling the Rate of Descent
Locking off a Figure 8
The Figure 8 device can be locked off to prevent descent before exiting the bucket.
While holding the rope tightly in your brake hand, move it towards the Figure 8. When
the hand is about 8 in. (200 mm) away smoothly draw the rope over the top of the
Figure 8 and wedge it down between the Figure 8 and the standing line. One wrap will
support the weight of most people, and a second wrap will secure it. A third wrap held
with an overhand knot tied to the standing line can be used to provide additional
security.
Locking off a Figure 8
Rescue from a Tower

This rescue would be used when a victim wearing a full body harness, lanyard and
shock absorber has fallen off the structure and is hanging from a fixed anchor point
such as a tower arm. This rescue is to be carried out by two persons; one rescuer in the
tower and one rescuer on the ground. You will need:
1. One Rescue Kit containing;
a. rescue rope (all rescue ropes are 500 feet in length)
b. anchor sling
c. rescue block
d. Figure 8
e. large karabiner
Page 4 of 8
2. Tag Line, long enough to suit the length that the fall victim is above the ground
3. A sharp knife
Method 1 – From ground
Step Action
Rescuer #1
1 Call 911 and call for help from other workers
Call to the victim, if the victim is “non” responsive, assess the surroundings to
2
identify causal factors
3 If deemed clear, climb the tower carrying the rescue rope and a block to a point
beside or above the victim (if a rescue rope and/or block are not already aloft or
raise it with a handline).
4 Attach the block to a steel member using the anchor sling, taking into account the
anchor point of attachment and rescue descent path. Reeve the rescue rope
through the block and attach to the back “D” ring. In the event back “D” ring is not
accessible then use the front “D” ring.
Note: If the victim is nonresponse and possibly not breathing, make every attempt
possible to reach the victim to administer First Aid immediately
5 If the rescuer can reach the back “D” ring on the injured workers harness.
• Connect the rescue rope directly into the back “D” ring.
• Connect a tag line (if required) into the back “D” ring, ensuring that ground
personnel can effectively tag the victim clear of all obstructions.
If the rescuer cannot reach the back “D” ring on the victim’s injured workers
harness:
• Raise a switch stick and anchor hook to the rescue location on the structure.
• Connect the rescue rope to the anchor hook.
• Connect the rescue rope to the victim’s back “D” ring using the switch stick and
anchor hook.
• Connect a tagline (if required) to the rescue rope and allow it to slide down to
the anchor hook, ensuring that ground personnel can effectively tag the victim
clear of all obstructions.
Note: The tagline, if required, must not be connected directly on the victim.
Connecting directly to the victim will put undue stress on the body when tagging
out.
Rescuer # 2
6 Run the rope through a Figure 8 (see attached drawing above) anchored to the
tower leg (or through a karabiner and tie a munter hitch) to provide a friction
brake.
7 Raise (the rescuer on the tower and the rescuer on the ground) the injured worker
with the rescue rope together to take weight from the victim's fall arrest. If the
victim is connected to the rescue rope through an anchor hook, connect the
Page 5 of 8
karabiner from the victim's shock absorber onto the karabiner on the anchor hook.
This provides a safety connection in the event that the victim somehow comes
loose from the anchor hook.
8 Detach the victim from their fall arrest (i.e. cut the fall arrest rope/pole strap). The
full weight of the injured worker will then be taken on the rescue line controlled by
the rescuer # 2 on the ground.
9 Lower the victim, controlling the rate of descent. Tagging the victim around an
obstruction will have to be done by others (if available) on the ground.
10 Administer First Aid Immediately
Using the back “D” ring
Page 6 of 8
Method 2 – Helicopter
Note: All crew members assigned with the task of performing helicopter work must be
deemed competent in performing this procedure by means of theory and practical
applications and must have radio communication at all times. Crew will have tower
rescue kit pre-inspected and on site at ALL times in the event that a workplace
accident/injury occurs, resulting in a tower rescue to be performed.
Step Action
1 Call 911 and call for help from other workers
2 Helicopter picks up rescue kit, long line and grapple hook and two crew members.
Helicopter drops off Rescuer # 1 on tower with “rescue kit” and “tag line” and then
3
descends to the ground with Rescuer # 2.
Rescuer # 1 then calls to the victim, if the victim is “non” responsive, assess the
4
surroundings to identify causal factors
Rescuer # 1 then attaches the block to a steel member using the anchor sling,
taking into account the rescue descent path. Using tag line, lower the remainder of
the rescue kit to Rescuer #2 on the ground. Once rescue kit is lowered to the
5 ground, reeve the rescue rope through the block and attach to the back “D” ring. In
the event back “D” ring is not accessible then use the front “D” ring.
Note: If the victim is nonresponse and possibly not breathing, make every attempt
possible to reach the victim to administer First Aid immediately
If the rescuer can reach the back “D” ring on the injured workers harness.
• Connect the rescue rope directly into the back “D” ring.
• Connect a tag line (if required) into the back “D” ring, ensuring that ground
personnel can effectively tag the victim clear of all obstructions.
If the rescuer cannot reach the back “D” ring on the victim’s injured workers
harness:
• Raise a switch stick and anchor hook to the rescue location on the structure.
• Connect the rescue rope to the anchor hook.
6
• Connect the rescue rope to the victim’s back “D” ring using the switch stick and
anchor hook.
• Connect a tagline (if required) to the rescue rope and allow it to slide down to
the anchor hook, ensuring that ground personnel can effectively tag the victim
clear of all obstructions.
Note: The tagline, if required, must not be connected directly on the victim.
Connecting directly to the victim will put undue stress on the body when tagging
out.
7 Rescuer # 2, run the rope through a Figure 8 (see attached drawing above)
anchored to the tower leg (or through a karabiner and tie a munter hitch) to
provide a friction brake.
Page 7 of 8
with the rescue rope together to take weight from the victim's fall arrest. If the
victim is connected to the rescue rope through an anchor hook, connect the
karabiner from the victim's shock absorber onto the karabiner on the anchor hook.
This provides a safety connection in the event that the victim somehow comes
loose from the anchor hook.
Detach the victim from their fall arrest (i.e. cut the fall arrest rope/pole strap). The
9 full weight of the injured worker will then be taken on the rescue line controlled by
11 Run the rope through a Figure 8 anchored to the tower leg (or through a karabiner
and tie a munter hitch) to provide a friction brake.
with the rescue rope to take weight from the victim's fall arrest. If the victim is
connected to the rescue rope through an anchor hook, connect the karabiner from
the victim's shock absorber onto the karabiner on the anchor hook. This provides
a safety connection in the event that the victim somehow comes loose from the
anchor hook.
13 Detach the victim from their fall arrest (i.e. cut the fall arrest rope/pole strap). The
full weight of the injured worker will then be taken on the rescue line controlled by
15 Administer First Aid Immediately
Page 8 of 8
Document Description Bucket Rescue And Escape Procedure
Date: Mar. 24, 2015 Revision: 2 Revised by: D. Page Date: April 20, 2015
27.002 Bucket Rescue and Escape
Purpose
The purpose of this document is to describe methods of bucket rescue and escape in the event
of equipment failure and/or worker injury. Only qualified personnel who have successfully
completed Valard’s Fall Protection Training Program are considered competent to perform
rescue training. This training exercise shall be used in conjunction with a documented Fall
Protection Plan (FPP). All applicable rescue and escape methods must be practiced and
documented annually at a minimum.
Note: Prior to the commencement of any work requiring the use of a Fall Protection System, the
supervisor on site must ensure that all staff requiring the use of a Fall Protection System has
completed up to date Fall Protection Training. A Fall Protection Plan (FPP) MUST be
completed, reviewed and signed by ALL crew members completing this exercise. All rescue
plans should be based on the premise that the victim may be injured, unresponsive and/or
unable to help with the rescue. Victims must be rescued promptly. If the victim is not breathing,
you will have approximately 4 minutes before permanent brain damage can occur due to lack of
oxygen.
Completing a rescue plan will assist to ensure that a rescuer can quickly and safely assess the
situation, lower the victim to the ground, remove the victim from the bucket or Manbasket,
assess the condition of the victim, and apply appropriate first aid as required while waiting for
assistance to arrive on the scene.
The “FPP” should also factor in the equipment’s “emergency lowering device”, safe location to
lower the victim in the event of an incident, ability of the bucket itself (able to dump), rescue
equipment on site in the event bucket does not “dump”, 911 location, first aiders on site and the
role that each person will take (if more than 2) in the event of an incident.
Understand the use of the Emergency Power/Lower Controls device:

Understanding the unit and its functions/controls prior to use can be pivotal when a rescue
situation is necessary. Some bucket trucks are similar in design but Do Not always has
same functions or capabilities.
Emergency Power
Some systems consist of a hydraulic pump driven by a DC motor, which is powered by the
truck engine battery. The system is connected in parallel with the main pump and is designed
for non-continuous operation. Toggle switches are used to energize the system at the upper
and lower controls. Emergency power is only available when the primary power source is not
operating.
Caution: Do not operate emergency power longer than thirty (30) seconds at a time. After 30
seconds shut off power and wait a few minutes for motor to cool.
Lower Controls
The lower controls are mounted to the side of the turret or at the back of truck. A selector
switch or toggle will indicate upper or lower control operation. Toggle switches operate all
boom functions at reduced speeds. An emergency stop palm button is also provided. The
emergency stop kills power to the controls, control valve, and stops the chassis engine
The picture given below is a standard design lower control board. Labeled clearly with
functions
1.0 Bucket Rescue
1.1 Miller Rescue Rig

The Miller rescue device (Figure 3) is recommended for use on aerial devices that will not
articulate enough for the bucket(s) to reach the ground. The rescue device is comprised of
a set of rope blocks, which are mounted to the boom of an aerial device. The rope blocks
are stored in a Velcro enclosed vinyl bag. The rescue device must be installed on the
boom according to manufacturer’s instruction before the aerial operations begin.
1.1.1 Procedure
Step Action
1 Call for help, assess the situation to determine the “cause” of the incident and, if
“safe” to do so, lower the bucket(s) from the accident area and position against
one side of the truck clear of any obstructions.
2 Open the Miller rescue device kit allowing all of the rope to fall out onto the
ground. If you cannot reach the Rescue Rig it can be opened easily with a
switch stick.
Note: It is important that all of the rope falls onto the ground. Do not allow
the rope to become entangled on any object as this could hinder the free
movement of the rope and thus the rescue itself
3 Pull enough rope through the block and tackle to allow the snap hook to be
connected to the rear D-ring of the victim's full body harness and then
detach the victim's safety lanyard.
4 Move the upper boom 3 to 5 feet away from the side of the truck. This will
ensure adequate space for the victim to pass between the bucket(s) and the
side of the truck to the ground.
5 While positioned on the ground, pull down on the fall line and extract the victim
from the bucket (Figure 4).
6 Guide the victim to the ground and into a suitable position to administer appropriate
first aid.
Figure 3 Figure 4
2.0 Emergency Bucket Escape

If an aerial device loses power, either from engine failure or hydraulic system failure, the
worker in the bucket must have a safe method of reaching the ground. The following
emergency escape kits are designed for the safe evacuation of workers from an aerial
bucket, man basket or cable car. Two different kits are available for use.
1. Figure 8 Bucket Escape Kit
2. Miller Emergency Descent Kit
2.1 Key Considerations
• Be sure you have a clear descent path to the ground. If the disabled bucket is located
directly over live electrical apparatus the operator should not attempt to descend to
the ground using the methods detailed here. In this instance, another aerial device
should be used or the operator may be able to safely transfer to a nearby structure to
descend.
• If the aerial device is equipped with an emergency 12-volt back-up system it may be
utilized to safely return the booms into a stowed position, in the event of the hydraulic
pump or engine failure. It is not necessary to remove the worker from the bucket while
operating this back-up power supply.
Caution: Do not operate emergency power longer than thirty (30) seconds at a
time. After 30 seconds shut off power and wait a few minutes for motor to cool.
• Bucket escape procedures must be practiced and documented annually, so that
crewmembers will be ready for any emergency. Procedures should be practiced with
the bucket approximately 3 meters (10 feet) above the ground.
• Bucket escape kits must be inspected monthly to ensure all components and
instructions are included and kit is in good condition.
• Bucket escape kits are kept in a yellow vinyl bag and must be stored in a clean dry
location on the vehicle where it is readily available for emergency rescue.
• Bucket escape kits using the descent device should always be stored with the descent
device preset ready for use.

2.2 Method 1- Figure 8 Bucket Escape Kit
All new purchased Figure 8 escape kits will be as illustrated in Figure 5. The end
connector has a 5000 lb. gate capacity to prevent rollout. These kits are similar to the
Dedicated Rescue Kits and can also be used for pole top and tower rescue.
Figure 5: Figure 8 Bucket Escape Kit Contents

2.2.1 Using a Figure 8 Descent Device
Rigging the Figure 8 Device

To brake with the right hand, stand with the rope on the right side. Hold the figure 8 in your left
hand with the large hole away from you. Rig the Figure 8 device as follows:
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
Push a loop through the Pull the loop over the small Connect the small hole of the
large hole of the Figure end of the Figure 8. Figure 8 to your harness with a
8. karabiner.
Figure 6: Rigging the Figure 8
Controlling Rate of Descent

The rate of descent is based on the position and amount of tension on the tail of the
rope (Figure 7). To decrease speed of the descent, do any one of the following:
• Hold the rope tighter with your breaking hand,
• Push the rope tighter against the body,
• Wrap the rope around more body surface (buttocks), or
• Have ground personnel apply tension on the rope (this is recommended should the
person aloft slip or become unconscious).
Figure 7: Controlling the Rate of Descent

Locking Off a Figure 8

The Figure 8 device can be locked off (refer to Figure 8) to prevent descent before exiting
the bucket. While holding the rope tightly in your brake hand, move it towards the Figure
8. When the hand is about 8 in. (200 mm) away smoothly draw the rope over the top of
the Figure 8 and wedge it down between the Figure 8 and the standing line. One wrap will
support the weight of most people, and a second wrap will secure it. A third wrap held with
an overhand knot tied to the standing line can be used to provide additional security.
Figure 8: Locking off a Figure 8
2.2.2 Procedure
Use the Figure 8 kit to escape from an aerial device bucket as follows:
Step Action
1 Pull the "Escape Kit" up with an emergency rope (tag line), disengage your lanyard
from the anchor attachment point and attach the snap end of the escape rope.
2 Take the free snap end of the lanyard and, starting from the left side, thread it through
the harness loop (located beside the leg strap) or thread lanyard behind the leg
support strap. See Figures 9, 10 and 11 for details on lanyard positioning.
3 Bring the lanyard across the abdomen and thread it through the opposite side loop or
leg support strap.
4 Pull all the slack out of the lanyard and bring it back across the abdomen area to the
left side and snap it back onto itself, behind the leg support strap.
Note: The lanyard is now an attachment point for the Karabiner. Open the karabiner
and snap it around the double lanyard.
5 Check to make sure that the rope is free of tangles, twists, or knots and drop the rope to
the ground.
6 Pull enough slack through the Figure 8 toward the anchor to ensure the Figure 8 will
not bind on the lip of the bucket as you step out. Lock off the Figure 8 by passing the
down line over top of and across the Figure 8. Pull the line down firmly.
7 Use the step on the outside of the bucket as an aid, step over the edge of the bucket
making sure there is tension on the rope just before the Figure 8 descent device.
8 Unlock the rope by passing the down line back across the Figure 8. Give the rope a
quick snap to free it from the bite and slowly ease away and down from the bucket by
letting slack in the fall line of the rope. Your weight will cause the Figure "8" to slide
down the rope.
2.2.3 Positioning of Lanyard
Figure 9: Miller 8095
Thread lanyard (from behind) under the leg strap, below waist belt.
Figure 10: Jelco 700/735
Thread lanyard through the loop at the hip, above leg connector buckle.
Figure 11: Sala Exofit
Thread lanyard through loop at the shoulder/leg strap junction, above leg connector
2.3 Method 2 - Miller Emergency Escape Kit
The Miller Descent Kits are made up of components as indicated in Figure 12. Each kit
should contain proper operating and maintenance instructions.
Miller Emergency Escape Kits are available in the following lengths.
Length
15 m (50 ft.)
22 m (75 ft.)
Figure 12: Miller Escape Kit Contents

2.3.1 Using the Miller Descent Device

The rate of descent is based on the number of turns around the device and the amount of
tension you put on the fall line under the descent device. The rope must be wound around
the device as illustrated in Figure 13.
Key Points
• The Miller descent device must only be used with the cover securely in place.
• The Miller descent device is not reversible. If used upside down, the cover may come
off, leaving the rope free to uncoil.
Figure 13: Miller Descent Device
Minimum 2 turns for the first 175lb

1 additional turn for each 50 lb.
2.3.2 Procedure
Use the Miller Descent Kit to escape from an aerial device bucket as follows:
Step Action
1 Pull the emergency descent kit up using the emergency rope (tag line).
2 Remove the outer cover by unscrewing the large thumbnut to its stop position,
depress spring plunger and slide down the cover. Check to ensure the correct
amount of wraps is applied to the device (Figure 13). Reposition cover.
3 Lock the rope in place by putting a half hitch around the locking lug.
4 Attach the snap end of rescue rope to an approved anchor attachment point.
Note: Utilize the hose protector located at the end of the rope to protect the rope
from any sharp edges.
5 Drop the rope to the ground making sure the rope is free of tangles, twists and knots.
Ensure the rope extends all the way to the ground.
6 Secure crossover link to leg support straps or side D-rings of your full body harness
with connectors provided. Refer to Figures 9, 10 and 11 for connection locations.
7 Attach crossover link to Miller Descent Device using karabiner supplied and
disconnect lanyard from the anchor attachment on the aerial device.
8 Remove all but enough slack to allow you to climb out of the bucket. Lock the
device in place by putting a half hitch around the locking lug.
9 Unlock the rope and slowly ease away and down from the bucket by letting slack in
the fall line of the rope. Your weight will cause the descent device to slide down the
rope. Have ground personnel apply tension on the rope.
Document Description Spill Contingency Procedure
VALARD Created By: Hayley McNeil Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.005
Date: May 1, 2010 Revision: Revised by: Date:
The Spill Contigency Procedure is intended to assist Valard Contruction and their contractors
address commitments to the environment, safety, and legisliative compliance during the
construction on the Transmission Line projects and operation of the Work Camp.
The inadvertent release of oils, fuels, or gases used in heavy equipment and vehicles is a risk
associated with construction. These events may occur as a result of mechanical breakdowns or
accidents. Risks can be mitigated through established preventative practices and procedures,
use of properly maintained equipment and through the use of spill kits and other materials in the
event of an occurrence.
PREVENTION:
The Valard will take the following precautions as a minimum:
• Inspect all mechanical equipment prior to moving it onto the work site, and at regular
intervals once working on the site.
• Equipment must be mechanically sound with no oil leaks. If a leak is detected the
equipment will be removed from service until the leak has been fixed.
• Defective fueling equipment, fittings and filters must be replaced immediately when
identified.
• Maintenance and refueling will not be done within 100 Meters of watercourse or wetland.
• Fuel storage areas will be clearly marked and/or protected to prevent damage from
vehicles
• Waste oils and lubricants will be retained in a closed container, and disposed of in an
environmentally acceptable manner.
PREPAREDNESS:
Spill kits and shovels will be located on each piece of equipment and in all pickup trucks on site.
Clean-up materials will be accessible and an adequate inventory will be maintained in the areas
of fuel, oil, lubricant and/or chemical storage.
MSDS will be maintained for all hazardous material on the project and copies will be available
with the onsite medic, Valard’s office, mechanics service trucks, and storage sea-cans.
RESPONSE:
In the event of a spill it is of paramount importance that the discharge be stopped at its source
and that the spilled material be contained when it is safe to do so. Shovels and other had tools
should be used for immediate containment and/or channelization of the spill material into the
containment area.
In the event of a spill, the following actions should be initiated by the first person on the scene in
the listed orders:
• Notify the crew and stop operations if workers, the environment or infrastructure are
endangered then move a safe distance away up-wind or crosswind.
Page 1 of 3
• Contact the Construction Manager and notify them of the spill or hazardous material.
Details should include location, type of material and volume, your name and contact
number.
• Keep a safe distance and approach from up-wind. Look for WHMIS or TDG safety
marks to identify the spilled or hazardous material, and assess the hazards.
• Refer to Product MSDS, and/or call CANUTEC for information about appropriate
response.
• Report the hazardous material or spill to the appropriate authorities including
Environmental Protection Services, Valard Management, contractors and others in the
affected area.
• If safe to approach and you have the required PPE, stop the product flow and / or secure
the site. Act quickly to shut off pumps, close valves, etc.
• Warn other people in immediate vicinity. Take precautionary measures such as
enforcing “No Smoking” and extinguishing any flame or sources of ignition.
• Contain the spill. Block off drains, culverts, ditches. Surround product with dirt or clay,
peat, straw, sand, or commercial absorbents to assist with containment.
• Be aware of your surroundings. Do NOT allow yourself to get ‘overcome’ by toxic
fumes. ALWAYS have an escape route and Do NOT put yourself at unnecessary risk.
• Develop a remediation plan with regulatory approvals and commence recovery, clean-up
and restorative action as appropriate.
• If not safe, all workers must go directly to the muster point and remain there until further
direction is provided by the Construction Manager.
Spill Containment Procedures

Containment procedures shall be immediately initiated to limit the spread of the spill and to
minimize impacts on water bodies or other areas of the environmental concern, and to prevent
damage to property.
If the spill source is leaking a fuel truck, the tanker shall be pumped dry (into appropriate
containers or another tanker).
Culverts shall be blocked to limit the spill.
A shallow depression shall be excavated or a surface berm constructed in the path of a spill to
stop and contain the flow. If feasible, without unduly delaying containment efforts, topsoil shall
be salvaged and stored separately during excavation.
All free products shall be collected with a vacuum truck and transported to a hazardous waste
treatment facility.
Sorbent materials shall be applied to contain and recover spilled material.
Heavily contaminated soil and vegetation, as well as used sorbent material, shall be disposed of
at an approved hazardous waste treatment facility.
Traffic shall be minimized on contaminated soils.
Wildlife shall be restricted from entering the area affected by the spill. If necessary a fence will
be erected.
Page 2 of 3
Spills Adjacent to or in a Water Body

Berms or trenches shall be constructed to contain spilled product prior to entering into a water
body.
If spilled material enters into a water body, booms, skimmers and sorbents shall be deployed, if
feasible, to contain and recover spilled material.
Free Product shall be recovered.
Containment areas, including downstream shorelines, shall be cleaned up in consultation will
spill response specialists and the appropriate government agencies.
Spot Spills
Since impact from small spot spills can generally be minimized if immediate action is taken, all
small spot spills shall be cleaned up immediately and reported to the project HS&E advisor.
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Accessing Landowner’s Property/ROW
VALARD Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.006
Date: Sept. 23, 2010 Revision: 1 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 28, 2011
27.006 ACCESSING LANDOWNER’S PROPERTY/RIGHT OF WAY
This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring and to
be completed in a safe and efficient manner.
All crews are required to review and ensure the ROW (Right of Way) requirements as
specified in the contract for their particular job is known and permission is signed before
entering any land.
If access information is not indicated in your daily work package, obtain this information from
a foreman or supervisor prior to entering any property.
Report all damage to your foreman or supervisor immediately. The landowner should also be
contacted as repairs due to ruts can frequently be completed immediately thus leaving little
minimal or no damage.
General Guidelines
Stay on adjacent roadways if possible.
On new power line construction ensure all permits are in place and stay as close as possible
to the centre of the new line being constructed. Most lines offer a maximum allowance of 30
(thirty) feet wide. Fifteen (15) feet on each side of the pole is the maximum traveling area
allowance. If you are unable to stay within this ROW area a foreman or supervisor must be
contacted and permission to operate equipment outside the designated ROW obtained. ( See
Permission Form Next Page)
If there are any damages that require repairs the repair Form is to be used and a copy
forwarded to the Edmonton office.
A Temporary Storage Yard, Access and Work Space Agreement Form is to be completed
prior to accessing any landowner’s property, signed and copy sent to the Edmonton office.
Page 1 of 4
LAND USE
PERMISSION FORM
I give Valard Construction LP permission to enter my property to complete work as required on

the powerline system on my land for the following work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I will provide Valard with an access and egress point and identify them prior to work
commencing.
Valard will after the work is completed:

A. Insure that there is no damage to the property (in cases where there may be damage)
Valard will inform the landowner of the damage and will endeavour to repair the
damaged land to its original condition.
B. Any ruts caused by the equipment shall be repaired prior to Valard leaving the
site or if agreed to will return on an agreed date to perform the repairs.
C. If a third party is required to perform any work to correct damage property then
that will be agreed upon before the crew leaves the site. The foreman of the
crew will discuss this with the landowner and have an agreement signed by both
parties.
Landowner;___________________ Signature:________________________
Print name
Valard Representative: _________________ Signature;____________________

Print name
Date:__________________
Page 2 of 4
REPAIR AGREEMENT
Valard will repair the following damage:
A.
B.
C.
D.
Agreement on the repairs as listed above:

Valard Rep:___________________ Signature:________________________
Landowner ___________________ Signature: _______________________
Repairs completion sign off:
I ______________________have checked the repairs and found them acceptable.

Landowner’s name (printed)
Signature:_________________________________ Date:______________________
Page 3 of 4
Temporary Storage Yard, Access and Work Space Agreement
I,_________________________________ of _____________________________ in the province of

Print name town/city
_________________, being the registered owner of the following lands:
Legal Description: _______________________________
_______________________________
_______________________________
and/or.
Address: _______________________________
_______________________________
_______________________________
In the consideration of the sum of ________________________________ Dollars paid to me/us by

Valard Construction LP, to access and utilize the area as identified in red on the attached sketch.
Valard Construction LP will indemnify the owner of the said lands against all actions or claims that
may be lawfully brought against the owner by reason of any activities carried out by Valard
Construction LP or any person claiming through or under Valard Construction LP, in the exercise of
any or all the rights hereby granted.
It is further understood that the subject agreement is temporary and will expire on the __________
Day of ________________, 2011.
Valard Construction LP will be responsible for any damages that may be caused to fences, property
and/or crops as a result of our activities.
Dated at: __________________________ in the Province of _________________________
This_________ day of ___________________, 2011.
Landowner__________________________ Valard’s Representative_______________________

Print Name Print Name
______________________________________ ______________________________________
Landowner’s Signature Valard’s Rep. Signature
Page 4 of 4
Document Description Equipment Ice Crossing
Date: Jan. 13, 2006 Revision: 1 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Mar. 8, 2011
27.007 EQUIPMENT CROSSING ON ICE
The purpose of this procedure is to:

• Specify rules of good safety practice for all Valard employees and contractors
engaged in operations on ice covers;
• Provide information on the thickness of ice required to support moving and
stationary loads;
• Specify methods for determining ice thickness and quality
Final decisions about ice crossings have to be made on site by an experienced

individual. Before any equipment crosses over any water course, the thickness of the ice
must be checked by cutting a hole in it. NOTE: Bulldozers will not use blade or ripper
tooth to check ice. The minimum ice thickness of clear blue ice for continuous travel is
as follows:
• The first 1,000 kilograms (2,200 pounds) require 14 centimetres (5.5 inches) of
ice
• Each additional 1,000 kilograms require 4 centimetres (1.6 inches)
• After 50 centimetres (19.7 inches) total thickness of ice, each additional 10,000
kg (22,000 pounds) needs 16 centimetres (6.3 inches) of ice
• Therefore, 1 5,000 kilogram (11,000 pounds) service truck needs 30 centimetres
(10 inches) of blue ice
• D3 Cat needs approximately 50 centimetres (20 inches) of blue ice
• D5H Cat need approximately 60 centimetres (24 inches) of blue ice
• D6 LGP needs approximately 65 centimetres (26 inches) of blue ice
• D65 LGP Komatsu approximately 75 centimetres (30 inches) of blue ice
• D7 LGP approximately 80 centimetres (31 inches) of blue ice
• D85 Komatsu approximately 85 centimetres (33 inches) of blue ice
Preventive measures and considerations to ensure safe procedures have to do with

effective weight – bearing ice. Ultimately, one must consider the following:
• White ice is only half as effective as Blue ice

• If water lies between layers of ice, use only the depth of the top layer of ice
• A vehicle speed of less than 30 kilometres an hour is recommended to avoid
wave buildup under the ice
• Add 20% to above thickness for saline ice
• Determine where the channels are on rivers and check periodically. These areas
will be first to thin when temperatures warm up and water starts to run
• A river will continually eat at the bottom of the ice bridge, so the thickness must
be checked before every crossing
Determining ice thickness

• Prior to use, the ice should be measured to determine whether its effective
thickness is adequate to support the expected load. The table below should be
used as a guide to the required thickness for the loads involved.
Page 1 of 3
• To initially determine effective ice thickness, the rule of thumb "one inch (2.5 cm) of
clear blue ice for every thousand pounds (450 kg)" may be used.
LOADS ON BLUE ICE
Required Minimum Description of Safe Moving

Ice Thickness in Load
inches
4 One person on foot
5 One Snowmobile
7 A single passenger automobile
8 A 2 ½ Ton Truck
9 A 3 ½ Ton Truck
10 A 7 to 8 Ton Truck
14 A 10 Ton Truck
19 A 20 Ton truck
24 A 30 Tom Truck
Caution
30 A 40 Ton Truck
• Ice that is less than six inches (15 cm) thick should not be used for any crossing.
Because of natural variations, thickness may be less than 2 inches (5 cm) in some
areas.
• The effective thickness can vary considerably in an ice cover. In particular,
dangerously thin areas can occur due to currents in the covers of rivers and
estuaries, and on lakes near the inlet or outlet of rivers and streams. Careful
attention should be given to reduced ice thickness close to shorelines and around
ridges and leads.
• The thickness can be determined by drilling test holes spaced at a maximum of
50 feet (15 m) apart in rivers, and 100 feet (30 m) apart on a lake.
• Crossings should be checked for ice thickness once a week when average air
temperatures vary between -15 and -5 degrees Celsius; and daily when the
temperature is above -5 degrees Celsius. Checks can be less frequent when ice
thickness substantially exceeds requirements. A new hole should be drilled for
each ice measurement.
• Ice that is no longer supported by water, due to lowering water levels, may be too
weak to support the loads to be applied; conversely, a rising water level can result
in the formation of two ice layers with an intervening water layer. Ice thickness
tests will reveal these conditions.
Operating precautions
• Following are a number of general precautions which should be taken when testing
for ice thickness or crossing ice covers:
(a) All persons involved in operations over ice covers should be familiar with
the hazards involved, the precautions to be taken and the basic rescue
techniques required in case of a breakthrough.
Page 2 of 3
(b) Single persons or single vehicles should not venture onto an ice cover when
there is no help at hand.
(c) When testing, persons on foot should be securely roped together, with
minimum spacing of 50 feet (15 m).
(d) Light vehicles used during test periods and initial build-up should be
equipped with an extended frame of logs to provide support if the vehicles
break through the ice cover.
(e) A rope at least 50 feet (15 m) long, or equivalent to water depth, with a float,
may be attached to test vehicles as an aid to marking and recovery.
(f) Vehicle doors and cab hatches should be removed or lashed open; seat
belts must NOT be worn.
(g) Adequate spacing must be maintained between vehicles; it is
recommended that an interval of at least 100 feet (30 m) be observed.
(h) Vehicle speed should not normally exceed 10 m/h (15 km/h) in order to
avoid the effects of the hydrodynamic wave, nor should speed be less than
1 m/h (1.5 km/h) in order to avoid the effects of stationary load.
(k) Equipment required for rescue operations, such as "mats" (chained or wire-
linked small logs or heavy planks as a platform for rescue vehicles) jacks,
hoists, etc., should be available near by.
(l) Frequently it is the second vehicle in a convoy which encounters ice failure
problems. Before a second heavily loaded vehicle proceeds along the ice
bridge, it is advisable to have it preceded by a more lightly loaded vehicle to
check the route.
Steps:
1. Review hazards and record on the tailboard with a plan to address them.
2. Identify area of crossing (to be determined by experienced person)
3. Check condition of ice (blue or white)
4. Worker to wear PFD and attached to a 50 foot rope.
5. Second worker must be present (no one is to walk on ice alone).
6. Drill hole to determine thickness of ice on river every 30 feet.
7. Using Table calculate load rating of ice.
8. Cross the ice with equipment that is less than the load rating of the ice.
9. Test ice whenever the weather warms up above freezing.
10. Cross the ice at no more than 15 km per hour and not less than 1.5 km per
hour.
11. Insure adequate spacing between vehicles.
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Material Placement in Laydown Yard
27.011 Material Placement in Laydown Yard

This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from
occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner.
Safety Equipment required;

• Hard hat
• Safety glasses
• Protective boots
• High visibility vest or outerwear
• Fall arrest equipment to be worn above 6 feet.
Steps:
1. Write tailboard, discuss and sigh off.
2. Setup equipment Crane/Boom truck and/or Zoom boom/Forklift.
3. Flagg off area where material is being lifted.
4. Install outrigger pads under the equipment’s outriggers.
5. When installing out rigger pads insure pads are placed under the outrigger
properly.
6. If ground is unstable and outrigger pushes the pad into the ground, lift outrigger
and install more pads until the machine is stable.
7. If at any time the vehicle becomes unstable while working on the job, stop and add
more pads to prevent the vehicle from becoming unstable to the point of tipping
over.
8. All workers are responsible for the vehicle setup. Pay attention to the stability of the
machine at all times, and let the operator know of any potential problems.
9. Unload material from truck deck. Fall arrest to be worn above 6 feet.
10. If material is large a minimum of 2 (two) slings rated for the load are to be used.
11. Place material on dunnage. (Insure dunnage is placed in position to insure sling
placement is not obstructed by other material or dunnage).
12. Material must be placed in a stable manner.
13. Clean up area and sign off on tailboard as completed.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Material Placement in Laydown Yard
Hazards
Vehicle tipping.
• Make sure outrigger pads are being used. Once outriggers are down swing
boom over the side of the vehicle to check stability.
• When lifting loads with the boom extended out, keep the load close to the
ground until load can be safely handled.
Material Damage.
• When laying down material place it on sufficient sized dunnage to be able to
support the load.
• Do not place more that 2 pieces of material on each other.
• Dunnage must be placed in between each piece.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Hauling Metal Structures
27.012 HAULING METAL STRUCTURES
Personal Protective Equipment Required;

• Hard hat
• Safety Glasses
• Gloves
• High Visibility Vest
HAZARDS AND CONTROL MEASURES:

Loading Steel
• Control method:
• Make sure proper rigging is being used.
• Check load charts to make sure weights are within lifting capacities of boom
truck.
• Stay clear of load when lifting and lowering into place.
• Place stakes to prevent material from falling of the sides of the trailer.
Unloading Steel
• Control method: Make sure proper rigging is being used.
• Check load charts to make sure weights are within lifting capacities of boom
truck.
• Stay clear of load when lifting and lowering into place.
SEQUENCE OF WORK
Complete tailboard, discuss and sign off.
1. Loading of Steel
• Set up Hi-boy
• Use sling/shackle to lift structure
• Place barriers on trailer sides to prevent material from falling off while loading.
• Driver must have the exact directions to worksite.
Hauling
• Tie down and secure load as per Load securement standards
• Arrange for travel permits if required (long/heavy load)
• If traveling on Ice Roads Follow Ice Road Chart Ice must be of sufficient
thickness.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Hauling Metal Structures
• Door must not be closed

• Speed must be maintained as per guidelines.
2. Traveling on highways.
• Check load weight and to ensure unit is not overloaded.
(Refer to Valard Safe Work Practice re “Vehicles”
• Speed limits must be followed
• If provincial borders are to be crossed insure that permits are available.
3. Traveling on Right of Way.

• If right of way is snow covered have tire chains available
4. Unloading Steel
• Clear snow from work site.
• Set up Hi-Boy
• Setup outriggers c/w outrigger pads
• Use sling/shackle to unload steel
• Lay down bundles on blocking
• Lay out bundles to minimize moving steel for assembly
HAZARDS AND CONTROL MEASURES:

Loading Steel
- Control method: Make sure proper rigging is being used. Check load charts to
make sure weights are within lifting capacities of boom truck. Stay clear of load
when lifting and lowering into place. PPE required -hard hat and steel toe
boots.
Unloading Steel
- Control method: Make sure proper rigging is being used. Check load charts to
make sure weights are within lifting capacities of boom truck. Stay clear of load
when lifting and lowering into place.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Installing Augured Footings
Date: Sept. 2011 Revision: Revised by: Date:
27.013 AUGERED FOOTING PROCEDURE

Safety Equipment required:

1. Safety Glasses, hardhat, and boots
2. Fall Arrest equipment and temporary barriers
3. Hi-visibility vest
Tools and Equipment required:

1. Track mounted augering machine
2. Rebar cage
3. Various formworks depending on soil conditions e.g. masonite sheets, sonotube, corrugated
steel culverts, casings, etc.
4. Footing framework and anchor bolt template
5. Slings
6. Shackles (sized for the weight being lifted)
Steps:
1. Complete tailboard.
2. If hold off is required, make sure switching is in place.
3. Setup augering machine and crane at site, level complete with outrigger pads where
applicable.
4. If working near existing power lines the crane must grounded.
5. Attach slings to the identified attachment points
6. Only one signalman is to be used.
Because of the hazards associated with aerial devices coming in contact with overhead
energized conductors, the operator of any aerial device MUST always stand on the
designated operator’s platform while performing any operation which could potentially
bring the aerial device within the limits of approach of energized conductors. All other
personnel MUST remain clear of the vehicle, the boom, the winch line and any of its
accessories while the aerial device is being operated unless proper protective equipment
is utilized.
To ensure that the “Limits of Approach” are not encroached a “Dedicated Observer”
must be appointed and positioned to aid the operator in performing these tasks. All
vehicles must be suitably grounded prior to any hoisting activities in close proximity to
energized conductors.
The following hazards must be addressed:

1. GRAVITY
• Suspended loads
• Falling materials
Page 1 of 4
• Working within the “drop zone”

• Hoisting equipment
2. MECHANICAL
• working near rotating machinery
• Failure of rigging equipment
Prepare a tailboard job plan identifying:

• The tasks to be performed
• The potential hazards associated with the job
• Emergency response plan
• Crew member duties
Before augering is to begin gas, electrical and other services in and near the area to be
excavated must be accurately located and marked. A Dig Monitor shall be identified to
observing the digging operation.
When working under or in the vicinity of live conductors, all equipment must be grounded and
the safe limits of approach to the live conductor must be maintained at all times. A qualified
dedicated observer and signal the operator whenever the equipment approaches these
specified distances as per provincial legislation.
Particular care is to be given to moving parts such as the kelly bar and auger of the digging
machine. The swing area of the auger machine must be clearly identified and workers are to be
kept clear at all times.
A level area extending at least 1m (3 ft.) from the upper edge of the excavation must be kept
clear of equipment, excavated soil, and rock and construction material.
Before starting work, visual barriers must be installed to identify clearly the safe work area(s) for
the worker, and/or to identify hazardous area(s) for people not involved in the work.
If a person could fall into an excavation that is more than 3 m (10 ft.) deep, a temporary barrier
or a protective cover must be installed.
The barrier must be at least 1.1 m (3.5 ft.) high and a minimum 1.8 m (6 ft.) from the edge.
Access within this area will be permitted only with the use of an approved fall protection system.
See sketches below for approved anchorages of the fall arrest equipment.
Furthermore, no worker shall enter an augered excavation unless confined space entry
procedures are followed.
The steel liner must extend a minimum of 0.6 m (2 ft.) above ground level, be supported on two
sides by steel wire rope, extend to within 1.2 m (4 ft.) of the point where work is to be done, and
the distance between the liner and perimeter of the hole must not be greater than 100 mm (4
in.).
Page 2 of 4
If protective covering is used it must completely cover the opening, be securely fastened,
identified as covering an opening and be capable of supporting all loads it may be subjected to.
The following steps combined with the use of the framework will allow for the safe installation of
the tower foundations. The framework is used for securing the anchor bolts and the circular
form. It consists of a main frame, a small frame, an anchor bolt template and a bolt support
plate. The template is bolted or nailed to the bottom of the small frame, which in turn is fastened
to the main frame by means of clamps. The main frame is generally located and supported on
four stakes (Peg anchors). The frame set must be properly designed to ensure that the
elevation of the anchor bolts is right with respect to the finished concrete.
1. Auger the footing hole to the required depth in accordance with the design. All workers to
maintain a safe distance from the rotating shaft and auger.
2. Install the main frame in accordance with the procedure. Check its horizontal and vertical
location.
3. Install formwork. The form is set flush with the top of the main frame, which usually
coincides with the top of concrete; and extended 0.3 m to 1.3 m (12 in. to 4ft. ).), into the
ground depending upon the soil conditions. When masonite sheets are used, the circular
length is pre-calculated and the nailing positions marked. The sheets are nailed to the main
frame at eight locations to form a circle. The joints of the sheets are overlapped approx. 0.3
m to 0.4 m (12 in. to 16 in.).
4. Sling the crane to the attachment points on the rebar cage and install the rebar cage.
Maintain specified concrete cover and secure it in position.
5. Install the small frame and the anchor bolt template.
6. Install the hopper at the augered hole and pour the concrete. The hopper is usually hung on
the concrete truck chute. Pour the concrete up to approximately 1/3 hole depth then back fill
the space between the form and the ground with soil. Continue pouring until the concrete
level reaches approx. 0.6 m to 0.9 m (2 ft. to 3 ft.) below finished grade.
Page 3 of 4
7. Installation of two to four anchor bolts, push the bolts vertically into the concrete through the
template. The anchor bolts are held in place by either the template or the bolt support plate
8. Check that the elevation and center of anchor bolts are correct.
9. For anchor tower footings, where a large number of anchor bolts are used, the small frame,
template, bolt support plate and anchor bolts are pre-assembled as a whole set. Pour
concrete to the elevation near the bottom of anchor bolts; install the small frame set, and
protect the bolt threads from concrete spatters, then bring the concrete to grade to grade.
10. Finish the concrete surface using a wooden or magnesium trowel. Do not over finish, as it
will bring a layer of mortar to the surface, which is not desirable. The concrete under the
template, where the shoe footing is to be seated, should be level and flat. In the other areas
the concrete should be sloped away from the edges of the template to facilitate drainage.
Page 4 of 4
Document Description Installing Power Installed Anchors
Date: Sept. 2009 Revision: 1 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 7, 2011
27.014 INSTALLING POWER INSTALLED ANCHORS


1. Digger truck c/w outrigger pads
2. Anchor attachment head and anchor installation wrench
3. Power Installed Anchor (PISA)
Steps:
2. Setup digger at site, level complete with outrigger pads. Operator must be trained and
competent.
3. If working near existing power lines the digger must grounded.
4. Remove earth auger from the Kelly bar.
5. Install anchor wrench attachment head to the Kelly bar
6. Attach anchor installation wrench to head and load PISA and guide to anchor location.
7. Digger operator to begin installation (all crew members must be clear of area).
8. Install PISA to proper depth and digger operator lifts installation wrench bar slowly out. While
lifting the wrench out the operator must adjust the boom to limit the amount of swing when the
wrench clears the PISA. All crew members must be clear of swing area.
9. If no further anchor installation required, reinstall the earth auger and stow the equipment.
Worker is
too close.
Proper distance.
Page 1 of 1
Document Description Anchor Pull Testing
VALARD Created By: Andy Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.018
Date: Jan. 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:
27.018 Anchor Pull-Test procedure
This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards involved in pull-testing anchors
using a crawler.
Because of the hazards involved with this procedure one person will be charge.
All equipment will be inspected before the start of the pull and at regular intervals.
All tests must be documented
A customer representative will be present during the procedure.
All equipment shall be certified by the manufacturer.
Safety Equipment Required;
• Hard hat
• Safety Glasses
• Safety Boots with green triangle and Omega sign.
• FR clothing
• Gloves
1. 750 John Deere crawler

2. Dynamometer Certified within 12 months of use
3. Shackles and slings with Certification
4. Black felt marker
Steps:
1. Tailboard or safe work plan.

2. Prior to using any crawler, ensure that all crew members are cautioned about working
around these units to eliminate the hazards associated with crushing injuries from tracks
or blades.
3. Setup crawler in front of lead on anchor Attach dynamometer to sling on blade, with sling
to shackle on anchor rod.
4. Tighten sling and get 45 degree matching angle on rod .
5. Mark rod at ground line with a black felt pen.
6. Gradually bring up pressure
7. Ensure that all of shackles are secure.
8. Increase pressure gradually at 25 percent holding at each step for 1 minute.
9. If anchor creep exceeds 4 inches [100mm] before 100% of load is attained stop
remove and reinstall anchor.
10. Side guy anchors will be pulled to 10,000 lbs.[44.482kN]
11. Deflections and dead-ends will be pulled to 20,000 lbs.[88.964kN]
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Anchor Pull Testing
Date: Jan. 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:
12. This will be held for 2 minutes.

13. When the pull is complete slowly release the tension.
14. Disconnect all slings and shackles.
15. Clean up worksite.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Guy Wire Modification
VALARD Created By: S. Eirickson Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.019
Date: Nov. 2009 Revision: 1 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan.7, 2011
27.019 GUY WIRE MODIFICATION WITH EPOXY RODS PROCEDURE
Note: The following procedures will be used to address some of the issues encountered
during construction. At all times, the lineman will use fall arrest, and when needed a second
point of attachment. All tools and hardware will be inspected and used in the appropriate
manner. Care and consideration will be given to all tools/hardware while performing the
work as well as during transport to/from the job. The environmental impact will be minimized
and a neat and tidy work area will be left behind.

• Safety glasses, boots, and hardhats
• Hi-Vis Vests
• Harnesses, lanyards
• Lineman belts, pole straps
Steps:
1. Travel to work area.
2. Once onsite, a tailboard will be conducted and all workers will sign on.
3. Guy wires will be jacked from ground and the preform released.
4. Workers will jack down on guy wires and disconnect when slack.
5. Guy wire will be lowered to ground on hand line where ground crew will attach
epoxy rod and pull back up to lineman.
6. Lineman will re-attach to pole.
7. Lineman will climb down pole, guy wires will be re-pulled, and new performs will
be used to secure to anchor.
Page 1 of 1
Document Description Guy Wire Relocation
Date: Nov. 2009 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:
27.020 MOVING GUY WIRES TO NEW LOCATION ON POLE PROCEDURE
Note: The following procedures will be used to address some of the issues
encountered during construction. At all times, the lineman will use fall arrest, and
when needed a second point of attachment. All tools and hardware will be inspected
and used in the appropriate manner. Care and consideration will be given to all
tools/hardware while performing the work as well as during transport to/from the job.
The environmental impact will be minimized and a neat and tidy work area will be left
behind.

• Hi-Vis Vests
Steps:
2. Once on site, a tailboard will be conducted and signed by all workers.
3. Guy wires will be jacked from ground and the preform will be released.
4. Workers will jack down the guy wires and release them when slack.
5. A lineman will climb the wood pole and disconnect the guywire.
6. Guy wire will be lowered to ground using a hand line.
7. Lineman will disassemble guy attachment hardware that will be used on
the new location on the pole.
8. Lineman will measure down to new location and mark pole for drilling.
9. Ground crew will pull drill up to lineman who will proceed to drill new holes
in pole.
10. Guy fitting will be reattached in new location, tightened and bonded.
11. Ground crew will then pull guy wire back up to the lineman who will
reattach in new location.
12. Lineman will then climb down pole and ground crew will re-pull guys and
attach to anchors using new preforms.
Page 1 of 1
Document Description Single Lift Lifting
Date: Nov. 2009 Revision: Revised by: Date:
27.024 SINGLE LIFT LIFTING PROCEDURE

Note: The following lifting procedures will assume that all site preparation work has been
completed and the mono pole is assembled.
• Safety glasses
• Boots
• Hard hats
• Hi-Vis Vests
Steps:

2. Conduct daily tailboard with crew and sign-off.
3. Set-up and level lifting crane using crane mats and pads to crane operator’s
requirements. Lift radius to be within the safe working dimensions as per the lift
plans.
4. Perform visual inspection of the rated slings and shackles and check for any
signs of wear or damage.
5. Choke pole at the predetermined positions using a shackle and attach tag lines.
6. Lower load block and hook sling to crane.
7. Slowly raise crane load block till there is 0.6m to 1.5m of slack in the sling.
Signalman will stop lift at this point and crew will insert softeners to prevent
sharp edges from rubbing against sling.
8. Signalman will direct crane operator to start hoisting again until sling is taut.
9. Hoisting will be stopped to do one last check to ensure proper positioning of the
choker and that the softeners are in place.
10. Once the rigging is secure the lift will begin with the signalman directing the
crane operator to start hoisting pole.
11. The crane operator will boom-up, raising the pole from its blocking.
12. Using boom-up, load line up, and swing, the crane operator will raise the pole to
vertical while watching signals from the signalman.
13. Once vertical and standing on base plate, slowly raise till pole is completely off
the ground.
14. Once signalman is satisfied the load is under complete control, he will signal the
operator to swing the pole over the foundation.
15. When pole is in position, the signalman will signal the crane operator to lower
pole onto bolt cluster.
16. Crew will secure pole by fastening nuts snug tight to anchor.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Single Lift Lifting
Date: Nov. 2009 Revision: Revised by: Date:
17. When pole is secured, signal man will signal crane operator to lower load line,
releasing tension from sling
18. Crew will unhook sling from pole. Crane operator will retract boom and
demobilize crane to the next site.
*A tailboard will be used at each structure site to identify site conditions, hazards,
workers roles & responsibilities, and emergency contacts.*
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Tower Erection/Paneling & Topping
27.031 TOWER ERECTION/PANELING & TOPPING PROCEDURE

2. Fall Arrest equipment.
3. hi-visibility vest

1. Crane c/w outrigger pads
2. Slings
4. Hand lines
Steps:
1. Check weather conditions Maximum wind speed 30 km per hour
3. If hold off is required make sure switching is in place.
4. Setup cranes at site, level complete with outrigger pads
5. If working near existing power lines the crane must grounded and bonded to the tower
creating an Equal Potential work zone.
is utilized.
energized conductors. The minimum limit of approach for 240 kV for un-insulated
equipment is 5 metres.

1. GRAVITY
• Suspended loads
• Hoisting equipment /tools /material aloft
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Tower Erection/Paneling & Topping
2. MECHANICAL
• Securing of objects on load hooks of hand lines
• Use of tool bags

• Crewmembers
The following steps will provide a guide for the safe and efficient handling of structures with
consideration for the proper use of the equipment available.
• Crane operator must be trained and competent in its operation and use.
• Equipment must have current certification and visually inspected all related lifting
hardware.
• Select a sling having suitable length and a rated capacity for the load it is lifting.
Note: Check manufacturer’s identification tag for capacity.
• Slings shall not be pulled from under loads when the load is resting on the sling.
• Tag lines must be used
• Lift structure and place it on a support to prevent it from falling.
• Only one person to be in charge of lift.
• Stay clear of load and pinch points
The following steps combine the assembly and erection of the tower as it is being built from
the ground up. This procedure allows for the use of a smaller crane because the loads are
much smaller and can be guided into place from structure.
1. If lift is near existing energized power lines crane must be grounded and bonded to the
system. Hold off is required.
2. Assemble the 2 longitudinal faces of one section (normally a 20 foot section) i.e. 2 panels.
3. Lift the panel onto the stub legs (first section) or the splice plates (subsequent sections).
4. Bolt the panel to the stub legs or the splice plates.
5. Lift the opposite face and bolt it to the stub legs or splice plates.
6. Web in the transverse faces.
7. Lift structure and place on pads for bolt up. (Crane and slings must be sized for the load)
8. Once all panels are secure, remove crane boom from the area.
9. To install the box section with the arms a larger crane will be needed.
10. Install a yellow or red flag on the crane head as a visual barrier.
11. Install warning flags around the crane on ground level as a warning barrier for workers.
12. Install a four-legged sling to the top corners of the section and connect it to the crane hook.
13. Tag lines may be attached to the bottom of the section to aid in guiding it when required.
Bolts may be placed in nosebags attached to this section.
14. The top of the tower is attached to bottom section and crane is removed.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Structure Body Erection V1S/V1L
VALARD Created By: B. Szumik Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.032
Date: Sept. 23, 2010 Revision: Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 7, 2011
27.032 Procedure: Body Erection ERCT 1 (Erection of Body and Arms for
V1S and V1L Structures)
Scope:
The scope of this document deals with:
• Erection of the body and arms
Mark-up data:
Activity Assignment
Erection of column and wing assembly Crew:
Canadian Union of Skilled Workers-
Supervisor/Worker
Operating Engineers
Tool /Equipment List:

200 Metric ton crane Rated steel and nylon slings Impact wrench and torque
limiting device
65 ton tailing crane Extension cords Ground Chains
Crew trucks Spud wrenches & bull pins Sockets and hand tools
Tag lines ¾ inch bolts Ground probes
Generator or inverter
Skills/Experience/Training
Qualified operators Rigging competencies Knowledge/experience at

Electrical Awareness tower erection
Equipment competency Electrical Awareness Off road/ROW driving
experience
Communications:
• Direction from Structure Senior Foreman to the Erection Foreman
Deliverables:
• Coded Time reports daily
• Construction Crew to torque and mark bolts
• QC document
Access and Permits:

• Bruce Nuclear security clearance as required.
• Maps and road restriction information.
Prerequisites:
• Foreman has work package.
• All materials at site
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Structure Body Erection V1S/V1L
Reporting:
• Completed timesheet “coded” ERCT 1 daily
• Submit tailboard daily
List of activities in sequence:

• Set up cranes at location on provided pads.
• Tower pick will be rigged at predetermined points, tag lines will be attached
• Signal person will appoint two persons to control the taglines.
• Appointed spotter will be in place maintaining clearance.
• The structure will be inspected prior to lift for loose pieces.
• The load is attached to the crane.
• The tailing crane will be attached to the bottom section of the lift.
• Crane one and crane two will both take weight of the load, signal person will direct both
units.
• Crane one and two will work in unison until the structure is 10-15 feet in the air.
• Crane two will maintain ground clearance at the bottom of the structure while crane one
continues hoisting.
• Once the structure is hanging vertical crane two will be released.
• Freed rigging will be removed.
• Linemen are in place in the tower to accept the structure at the point of connection.
• The linemen will signal the crane to bring the structure into place.
• A ground will be used to bleed off the induction from the load prior to connection.
• The signal person will lower the load into place to make the connection.
• Once the splice is developed and sufficiently bolted the crane will be released.
• The line man will disconnect the crane from the load.
• Line crew will finish bolting and torquing.
• Follow bolt specifications on Lockwell drawings.
• Tighten the bolts in the sections to torque.
Contingencies:
• Missing pieces of steel will be documented at site by crew Forman on material inventory
sheet (part of the bill of lading package), all documents will be returned at the end of the
shift and submitted to the office.
• Lifts may be delayed upon change in weather.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Installation of Rider Poles
27.035 INSTALLATION OF RIDER POLES

1. Climbing belt and choker strap
2. Hi- visibility vests
3. Safety glasses
4. Boots
5. Gloves
Equipment required;
1. Ropes
2. Blocks
3. Steel Slings
4. Shackles For the rider arm.
5. Rope Assorted lengths
6. Nodwell, Excavator, one ton truck, Bulldozer
7. Boom Truck
Steps;
1. Calculated the height of the energized circuit from the ground.
2. Insure that one-call has identified and underground lines etc.
3. Attach reflective yellow/black markers on rider poles.
4. Check voltage of lines to be crossed.
5. Determine the height of the poles keeping minimum clearances as required by code.
6. Combine the two measurements to determine the length of the poles required to
meet this. (Allow for deep setting as well as pole height for decking).
7. Install rider poles as per SWP 26.002 Electrical Work maintaining limits of Approach
at all times.
8. Raise cross arms with boom truck or by carrying up a sling and deck blocks using a
climbing belt with choker strap.
9. Attach the deck block at the top of the pole and one 3 ft above ground level. Run
rope through both blocks to the ground and attach it to the rider arm.
10. Use dozer or Nodwell to pull the rope to raise arm into place. Maintain limits of
Approach at all times.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Installation of Rider Poles
11. Worker is to maintain his position and be seen by the operator at all time. He must
be knowledgeable in hand signals; all others are to stay clear of this activity.
12. After raising the arm, worker will attach a steel sling from the main pole to the rider
arm with a shackle. The steel sling must be on the face of the pole to prevent
contact with the conductor.
13. Lower all rigging equipment with a hand line.
14. Restore the environment as much as is possible to its original state.
15. Clean up work area after work is completed
Page 2 of 2
Document Description
Stringing Over Rider Poles
27.036 Procedure for Stringing Over Rider Poles
This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards involved in stringing conductor over
rider poles.
Because of the hazards involved with this procedure one person will be charge.
All crewmembers involved will attend a safe work plan [tailboard]
Traffic will be controlled at all times
If crossing energized lines, lines will be de-energized or re-closer devices will be
disabled.

• Safety Glasses
• Hardhat
• Boots
• Fall Arrest equipment
• Fire Retardant Clothing
• High Visibility clothing
• Rubber Gloves
• Live Line pole tongs
• Road Signage

1. Conductor pulling equipment [dozer or nodwell]
2. Rope pulled over rider arms
3. Barriers or traffic cones
Steps:
1. Tailboard or safe work plan.
2. Prior to using any crawler, ensure that all crewmembers are cautioned about
working around these units to eliminate the hazards associated with crushing
injuries from tracks or blades.
3. If crossing energized lines get recloser blocking or de-energize line.
4. If crossing roads control traffic and pedestrians. No vehicles will be allowed
through work area unless employee in charge allows access, with a spotter.
5. Pull conductor or shield wire past rider poles leaving sufficient lead rope to go
over rider arms and back to spreader bar on pulling equipment.
6. Disconnect lead ropes from pulling equipment and pull back, keeping ropes
separate.
Page 1 of 2
Stringing Over Rider Poles
7. Attach lead rope to rope over rider arms and pull lead rope over until enough lead
rope is available to attach to pulling equipment.
8. Continue this until all ropes are connected to spreader bar on pulling equipment.
9. Pulling equipment will proceed taking up slack until wire has cleared the rider
arms.
10. One person will observe until conductor is through next structure.
11. Remove stringing rope over rider arms.
12. Remove traffic barriers
13. Clean up worksite.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description: Typical Crossing - Tension Stringing Set-up Diagram
Doc.
VALARD Created by: J. Rideout
Number:
Safe Operating Procedure 27.037
Page 1 of 1
Document Description Crossing Energized Lines
VALARD Created By: W. Stewart Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.038
Date: Aug. 1, 2011 Revision: Revised by: Date:
27.038 CROSSING ENERGIZED LINES
Safety Equipment Required:

1. Safety glasses
2. Boots and
3. Hardhat
4. Hi-Vis Vest
5. Ground gradient mat
6. Temporary ground cable leads
7. Temporary ground probe(s)
8. Running ground bracket(s)
9. Certified live line stick
10. Climbing belt and safety strap
11. Fire Retardant Clothing

1. Tensioner
2. Puller
3. Bucket truck or crane
4. Bull rope(s) (sufficient length to complete the task)
5. Travelers
6. Ropes
7. Blocks
8. Slings
9. Shackles For the rider arm
10. Nodwell, Excavator, one ton truck, Bulldozer
Steps
1. Rider Poles will have been previously installed. Check to ensure that Cross
Arms are located at least 4 meters above existing energized conductors.
2. Reclosures on the existing circuit need to be set on the non reclose function.
3. Using an aerial work platform, a clean dry lead line is passed over the
energized circuit, using the Cross Arms to support the rope and maintain
clearances. Once the rope is fished across, tension will be maintained on the
ends to keep the rope’s above and clear of the energized circuit.
Note:
 Rubber gloves should be worn when passing the lead ropes over the
Page 1 of 3
 A Signal Person/Observer should be used to ensure Safe Limits of
Approach are maintained.
 Aerial device should be grounded
4. The lead line is used to pull the main pulling line/s over the riders. Tension is
maintained to ensure the belly of the rope doesn’t get too close to the
Note:
 Rubber gloves should be worn when handling the ropes during this
operation.
5. Continue to pull out Pulling Ropes or Hard Lines through the remaining
towers until the Tensioner site is reached.
Note:
 See grounding and bonding requirements for equipment while
stringing.
 An observer should remain at the crossing site to ensure necessary
clearances are maintained.
 Adequate communication is necessary between observer and
stringing crews.
6. Using Pulling Ropes or Hard Lines, which are connected to the appropriate
conductors, the conductors or OPGW will be pulled in and sagged as per
specifications.
Note:
 An Observer should remain at the Rider Pole site until all the new
conductors and OPGW are installed.
 See equipment grounding and bonding requirements while stringing
Hazards and Control Methods:

Hazard:
Fall from elevation and falling objects
Control:
Use fall arrest in the bucket at all times. Stay clear of the area when
workers are working from heights
Hazard:
Pulling in wire
Control:
Make sure radio contact is maintained at all times
Page 2 of 3
Hazard:
Electrical Shock
Control:
Use proper grounding procedures when working in the vicinity of
overhead power lines and when installing splice.
Ensure non-reclosure is in place on energized circuit.
Wear hot line gloves
Ensure a signal person is dedicated to ensuring that limits of approach
are maintained.
Use proper grounding
Safe Work References:

SWP 26.001 – Defective Tools Practices
SWP 26.002 – Electrical Work
SWP 26.006 – Hoisting and Rigging
SWP 26.007 – Use of Cable Clamps and Wire Ropes
SWP 26.013 – Use of Company Vehicles
SWP 26.014 – Environmental Work Practices
SWP 26.020 – Use of Elevated Work Platforms
SWP 26.025 – Use of Hand Tools
SWP 26.027 – Spotters and Signalers
SWP 26.028 – Fall Prevention
SWP 26.029 – Cold Weather Work
SWP 26.036 – Bonding and Grounding
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Stringing Transmission Lines
27.039 STRINGING PROCEDURE

This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in stringing of transmission line
conductors.
personnel MUST remain clear of the vehicle, the boom, the winch line and any of it’s
is utilized.
To ensure that the “ Limits of Approach” are not encroached a “Dedicated Observer” must
be appointed and positioned to aid the operator in performing these tasks. All vehicles
must be grounded prior to any hoisting activities in close proximity to energized
conductors. The minimum limit of approach for un-insulated equipment is 10ft.
• Safety glasses
• Boots
• Hardhat
• Hi-Vis Vest
• Ground gradient mat
• Temporary ground cable leads
• Temporary ground probe(s)
• Running ground bracket(s)
• Certified live line stick
1. Dozer (cat) or Nodwell
2. Trailer for wire spools
3. Bucket truck or crane
4. Shackles/slings
5. Bull rope(s) (sufficient length to complete the task)
6. Travelers
Steps:
1. Complete tailboard, discuss with the crew and signoff.
2. Prior to using any craning devices, ensure that all crewmembers are cautioned
about working around these units to eliminate the hazards associated with
crushing injuries from vehicle stabilizer outriggers.
Page 1 of 4
3. Setup stringing trailers and load wire.

4. Check all rigging equipment to ensure that it’s in good condition and rated for
the load before hoisted. Verify the weight of the reels to ensure that all rigging
equipment is of sufficient rating
5. Temporary ground mats must be installed if working in close proximity of
energized circuits or where there is the potential for induction.
• Worker(s) at the reel trailer must stand on ground mat at all times.
• Work area must be fenced to prevent worker(s) from stepping off ground
mat onto the ground thus creating a difference of potential.
• As an alternative, a guard could be positioned to prevent any person from
encroaching on the gradient mat or the worker stepping off the mat
6. Bond conductor trailer to a temporary ground probe or anchor rod.
7. Install Kellum grips on conductor(s) as per manufacturer’s specifications.
8. Attach pulling bull ropes to the Kellum grips using appropriately rated swivels
and approved shackles.
9. Pull off sufficient conductor to pass through the travelers supported on the rear
of the cable reel trailer.
10. Attach running grounds to each conductor with the ground lead attached to a
temporary ground probe or anchor rod.
11. Ensure that all of the ground leads are attached to a common point/connection
to eliminate a difference of potential.
12. Attach the pulling bull ropes to the spreader bar on the dozer/Nodwell.
13. Verify that good radio communications have been established and that all
crewmembers are instructed and familiar with proper radio protocol for
stringing. A dedicated radio frequency should be allocated for this process. If
this is not possible then all other work crews must be notified of the stringing
process so that any potential conflicting radio transmissions are minimized.
14. When all preliminary work has been completed, start pulling out conductor.
15. Good radio contact must be maintained at ALL times between personnel at reel
trailer(s) and the dozer/Nodwell.
16. Apply a little brake pressure on the reel axle(s) to ensure that the reel(s) of wire
doesn’t spin to fast resulting in potential conductor damage.
17. When reaching the first structure, the dozer/Nodwell must go past the structure
far enough to ensure that there is sufficient rope to go up the structure, through
the travelers and back down to the dozer/Nodwell.
18. Once adequate slack has been pulled past the structure reverse the dozer
/Nodwell to relieve tension on the bull lines so that the bull lines can be
detached from the machine. The bull lines can then be pulled back to the
structure. Use caution to prevent tangling of the rope(s) as the rope is being
coiled at the base of the structure.
Page 2 of 4
19. Hang ropes through the travelers using an aerial device/bucket. Fall arrest
must be worn and connected at all times when the lineman is in the
bucket. As an alternate method, “P” lines could be previously installed through
pre-hung travelers and secured to the butt of the pole. These ropes could be
used to pull the bull lines up the pole, through the traveler and back down to
the ground.
20. Ground aerial device at each location when working in close proximity to
21. Re-attach ropes to the spreader bar on the dozer/Nodwell after the ropes have
been hung through the traveler.
22. Stay in radio contact at all times with workers at reel trailer and operator running
dozer/nodwell. Monitor the bull ropes for increased tensions, which could
indicate defective travelers at structures or the conductor becoming snagged
on the ground. An observer should follow the kellem grips as they pass through
the sheave of the traveler.
23. Once workers are clear of the structure, proceed to the next structure.
24. Conductor running grounds will be installed on travelers approximately every 10
spans. The uses of travelers with neoprene sheaves pose a potential hazard of
induction that must be eliminated utilizing running grounds.
25. Repeat this procedure until the conductor is at the tie- down site or a dead-end
structure.
26. Once the conductors have reached the tie-down area temporary portable
grounds are to be placed on the conductors. Also the conductors are to be
bonded to each other. This will ensure that any induction will be drained off and
all conductors will be at the same potential. Alternately the conductor could be
dead-ended at the structure.
27. The sagging process can now be undertaken.
28. Refer to the sag charts to determine the:
• Location of the span(s) to sag from
• The ambient air temperature
29. Prior to sleeving the 2 ends of the line sections together portable jumper
grounds must be applied to each end on the wire utilizing a live line stick so
that there isn’t a difference of potential when installing the sleeve.
30. When line sections exceed 3 Kms. portable grounds must be applied. The only
exception to this work practice is that if there will be NO work being performed
in this line section and the line is sitting dormant, grounds are not necessary.
There MUST be an open point between the 2 line sections. When any 2-line
sections are to be connected to each other, temporary grounds are to be
installed on each line section to drain any potential induction and a temporary
jumper must be installed prior to the installation of the permanent loop at the
structure.
Page 3 of 4
31. Safety slings must be installed at corners to prevent the contact of either the
bull line or the new conductor with any energized adjacent circuits in the case
of an equipment failure (traveler) during stringing or sagging.
32. Working grounds utilizing approved live line techniques and certified live line
tools must be applied to the new circuit prior to clipping in conductors
33. All grounding work methods must adhere to Valard’s Equal-potential
grounding policies.
Page 4 of 4
Document Description Conventional Stringing
27.040 This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in stringing of transmission line
conductors
Note: The use of rider poles at roadways and energized circuit crossings should be
determined, and installed , prior to stringing.
Any traffic control plans should be arranged prior to work beginning. Restrictions and
regulations re any pipeline crossing must also be considered.

• Safety glasses
• Boots Hardhats
• Hi-Vis Vests

1. Dozer (cat) or Nodwell
2. Trailer for wire spools
3. Bucket truck and or crane
4. Shackles/slings
5. Bull rope(s) (sufficient length to complete the task) Usually app. 150ft.
6. Travelers
7. Spacer Carts
8. Temporary ground cable leads
9. Certified live line stick
10. Temporary ground probe(s)
Steps:
2. Ensure that workers and 3rd parties stay clear of stringing equipment.
3. Prior to using any craning devices, ensure that all crewmembers are cautioned
about working around these units to eliminate the hazards associated with
crushing injuries from vehicle stabilizer outriggers.
5. Check all rigging equipment to ensure that it’s in good condition and rated for
the load before hoisted. Verify the weight of the reels to ensure that all rigging
equipment is of sufficient rating
6. Install Kellum grips on conductor(s), as per manufacturer’s specifications.
7. Attach pulling bull ropes to the Kellum grips using appropriately rated swivels
and approved shackles.
Page 1 of 3
8. Pull off sufficient conductors or hardlines to pass through the guide travelers or
blocks.
9. Attach the pulling bull ropes to the spreader bar on the dozer/Nodwell.
10. Verify that good radio communications have been established and that all crew
members are instructed and familiar with proper radio protocol for stringing. A
dedicated radio frequency should be allocated for this process. If this is not
possible then all other work crews must be notified of the stringing process so
that any potential conflicting radio transmissions be minimized.
trailer(s) and the dozer/Nodwell.
13. Apply a little brake pressure on the reel axle(s) to ensure that the reel(s) of wire
doesn’t spin to fast resulting in potential conductor damage.
14. If at any time during the stringing operation, the conductors need to be handled,
radio communication will let all workers know that work has stopped.
15. When reaching the first structure, the dozer/Nodwell must go past the
structure far enough to ensure that there is sufficient rope to go up the
structure, through the travelers and back down to the dozer/Nodwell.
16. Once adequate slack has been pulled past the structure reverse the dozer
/Nodwell to relieve tension on the bull lines so that the bull lines can be
detached from the machine. The bull lines can then be pulled back to the
structure. Use caution to prevent tangling of the rope(s) as the rope is being
coiled at the base of the structure.
17. Hang ropes through the travelers using an aerial device/bucket. Fall arrest must
be worn and connected at all times when the lineman is in the bucket. As an
alternate method, “P” lines could be previously installed through pre-hung
travelers and secured to the butt of the pole. These ropes could be used to pull
the bull lines up the pole , through the traveler and back down to the ground.
18. Re-attach ropes to the spreader bar on the dozer/Nodwell after the ropes have
been hung through the traveler.
19. Stay in radio contact at all times with workers at reel trailer and operator
running dozer/nodwell. Monitor the bull ropes for increased tensions which
could indicate defective travelers at structures or the conductor becoming
snagged on the ground. An observer should follow the kellem grips as they
pass through the sheave of the traveler.
20. Workers must only handle the bull ropes.
21. When crossing rider pole locations, finger lines or ropes should be installed so as
to pass over the riders. This will allow control of the conductive wires while
they are being pulled over the riders.
Page 2 of 3
22. Once workers are clear of the riders or structure, proceed to the next structure.
23. A spotter should remain at the rider location to ensure conductors stay clear of
road crossing or energized circuits.
24. If energized parallel circuits exist, conductor running grounds will be installed
on travelers approximately every 10 spans. The use of travelers with neoprene
sheaves pose a potential hazard of induction that must be eliminated utilizing
running grounds. If there are no energized parallel circuits but one or more live
circuit crossings, then running grounds need to only be installed at the
crossings.
25. Overhead wires being installed on metal sheaved travelers connected to the
structure grounding will not require running grounds.
26. Repeat this procedure until the conductors are at the tie-down site, dead-end
structure.
27. Once the conductors have reached the tie-down area temporary portable
grounds are to be placed on the conductors so the conductors are to be
bonded to each other. This will ensure that any induction will be drained off
and all conductors will be at the same potential. Alternately the conductor
could be dead-ended at the structure.
29. Refer to the sag charts to determine the :
• Location of the span(s) to sag from
• The ambient air temperature
30. Prior to sleeving the 2 ends of the line sections together portable jumper
grounds must be applied to each end on the wire utilizing a live line stick so
that there isn’t a difference of potential when installing the sleeve.
31. When line sections exceed 3 Kms. portable grounds must be applied. The only
exception to this work practice is that if there will be NO work being performed
in this line section and the line is sitting dormant, grounds are not necessary.
There MUST be an open point between the 2 line sections. When any 2 line
sections are to be connected to each other, temporary grounds are to be
installed on each line section to drain any potential induction and a temporary
jumper must be installed prior to the installation of the permanent loop at the
structure.
32. Safety slings must be installed at corners to prevent the contact of either the bull
line or the new conductor with any energized adjacent circuits in the case of an
equipment failure (traveler) during stringing or sagging.
33. Working grounds must be applied to the new circuit prior to clipping in
conductors.
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Slack Stringing
Date: Sept. 23, 2009 Revision: 0 Revised by: A. Felczak Date:
27.042 SLACK STRINGING PROCEDURE CYPRESS SE

This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in slack stringing of transmission line
conductors on the Cypress SE project. This particular phase of the project requires the
slack stringing of three, 266 AWG conductors and a single shield wire for a distance of 1.6
km.
Wood poles are used and as well as 138 kV horizontal insulator line posts in the
construction of this line. The one single-phase distribution line in this area will be isolated
and de-energized for the entire stringing and clipping operations. As the line follows an old
abandoned concession road, traffic will be minimal or none existent. The road will be
blocked off during the stringing operation.

• Safety glasses
• Boots
• Hardhat
• Hi-visibility vest
• Front end loader
• Trailer for wire spools
• Bucket truck or crane
• Shackles/slings
• Bull rope(s) (sufficient length to complete the task)
• Travelers
Steps:
2. Prior to using any craning devices, ensure that all crew members are cautioned about
working around these units to eliminate the hazards associated with crushing injuries from
vehicle stabilizer outriggers.
Page 1 of 3
4. Check all rigging equipment to ensure that it’s in good condition and rated for the load
before hoisted. Verify the weight of the reels to ensure that all rigging equipment is of
sufficient rating
8. Attach pulling bull ropes to the Kellum grips using appropriately rated swivels and
approved shackles.
9. Attach the pulling bull ropes to the spreader bar on the front-end loader.
crewmembers are instructed and familiar with proper radio protocol for stringing. A
dedicated radio frequency should be allocated for this process. If this is not possible then
all other work crews must be notified of the stringing process so that any potential
conflicting radio transmissions are minimized.
trailer(s) and the front end loader.
13. Apply a little brake pressure on the reel axle(s) to ensure that the reel(s) of wire doesn’t
spin to fast resulting in potential conductor damage.
14. When reaching the first structure, the front end loader must go past the structure far
enough to ensure that there is sufficient rope to go up the structure, through the travelers
and back down to the front end loader.
15. Once adequate slack has been pulled past the structure reverse the front-end loader to
relieve tension on the bull lines so that the bull lines can be detached from the machine.
The bull lines can then be pulled back to the structure. Use caution to prevent tangling of
the rope(s) as the rope is being coiled at the base of the structure.
16. Hang ropes through the travelers using an aerial device/bucket. Fall arrest must be
worn and connected at all times when the lineman is in the bucket. As an alternate method,
“P” lines could be previously installed through pre-hung travelers and secured to the butt of
the pole. These ropes could be used to pull the bull lines up the pole, through the traveler
and back down to the ground.
17. Re-attach ropes to the spreader bar on the front end loader after the ropes have been
hung through the traveler.
18. Stay in radio contact at all times with workers at reel trailer and operator running front
end loader. Monitor the bull ropes for increased tensions, which could indicate defective
travelers at structures or the conductor becoming snagged on the ground. An observer
should follow the Kellum grips as they pass through the sheaves of the travelers.
structure.
21. Once the conductors have reached the tie-down area temporary portable grounds are
to be placed on the conductors. Also the conductors are to be bonded to each other. This
will ensure that any induction will be drained off and all conductors will be at the same
potential. Alternately the conductor could be dead-ended at the structure.
Page 2 of 3

• Location of the span(s) to sag from.
• The ambient air temperature.
24. Once sagging is complete then clipping in can take place.
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Sagging Wire
27.043 SAGGING PROCEDURE

Safety Equipment required;
• Hard hat
• Safety glasses
• Approved boots
• Gloves
• Fire Retardant clothing
• Fall Arrest Equipment
Equipment required:
• Ground probe
• Ground chains
• Dynometer
• Radios for communication
Hazards:
Falling from Elevation:
• Complete fall arrest to be used at all times. Pickers must have bucket rescue devices on
site.
Equipment Setup:
• Refer to Valard’s procedure 27.023 on setting up equipment.
Grounding:
• Ground vehicle when working near power lines.
Radio Communication:
• Check radios for range and signal. If radio contact is lost stop job and make changes as
necessary. Be sure radios are charged at all times.
Steps;
1. Complete tailboard, discuss and sign off.
2. Make sure sagging equipment is in good working condition.
3. Hang sag markers as per specifications for temperature and span length
4. Use sagging scope to check sag of wire or dynometer to measure tension.
5. Slack is adjusted using jacks at the snub down site or dead end.
6. Radio communication must be used at all times when sagging.
7. Clean up work area before leaving.
Page 1 of 1
Document Description Deadending Conductor
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 7,2011
27.045 DEADENDING CONDUCTOR
and underground energized conductors, the operator of any aerial device must always
stand on the designated operator platform while performing any operation which could
potentially bring the aerial device within the limits of approach of energized conductors,
and all other personnel must remain clear of the vehicle, the boom, boom accessories,
and winch line while the aerial device is being operated unless proper protective
equipment is utilized.

• Hard hat
• Safety glasses
• Boots
• Fall arrest Equipment
• Ground chains
• Bucket rescue equipment
Equipment required:
• Digger Derrick
• Slings and shackles
• Dynometer
• Jacks
Steps:
1. Complete tailboard discuss and signoff.
2. Setup equipment as per Equipment Setup procedure using outrigger pads to complete
the job.
3. Have lineman hang the dollies on dead end structure using proper rigging.
4. Hang ropes through the dollies and attach to the cat.
5. When ropes and rigging is complete lineman will clear the structure.
6. Once workers are clear of the structure, begin pulling up the wire while keeping in
contact with the sagging crew.
7. When conductor is close to being in sag install jacks on the conductor.
8. Complete final sag using a dyno or sag boards.
9. Once wire is in sag lineman will dead end conductor using utility supplied material.
10. When dead-ending is complete remove pulling ropes from cat and trim wire.
11. Cleanup jobsite and complete the dead end Q/A form.
Hazards
Equipment and tools
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Deadending Conductor
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 7,2011
• Setup equipment using equipment setup procedures. Make sure proper grips and
jacks are being used.
• Check slings and shackles for wear.
Falling and falling objects.

• Fall arrest must be worn at all times.
• Stay clear of structure when linemen are working.
• Make sure material or equipment is secure when sending things up on the
handline.
Induction
• Use proper EPG procedures at all times. See SWP 26.036 Bonding & Grounding
• Make sure continuity is maintained at all times when working on jumpers.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Jumper Weight Installation
Date: Nov. 2009 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:
27.046 JUMPER WEIGHTS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Note: The following procedures will be used to address some of the issues encountered
during construction. At all times, the lineman will use fall arrest, and when needed a
second point of attachment. All tools and hardware will be inspected and used in the
appropriate manner. Care and consideration will be given to all tools/hardware while
performing the work as well as during transport to/from the job. The environmental impact
will be minimized and a neat and tidy work area will be left behind.

• Hi-Vis Vests
Steps:
2. Once on site, a tailboard will be conducted and signed by all workers.
3. Materials and tools will be unloaded and work will commence.
4. Two linemen will climb the wood pole using fall arrest and 2nd point of
attachment when going around obstacles on pole.
5. The first lineman up the pole will take the hand line block up to help lift
required materials.
6. Lineman will hang the hand line.
7. Ground crew will pull up ladder to be hung on the cross arm and attach safety
straps.
8. Lineman will push the ladder out on cross arm.
9. Lineman will position himself on cross arm to slide out to ladder. Worker shall
maintain fall arrest at all times.
10. Once worker and ladder are in position in the work area, he will transfer
himself onto the ladder and climb down into position.
11. Ground crew will assemble weights and attach appropriate hardware.
12. Lineman will signal ground crew to hoist weights up to him either pulling by
hand or through use of equipment.
13. Once in proper position, the lineman will attach the weights to the yoke plate.
14. The lineman will disconnect hand line from weights.
15. Lineman will then proceed to climb ladder and move operation to the next
pole to repeat until structure is complete.
Page 1 of 1
Document Description Installation of Implosive Sleeves
VALARD Created By: H. McNeil Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.047
Date: Dec. 15, 2010 Revision: Revised by: Date:
27.047 Installation of Implosive Sleeves
This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in using implosive for dead end
terminations and in-line connections.
For the purpose of this procedure a Blaster is one who has been suitably trained in
the Safe Use and Installation of EXCONEX.

• Hard hat
• Safety Glasses
• Boots
• Hi-vis outerwear
• Fire retardant clothing
Procedure:
1. The certified blaster is responsible for the safety of workers and equipment, and
for following regulatory requirements covering the use, storage, handling and
transportation of explosives within the blast and danger areas.
2. Assess the work area.
• Where the implosion will occur within a one-mile radius of any residence,
notify area residents, municipal authorities, police department, and other
crews about upcoming blasts - this must be done before actual blasting.
• Signs shall be posted on all roadways leading to a blasting area in
accordance with government rules and regulations.
• Maintain safe distances of the blasting site from other employees, vehicles,
equipment, structures, and fire hazard sources. Perform blasts during pre-
determined times. Do not perform work during electrical storms or adverse
weather conditions.
3. The certified blaster on site must be in constant communication with all guards.
Guards must be posted at all access routes to stop/eliminate the public from
entering.
4. During handling of all explosive components avoid conditions of shock,
exposure to flame, heat, impact, and friction. Do not jerk or break shock tubing.
Do not drive equipment over shock tubing. Make sure that shock tubing does
not become entangled with machinery or moving equipment. Keep all explosive
components in clean and dry condition. Do not smoke while handling or within 8
meters of explosives. Keep detonator and Implode Sleeves separate until final
installation. Use only appropriate tools.
5. Identify the implosion devices to be used and follow the manufacturer’s
instruction manual for the safe installation of the specific device(s).
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Installation of Implosive Sleeves
VALARD Created By: H. McNeil Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.047
6. The certified blaster is responsible for:

• Establishing a minimum 50-meter radius blast area, which includes all
workers and equipment not involved in preparing the blast device, and
other people, equipment and combustible material.
• Conducting a risk assessment and placing appropriate barriers to protect
any workers and or equipment within this blast area.
• Vehicles and/or equipment involved in the preparation of the blast
procedure may remain within the 50 meter radius blast area provided they
partially open their windows and take any other necessary precautions.
• Establishing and managing the danger area for the purpose of preventing
damage or injuries from the effects of the blast.
7. The Certified Blaster must notify all workers on site about the upcoming blast(s).
He must make sure that all the workers on site know the sequence of pre-blast
warning signals. All workers on site must wear required Personal Protective
Equipment. Fire extinguishing equipment must be readily available.
• Perform blasts parallel to wire sling and not jacking device. Make sure that
support insulator is not at a right angle to the connector.
• Just before the detonation the Certified Blaster must:
 notify workers in the area of upcoming blast by activating three standard
two second air horn signals.
 Perform a 10 second countdown.
 Initiate the detonating device.
• If at any time the countdown is interrupted, the Certified Blaster must
ensure that the blasting area is clear, repeat the entire process of three
two second horn signals, a 10 second countdown, and then perform the
blast.
8. After the blast has been completed the Certified Blaster must inspect the
blasting area. Once determined that the blast has been completed and the area
is safe, the Certified Blaster shall sound a four second clear signal.
• If misfire occurs, The Certified Blaster shall wait 10 minutes before
entering the blast area. Once the Blaster has determined there has been a
misfire, the misfired detonator must be destroyed by taping another
detonator to the misfired detonator and blasting it off. If this fails, stop
work, secure the area, and immediately notify your supervisor of the
misfire.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description RELEASING BUTT DOWN
Date: July 2011 Revision: Revised by: Date:
27.049 Releasing Butt Down

1. Hi- visibility vests
2. Safety glasses
3. Boots
4. Gloves
5. Fire Retardant clothing
Equipment:
1. Ropes
2. Blocks
3. Slings, grips
4. Shackles For the rider arm.
5. Nodwell
6. Excavator
7. one ton truck
8. Bulldozer
9. Boom Truck
Steps:
1. Tailboard N/A. This is part of the stringing operation and will be covered in the
stringing tailboard.
2. Site should be at the following state. Conductor is gripped off to stub or
spreader bar. Ground mats in place and grounded. Conductor has ground
chains installed. Communication established with the cat. First span back has
been clipped in.
3. Install sheave to spreader bar or stub and thread a ¾ double braid rope that will
be used to control the release of the conductor from the tie downs.
4. Take the slack out of the setting and start to take up tension on the conductor.
At this time stop the cat and install the “let-up clamp” on the conductor to the
rope through the sheave. Rope is anchored to pick up that will be used to
control the clearing of the conductor. The “let-up” clamp is rigged so it can be
lowered after span is “soft sagged’ Take tension on the “let-up” clamp( back up
the pick up)
5. Start the sagging operation again until there is slack in the cable between the
butt down and the grips. Remove the grips.
6. Remove the ground chains with hot stick.
7. From this point on it is a matter of coordinating the release of the conductor with
the taking up the slack by the cat. This is accomplished by an observer at the
first span back who controls the progress of the cat taking up the slack and the
pick up releasing slack into the setting as the conductor. He does this by
keeping the insulator string vertical.
8. When the conductor reaches in sag tension the “let-up” clamp is released from
Page 1 of 2
Document Description RELEASING BUTT DOWN
the conductor and is lowered to the ground.
Hazards and Control Methods:
Hazard:
Release of Potential Energy
Control:
Proper Rigging is essential
Stay clear of pinch points
Communication is essential for the coordination of pulling up the
conductor and letting is up from the butt down. All activity will stop if
communication fails
Hazard:
Electrical Shock
Control:
Use of grounding procedure
Safe Work References:

SWP 26.001 – Defective Tools Practices
SWP 26.002 – Electrical Work
SWP 26.006 – Hoisting and Rigging
SWP 26.007 – Use of Cable Clamps and Wire Ropes
SWP 26.013 – Use of Company Vehicles
SWP 26.014 – Environmental Work Practices
SWP 26.020 – Use of Elevated Work Platforms
SWP 26.025 – Use of Hand Tools
SWP 26.027 – Spotters and Signalers
SWP 26.028 – Fall Prevention
SWP 26.029 – Cold Weather Work
SWP 26.031 – Excavations
SWP 26.036 – Bonding and Grounding
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Use of Cable Car for Installing Hardware
VALARD Created By: H.McNeil Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.050
Date: Aug. 10, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:
27.050 Use of Cable car (stringing buggy) for Installing Hardware
This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards involved in installing

aerial marker balls and spacers with a cable buggy on the Johnson Ridge
from JR115 to JR109.
Safety equipment required:

• CSA approved work boots
• Hard hat or helmet,
• High visibility vest
• Safety glasses
• Gloves
• Fall arrest equipment
• Emergency rappel kit
Tools and equipment required:

1. Cable buggy (certified to 350 lbs capacity)
2. Capstan Hoist (10, 000 lbs)
3. 5/8” rope
4. 1/2” Power braid rope
5. Marker balls
6. Air Flow Spoilers
7. Bird Diverters
8. Radio or two-way communications
9. Chain jack/hoists
10. 6” Travelers
11. Helicopter
Hazards:
Fall from heights, falling objects, mechanical failure, slips/trips, weather/wind, rope failure,
pinch points, hydraulic failure, and wire/rope under tension – hit by/struck by.
Equipment setup prior to commencing work:

1. Ensure capstan hoist is in good mechanical condition, and capstan hoist is secured
to the butt of the pole.
2. Check all rope to ensure it is of proper strength and length and in good condition.
3. Engineering certifications for cable buggy and associated rigging are on site.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Use of Cable Car for Installing Hardware
VALARD Created By: H.McNeil Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.050
4. Verify that tools and equipment are not over the maximum load capacity of buggy.
5. Spacer buggy is attached via rope on one side and hooked to capstan hoist so that
buggy’s ascent and descent can be controlled. Ensure that no sharp edges are in
contact with the rope.
6. Worker has two means of support– one via the cable buggy secured to conductor
cable, plus appropriate fall protection.
7. Check and ensure that all PPE is in good condition.
8. Check that radios are charged, verified for range and signal strength prior to
commencing work. Work must stop if there is no communication between worker
in cable buggy and operator of puller.
Steps:
1. Review procedure, complete tailboard/hazard assessment including the safety
procedures for activities involving helicopter, discuss and sign off so that everyone
is aware of the work plan and associated hazards, and rescue plan.
2. The work will only take place in good weather conditions and visibility.
3. The helicopter will deliver tools and materials to the sites, and after materials are on
site the helicopter will transport workers back and forth to the sites.
4. Worker will ascend the pole via bucket truck or climb, use a chain jack to secure the
cable buggy and attach buggy to the conductor cable, and then climb in and secure
himself in the buggy, maintaining 100% tie-off at all times.
5. Capstan Hoist slowly controls the descent of the cable buggy from span to span,
stopping as required so that spacers can be removed, clearing the path to install
applicable hardware.
6. Once the buggy arrives at the structure the worker will tie-off and use the chain jack
to secure the buggy and move buggy to other side of the structure, and repeat the
process as the capstan hoist slowly lets the buggy descend to JR 109.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Potential Energy
Date: Sept. 23, 2010 Revision: Revised by: Date:
27.056 Potential Energy

This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring
and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner.
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to determine if the energy source(s) associated with a
work assignment have the potential to harm workers. If so, the energy must be controlled
using the general lockout/tagout procedure, equipment-specific lockout procedure, or
alternative energy control, as appropriate. The procedure includes requirements for
showing that a hazard analysis was completed.
Scope and Applicability

The procedure covers all work that involves working on or near exposed electrical
conductors or circuit parts or work that involves installation, servicing, and maintenance on
equipment, machinery, or systems that may release hazardous energy.
Energy Types: Additional Information
Electrical
Electrical energy refers to generated electrical power, stored power, and static electricity.
Electrical energy originating from generated electricity or stored electrical energy in a
battery can be switched on and off or disconnected. The stored electrical charge in a
capacitor and static electricity can only be dissipated or controlled.
Thermal
Thermal energy – what we experience as heat or cold – is commonly produced by
mechanical devices (combustion and/or friction), electrical resistance, and chemical
reactions (or changes of state). Thermal energy can be controlled and/or dissipated.
Burns can occur due to both heat and cold, and the severity of a burn depends on
temperature and duration or contact. The threshold for injury due to contact with hot liquids
(which can cause burns or scalding) is 52°C (120°F). The threshold for injury to tissues due
to cold is slightly below freezing (27°F or -3°C). All cryogenic liquids present a cryogenic
burn hazard.
Contact hazards with hot or cold surfaces are typically controlled with insulation, personal
protective equipment (PPE), and/or time sufficient to allow cooling or warming.
Kinetic
Kinetic energy is the extra energy an object possesses due to its motion. Setting an object
into motion requires that the object be accelerated to attain motion, and this energy, if
hazardous, must be dissipated. No threshold is proposed for kinetic energy; each situation
must be evaluated.
Potential
Potential energy can be thought of as the energy stored within a physical system. Objects
at an elevated level, for instance, contain more potential energy than when they are
Page 1 of 3
physically lowered, load suspended when lifting or moving with a crane/boom truck or any
other approved lifting device. This also referred to as configurational energy, and it can be
eliminated by lowering an object in a controlled manner. Potential energy is also stored in a
compressed spring, which can be released in a controlled manner. No threshold is
proposed for potential energy; each situation must be evaluated.
Pneumatic and Hydraulic

Pneumatic and hydraulic energy refers to the energy inherent in the pressure that a gas or
liquid is under. Pressure is generally expressed as psig (pound-force per square inch
gauge), which expresses pressure relative to the surrounding atmosphere. A system can be
under positive pressure (greater than atmospheric pressure) or negative pressure
(vacuum).
Pneumatic refers to pressurized air or gas, as in compressed air or gas in a compressed
gas cylinder. Hydraulic refers to pressurized liquid, such as water in a hose pressurized by
a pump. Releasing pneumatic or hydraulic pressure involves identifying the pressure
source. If equipment is producing pressure, turn it off. If the pressure is stored, allow it to
release or dissipate under controlled conditions.
Note This section describes thresholds for non-hazardous gases; hazardous gases and
liquids at any pressure must be locked out due to their chemical hazards (for example toxic,
flammable, reactive).
Pneumatic Injury Thresholds

Provided that skin and eyes are protected and no potential for deadheading (point blank
exposure of the jet to bare skin) exists, the pressure required to inflict pneumatic jet injuries
to healthy unbroken skin is over 600 psi. Pneumatic sources directed at eyes or ears can
cause injuries at significantly lower pressures, depending on the proximity and diameter of
the jet. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) places the threshold for
air pressure that can penetrate through open wounds or cause damage if directed at body
openings at 30 psig.
Hydraulic Injury Thresholds
The pressure required to break intact healthy skin delivered by a hydraulic jet is over 600
psi. Depending on the diameter of the jet and distance between it and the affected area,
much lower pressures are hazardous to eyes, ear drums, and open wounds. Hydraulic
injection injuries at distances up to 4 inches between the skin and jet have been recorded.
In larger piping systems, a hazard may be present if the liquid momentum conveyed by
water and other liquids is sufficient to knock a worker down.
Compressed Air and Water Utility Systems

Nearly every industrial or commercial installation uses utility water or compressed air
systems operating at pressures up to 150 psig. Common practice has shown that wearing
normal PPE such as coveralls, gloves, and safety glasses provides worker protection and
lockout/tagout is not normally used or required for servicing and maintenance of these
systems.
The need for lockout/tagout may be indicated for pressures below 150 psig in such systems
due to secondary factors such as water temperatures that exceed 120°F or working at
Page 2 of 3
elevation, since a sudden release could activate the startle reflex that may cause a fall.
Take into account all secondary hazards present in a particular work environment.
Compressed Gas
Compressed gas cylinders or subsequent valves feeding downstream systems are subject
to lockout/tagout where 1) the system is being serviced or modified, and 2) the gas is
flammable, the gas is toxic, or the delivery pressure can exceed 150 psig with the regulator
valve fully open. Lockout/tagout does not apply to cylinder installation and removal.
Chemical
There is no threshold below which it can be categorically stated that no hazard exists for a
system that may release hazardous chemical solutions at any pressure. This also applies to
systems that contain flammable liquids or gases or any gases with a potential of creating a
hazardous atmosphere, including gases used for fire suppression systems. Lockout/tagout
may be necessary based on the hazardous properties of the chemical or to prevent a
chemical release that poses environmental consequences. For more information on the
properties of hazardous chemicals, see the appropriate MSDS on the chemical.
Potentially Hazardous Energies in Combination

The following partial list of possible dangerous combinations of hazardous energies is
meant to illustrate the types of configurations to watch for; many other combinations of
energies may be hazardous.
Water and electricity. Consider the potential for shock or arc flash hazard when working
on water lines over electrical components or when working on electrical systems in a wet
location.
Compressed air and toxic materials. Consider results of inadvertent activation (will it
generate toxic or radioactive dusts or aerosols that create contamination or personal
exposure?)
Work on a ladder and unexpected energy or noise. Consider the location of
overhead water or air lines when placing the ladder; consider the effect of unexpected
impact of air or water or elevated noise level from release of compressed air. (A startled
worker may fall or drop tools.)
Inert gas in a confined space. Consider asphyxiation hazards in a work location with
poor or no ventilation; shut the gas source off and lock it out avoids oxygen depletion.
Magnetic fields and metal. Consider that ferrous tools may be propelled by strong
magnetic fields.
Pneumatic and thermal. Consider thermal and pneumatic hazards near live steam or
pressure relief valves.
Note; Review Safe Work Practice 26.015 Lockout
Page 3 of 3
Document Description LIVE LINE TOOL RECERTIFICATION
VALARD REQUIREMENTS
Created By: HSE Department Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.070
LIVE LINE TOOL RECERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
Protective Maximum Use Voltage Retest

Equipment Phase to Phase Frequency
Rubber Gloves
Class 00 500 V 6 Months
Class 0 1,000 V 6 Months
Rubber Blankets, Line Hose, Couplers and Hoods

Class 0 1,000 V 1 Year
Bypass Jumper/Tubes
15 kV 15,000 V 1 Year
36 kV 35,000 V 1 Year
46 kV 46,000 V 1 Year
Fibre/Plastic Cover-up
Grounding Cables All Sizes 1 Year

Insulated Pole Platform 15,000 V
FRP Live Line Tools 3 Year
Hydraulic Pruners/Pole Saws 3 Year
Insulated Aerial Devices 1 Year
Insulated Aerial Device As per the individual unit’s
current test certification 6 months
Barehand
Bucket Liner 1 Year
Page 1 of 1
Document Description Traffic Accommodation Plan
VALARD Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27. 071
Date: June 2, 2010 Revision: Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 7, 2011
Notes • Use this sheet in order to document your written Traffic Control Plan (TCP) and keep with the Job Planning documents.
• Where a job involves moving to set-up at several different locations during the day (e.g., several poles), after each move, check
this plan to determine if there is a need for changes (e.g., changed road conditions, traffic volume, etc.). Where conditions do
not change, continue to use the same TCP. Create a new TCP if work activity, hazards or measures change.
Work duration Work location Posted Speed Limit – Non-Freeway
 Mobile Operations  Shoulder  < 50 km/h
 Very Short— less than 30 minutes  Encroachment in right lane  60 km/h
Work  Short— 30 minutes to 24Hrs  L a n e c lo su r e  70 km/h
Zone  Long — more than one day  Intersection  80 km/h
 90 km/h
Volume of Traffic Visibility Posted Speed Limit - Freeway
 Low (less than 10 vehicles in 3 min.)  Less than 150 m  80 km/h
 High (more than 10 vehicles in 3 min.)  More than 150 m  90 km/h
 Night Operations  100 km/h
 H il l s/ Cu rv e s
Traffic ❑Draw Diagram

Control
Diagram
Traffic Devices  Signs  Barricades  Police  Arrow board

Used
 Cones  Blocker Truck  Crash Truck  360 degree Beacon Light
plus Four Way flashers
 Other Devices (specify)
Traffic Traffic Control Persons Required? ❑ Yes  No Number ❑ High visibility clothing worn by all workers
Control ❑ Night time arm/leg high visibility worn
Persons Means of communication ❑ Radio  Visual Signals
(Must not
perform any The Handbook for Construction Traffic Control Persons Third Revised Edition along with this plan are designed to help meet the requirement for written instructions
other work while
directing traffic) Name Location  T r ai n e d
 Written/Oral instructions
Name Location  T r ai n e d
Name Location  T r ai n e d
Page 1 of 1
Document Description Security
Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.079
Date: Feb. 28, 2013 Revision: Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Mar. 23, 2018
27.079 SECURITY
This procedure is developed to identify and to prevent any occurrence access and theft at all
Valard’s Sites;
Head Office:
 All doors shall be locked on each floor at all time, access will only be by the use of a
access card.
 All visitors must access the office at the reception area and sign in on the visitor’s sign in
sheet on the receptions desk and it to be signed out when exciting the premises.
 The receptionist area doors are to be locked at 5:00 pm.
 Access to the underground parking shall prevented unless activated by an employee’s
access card.
 All other office emergency procedures are located at each exit door of the office.
Substations;
 All Sea Cans shall be locked with high security locks and a steel box cover to prevent
open access to the lock itself.
 All material of value will not be placed on site unless required for installation.
 Security shall be coordinated with the owner of the substation and surrounding area.
 Area will set up a contract with a local security company if the local area requires it.
 All spools of wire shall be placed in a locked area.
 Local police are to be notified of the worksite and its valuable contents.
Transmission Work Sites;

 All material placed on a site shall be placed to prevent individuals from being able to see
any spools of wire and all valuable items.
 Where there is local traffic in the material laydown area a sign stating the No entry is
permitted and that it is monitored 24 hours a day.
 Any outside individuals that are seen in the area are to be informed that if they are seen
in the area again without permission shall be notified to the local police.
 In cases where there are individuals that are not permitted are seen then a security firm
shall be hired to patrol the area or a Valard employee shall have a trailer located in the
material laydown area which contains sleeping accommodate to prevent any others from
unlawfully entering Valard’s sites.
Page 1 of 1
Document Description Use of Helicopter for Material Placement &
VALARD Crew Delivery - Dokie
Created By: H. McNeil Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.081
This plan details the operations performed in the use of helicopters to fly equipment and personnel into the
Dokie Wind Farm Project Area. The activities covered by this plan should be of approximately 4 days in
duration.
1. Pre-Flight Preparation
1.1. Helicopter Selection
 Load Weights: 2000 lbs depending on required weight of fuel on board.
 Suitable Helicopter: Bell 206
 12,000 vertical reference hours
 15,000 turbine hours experience
1.2. Pilot-Provided Orientation
 The pilot will orientate the crew on the use of helicopter lifting in regard to the activities to be
performed.
 The pilot and ground crew will review the appropriate communication protocol, procedures and
emergency protocols.
 Flight direction of loads will be discussed.
 All necessary documentation will be provided by the Pilot and available for review.
 The pilot should be advised of any passengers who are riding in a helicopter for their first time or of
any passengers whom are susceptible to motion sickness or significant medical concerns.
 The pilot will hold a safety briefing with passengers to ensure they are in understanding of the risks
involved with helicopter transportation and of the particular helicopter in which they will travel.
1.3. Review & Preparation

Activities Supervisor: Darren Windross
# Of Crews: 1 (including supervisor)
 Pre-determined delivery location is identified to pilot.
 Staging area will be ensured to be free of debris and articles that may become airborne. The pilot
will confirm this.
Preparation:
1. The staging area will be laid to reduce foot travel and to ensure no potential of load interference.
2. Loads will be prepared with rated web slings and cargo nets or fly bags.
3. Lifting order will be reviewed and discussed.
Controls:
1. A barricade will be placed at the access point to the fly staging area – no unauthorized people
will be permitted to the site.
2. Radio Calling
a) Notification of the activity will be announced over the area’s relevant radio frequencies.
b) Pilot ground crew communication.
Page 1 of 4
3. Lifts made away from roads, facilities and equipment.
2. Delivery Procedure
2.1. Load Hookup
1. Crew gets in position and stands in readiness to receive.
2. Communication between supervisor and pilot confirms they are ready to connect the load.
3. Receive the hook wearing appropriate PPE.
4. Hook load and indicate to the pilot the load is hooked using hand signals or by radio
communication.
5. Clear the load about to be lifted by moving backwards facing the load.
6. Load is lifted and transported to delivery location.
7. Once pilot clears the area with the load, the next load is prepared.
8. Re-approach is radioed from pilot to ground crew.
9. Repeat until all loads are delivered.
10. Ground Crew clears the area to a pre-determined location to allow the pilot to land.
11. Operation is concluded.
2.2. Load Release

1. Pilot will radio the incoming load on approach.
2. Crew members will stand with arms raised to direct the placement of the long lined load.
3. One crew member will communicate with the pilot on the radio.
4. When the load is approaching the ground the crew will remain clear and allow the pilot to release
the load.
3. Passenger Transport
3.1. Passenger Information

1. Helicopters are provided with seatbelts. They should be secured at all times once on board. If
provided, shoulder harnesses and ear protection (ear defenders or headsets) should be worn.
2. Do not throw any objects from the helicopter.
3. Ensure that all items inside the cabin are secured and that no objects are hanging outside. As
well, ensure cabin doors are fastened and locked.
3.2. Embarking and Disembarking
1. Never exit towards the rear of the Helicopter. Always walk away from the helicopter from the
front. If ground clearances are questionable, it is wise to crouch until the helicopter takes off.
However take special care that personal belongings, hardhats and light articles are secured to
prevent prop wash blowing things away or into rotors.
2. Approach helicopter at approximately 10:00 o’clock to 2:00 o’clock of pilot for their optimal
vision.
3. Walk parallel to helicopter to maximize helicopter blade to ground clearance.
4. Never walk uphill when exiting a helicopter or downhill when entering a helicopter.
5. Before approaching the helicopter, ensure that the pilot has seen you and that the hand signals
you have been instructed to use are exchanged.
6. On uneven ground proceed only on the downhill side of the helicopter. Uneven terrain can
significantly affect ground to helicopter blade clearances.
Page 2 of 4
7. Do not carry anything above the level of your of your shoulders. Carry long objects parallel to the
ground.
8. Secure all personal belongings, particularly headgear to prevent blade wash from blowing loose
articles away or into blades.
4. Fueling
4.1. Fuel Storage

1. Secondary fuel containments will be located a pre-determined locations in accordance with
Transport Canada Regulations and to minimize the impact of rotor wash when landing for fuel.
4.2. Normal Fueling (aircraft shutdown)

1. Helicopter Crew Personnel will be the only ones permitted in the re-fueling area while this the
helicopter is being fueled.
a. Prior to commencement of fuelling operations, ground crews shall ensure that:

b. Fuel to be dispensed is of the appropriate type and is free of contaminates and /or
biological agents.
c. The refueling equipment is in proper operating condition; all valves, piping tanks, hose
nozzles.
d. Accompanying equipment are in satisfactory condition, undamaged and free from leaks.
e. All fire extinguishers are appropriately charged, current and properly placed.
f. The landing area is free of debris.
g. All non-essential personnel are cleared from the fueling area.
h. Ensure that the aircraft will remain clear of any objects as it settles on its oleos to avoid
any unintended contact.
4.3 Rapid Fueling (Rotor turning)

1. Helicopter Crew Personnel will be the only ones permitted in the re-fueling area while this the
helicopter is being fueled
a. For rapid (rotor turning) refueling the following shall be accomplished by the pilot prior to
initiating:
b. Stabilize the helicopter at a flat pitch and appropriate idle RPM in accordance with the
RFM.
c. For mulit-crew aircraft, at least one pilot shall remain at the controls of the helicopter at
all times.
d. For single pilot aircraft circumstances may require the pilot to exit the aircraft. The
decisions to remain at ground idle or shut the aircraft down rests with the PIC. Under no
circumstances shall the pilot exit the aircraft prior to properly securing the flight controls
and setting engine RPM to ground idle.
e. Ensure that the appropriate communications are established with the ground crew, either
through plug-in ICS, mobile radio, or hand signals.
f. Verify that the area surrounding the aircraft is clear of non-essential personnel and all
debris.
g. For All refueling operations:
h. Ensure that the fueling equipment is grounded.
i. Ensure the aircraft is grounded.
j. Ground the fueling equipment to the aircraft.
Page 3 of 4
k. Ensure that all the crewmembers are ready for refueling operation to commence.
Page 4 of 4
Document Description Rope Flying
VALARD Created By: Vjeko Vidakovic Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.084
Date: April 8, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Hayley McNeil Date: Aug. 2011
27.084 Rope Flying Procedure
Tools and Equipment:
• Fly Rope Carrier

• Helicopter
• Various Shackles
• Fly Rope Anchors
• Portable Radios
• Appropriate Road signs
Steps:
• Set fly rope carrier into position.

• Boom truck shall be set behind the carrier in order to replace the fly rope reels
during the operation (if applicable)
• Operator to check that Fly Rope Carrier is in good condition and operate electrical
and mechanical releases, making sure that it is in functioning properly.
• Establish radio contact between fly rope carrier operator -> helicopter pilot -
>foreman.
• Fly rope carrier operator adjusts brake pressure as per pilot instruction.
• Place towing arrangement on the ground midway between puller and first tower
(leaving at least 15m of slack in the rope, enabling pilot to pick up the rope and
maneuver into position).
• Hook up man stands stand holding the fly rope end and MUST be visible to pilot at
all times (wearing rubber gloves).
• Pilot lowers the helicopter in order to hook up towing arrangement with fly rope.
• Hook up man will signal to pilot that hook up has been made - helicopter can start
flying operation and clear away in crouch position (always visible to the pilot).
• Pilot will start pulling of the rope, advising the fly rope carrier operator to release
breaks.
• Adjust the tension on the fly rope during the operation, as per pilot’s instruction.
• Stop the flying (pulling) at each structure until rope is inserted into traveler.
• Position lineman at each dead/end structure to assist pilot to insert the rope into
traveler.
• Pull the rope through the last traveler in section and past the tie down area until
rope can be reached from the ground.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Rope Flying
VALARD Created By: Vjeko Vidakovic Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.084
Date: April 8, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Hayley McNeil Date: Aug. 2011
• Crewman will hold the rope on the ground and grip it off to the anchor provided.
• Pilot will move helicopter backward until enough slack is obtained so that rope can
be disconnected from the towing arrangement suspended at the bottom of the
helicopter.
• Grip the fly rope at the other end of the section that is at the puller site.
• Move helicopter back to puller site to attach the next fly rope, repeating the same
procedure as described above.
Contingencies:
• Equipment will be available in case that breakdown occurs; extra ropes and tools
will be available if required.
• Mechanic shall be on standby in case that fly rope carrier breaks down.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Wire Stringing with Helicopter
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Mar. 28, 2011
27.085 HELICOPTER WIRE STRINGING PROCEDURE for

North Steepbank Extension 72 kV Line Construction 29PL6-38/39 Project
occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. In addition to this
procedure the SWP 26.030 Helicopter Safe Work Practice must be reviewed.
SAFETY EQUIPMENT:
1. Safety glasses
2. Hard hat c/w chin strap
3. Safety boots
4. Gloves
5. High Visibility outwear
6. Hearing protection
EQUIPMENT:
• Helicopter; type: as required.
• 100’ Long line with belly hook, suitable ballast weight and load hook
• 10ft 5/8 cable sling
• Rated swivel
• Rated pulling sock banded and taped
• Rated slings and grips for both towers.
• 2 man baskets
• 1 crane for loading wire.
• 1 tensioner
• 1 reel trailer
SUPERVISOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
 Insure that tailboard is completed with hazards identified and reviewed with
the crew.
 Confirm site’s are free of debris and loose rigging and or material
 Flag of area that designated as a work zone.
 Insure that maximum conductor weight 80 feet of sag @ 0° C = 4000lbs is
maintained.
 Insure that appropriate sized rigging is available and certified.
 Confirm sag marks are in place
 Insure that sager has a radio with the same frequency as the pilot
 Confirm clear communication with all parties.
 Helicopter landing site is to be marked and flagged to prevent unauthorized
entry.
 Monitor radio to ensure that all communication and directions are understood
ITEMS TO BE REVIEWED WITH WORKERS

• Overall plan to be reviewed including SWP 26.030 and this procedure
• Review with each 4 man crew their location and responsibilities,
Page 1 of 3
 Once wire is hung in dolly crew leader to make contact with helicopter
pilot, tensioner operator, and receiving crew.
 HELICOPTER WILL LIFT OFF WHEN ALL PARTIES ARE READY
 Communication to be kept up during the stringing process with pilot and
tensioner. Keep phrases as short as possible.
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT.
• Frequency of communication radio is to be 140.400
• Foreman on each crew, sager and tensioner operator will be issued radios.
• Meeting with pilot to discuss directions and commands
• Helicopter hand signals if radio fails use these hand signals. See chart below.
Page 2 of 3
Steps
1. Clear site of all tripping hazards

2. Flag or fence off all environmentally sensitive areas to prevent any entry.
3. Confirm radio communication
4. Communicate plan to all workers
5. This method requires the use of a helicopter with 10,000 lbs. rating. ( VERTOL)
In the event of equipment failure, IE: tensioner seizes, wire will be flown back to
reel side of river. STR#38
6. Setup reels and tensioner back of STR#38
7. Thread wire thread through tensioner and dolly on tower.
8. Wire to be gripped off at tower to hold it in position with enough tail to allow for
helicopter connection.
9. Rated kellum grip, banded and taped, installed with rated swivel and cable and
shackle for connection to helicopter.
10. Set up crane at STR#37 and ready rated cable sling and grip to capture wire.
11. Establish communication with pilot, tensioner operator, crew at STR# 37, and
stringing foreman.
12. Connect chopper to lead cable on wire and move away from area.
13. Chopper will take the weight until hold back sling becomes slack, and hold
position.
14. Remove grip from wire and secure sling so it will not interfere with the dolly.
15. Begin pulling wire maintaining minimum tension needed for chopper and to
maintain ground clearance. This will be determined by the use of sag charts and
site sag of wire belly.
16. Once wire has past STR#37 by 20’ the brakes will be applied on tensioner.
17. The chopper will move the conductor into position at the tower wing and the crew
will install the grip, secure wire tail with rope to avoid kinking, and clear out of area.
18. The chopper will then release tension and if all looks good release the wire.
19. Wire will be gripped off to dead end assembly with 6-ton jack and grip at STR# 38.
20. Wire will be back gripped, cut and prepped for next phase. Or lowered to the
ground for reel change.
21. This procedure will be repeated until all 6 conductors are installed starting with the
bottom wire on #39 Line.
22. 2 wires to be pulled from each reel. Leftover wire to be used for #38 to #39.
• Conductor is 1033 ACSR Curlew.

• Weight per foot-1.329lbs.
• Final sag tension @ 0° C is 8000lbs.
Page 3 of 3
Document Description AED Program and Inspection
Created By: R. Hiscock Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.086
Date: Jan. 2, 2019 Revision: 0 Revised by: Date:
Scope and Purpose

The purpose of this document is to ensure that all proper procedures are followed when you are
assigned an AED unit.
For additional information on AED Operating Instructions, please refer to the Operator’s Manual.
AED Request
If you require an AED for an upcoming project, email valardsafetyadmin@valard.com. A form will
be sent to you for completion prior to receiving the AED. By signing out the AED, you are
responsible for the overall care of the unit and maintaining the mandatory monthly inspections.
Once the project is complete, the AED must be returned or re-assigned to your new project.
Monthly Inspection
All AED units are to be inspected using form 9.9 AED MONTHLY INSPECTION FORM from
Valard’s Health & Safety Manual
This inspection form shall be submitted within the first week of each month to the Corporate Safety
office by email: valardsafetyadmin@valard.com
All fields must be filled in on the checklist monthly, or it will be sent back to you for completion.
Please note that in the winter months, the AED unit must be kept in a warm area, and not left in
a vehicle overnight. Failure to comply may lead to AED not functioning properly.
If AED is being stored in hotel/camp room overnight, it must be brought back to site the following
morning.
Maintaining a State of Readiness
Your AED does not require routine maintenance. It performs an automatic self-test once a week
and every time you turn it on. The electrode indicators briefly flash during the test. If the automatic
self-test detects a condition that requires attention, the OK symbol in the readiness display will
fade and either the CHARGE-PAK symbol, the ATTENTION symbol, or the WRENCH symbol will
appear, depending on the type of condition detected.
Each month, the following shall be inspected and recorded:

• Check to make sure that the OK symbol is visible in the readiness display
• Check the use by date on the electrode packet (visible through the defibrillator lid in the
upper right corner) and all other electrode packets. If the date has passed replace the
electrode packet and battery charger.
• Check that the following supplies are stored with your AED:
o CPR/AED Rescue kit
o Pre-connected electrode pads
Replacing the Charge-Pac Battery Charger and the Quick-Pak Electrode Packet
CHARGE-PAK battery charger and the QUICK-PAK electrodes are a set and have the same
expiration date. Always replace the battery charger and electrodes at the same time to keep the
replacement cycles in sync.
Page 1 of 4
Use the Physio-Control replacement kit to replace the battery charger and the electrode packet
as follows:
• After using the AED
• If the CHARGE_PAK symbol appears in the readiness display
• When the use by date is reached or passed
• Once both change outs have been completed, you must fill out the AED Battery and Pad
Change Out Form and return to the address listed on the bottom of the form
The Physio-Control replacement kit includes a CHARGE-PAK battery charger, two QUICK_PAK
electrode packets, and a CHARGE-PAK battery discharger. The
discharger depletes a used battery charger so that it is ready for recycling or disposal.
Replacing the CHARGE-PAK Battery Charger

To replace the CHARGE-PAK Battery Charger:
1. Press the release latch (in the direction of the arrow) to

Remove the used battery charger. The battery charger springs
outward from the defiibrillator.
2. Insert the new battery charger into your defiibrillator and push
until you hear it click into position.
3. Confirm that the symbol disappears and that the OK

symbol appears in the readiness display.
NOTE: If the symbol appears after you replace the battery
charger, the internal battery is very low and needs time to
charge. Iyt may take up to 3 days if you had the defibrillator on
for a long time or if you delivered many shocks. The OK symbol
appears when the internal battery is charged.
Remember: If the defibrillator is needed for an emergency, attempt

to use it even if the symbol is visible.
CAUTION!
Keep the defibrillator at temperatures between 0° - 50° (32° - 122°F) while the new battery
charger charges the internal battery may not charge efficiently at lower temperatures.
Temperatures exceeding 50°C (122°F) for longer than seven days can permanently
damage the internal battery.
Page 2 of 4
Replacing the QUIK_PAK Electrode Packet

To replace the QUIK_PAK Electrode Packet:
1. Press the ON/OFF button to open the

defibrillator lid (voice instructions will sound)
2. Press and hold down the ON/OFF button for 2

seconds to turn off the defibrillator and save
battery power.
3. Remove the outdated or used electrode packet:

a. Unplug the electrode connector from the
connector receptacle.
b. Slide the anchor pin from the slot.
c. Discard the outdated or used electrode
packet according to the local regulations.
4. Install the new electrode packet.

a. Slide the anchor pin into the slot.
b. Plug the electrode connector into the
receptacle.
c. Ensure that the new electrode packet is
centered on the defibrillator and is tucked
behind the lip before closing the lid.
d. Close the lid. Confirm that the packet USE
by Date is visible through the upper right-
hand corner of the lid.
Page 3 of 4
Lost/Stolen AED
If an AED that has been assigned to you has been lost or stolen, you must email
valardsafetyadmin@valard.com and declare so. You will be required to fill out an AED
Lost/Stolen Report form prior to a replacement being sent.
Returning an AED
If you no longer require an AED that was assigned to you, please contact
valardsafetyadmin@valrd.com. They will inform you of all shipping procedures to have the AED
returned to the proper location.
Page 4 of 4
Document Description Ice Crossing with Equipment
Date: Jan. 2009 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Nov. 3 2011
27.087 EQUIPMENT CROSSING ON ICE

The purpose of this procedure is to specify rules of good safety practice for all
“Company” employees and contractors engaged in operations on ice covers and to
provide information on the thickness of ice required to support moving and stationary
loads and to specify methods for determining ice thickness and quality
Final decisions about ice crossings have to be made on site by an experienced

individual. Before any equipment crosses over any watercourse, the thickness of the ice
must be checked by cutting a hole in it. NOTE: Bulldozers will not use blade or ripper
tooth to check ice. The minimum ice thickness of clear blue ice for continuous travel is
as follows:
The first 1,000 kilograms (2,200 pounds) require 14 centimetres (5.5 inches) of ice
Each additional 1,000 kilograms require 4 centimetres (1.6 inches)
After 50 centimetres (19.7 inches) total thickness of ice, each additional 10,000 kg
(22,000 pounds) needs 16 centimetres (6.3 inches) of ice
Therefore, 1 5,000 kilogram (11,000 pounds) service truck needs 30 centimetres (10
inches) of blue ice
D3 Cat needs approximately 50 centimetres (20 inches) of blue ice
D5H Cat need approximately 60 centimetres (24 inches) of blue ice
D6 LGP needs approximately 65 centimetres (26 inches) of blue ice
D65 LGP Komatsu approximately 75 centimetres (30 inches) of blue ice
D7 LGP approximately 80 centimetres (31 inches) of blue ice
D85 Komatsu approximately 85 centimetres (33 inches) of blue ice
Preventive measures and considerations to ensure safe procedures have to do with

effective weight – bearing ice. Ultimately, one must consider the following:
White ice is only half as effective as Blue ice

If water lies between layers of ice, use only the depth of the top layer of ice
A vehicle speed of less than 30 kilometres an hour is recommended to avoid wave
buildup under the ice
Add 20% to above thickness for saline ice
Determine where the channels are on rivers and check periodically. These areas will be
first to thin when temperatures warm up and water starts to run
A river will continually eat at the bottom of the ice bridge, so the thickness must be
checked before every crossing
Determining ice thickness

Prior to use, the ice should be measured to determine whether its effective thickness is
adequate to support the expected load. The table below should be used as a guide to
the required thickness for the loads involved.
To initially determine effective ice thickness, the rule of thumb "one inch (2.5 cm) of
clear blue ice for every thousand pounds (450 kg)" may be used.
Page 1 of 3
LOADS ON BLUE ICE
Required Minimum Ice Description of Safe Moving Load

Thickness in inches
4 One person on foot
5 One Snowmobile
7 A single passenger automobile
8 A 2 ½ Ton Truck
9 A 3 ½ Ton Truck
10 A 7 to 8 Ton Truck
14 A 10 Ton Truck
19 A 20 Ton truck
24 A 30 Tom Truck
30 A 40 Ton Truck
Caution
Ice that is less than six inches (15 cm) thick should not be used for any crossing.
Because of natural variations, thickness may be less than 2 inches (5 cm) in some
areas.
The effective thickness can vary considerably in an ice cover. In particular, dangerously
thin areas can occur due to currents in the covers of rivers and estuaries, and on lakes
near the inlet or outlet of rivers and streams. Careful attention should be given to
reduced ice thickness close to shorelines and around ridges and leads.
The thickness can be determined by drilling test holes spaced at a maximum of 50 feet
(15 m) apart in rivers, and 100 feet (30 m) apart on a lake.
Crossings should be checked for ice thickness once a week when average air
temperatures vary between -15 and -5 degrees Celsius; and daily when the temperature
is above -5 degrees Celsius. Checks can be less frequent when ice thickness
substantially exceeds requirements. A new hole should be drilled for each ice
measurement.
Ice that is no longer supported by water, due to lowering water levels, may be too weak
to support the loads to be applied; conversely, a rising water level can result in the
formation of two ice layers with an intervening water layer. Ice thickness tests will reveal
these conditions.
Operating precautions
Following are a number of general precautions which should be taken when testing for
ice thickness or crossing ice covers:
(a) All persons involved in operations over ice covers should be familiar with the
hazards involved, the precautions to be taken and the basic rescue techniques
required in case of a breakthrough.
(b) Single persons or single vehicles should not venture onto an ice cover when there is
no help at hand.
Page 2 of 3
(c) When testing, persons on foot should be securely roped together, with minimum
spacing of 50 feet (15 m).
(d) Light vehicles used during test periods and initial build-up should be equipped with
an extended frame of logs to provide support if the vehicles break through the ice
cover.
(e) A rope at least 50 feet (15 m) long, or equivalent to water depth, with a float, may
be attached to test vehicles as an aid to marking and recovery.
(f) Vehicle doors and cab hatches should be removed or lashed open; seat belts must
NOT be worn.
(g) Adequate spacing must be maintained between vehicles; it is recommended that
an interval of at least 100 feet (30 m) be observed.
(h) Vehicle speed should not normally exceed 10 m/h (15 km/h) in order to avoid the
effects of the hydrodynamic wave, nor should speed be less than 1 m/h (1.5 km/h)
in order to avoid the effects of stationary load.
(k) Equipment required for rescue operations, such as "mats" (chained or wire-linked
small logs or heavy planks as a platform for rescue vehicles) jacks, hoists, etc.,
should be available near by.
(l) Frequently it is the second vehicle in a convoy, which encounters ice failure
problems. Before a second heavily loaded vehicle proceeds along the ice bridge, it
is advisable to have it preceded by a more lightly loaded vehicle to check the route.
Steps:
1. Review hazards and record on the tailboard with a plan to address them.
2. Identify area of crossing (to be determined by experienced person)
3. Check condition of ice (blue or white)
4. Worker to wear PFD and attached to a 50 foot rope.
5. Second worker must be present (no one is to walk on ice alone).
6. Drill hole to determine thickness of ice on river every 30 feet.
7. Using Table calculate load rating of ice.
8. Cross the ice with equipment that is less than the load rating of the ice.
9. Test ice whenever the weather warms up above freezing.
10. Cross ice at no more than 15 km per hour and not less than 1.5 km per hour.
11. Insure adequate spacing between vehicles.
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Setting H-Frames
Created By: B. Kowaski Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.115
Date: May 18, 2017 Revision: 0 Revised by: Date:
27.115 SETTING H-FRAMES
This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in Setting H-Frames and must be
available while the work is in progress
Safety Equipment:
• Hard Hat
• Safety Glasses
• Gloves
• Hi-Vis vest
• Spotter to have a different coloured hi-vis vest

• 30 Ft Slings (2) /20,000lb Rating
• 24 Ft Slings (2) /20,000lb Rating
• Spreader bar (1)
• 1 ¼” Shackles (4)
• 1” Shackles (4)
• Softeners for slings (8)
• Carpenters transits (2)
• Plumb bobs (3)
• Shovels (4)
• Harness and basket rescue kit (1)
• Pickup (1)
• 1-Ton (1)
• 80 Ton Crane (1)
• 23 Ton Picker (1)
• Digger Truck (1) with Pole Tongs
• Gravel Truck (1) with conveyor
• Hydrovac Truck (1)
• Air compressor (1)
• Air Tampers (4)
Page 1 of 3
Manpower Requirements:
• 1 – Foreman
• 1 – Journeyman Power Lineman
• 2 – Apprentice Power Lineman
• 1 – Boom Truck Operator (Competent/Qualified)
• 1 – Crane Operator (Competent/Qualified)
• 1 – Digger Operator (Competent/Qualified)
• 1 - Laborer
Steps:
1. Travel to job site

2. Review procedure and engineered lift plan. Complete Hazard Assessment and
Tailboard with all personnel involved prior to starting any work on site
3. Inspections to be completed on all Tools/Equipment and Rigging before any work
commences
4. Equipment logs to be completed before any work commences
5. Set up 80 Ton Crane level and at the proper radius for lifting each individual structure
6. Set up 23 Ton Picker or General Digger near the bottom section of H-Frame for
tailing
7. Prior to setting the structure, the Crew will level both holes with ¾ washed rock and
measure for setting depth
8. The rigging for the 80 Ton Crane will be choked below the top of the x-braces, using
20,000lb rated sling and a 1 ¼”shackle
9. Softeners will be used to prevent any damage to the sling where there are sharp
edges
10. A designated Signalman will give signals to the Operators while doing the lift
11. Direction will be given to the Crane Operator to tighten up the winch line by the
Signalman. The rigging will then be double checked by the Rigger before proceeding
with the lift
12. The rigging for the Tailing Crane will be attached with the sling being basketed two
feet from the end of the butt section of each pole and hooked up to a spreader bar
using 1” shackles
13. Direction will be given to the Tailing Operator by the Signalman to tighten up the
winch line. The rigging will then be double checked by the rigger before proceeding
with the lift
14. The Tailing Crane will keep the butts of the poles approximately two feet off the
ground and swing the boom to keep the winch line straight up and down as the 80
Ton Crane is doing the main lift
15. Once the 80 Ton Crane has the H-Structure vertical and the Signalman will stop the
lift and the Tailing Crane will be unhooked from the Structure
Page 2 of 3
16. The Structure will be swung over the two holes and will be lowered with the Lineman
guiding the butts into the holes until it is sitting firmly on the bottom
17. The Structure will be checked for plumb using a Plumb Bob and/or transit. If one
side has to be raised the crane will hoist the Structure high enough that the gravel
can be placed evenly across the bottom of the hole
18. Once the Structure is level the Digger Truck will clamp onto the pole utilizing pole
claws to plumb one side of the Structure
19. The Gravel Truck will then be backed up close to the pole that is plumb, and will fill
the hole ½ way with ¾” washed rock
20. The Digger will then grab the other pole and square off the Structure
21. Once the structure is plumb and squared each hole will have gravel placed in 6 inch
lifts and mechanically tamped.
22. The Signalman can give enough direction to the Crane Operator to lower the winch
until there is enough slack to unhook the shackles from the H-Structure
23. A Lineman will then go up in a man basket and clear all the rigging
24. The equipment will then de-mob and move to the next site
Contingencies:
1. Mechanic will be available in the event a breakdown occurs

2. Extra ropes and tools will be available if required
3. Muster Point will be the Crew Leader’s truck
4. Tailboard, ERP and Job Procedure is all in the Crew Lead’s truck
5. Spill trays and spill kits are on all equipment
6. Always stay clear of Line of Fire; NEVER walk under or place limbs underneath a
suspended load
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Site Preparation-Butt-Down Areas
Date: June 09, 2017 Revision: 0 Revised by: Date:
27.116 PREPARATION-BUTT-DOWN AREAS
This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in Preparation of Butt Down Areas
This procedure deals with preparation of stringing pull sites (puller and/or tensioner). Activity
includes clearing of pull sites, installation of screw anchors or dead-man anchors for anchoring
of conductors and OHSW (when pull site is in the middle of span), installation of ground matting,
ground roads, set up of stringing equipment.
Safety Equipment:
• Hard Hat
• Safety Glasses
• Gloves
• Hi-Vis vest
• Crew Cab (2)

• Megger (1) (Ground resistance measurement)
• Radial Boom Digger (1)
• Boom Truck (1) (28-30T rated)
• Back-hoe (1) (200 or bigger)
• 13 mm wire rope (As required)
• Slug Plates (6) (Tested to minimum of 50000LBS)
• Slug Anchors or helix anchors (6 sets) (As per design)
• Non-metallic rope (As required)
• Ground rods (As required)
• Ground matting (As required)
• Anchor bars and grout (As required)
• Orange fencing (As required)
• 4’x8’ orange fencing (As required)
• Cross clamps (As required) (Attached to ground rods)
• “Danger Limit of Approach”-signs (As required)
• Orange flags (As required)
Page 1 of 5
Manpower required:
• 1- Foreman
• 3 – Ground Man
• 1 – RBD Operator (Competent/Qualified)
• 1 – Boom Truck Operator (Competent/Qualified)
Job Steps:
1. Set out anchors positions for slug bars as per Detailed Stringing Plan
2. Depending on site ground conditions; use dead-man or drilled anchors as anchoring points for
the conductors. If it is normal or wet soil, use cements anchors for anchoring of conductors.
Design of dead-man or drilled anchors shall be done by qualified engineer.
3. If dead-man anchors are used: Dig the hole as per design, install two slings on each anchor
and extend it to the ground level. Backfill the hole properly and compact it thoroughly during
backfilling. Use one dead-man anchor for anchoring of two sub-conductors. Total of six
anchors shall be installed on any slug site for this project.
4. If screw anchors are used: Mark anchors positions on the ground and position RBD level for
the first screw anchor to be drilled.
5. Install all screw anchors as per design. Rake the anchors as required per design. The anchors
shall be installed in groups of four anchors.
6. Test anchors with dynamo to ensure they are rated for loads that will be applied to them
7. Make sure that area is free from any materials/equipment that could obstruct installation of the
matting.
8. Layout grounds mats and connect it using properly rated connectors.
9. Once matting is completed, install slug plates by connecting them to slings protruding to the
ground level from dead-man anchors or connecting them to front screw anchors of each group
of four. Note that slug plates shall be tested / certified to designed load. Front and back screw
anchors shall be inter-connected by certified chains and shackles.
10. Install ground rods as needed in order to obtain proper ground resistance (measure with
megger).
11. For sites where poor ground resistance reading are encountered, install additional ground rods
outside the grounding mat (other option is to connect the slug-site matting with adjacent towers
by means of #2 ACSR wire).
12. Install a fence 1 FT in from the outer edge of the ground mat.
13. Install the outer fence 5 FT outside of the first fence (this fence should not be connected to the
grounding mat).
14. Make one entrance into each area. Install plywood or walkways at the entrance to the ground
mats. Walkway is to be covered by clean rated rubber blankets.
Page 2 of 5
15. Position each piece of equipment (puller, tensioner, etc.) just behind slug anchors. Use heavier
equipment to anchor lighter equipment using properly rated rigging (anchor tensioner to reel
carriers, puller to reel winder, etc.)
16. Fly rope carrier may be set outside matting area and anchored by truck or excavator.
17. Connect each machine to the ground matting using rated and tested ground leads.
18. Ensure that all fencing is put back if removed due to placement of the equipment or reels.
19. If OPGW pulls do not coincide with conductor slug sites, prepare smaller slug sites as per
OPGW pulling schedule. The distance of OPGW slug should be not less than 3 x height of the
adjacent structure.
20. Check communication throughout the pulling section prior start any operation.
Drawings:
1. Typical slug-site lay-out
2. Certified design/drawing for screw piles or dead-man conductor anchoring
Contingencies:
1. Equipment will be available in case that breakdown occurs; extra ropes and tools will be
available if required.
2. Mechanic shall be on standby in case that any piece of equipment breaks down.
Page 3 of 5
Figure 1: The running ground required will provide protection from static electricity, induction, or
accidental contact with an energized conductor. Grounds ensure that protective equipment will
operate.
Page 4 of 5
Page 5 of 5
Document Description Installation Of Spacer Dampers
Date: Nov 1, 2014 Revision: 1 Revised by: B. Kowaski Date: June 27, 2017
27.117 Installation of Spacer Dampers
be completed in a safe and efficient manner. This procedure must remain on site while work is
being performed.

• Hard hat
• Safety glasses
• Face Shield
• Boots
• Leather gloves
• Fall Arrest Harness c/w Lanyard.
Required Tools and Equipment:

• Crew Truck (1)
• Man Lift (1) *Optional
• Chain Hoist 1.5T (2)
• Boom Truck/Crane (1) (40-50T Rated)
• Cable Car (6)
• Universal lifting davit (6)
• Rigging slings (belts) (4) Rated 2T SWL
• Torque wrenches (6)
• Various Shackles (4)
• Torque wrenches (6)
• Hand Line Ropes (18-20mm dia-60m long) (2) Incl. snatch block (1.5T)
• Hand Tools (1 set) (Pliers, Spanners, Screw-driver)
• Emergency rescue kit (1 set)
Manpower Required:
• 1 - Foreman
• 6 – Power Lineman
• 2 – Ground man
• 1 - Operator
Page 1 of 3
Job Steps:
• Inspect the cable cars at the ground level (start the motor, make sure that both front and
reverse gears are working, check brakes, etc).
• Provide portable extinguisher at each cable car.
• Position the Cable Car bellow first tower to start installation.
• Position the boom truck (or crane) just next to it. Boom truck (crane) positioned as per
instruction (on level ground and away from existing lines).
• Alternatively : Cable cars could be lifted up by hand line (if light spacer carts are used).
• Note: Lineman already climbed onto the tower (using double lanyard system) and
positioned at each conductor arm.
• Install temporary ground between cross arm and conductor.
• Linemen descends down the insulator set to the conductor level (or crosses over the D/E
insulator set.
• Attach the cable car to the boom of boom truck (crane) and lift it up to bottom x-arm first.
• Lineman at the conductors shall guide the cable car when close to conductor and close in
traction wheel against each sub conductor.
• Lineman climbs into cable car, belting into a car and un-belt from the bundle.
• Perform visual and mechanical circle check as described above.
• Place odometer on “zero” reading and starts moving towards position of first spacer-
damper.
• The lineman in lowest cable car moves first, followed by lineman on middle phase and then
lineman at the top conductors. They should never be exactly one above the other due to
possibility of dropping tools or materials.
• When cable car reaches first spacer-damper location, put on the brakes and turn off the
motor.
• Position spacer-damper within tolerance using setting tool (square). Examine the spacer-
damper prior installation.
• Tighten spacer-damper bolts to specified torque.
• Start motor, release breaks and move next spacer-damper position.
• Once cable car reaches next tower, the cable car is designed to go through if it is
suspension (tangent) tower. In case of angle or dead/end tower, the cable car shall be
lowered down to the ground level on one side and lifted up to the conductor level on the
other side of the tower, using boom truck or crane (or hang line in case of light spacer
carts).
Page 2 of 3
Contingencies:
• Equipment will be available in case of breakdown occurs, hold back ropes and tools will be
available.
• Man Lift provided in case of bad weather and/or slippery tower steel.
Cable car in position (next to tangent tower)
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Installing Travelers on H-Structures
Date: Aug. 20, 2016 Revision: 1 Revised by: M. MacKenzie Date: June 20, 2017
27.118 INSTALLING TRAVELLERS ON H-STRUCTURES
This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards Installing Travelers on H-Structures
and must be available while the work is in progress
This procedure deals with hanging the travelers to the insulators on a steel H-structure.
The works are to be done in conventional way, using a picker with man basket and a
winch truck. Use of helicopter is not required for this method.
Safety Equipment:
• Hard Hat
• Safety Glasses
• Gloves
• Hi-Vis vest
• Specialty PPE (Fall Protection)
• Delineators (Mark Drop Zone)

• 23 Ton Boom Truck with Man Basket (1)
• 1 Ton with Rope Winch (1) (SWL On Rope 3780LBS)
• 1 Ton Crew Truck (1)
• Hanging Sling/Soft Sling (4) (2-3mm Long – 2T SWL)
• Various Shackles (4) (Rated 2T)
• 2 Ton Sheaves (2) (Rated 2T)
• 5/8 Power Braid Rope (300ft) (SWL 3780LBS)
• Hand Line Sheave (1) (SWL 1200LBS)
• Hand Tools (Pliers, Wrench, Kliens)
• 1 – Foreman
• 1 – Journeyman PLT
• 1 – Picker/Boom Truck Operator (Competent/Qualified)
• 1 – Winch Truck Operator
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Installing Travelers on H-Structures
Date: Aug. 20, 2016 Revision: 1 Revised by: M. MacKenzie Date: June 20, 2017
Job Steps:
1. Insulators, and travelers are already at site.
2. Go over tail board with all personal involved.
3. Complete all inspections on equipment and tools before use.
4. Set up picker with man basket ,making sure that the truck is set up level and the
outriggers are on stable ground.
5. Set up winch truck on same side of the structure as the picker so the rope does not have
to be passed around the poles. And line up the fare lead to the center phase.
6. Maintain limits of approach when working near any energized lines.
7. One lineman will go up in the man basket to do the rigging. The lineman will use hand
signals to instruct the crane operator where the basket is to be positioned.
8. The lineman will also use hand signals to instruct the winch truck operator.
9. A 2”nylon sling will be basketed over the arm and a 2 ton sheave will be connected to
the sling.
10. The 5/8 rope will be placed in the sheave and the tail of the rope will be lowered to the
ground and connected to the bundle traveler.
11. The traveler will be winched up until it is hanging even with the bottom of the glass.
12. The lineman will connect the traveler to the glass using a socket clevis that is rated for
25000lbs.
13. Once connected the winch will be lowered and the rigging will be removed from the
traveler.
14. Inspect the traveler attached to the glass (movable gate should operate smoothly; no
damaged sheaves).
15. Make sure that all wheels are turning freely.
16. For the center phase install a hand line sheave to the lifting rope and connect to traveler
to keep the traveler clear of the x-braces as it is being winched up.
17. Hang OHSW travelers on to the designated peaks using the man basket.
Contingencies:

suspended load
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Let-out and Sagging of Conductors and OHSW
27.119 Let-out and Sagging of Conductors and OHSW
being performed.

• Hard hat
• Safety glasses
• Face Shield
• Boots
• Leather gloves
• Fall Arrest Harness c/w Lanyard.
• Bucket Rescue Kit.

• Backhoe (2) (PC200 or similar)
• Crew Truck (6) (Incl. Saggers)
• Man Lift (3) (Optional)
• Sagging Sling (1) (20m long-rated 20000LBS
• Webbing Sling (2) (Rated 20000 Lbs, 20FT long
• Let-out Ropes (2) (Approx 200m long-rated
• Various Shackles (20)Rated 15000LBS
• Dynamometer (5) (20000LBS rated)
• Grounding Chains (10)
• Hand Line Ropes (2) (18-20mm dia-60m If Required)
• Running Grounds (4)
• Hand Tools (1) (Pliers, spanners, screw-driver)
• Live Line Tool to install grounds (Visible tool testing due dates)
Manpower Required:
• 2 - Foreman
• 5 - Operator
Page 1 of 6
Job Steps:
1. Let-out of Conductors and OHSW

2. Note: All conductors are already connected to slug bars on one side. The conductors are
pulled out in the opposite direction and gripped on the other side of the slug bars under
lower tension and are ready to be spliced.
3. Splice all sub-conductors at the slug site.
4. Install two single travelers on the top of slug bar and insert let-out ropes into each of the
travelers, then connect the ends of the rope to the grips that are holding conductors on
forward side (low tension side).
5. Pull slowly the let-out ropes by heavy equipment located outside matting area and
remove grips on forward side.
6. Get ready for pulling conductors at the forward site. Grip both sub-conductors in front of
slug and pull it with sagging wire (rated 25000LBS), traded through evener block-
(20000LBS). Connect evener block with dynamometer (20000LBS) and use webbing
sling (20000LBS) to connect dynamometer to pulling equipment. Dynamometer will be
used in order to not over tension wires. Install two single travelers in inverted position at
the slug bar and insert sub-conductors into them.
7. Tie 2 sub-conductors vertically to the slug bar to prevent the upward movement.
8. Pull slowly 2 sub-conductors at the forward slug site until grips on backward side at let-
out slug site, are free and can be removed. Unshackle it from the slug bar.
9. Attach two let-out ropes that are already inserted into two single sheave travelers at the
top of slug bar to let-out lips (rubberized in order to prevent damage to sub- conductors)
of both two sub-conductors of the first bundle to be let-out. Now, two sub- conductors
are ready to be let-out.
10. Position the observer at the last tied in structure to monitor the movement of the
suspension clamps and vertical movement of the suspension assembly.
11. Pull up with machine at the forward slug site, releasing the let-out lips vertically at the let-
out site, until tension is off the lips at the let-out slug site. Stay in constant
communication between observer at the last tied in structure-let-out slug site and
forward slug site. Use separate radio channel if there is any helicopter works going at
the same time.
12. This procedure continues until the let-out site has no tension on ropes.
13. The let-out lips will then be dumped off the wire and let to the ground, controlled by a P
line (small rope-dia 10-12mm) previously installed (to prevent damage to other wires in
slug site during the fall of lips).
14. Then, the forward end will contact the last tied in tower to confirm the position of shoes
on bundle. If necessary, adjust the shoes (clamps) position and then re-install grips and
temporary grounds at the forward side.
15. Put the bundle back to slug grips and install grounding chains onto the conductors.
16. Repeat the same procedure until all conductors are let-out.
17. Let-out OHSW in the same manner as explained above.
18. Now, conductors are ready for sagging.
Page 2 of 6
Sagging at the slug site:
1. Start sagging with center bundle if possible.

2. Get ready for sagging of the conductors at the forward site. Grip both sub-conductors in
front of slug and pull it with sagging wire (rated 20000LBS), threaded through evener
block-(20000LBS). Connect evener block with dynamometer (20000LBS) and use
webbing sling (20000LBS) to connect dynamometer to pulling equipment. Dynamometer
will be used in order not to over tension wires. Install two single travelers in inverted
position at the top of slug bar and insert sub-conductors into it.
3. The wire will then be put into the single travelers on the slug bar.
4. Remove grounds from both sub-conductors.
5. The both sub-conductors are now ready to be pulled out of the grips at slugs and to be
sagged.
6. The operator of the pulling equipment will be signaled by an appointed signaling person
positioned at the slugs to take up the slack in the conductors until tension is released
from the grips holding the conductors at the slug site. Remove the grips off the sub-
conductors.
7. Depending on the length of the pull there will be 2-3 spans marked with sag boards.
These sag boards will be installed in accordance with calculated temperature sag sheet.
8. There will be a sagger assigned to each span where sags are marked with sag boards
and will have a fixed scope or free hand to sight the wire in to the sag board.
9. If there is a change in temperature from what the boards were hung at, each sager will
be given a calculated adjustment to compensate for the temperature change.
10. The wire will then be pulled up while the sager watch to not over pull.
11. The back sager (being the farthest away from the pulling end) will direct the person at
the pulling end to take up the wire and then will stop pulling when it is roughly 6” low to
the sag mark.
12. The back sager will now instruct the pulling end to take it up slow until the wire in his
span is on the boards. He will then stop the pull, check that his wires are level and on
the board.
13. If he is satisfied with this he will call them good and the pulling end will then work with
the next sager and use the same procedures as with former sager. This procedure will
be followed with each sager in the pull working backwards to the pulling site.
14. Note: As each sag is being worked with, the pulling end will check with the other
saggers, having completed their sagging already, that the conductors at their site are still
good and not being pulled over or remain lower than the design sag.
15. Now that both two sub-conductors have been brought to the designed sag in each
section and confirmed good by the sag crew, the wires can be grounded and gripped
into the slug.
16. Once the wires have been gripped, all saggers will be instructed to give a final check to
ensure there are no adjustments to be made.
17. Note that sagging crew may decide to pull one by one sub-conductor into full sag,
repeating the above procedure step by step.
18. Repeat the same procedure all three phases as well as OHSW.
Page 3 of 6
Sagging at the Dead End structure:
1. When sagging at the D/E structure, position pulling equipment behind the structure at
least 2 x conductor attachment height.
2. Install grips on both sub-conductors as close as possible to the ground level (depending
on the conductor tails length).
3. Depending on the pulling equipment, 1x1 or 2 sub-conductors shall be pulled to full sag.
4. Hook the steel wire rope of appropriate rating (15000LBS each) to the grips and then
connect it to the winches of the Bulldozer (D8 or similar) or to the backhoe by means of
appropriately rated webbing sling (20FT long). Install Dynamometers on to pulling wires
as close as possible to the pulling equipment.
5. Pull slowly until grips installed on the sub-conductors at the structure arm could be
removed.
6. Once grips are removed, start sagging of the wires with further sager and repeat similar
procedure as explained above.
7. Once wires are on the sag boards with all saggers, re-install grips at the x-arm of the
structure or install D/E insulator string and grip all sub-conductors at the rear end of the
string directly.
8. Repeat similar procedure until all bundles and OHSW are sagged to designed sag.
Contingencies:
1. Equipment will be available in case of breakdown occurs, hold back ropes and tools will
be available.
2. Man Lift provided in case of bad weather and/or slippery tower steel for the saggers.
Page 4 of 6
Page 5 of 6
Page 6 of 6
Document Description Pulling of Conductors and OHSW
Date: Dec. 2014 Revision: 1 Revised by: B. Kowaski Date: June 09, 2017
27.120 PULLING OF CONDUCTORS AND OHSW (SWEATD PROJECT)
This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in Pulling of Conductors and OHSW
and must be available while the work is in progress
This deals with:

1. Tension Stringing Method Pulling of Conductors and OHSW
2. Slack Stringing Method for Pulling of Conductors and OHSW
Safety Equipment:
• Hard Hat
• Safety Glasses
• Gloves
• Hi-Vis vest
• Specialty PPE (Fall Protection)

• Crew Cab (5)
• Crane (1) (40 ton rated-for loading of reels)
• Big Puller (1) (20000 LBS)
• Track hoe (1) (200 or bigger)
• Tensioner for Conductor (1) (20000 LBS)
• Reel Trailers (2)
• Four drum rope puller (1) (9000LBS)
• OHSW/OPGW Tensioner (1) (4000LBS)
• Single drum rope puller (1)
• Running Board for conductor (2)
• ¾” slings 15-20FT (12) (For anchoring conductors & equipment)
• Crane/Boom Truck 23 ton (As req.) (With man basket)
• Conductor Grips (24) To suite conductor size (Chicago type)
• OHSW Grips (6) Chicago Type or Preformed
• Pulling Socks for Conductor (12) (To Suite conductor size)
• Pulling Socks for OHSW (4) (Killam Grip- To suite wire size)
• Swivel 20000 LBS (1) (In front of running board)
• Swivel 10000LBS (8) (At the back of running board)
• Swivel 5000LBS (4) (For pulling OHSW)
Page 1 of 5
• Running Ground for conduct. (2 sets)

• Running Ground for OHSW (2 sets)
• Miscellaneous small tools (2 sets) (Hammer, pliers, tie wire, plastic tape)
• Cable Cutter (2) (With cutting dies for conductor & OHSW)
• 2 – Foreman
• 6 – Power Line Technician
• 4 – Operators (Puller, 624 Loader-2, Tensioner, Crane, Boom Truck,
Puller/Tensioner)
•
• Flagging Crew and Traffic Signs: (if crossing over public roads, railways, and
navigable rivers) shall be positioned at all major crossings within the pull. Vehicle
with flashing lights and flagger, with required traffic signs, shall stop any traffic
while running board and or socks cross over road or railway.
If required, rider poles to be installed at the crossing point as per Procedure
for Installation and Removal of Rider Poles.
Job Steps:
1. Position two (2) reel trailers, each loaded with 2-4 conductor reels, just behind tensioner.
2. Ground it to the ground mat, as per Site Preparation-Butt-down Areas procedure. Anchor
tensioner to the ground anchor or connect it with both reel carriers by sling wires or belts
(min.3/4”-8-10000LBS).
3. Feed sub-conductors through the bull wheels of tensioner.
4. Assign radio channel for pulling operation that is not interfering with channel used by
helicopter operations, if in progress at the same time.
5. Anchor Puller to the ground anchor or to the Hard Line Winder. Use slings min. ¾”-
12000LBS.
6. Connect Hard Line to the fly rope end at the puller site. Note that running ground needs
to be installed on the Hard line (if it is steel hard line) in front of the puller and start
pulling of Hard-Line from Tensioner towards Puller. Puller will be operated in backward
mode, controlling pulling tension. Use puller/tensioner, set at the tensioner side, to pull
the Hard line. Note that Puller/Tensioner (P/T) needs to be anchored by means of heavy
equipment prior start pulling (bulldozer/loader/backhoe) by 2 x dia ¾”x10-12FT long sling
wires.
7. Assign lineman to follow the head of Hard line all the way from puller to tensioner.
8. Position lineman with boom truck at heavy angle structures in order to assist pulling of
the Hard line through, where required.
Page 2 of 5
9. Position Flaggers at any major road/railway/river crossing as well as any line crossing
where rider poles are installed.
10. Control tension of the Hard line while pulling in order to not to interrupt any traffic or rub
heavily on the rider poles or any other obstacles.
11. Once Hard line reaches the tensioner end, grab it in front of tensioner and install
temporary ground on it. Disconnect it from rope and connect with running board front
end by means of 20000LBS swivel. Note that two sub-conductors are already in front of
tensioner and are connected to rear end of running board by means of pulling socks
(Kellem grips) and swivel joints.
12. Install running grounds on both sub-conductors.
13. Remove temporary ground that is installed earlier on the Hard line.
14. Slowly start pulling by removing the slack of the Hard line first.
15. Continue at slow speed rate until running board passes first tower.
16. Assign observer to follow the running board at all times during pulling. Due to various
obstacles along the pulling section, this may require more than one observer. Dead End
structures in heavy angle shall have full time observer stationed at it. Note that double
traveler may have to be used on the arms of heavy angle structures.
17. Running board observer shall stay in radio contact with puller and tensioner operator at
all times during the operation. The observers will advise on information such as: position
of the running board, running board is approaching any structure; pulling tension should
be increased/decreased etc.
18. Slow down the pulling when warning markers on the conductor reels are down to last
layer left on the reels.
19. Continue with slow pull until only two to four wraps are remaining on the conductor reels.
20. Stop pulling.
21. Cut the ends of both sets of the reels (front set that is just pulled out and set to follow).
22. Connect ends of reels by means of Kallem grips. Tie the Kellem grips properly and call
puller to “sock-out” the Kellem grips.
23. As Kellem grips come out of the tensioner, hold the pulling.
24. As pulling stops for installation of the implo-sleeves, ground both sub-conductors in front
of the tensioner far enough to allow for the attaching slings and grips. Slings used for
this purpose shall be at least dia 3/4” and 20-30FT long.
25. Install grips and slings on each sub-conductor in front of tensioner. As the sub-
conductors could be high in some cases, use ladder or man lift to install the slings and
grips.
26. Push forward slowly by tensioner until sling wires take the tension and Kellem grips are
lose and can be removed.
27. Remove Kellem grips from both ends and install implo-sleeves as per manufacturer’s
instruction and procedure.
28. Once sleeves are completed, tie back sub-conductors by tensioner in order to remove
the grips and slings in front of tensioner.
29. Remove grounds installed in front of tensioner.
30. Reinstall running grounds on each sub-conductor.
31. Continue with pulling until second/third sets of reels are completed.
Page 3 of 5
32. Once the board has passed through to the last structure, pull until conductors enter the
slug area.
33. Once the board has entered the slug site at the puller end and the operator is satisfied
that there is enough wire to safely grip into the slug, alert the tensioner end and halt the
pull.
34. Each of the conductors will then be grounded and transferred into the slug. If the position
of tensioner is not in line with slugs, attach the bundle to heavy equipment (backhoe or
loader) and transfer it (walk) to the slugs.
35. Note that once back hoe/loader has taken over the load of the bundle, puller shall
release the Hard line and detach the running board and Kellem grips from the head of
the bundle.
36. Advise the tensioner site that all sub-conductors have been secured and grounded.
37. The tensioner end can then even up the wires if needed and grip it into the slugs using
the same methods as the puller end. Note that tensioner side may place the bundle into
the slug at first in which case the leveling of the bundle shall be carried out at the puller
site prior gripping of the sub-conductors into the slugs.
38. Repeat the same procedure until all conductors are pulled out.
39. Note that pulling section may begin and/or end at the dead-end structure. In that case all
sub-conductors shall be “short-gripped” to the cross arms of the D/E tower.
40. Pull OHSW using Puller/Tensioner, positioned at the tensioner site.
41. Small tensioner for pulling of the OHSW shall in normal case, be positioned at the puller
side but the positions could be inverted in some cases.
42. OHSW shall be connected tot the end of fly rope and pulled in by the same rope.
43. Head of OHSW shall be connected to the rope end by means of Kellem grip and swivel-
5000LBS.
44. Constant communication on separate channel (if parallel with pulling of the conductors)
shall be maintained during stringing of OHSW.
45. Once pulled in, OHSW shall be put into slugs in the same manner as conductors.
46. Safe clearance from the pulling conductors/OHSW to the ground and any obstacles,
such as rider pole, shall be kept at all times during puling operation.
47. Special care shall be taken where the pulling comes close or crosses existing lines. LOA
shall be maintained at all times during pulling as well as reclosure blocking will be in
place.
48. In order to avoid damages of the conductors during the pulling operation, the conductors
shall be handled with extreme care. However, if the any damage occurs, it will be treated
in accordance with Specification for Conductors and OHSW installation.
Page 4 of 5
Typical Tension Stringing Crossing Diagram
Contingencies:

suspended load
Page 5 of 5
Document Description Tie In Tangent (Clamping In)
27.121 Tie in Tangent (Clamping in)
being performed.

• Hard hat
• Safety glasses
• Face Shield
• Boots
• Leather gloves
• Fall Arrest Harness c/w Lanyard

• Crew Truck (1)
• Man Lift (1) *Optional
• Chain Hoist 3T (2)
• Retractable Lock (3)
• Rigging slings (belts) (2) (1.5-2m Long -Rated 3T)
• Grip All Stick (1 Set)
• Various Shackles (4)
• Hand Line Ropes (18-20mm dia-60m long) (2) Incl. snatch block (1.5T)
• Hand Tools (1 set) (Pliers, Spanners, Screw-driver)
Manpower Required:
• 1 - Foreman
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Tie In Tangent (Clamping In)
Job Steps:
• Once two linemen are on the top of tower (lifted up by man lift or climbed using double
lanyard), attach temporary ground (grip all stick) to the sub conductors of the phase to be
tied in first.
• Lift up lifting shoes, rigging slings and chain hoists onto the tower.
• Attach the rigging set (chain hoist, sling, lifting shoes) to the end of tower arm.
• Take up load on the chain hoists, raising sub conductors approximately 50 to 70 mm off the
traveler sheaves.
• Wrap the end of the hand line around center sheave of the traveler and open the hinged
trap door of the helicopter arm assembly.
• Jack up the conductor bundle until it is cleared above traveler sheaves.
• Disconnect traveler from the insulator string and lower it to the ground. Use 1T truck or any
other available equipment to lower the traveler.
• Remove the hand line from the traveler once it reaches ground.
• Connect the suspension clamps to the hand line and lift it up into position.
• Connect the suspension clamps to the insulator string, as per suspension assembly
drawing, making sure that that the ball is properly seated in the socket and that cotter key is
properly installed.
• Place each sub conductor into the individual clamp and tighten properly (making sure that
insulator assembly is vertically plumbed after the clamps are tightened and rigging set
removed).
• Remove the rigging set to the next phase and continue with clamping.
• Use 1.5 T Chain hoist to tie in sky wire and OPGW.
Contingencies:
• Equipment will be available in case that breakdown occurs. Hold back ropes and tools will
be available.
• Man Lift provided in case of bad weather and/or slippery tower steel.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Setting H Frames
Created By: Darren Windross Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.136
Date: Revision: 6 Revised by: W Procyshyn Date: 08/16/2018
SOP 27. 136 Setting 2 Pole H- Frames

1. Tool/Equipment List:
1.1 2 - 40 ft. poly Slings Rated for 40000 lbs.
1.2 2 – 10 ft. Poly Slings rated for 53000 lbs.
1.3 1 – Spreader Bar rated for loa
1.4 2 - 11/ in. Shackles
1.6 360 ft. - Poly Rope
1.7 Carpenter’s transits
1.8 8 - Softeners for slings
1.9 3 - Plumb bobs/Transit
1.10 4 – Shovels
1.11 1 – 350 Excavator
1.12 4- 1 ton pickups
1.13 1 – 200-ton Crane
1.14 1 250 Excavator with claws
1.15 1 – Backhoe or Loader
1.16 2 Gravel Trucks
1.17 Conveyer
1.18 Laser Level
1.19 1- Air compressor mounted on car hauler
1.20 10 – Air Tampers
2. Manpower Required:
2.1 1 – Foreman with Supervisor Leadership Training
2.2 2 – PLT Journeymen c/w EQ Bonding & Grounding training and JM certificate
2.3 4 – PLT apprentices c/w Fall Pro & Ground disturbance training
2.4 1 – Gravel Truck operator c/w driver’s license
2.5 1 – Crane operator with Crane and hoisting certificate
2.6 1 – Excavator operator c/w PME training
2.7 1 - Labourer c/w site orientation
3. Jobsite Communication
3.1 All direction to be from the Construction Manager to Crew Foreman
3.2 All direction to workers from the Foreman
4. Deliverables
4. 1 Coded Time Reports done daily
4.2 Daily Tailboard and Emergency Response Plan
4.3 Applicable Daily Equipment Checks
Page 1 of 3
4.4 Daily NSC Equipment Logs

4.5 Construction crew to inspect all material are available and insure they are in good
condition
4.6 This procedure to be available on site during the work process
4.7 Engineering Plan approved and available prior to work commencing
5. Access
5.1 Maps and Road Restrictions to be available
5.2 All equipment must stay on rig mats when crossing pipeline right of ways
6. Prerequisites
6.1 Foreman to have work package c/w Drawings/ ERP/ Quality Documents
6.2 All Materials on site
6.3 Drop zones to be established setup and maintained
6.4 Grounding Plan to be developed on site daily if required
7. Procedure Steps
7.1 Travel to Jobsite
7.2 Review procedure, engineering lift plan, all IFC drawings and QA requirements
7.3 Complete Hazard Assessment and Tailboard daily with all personnel involved
7.4 Equipment logs to be completed before any work commences
7.5 Set up 200Ton Crane level and at the proper radius for lifting each individual
structure
7.6 Set up 350 Excavator and spreader bar near the bottom section of H-Frame for
tailing
7.7 Prior to setting the structure, the Crew will level both holes with ¾” to 1.5”
washed rock and measure for setting depth. Mark setting depth onto each pole of
H-frame with chalk
7.8 The rigging for the 200 Ton Crane will be choked below the bottom cross arm,
using 20,000lb rated sling and a 1 ¼” shackle
7.9 Softeners will be used to prevent any damage to the sling where there are sharp
edges
7.10 A designated Signalman will give signals to the Operators while doing the lift
7.11 Direction will be given to the Crane Operator to tighten up the winch line by the
Signalman. The rigging will then be double checked by the Rigger before
proceeding with the lift
7.12 The rigging for the Tailing Crane will be attached with the sling being basketed two
feet from the end of the butt section of each pole and hooked up to a spreader
bar using 1” Shackles
7.13 Direction will be given to the Tailing Operator by the Signalman to tighten up
the rigging. The rigging will then be double checked by the rigger before
Page 2 of 3
7.14 The 350 Excavator and spreader bar tailing, will keep the butts of the poles
approximately two feet off the ground and walk towards the 200ton crane to
keep the winch line straight up and down as the 200ton Crane is doing the
main lift
7.15 Once the 200 Ton Crane has the H-Structure vertical, the Signalman will stop the
lift and the 350 excavator and spreader bar tailing will be unhooked from the
Structure
7.16 The Structure will be swung over the two holes and will be lowered with the
Lineman guiding the butts into the holes until it is sitting firmly on the bottom
7.17 The Structure will be checked for initial plumb using a Plumb Bob and/or transit. If
one side has to be raised the crane will hoist the Structure high enough that the
gravel can be placed evenly across the bottom of the hole
7.18 Once the Structure is level, the 250 excavator with clam, will clamp onto the left or
right pole and plumb one side of the structure as per the direction of the signal
man.
7.19 The Gravel Truck will then be backed up close to the pole that is plumb, and will
fill the hole ½ way with ¾” to 1.5” washed rock
7.20 The 250 excavator with clam, will then grab the other pole and square off the
Structure
7.21 Once the structure is plumb and squared each hole will have gravel placed in 2’
7.22 The Signalman can give enough direction to the Crane Operator to lower the
winch until there is enough slack to release the pull pin shackles via 3/8” poly
rope from the H-Structure
7.23 The equipment will then de-mob and move to the next site
3. Contingencies:
8.1 Mechanic will be available in the event of equipment breakdown of failure
8.2 Extra ropes and tools will be available if required
8.3 Muster Point will be the Crew Leader’s truck
8.4 Tailboard, ERP and Job Procedure to be located in the Crew Lead’s truck
8.5 Spill kits to be located in all equipment
8.6 Always stay clear of Line of Fire; NEVER walk under or place limbs underneath a
suspended load
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Setting H Frames VC7608
Created By: Darren Windross Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.136(A)
Date: Revision: 7 Revised by: J. Repchinsky Date: Oct. 15, 2018
SOP 27. 136(A) Setting 2 Pole H- Frames VC 7608

1. Tool/Equipment List:
1.1 2 - 40 ft. poly Slings Rated for 40000 lbs.
1.2 2 – 10 ft. Poly Slings rated for 53000 lbs.
1.3 1 – Spreader Bar rated for loa
1.4 2 - 11/ in. Shackles
1.6 360 ft. - Poly Rope
1.7 Carpenter’s transits
1.8 8 - Softeners for slings
1.9 3 - Plumb bobs/Transit
1.10 4 – Shovels
1.11 1 – 350 Excavator
1.12 4- 1 ton pickups
1.13 1 – 200-ton Crane
1.14 1 250 Excavator with claws
1.15 1 – Backhoe or Loader
1.16 2 Gravel Trucks
1.17 Conveyer
1.18 Laser Level
1.19 1- Air compressor mounted on car hauler
1.20 10 – Air Tampers
2. Manpower Required:
2.1 1 – Foreman with Supervisor Leadership Training
2.2 2 – PLT Journeymen c/w EQ Bonding & Grounding training and JM certificate
2.3 4 – PLT apprentices c/w Fall Pro & Ground disturbance training
2.4 1 – Gravel Truck operator c/w driver’s license
2.5 1 – Crane operator with Crane and hoisting certificate
2.6 1 – Excavator operator c/w PME training
2.7 1 - Labourer c/w site orientation
3. Jobsite Communication
3.1 All direction to be from the Construction Manager to Crew Foreman
3.2 All direction to workers from the Foreman
4. Deliverables
4. 1 Coded Time Reports done daily
4.2 Daily Tailboard and Emergency Response Plan
4.3 Applicable Daily Equipment Checks
Page 1 of 3
4.4 Daily NSC Equipment Logs

4.5 Construction crew to inspect all material are available and insure they are in good
condition
4.6 This procedure to be available on site during the work process
4.7 Engineering Plan approved and available prior to work commencing
5. Access
5.1 Maps and Road Restrictions to be available
5.2 All equipment must stay on rig mats when crossing pipeline right of ways
6. Prerequisites
6.1 Foreman to have work package c/w Drawings/ ERP/ Quality Documents
6.2 All Materials on site
6.3 Drop zones to be established setup and maintained
6.4 Grounding Plan to be developed on site daily if required
7. Procedure Steps
7.1 Travel to Jobsite
7.2 Review procedure, engineering lift plan, all IFC drawings and QA requirements
7.3 Complete Hazard Assessment and Tailboard daily with all personnel involved
7.4 Equipment logs to be completed before any work commences
7.5 Set up 200Ton Crane level and at the proper radius for lifting each individual
structure
7.6 Set up 350 Excavator and spreader bar near the bottom section of H-Frame for
tailing
7.7 Prior to setting the structure, the Crew will level both holes with ¾” to 1.5”
washed rock and measure for setting depth. Mark setting depth onto each pole of
H-frame with chalk
7.8 The rigging for the 200 Ton Crane will be choked below the bottom cross arm,
using 20,000lb rated sling and a 1 ¼” shackle
7.9 Softeners will be used to prevent any damage to the sling where there are sharp
edges
7.10 A designated Signalman will give signals to the Operators while doing the lift
7.11 Direction will be given to the Crane Operator to tighten up the winch line by the
Signalman. The rigging will then be double checked by the Rigger before
7.12 The rigging for the Tailing Crane will be attached with the sling being basketed two
feet from the end of the butt section of each pole and hooked up to a spreader
bar using 1” Shackles
7.13 Direction will be given to the Tailing Operator by the Signalman to tighten up
the rigging. The rigging will then be double checked by the rigger before
Page 2 of 3
7.14 The 350 Excavator and spreader bar tailing, will keep the butts of the poles
approximately two feet off the ground and walk towards the 200ton crane to
keep the winch line straight up and down as the 200ton Crane is doing the
main lift
7.15 Once the 200 Ton Crane has the H-Structure vertical, the Signalman will stop the
lift and the 350 excavator and spreader bar tailing will be unhooked from the
Structure
7.16 The Structure will be swung over the two holes and will be lowered with the
Lineman guiding the butts into the holes until it is sitting firmly on the bottom
7.17 The Structure will be checked for initial plumb using a Plumb Bob and/or transit. If
one side has to be raised the crane will hoist the Structure high enough that the
gravel can be placed evenly across the bottom of the hole
7.18 Once the Structure is level, the 250 excavator with clam, will clamp onto the left or
right pole and plumb one side of the structure as per the direction of the signal
man.
7.19 The Gravel Truck will then be backed up close to the pole that is plumb, and will
fill the hole ½ way with ¾” to 1.5” washed rock
7.20 The 250 excavator with clam, will then grab the other pole and square off the
Structure
7.21 Once the structure is plumb and squared each hole will have gravel placed in 2’
7.22 The Signalman can give enough direction to the Crane Operator to lower the
winch until there is enough slack to release the pull pin shackles via 3/8” poly
rope from the H-Structure
7.23 The equipment will then de-mob and move to the next site
3. Contingencies:
8.1 Mechanic will be available in the event of equipment breakdown of failure
8.2 Extra ropes and tools will be available if required
8.3 Muster Point will be the Crew Leader’s truck
8.4 Tailboard, ERP and Job Procedure to be located in the Crew Lead’s truck
8.5 Spill kits to be located in all equipment
8.6 Always stay clear of Line of Fire; NEVER walk under or place limbs underneath a
suspended load
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Erection of a “V” Type Tower using Crane
Created By: J. Friesen Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.143
27.143 ERECTION OF A “V” TYPE TOWER USING A CRANE

This procedure applies to the erection of a “V” type tower using a crane to prevent injury to
workers or disruption of production while performing this task.
PPE Required:
• Hard Hat
• Safety Glasses
• Appropriate Gloves
• CSA Approved Boots
• Hearing Protection
• Hi-Vis Outerwear
• Fall Arrest Harness and Lanyard
• Tower Rescue kit
• Bucket Rescue kit
Equipment Required:
• Mobile work platforms
• Mobile crane
• Chain Hoists (1-1 ½ ton) (1-3 ton)
• Excavator (350)
• Shackles (rated)
• Steel slings (rated)
• Nylon slings (rated)
• Sling Softeners
Tools Required:
• Torque wrenches
• Wrenches (spud and open ended)
• Generator
• Extension cord
• Impact gun c/w sockets
• Sling Softeners
• Sledge hammer
• Batteries/Chargers
STEPS:
Page 1 of 3
1. Crane operator to set up crane ensuring full extension of all outriggers on pads (use rig
mats on unstable ground).
2. Designated signalperson to guide crane boom into position and rigger to connect
rigging assembly
at the predetermined lifting points on the upper section of the tower.
3. Rigger to connect the excavator to the rigging assembly on the lower section of the
structure.
4. Grounds crew to attach (½ - ⅝ rope) tag lines to control the load as it is being hoisted
and maneuvered into place.
5. Signalperson will direct both crane and tailing crane/excavator to hoist slowly, taking up
slack in the rigging assembly.
6. Once the slack has been removed from the rigging assembly, the signalperson shall
direct the cranes to STOP and confirm that the lifting hooks are positioned and seated
correctly, centrally over the load lifting points. Adjust the rigging assembly as
necessary to minimize the ‘drift’ of the load as it is being lifted
7. Signalperson will signal operators to slowly hoist tower section off the ground taking
the weight of the structure in preparation of full lift.
8. Once the load has been completely transferred to the lead crane, the ground and the
tailing the rigging can be removed from the excavator.
9. The signalperson shall signal the crane operator to hoist up and swing the tower into
position over the footing.
10. Once the tower is in position over the footing, the section can be lowered onto the
footing and set the tower.
11. Crew (2 – 3 per anchor location) to take guy wires out to each of the guy positions and
connect the chain hoist assembly to the guy wire.
12. Crew to bolt tower footing to tower base (following the bolting specifications on the IFC
specs.) torqueing, then marking with a red marker.
13. In preparation of guy connection, crew to position themselves to plumb tower, one in-
line with the ROW and the other 90 degrees off the tower.
14. Groundsperson will signal crane operator to lean tower toward two guys, catch guys at
end of adjustment and attach to the guy fittings on both anchor rods.
15. Rotate crane to roughly plumb tower. Grab two remaining guys with turfer, rope blocks
or chain jack (rated) and attach to guy fittings. Rigging at the guy wire will be 1 or two
rated jacks attached to a yoke plate (if required).
16. Plumb tower using nuts on guy fittings and snug backer nut (not final tension).
17. Signalperson will signal the lead crane operator to lower his hook and let slack into the
rigging assembly.
18. Crews to ascend the tower (climb or man-lift) to release the rigging from the structure.
19. Once released, designated lineman on tower will signal to the crane operator to move
the hook and rigging away from the structure.
Page 2 of 3
20. Crew member will guide disconnected rigging assembly away from the structure.
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Assembling Steel H Frame Structures
Created By: V. Vidakovic Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.147
Date: Feb 22, 2018 Revision: 2 Revised by: J. Repchinsky Date: Oct. 3, 2018
SOP 27.147 Assembling Steel H Frame Structures
1) Tool /Equipment List:
Item Description Quantity Remarks

1. Crew truck 2
2. Loader/Zoom boom 1 With softeners on forks
3. Picker 1 26 ton or larger
4. Nylon slings Required amount Properly rated
5. Spud bars 6
6. Impact wrenches 3
7. sockets Required amount impact
8. Back up wrenches 3
9. Hammers
10. Blocking/pole cows Required amount
11. Generator 1
12. Extension cords 2 100’ long
Personnel Requirements Quantity Knowledge and Training Requirements
• Leader ship trained and qualified.

Foreman 1
• Trained in basic rigging and qualified.
• First aid trained.
• Power mobile equipment certified and qualified
Loader operator/Zoom boom 1 for loader.
• Trained in basic rigging.
• Certified and qualified.
Picker operator 1 • Log book training.
• Trained in Basic rigging.
Lineman 2 • Certified and qualified.

• Trained and qualified In the use of chainsaws (if

Laborer 2 using chainsaw)
3) Deliverables:
Page 1 of 3
3.1 Coded time reports daily

3.2 Completed tailboard
3.3 Applicable equipment inspections
4) Access to Site:
4.1 All equipment will be clean prior to entering the work site.
4.2 Slow down when passing farms on way to work when traveling on gravel roads.
5) List of activities in sequence:
5.1 The foreman in charge of each crew will go over tail board and procedures before starting any
work with all personnel involved in the task.
5.2 Designated signal man or spotters will be documented on tail board.
5.3 Designated certified operator for each piece of equipment will be documented on the tail
board.
5.4 Operators will inspect their equipment and fill out any required paper work prior to starting
their equipment.
5.5 Rigging will be inspected before each use.
5.6 Materials are to be counted and confirmed that the quantities are correct with the assembly
drawing.
5.7 The assembly foreman will select an area for the structure to be assembled where it is close
to the stakes and level.
5.8 Picker will be set up in the middle of where the structure is to be assembled.
5.9 Steel will be moved around the site using a loader or zoom boom, and placed where the
picker will be able to reach the steel.
5.10 Tag lines shall be used when suspending a load with slings.
5.11 Spotters will give direction to the operator when picking and placing steel or other materials.
5.12 All personnel will stay clear of any suspended loads.
5.13 Softeners shall be installed prior to hoisting steel using the forks on loaders or zoom booms.
5.14 The pole sections will be placed on blocking or pole cows making sure that it is left in a secure
position.
5.15 Spud bars will be used for lining up bolt holes, the worker must keep their hands clear of any
pinch points when making a connection.
5.16 The structure will be assembled starting at the top and working towards the bottom, making it
easier to square off the structure as it is being assembled.
5.17 The top section of one pole will be connected to the top inside arm.
5.18 The top section of the second pole will be connected to the opposite end of the inside arm.
5.19 Second section of the pole will now be connected to the first section of pole.
5.20 The second inside arm will then be attached to both poles.
5.21 The remaining sections of poles can be assembled to both poles.
5.22 The structure can then have the x-braces attached.
Page 2 of 3
5.23 Outside arms can be assembled in any order.

5.24 Once all the steel has been assembled the bolts can be tightened following the turn of nut
method, following the procedure supplied by the manufacture.
5.25 After each bolt has been properly tightened it will be marked with a black paint marker.
5.26 The structure will be inspected for scratches or imperfections on the steel.
5.27 Any areas where the galvanization has been removed, the area will be cleaned with paint
thinner and painted with a product supplied by Sask power.
5.28 Foreman will fill out required QA documents once structure is complete.
5.29 Site will be cleaned up and structure left on blocking in a safe manner.
5.30 If the structure is in an area where it can’t be seen very well it will be marked with orange
traffic cones or flagged.
6) Contingencies:
6.1 Mechanic will be called out if required.
6.2 Extra equipment will be available to ensure continuity of work in event of a break-down.
6.3 All equipment must have first aid and spill kits in accordance with the ERP.
6.4 All equipment must have firefighting gear in accordance with quantities detailed in the ERP.
6.5 ERP is in all Supervisor’s trucks.
6.6 Crew will have MSDS information on site for the products required for the steel repairs.
Note 1: The purpose of this procedure is to aid the site supervisor/foreman in planning of the work for
Assembling Steel H structures and applicable procedures. This should not be viewed as the complete job
plan but as a starting point. Any changes or details not covered herein, shall be discussed with crew and
recorded in Daily Tailboard.
Page 3 of 3
Created By: J. Brennan Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.162
Date: Dec. 14, 2018 Revision: 1 Revised by: J. Brennan Date: Dec. 19, 2018
SOP 27.162 SLACK STRINGING PROCEDURE FOR BYPASS L0104

This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in slack stringing of transmission line
conductors on the NB Power L0104 Bypass. This particular phase of the project requires
the slack stringing of three, 2/0 conductor for a distance of 2.2 km.
Aerial Device and Crane will be used between str 26-27 (on both sides of roadway) in place
of rider poles to maintain conductor clearance over road crossing. Traffic plan will be set up
as per NB WATCM. All stringing will be completed with a hold-off for parallel 69KV line
0104.

• Safety glasses
• Boots
• Hardhat
• Fall Protection Equipment
• Truck
• Marooka
• Trailer for wire spools
• Bucket trucks
• Crane
• Shackles/slings
• Bull rope(s) (sufficient length to complete the task)
• Travelers
• Running Ground
Steps:
1. Complete tailboard, discuss hazards with the crew and signoff.
2. Ensure proper Work Protection is in place, hold off for L0104
Page 1 of 3
3. Prior to using any craning devices, ensure that all crew members are cautioned about
working around these units to eliminate the hazards associated with crushing injuries from
vehicle stabilizer outriggers.
4. Setup stringing trailers and load wire at str 47
5. To create an Equal Potential Zone, set up grounding grid mat and running ground at str
47, set up grounding grid at str 22.
6. Check all rigging equipment to ensure that it’s in good condition and rated for the load
before hoisted. Verify the weight of the reels to ensure that all rigging equipment is of
sufficient rating
8. Attach pulling bull ropes to the Kellum grips.
9. Attach the pulling bull ropes to the truck or tracked equipment depending on conditions.
crewmembers are instructed and familiar with proper radio protocol for stringing. A
dedicated radio frequency should be allocated for this process. If this is not possible then
all other work crews must be notified of the stringing process so that any potential
conflicting radio transmissions are minimized.
trailer(s) and the truck or tracked equipment.
13. Apply brake pressure on the reel axle(s) to ensure that the reel(s) of wire doesn’t spin
to fast resulting in potential conductor damage.
14. When reaching the first structure, the truck must go past the structure far enough to
ensure that there is sufficient rope to go up the structure, through the travelers and back
down to the truck.
15. Once adequate slack has been pulled past the structure reverse the front-end loader to
relieve tension on the bull lines so that the bull lines can be detached from the machine.
The bull lines can then be pulled back to the structure. Use caution to prevent tangling of
the rope(s) as the rope is being coiled at the base of the structure.
17. Re-attach ropes to the truck.
18. Stay in radio contact at all times with workers at reel trailer and operator running the
truck or tracked equipment. Monitor the bull ropes for increased tensions, which could
indicate defective travelers at structures or the conductor becoming snagged on the
ground. An observer should follow the Kellum grips as they pass through the sheaves of
the travelers.
structure.
21. Once the conductor has reached the tie-down area temporary portable grounds are to
be placed on the conductor using grounding grid at str 22. Repeat steps for other 2
conductors. Also the conductors are to be bonded to each other. This will ensure that any
Page 2 of 3
induction will be drained off and all conductors will be at the same potential. Alternately the
conductor could be dead-ended at the structure.
• Location of the span(s) to sag from.
• The ambient air temperature.
24. Once sagging is complete clipping in can take place, a working bond out of the bucket
will be required before handling conductor.
25. Complete deadends at str 22 and 47.
26. Hand lay conductor between str’s 22A-22 and 47A-47.
27. Hang conductor using ropes and travelers.
28. Ground and bond both deadend structures (22-47) in direction of tap (22A-47A).
29. Deadend conductor (refer to sag requirements)
30. Install loops at str 22-47.
32. Remove grounds and clean-up worksite.
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Defective Tools
Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.001
Date: Oct. 10,2003 Revision: 3 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 6, 2012
26.001 DEFECTIVE TOOL PRACTICE
Defective tools can cause serious and painful injuries. If a tool is defective in some way,
DO NOT USE IT.
Tools, equipment and machinery will be considered defective if:
1. The unit has been damaged or modified so that it is not to manufacturer’s design
specifications
or
2. The unit does not comply with government regulations.
Defective tools must be removed from service immediately and tagged. For further
information refer to Section: 17.3 Removal of defective Tools, Machinery and
Equipment
Be aware of problems such as:
• Chisels and wedges with mushroomed heads

• Split or cracked handles
• Chipped or broken drill bits
• Wrenches with worn out jaws
• Tools which are not complete, such as files without handles
• Power tools with guards removed
• Broken or inoperative guards,
• Insufficient or improper grounding due to damage on double insulated
tools,
• No ground wire (on plug) or cords of standard tools,
• The on/off switch not in good working order,
• Tool blade is cracked,
• The wrong grinder wheel is being used, or
• The guard has been wedged back on a power saw.
Regulatory References
Alberta
Part 25, Tools, Equipment, and Machinery – All Sections
British Columbia
Part 24, Building Structures, and Equipment – Section 4.3
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Defective Tools
Date: Oct. 10,2003 Revision: 3 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 6, 2012
Yukon
Part 24, Hand Tools & Power Driven Portable Tools – Section 4.03(i)
Saskatchewan
Part X, Machine Safety – Section 134-152
Manitoba
Part 16- Machine, Tools, & Robots- Section 16.1-16.28
Ontario
Part II - General Construction – Section 93-95
NWT
Part V- Guards and Protective Devices on Machinery- Section 73-131
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Electrical Work
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 9 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Apr. 27, 2018
26.002 ELECTRICAL WORK

Definitions of a utility worker and a qualified utility worker are;
A qualified utility employee is:
An individual who is a Power Line journeyman or Sub-station Power Systems
Electrician (PSE) journeyman, trained and experienced to work safely on energized
electrical equipment or lines in accordance with the requirements of the safety rules
while performing duties assigned by an employer.
A utility employee is:
1) An employee trained to recognize hazards associated with energized electrical
equipment or lines, and trained and experienced to work safely near energized
electrical equipment or lines but not on them and in accordance with the
requirements of the safety rules while performing duties assigned by and employer,
and
2) An Journeyman Electrician trained and experienced to work safely on energized
electrical equipment or lines operating at voltages below 750 volts between the
conductors in accordance with the requirements of the safety rules while performing
duties assigned by an employer.
Policy
1. Only qualified electrical workers are permitted to construct, install, alter, repair, or
maintain high voltage electrical equipment. Qualified workers shall be trained on the
use of special precautionary techniques, specific PPE requirements (e.g. Arc Flash),
insulating & shielding materials, and insulated tools.
2. A Hazard Assessment must be done to identify all electrical hazards including a
mitigation plan to eliminate the hazards and documented prior to them starting to
work. Safe work practices shall be employed to prevent electric shock or other
injuries resulting from either direct or indirect electrical contacts. Tailboards must
also be completed prior to working on any line. (FLRA/HA)
3. All Valard employees working on or near energized lines must complete “Electrical
Awareness” training. This is provided during the employee’s orientation See Section
8 “orientation overview”.
4. Employees working near high voltage electricity who are not qualified electrical
workers shall be provided awareness training. Employees shall be trained in safety
related work practices that pertain to their respective job assignments, clearance
distances, Lockout Tagout, long dimensional conductor objects clearances, Arc
Flash Protection, and conductive materials awareness. Training is to be provided by
Valard’s Energized Services Training division. All electrical tools used in either
Outdoor or damp locations shall be connected to a ground Fault Circuit Interceptor
(GFCI)
5. All electrical equipment must meet Canadian Electrical Code Standards and be
approved for use and of the type and rating as required by specifications listed.
6. No flammable liquids are to be stored within 100 metres of energized electrical
equipment.
7. A worker shall not approach high voltage electrical equipment within the safe limit of
approach distance unless the equipment has been de-energized and locked and
tagged out as per SWP 26. 032 Lockouts. Failure to follow this practice may lead to
disciplinary action being taken.
Page 1 of 18
8. All electrical work shall be analyzed for Arc flash and appropriate protective clothing
shall be worn. This may include an arc flash suit with approved face shield and
appropriate headgear, arc flash barrier designed for the work area, safety glasses
and type 1 class 0 rubber glove with leather protectors designed for the voltage of
the switch gears and equipment.
9. All employees that work on or near any energized lines or equipment must wear as
a minimum;
• Fire Retardant outerwear, Sleeves must reach the wrist section, i.e. short
sleeves are not permitted.
• Non-synthetic under clothing, such as: cotton, wool or silk.
• Hi visibility vest (may be a part of the Fire retardant clothing)
• CSA boots with a green triangle and an Omega symbol.
• Safety Glasses CSA/ANSI as identified in Section 10 Personal Protective
Equipment.
• All metal articles that are in contact with workers skin must be removed.
10. No worker is permitted to work on energized lines that cannot be isolated and
locked out unless the worker is qualified by specialized training by Valard’s
Energized Service Division prior to commencing any work on a energized line.
11. Rubber gloves shall be worn when: controlling poles by using tools and/or ropes in
the proximity of energized overhead apparatus, stringing or sagging conductors in
the proximity of energized overhead apparatus or when workers on the ground are
guiding materials being raised and distances specified in the "Safe Limits of
Approach" for non-insulated booms cannot be maintained.
12. All workers working near energized lines must notify the controlling authority and
advise them of the work scope, duration and location. A means of communication
must be in place prior to the work commences.
13. Adequate jumpers shall be used when cutting, splicing or repairing a neutral
conductor, neutral bus or skywire, in order to prevent a potential difference shall be
used and installed/removed using approved work procedures.
14. Workers operating stringing equipment shall be either qualified or authorized or
under the direct supervision of an authorized worker, and shall follow approved
documented procedures.
15. Only approved non-conductive portable ladders shall be used when working on or in
proximity to energized apparatus. Metal ladders or metal measuring tapes are not
permitted.
16. Workers who work in a bucket shall be trained in bucket rescue annually and must
demonstrate the ability by performing a rescue annually. Those who climb poles
must be trained in pole top rescue and be able to demonstrate the ability to perform
a rescue annually, whenever the worker is required to work from a ladder the
worker must be trained in ladder rescue and be able to demonstrate it by performing
a rescue. When the worker is expected to work in any of the above work activities a
rescue plan must be developed and reviewed by all workers.
17. If parts cannot be de-energized, tagging must be applied in any event and barriers
such as insulated blankets must be used to protect against accidental contact. Arc
Flash PPE must be worn.
18. All workers who work on powerlines must be trained in Rescue techniques and
must retrain annually in case of an electrical contact.
Page 2 of 18
19. Workers who work on lines must review the Tower rescue and pole top rescue
annually as per SOP 27.001 Tower Rescue and 27.003 Pole Top Rescue in cases
where there may be a electrical contact.
Limits of Approach
No employee shall approach or allow conducting objects, or equipment to approach
energized lines, or equipment closer than the limits of approach as specified in each
Provincial jurisdiction. Valard’s specific Limits of Approach may exceed specific utility
or provincial requirements. Any deviation of these limits must be documented on the
job plan
Working on Client’s Utility Power lines/Substations

To work on Utility lines, the following are to be met;
a) All utility workers are to review and possess a copy of the “ Alberta Electrical
Utility Code 3rd Edition 2007 “
b) Workers must have a copy of the Client’s Safe Work Practices for the applicable
task. This must be reviewed prior to working on any line or equipment and
where applicable referred to in the “tailboard”.
c) Workers are to receive a copy of the client’s safety rules and these are to be
reviewed prior to work commencing. A copy of this rulebook is to be kept at the
worksite for future reference.
d) A foreman (Qualified Utility Worker) must be present on the worksite, which will
insure that all safe work practices and procedures are followed and the safety
rules are available and understood by all of the workers under his direction. In
case of his absence a “Person in Charge” must be appointed, this person must
be a Qualified Utility employee and must also insure that all safe work practices
and procedures are followed and the safety rules are available and understood
by all of the workers under his direction and all of the equipment/tools are
suitable for the task at hand. Both the Foremen and the “Person in Charge” is
also responsible to insure that records are kept of all activities, training and is
responsible that when visitors or any other unauthorized personnel are kept
away from any hazardous conditions. Visitors must receive an overview of the
tasks being performed and where and when they are permitted to enter any
area; this visitor also must be escorted by either the foreman or the “Person in
Charge” during the visit.
e) All aerial devices that are to be used on lines/equipment must be equipped with
controls in the bucket and at ground level. An operator must be located at the
lower controls at all times in case there is a problem with the controls and in
case of an emergency and the worker in the bucket can not operate.
f) Where the electrical system equipment exists, a hold-off shall be established for
equipment protection and must not be used in place of a work permit whenever:
a live line work procedures are being performed, stringing, sagging, raising, or
lowering conductors or stringing ropes in proximity to energized apparatus,
Page 3 of 18
installing or removing loops of airbreak switches, load interrupters, loadbreak

switches, and bypass tubes, installing or removing live line openers (conductor
and clamp assembly), moving energized cables over 750 V, a supervisor,
worker, or controlling authority considers it necessary or it is determined during
job planning.
Working on Energized Lines

To work on energized lines using rubber gloves, employees must be trained by a utility
company or an approved trainer. If no training has been received no worker is qualified
to work on a line using rubber gloves.
Workers working on energized circuits of 300 volts or less phase-to-phase shall wear a
type 1 class 0 rubber glove with leather protectors.
When work is to be performed on switching equipment arc flash protective clothing
and/or a blast shield must be in place. Arc flash calculations must be performed on
client’s equipment by its engineering department.
Workers performing tasks near energized equipment must wear eye protection as per
ARC Flash calculations.
When operating gang switches, or working near energized lines class 3 rubber gloves
must be used with leather protectors.
All PPE, which is to be worn, must be inspected daily and replaced immediately if
damaged or if the certification has expired.
All work on energized equipment and lines must b performed with a minimum of two (2)
Qualified Utility Workers.
Working on Isolated Lines and Equipment

Before working on an isolated, or de-energized line or equipment, either under 750V or
high voltage equipment it must be tested with a potential tester designed for each
specific system, under 750V or over and then grounded.
All Electrical-testing devices shall only be used in accordance with the manufacturers'
specifications and approved work procedures.
Lines that are isolated or de-energized must be treated as energized if the above steps
have not been taken.
Safety Interlocks
Guards and safety interlocks must NOT be removed except for troubleshooting and/or
testing, and approved work procedures must be used to protect employees and the
public from any exposed hazards. Safety interlocks must NOT be by-passed by the use
of devices such as jumpers or spare keys except for the following situations:
• The device to be worked on or operated an the associated interlock system are
both contained within an isolated zone
• Troubleshooting and/or testing is being performed by a competent worker and
the following conditions are met
• A documented job plan identifying hazards and the use of barriers to control
these hazards has been completed and communicated to all members of the
Page 4 of 18
work group, and at least one member of the work group remains within view of
the device for which the interlock has been by-passed, and close enough to
prevent any unauthorized personnel from entering the work area.
• The safety interlock system must not be by-passed before the guaranteed
isolation zone is established and it must be returned to service before the
isolation is surrendered.
Tree Trimming
No Worker is allowed to brush trees in the vicinity of energized power lines, unless they
have been trained as a qualified tree arbourist.
Before cutting or trimming trees, permission must be obtained from the landowner, and
the utility the work is being completed for. This can be completed if there are no
energized lines in the vicinity.
When using chainsaws refer to the HS&E Manual SWP 26.003 Safe Use of
Chainsaws.
Underground Lines
When working on an underground system, the following rules may apply.
All cables and equipment will be considered energized until tested for potential, and
grounded.
Underground cables must be identified before any work is done to them.
Cables must be spiked before being cut.
Employees must wear appropriate PPE including rubber gloves, and a tested hot stick
when switching or removing/installing load break elbows on an energized circuit.
Elbows must be parked and grounded when removed from the bushing.
Live Line Work

1. No employee may use live line tools on energized lines, or equipment unless
they have been trained in proper tool usage.
2. Employees doing live line work must give their full attention to the work at hand.
3. Live line work will not be done in the following conditions:
• At night
• In adverse weather
• When visibility is obscured
4. “Second points of contact” must be insulated, or removed from the immediate live
line work zone. These include:
• Ground wires
• Guy wires
• Secondary conductors
5. Neutral conductors associated with distribution circuits must not be cut or
disconnected until they have been by-passed with jumper cables that are capable
of carrying the primary voltage of the circuit.
Page 5 of 18
6. Live line work may only be done on one conductor at a time, on any single pole
structure.
7. Live line work must not be done on adjacent structures at the same time.
8. When live line work is done on circuits protected by automatic re-closing
equipment, the re-closing devices must be blocked and tagged before live line
work commences, and not restored until the work is complete, or workers are clear
at the end of the shift.
9. When using live line tools, employees must not place their hands or any conductive
material closer than the Limits of Approach specified in the Safe Work Practice.
10. Energized metal parts of live line tools or tie wires on energized conductors must
not be brought into contact with cross-arms, poles, apparatus, or associated
hardware.
11. Holdout ropes or live line tools being used to spread, or raise conductors must be
securely fastened. They must not be held by employees except as necessary to
secure or release them.
12. All live line tools and equipment must be inspected for mechanical and electrical
strength and wiped clean before each job is started.
When any employee changes position on a pole or tower, co-workers should be
informed.
Live Line Tools

1. Live line tools and equipment, rubber gloves and cover-up equipment may only be
used if they are in good condition. They must be specifically designed,
constructed, and tested for the purpose for which they are used and must not be
used for other purposes.
2. Metal rulers, measuring tapes, or wire reinforced fabric tapes or other conductive
tools must not be used up poles, or in areas where exposed live apparatus could
make their use hazardous.
3. An approved tool bag must be used for raising tools or materials to workers on
poles, trees, or structures. Under NO circumstances may articles be thrown to
workers.
4. Approved and tested live line tools, equipment, rubber gloves, and cover-up
equipment must be used for work inside Limits of Approach on live lines, or
apparatus at the following voltages:
• From 250 volts to 25,000 volts phase-to-phase (14.4 kV phase-to-ground)
• At lower voltages where work is hazardous
5. Approved and tested live line tools, and equipment must be used for work on live
lines, or apparatus at voltages above 25 kV phase-to-phase. Rubber gloves, and
cover-up equipment IS NOT permitted at these higher voltages.
6. Before climbing through or working in a dangerous position, workers must protect
themselves from electrical hazards. Equipment for this purpose includes the
following:
• Line hose
• Insulator hoods
Page 6 of 18
• Shields
These items must have sufficient voltage rating, and be distributed to cover all wire
and apparatus that could endanger the workers.
7. All protective equipment, including rubber blankets, hoses, hoods, shields, and
gloves must receive periodic testing by an approved service shop. Dates of next
tests must be visibly marked and never exceeded.
8. No repairs or alterations may be made to live line tools or equipment other than by
an approved service shop.
9. Live line tools are to be properly stored by being placed on racks, and tied down
securely. Rubber protective equipment is to be placed into approved protective
bags, and then stored in a cool location out of the sun. Such items must be kept free
from dirt and moisture and should not be laid directly on the ground. Fiberglass
surfaces should be kept clean and glossy so that moisture forms into beads.
10. Workers must thoroughly inspect rubber protective equipment, live line tools, and
equipment before use and whenever damage is suspected.
11. Tools or equipment that show any signs of damage must be withdrawn from service
immediately, and be forwarded with an explanatory note to an approved safety
service shop.
12. High voltage protective rubber left in service for a long time (i.e. overnight) must not
be expected to offer protection. Such items must be removed, inspected, and
cleaned before being used again. If suspected, they must be sent for electrical tests.
13. Rubber gloves must not be worn inside out. They must not be worn without
approved leather covers. The leather outer gloves must never be used for any other
purpose. Watches, bracelets, and rings must not be worn with rubber gloves.
14. Blocks, ropes, slings, and other tackle provided for live line work must not be used
for any other purpose. It must be kept clean, dry, and free from foreign substances.
Moisture in rope allows it to conduct electricity, making it extremely dangerous for
live line work. If live line rope becomes damp, it must be allowed to dry uncoiled in a
heated area for a minimum of 48 hours.
Grounding and Bonding

1. The two booklets listed below explain the requirements for grounding and bonding in
Alberta and British Columbia. All line crewmembers must have access to the booklet
corresponding to the location of work, and must sign a document stating that they
have read it.
• Equipotential Bonding and Grounding Application Guide, TransAlta Utilities
Corporation.
• Temporary Safety Grounding and Bonding, BC Hydro Corporate Safety
Dept.
2. Workers must not make contact with any electrical conductors, which normally carry
high voltage unless the conductors are rendered safe for work to be done on them.
High voltage is defined as 750 volts or above.
3. When bonding or grounding is required, it will be placed at such locations and
arranged so that each worker is protected from exposure to hazardous voltages.
Page 7 of 18
4. Equipment such as ground rods, leads, and clamps must have the following
electrical qualities:
• Must be capable of conducting the maximum fault current that could flow at the
work location for the time necessary to clear the fault. Values for fault current
have been calculated for all locations, and are available from the control centre of
electrical power utilities.
• It must have low impedance such that it will not interfere with the operation of
protective relays in the affected part of the power system. Jumper cables are not
to be used for grounding and bonding.
• Ground chains must have the compression ferrows on the end of the wire.
• Duckbills must have a threaded end so the cable will fasten to them.
• Ground chains and duckbills must be tested yearly.
5. The procedure for installing a ground is as follows:
a) Connect one end of the ground lead to a solid ground. The following are suitable
for this purpose:
• The station ground grid in a substation
• The counterpoise ground at a URD transformer
• The neutral conductor on a distribution power line
The following are not considered suitable for protective grounding:
• A transmission tower footing
• A wood-pole ground wire or guy wire
• If a ground rod is necessary, it shall be a straight (not spiral), galvanized, or
copper-clad steel rod. It should be driven into the ground to a depth of at least 1
metre at a distance of about 10 metres from the immediate work area.
• Test the conductors to be grounded and establish that they are de-energized.
• Using a hot-stick, connect the unattached end of the ground lead to the
conductor.
• Secure the ground lead with rope so that it will not cause harm by whipping if
fault current flows.
Working grounds are temporary devices, which must be removed when the
job is finished. The procedure for removal is the reverse of the attachment.
The securing rope is removed; the ground lead is taken off the conductor,
using a hot-stick and then removed from the ground rod.
6. The procedure for creating an equipotential zone for a worker on a wood pole is as
follows:
• Strap a pole-band firmly around the pole at a level below where the worker’s
spurs will be, but high enough to be well beyond reach from the bottom of the
pole.
• Connect a ground lead to the neutral (if there is one) or to a properly driven
ground rod.
• Connect the other end of the grounded ground lead to the pole band.
Page 8 of 18
• Test to ensure that the line to be grounded is de-energized.

• Connect a second ground lead to the pole-band.
• Using a hot-stick, connect the unattached end of the second lead to the
conductor.
• Secure the ground lead with rope as described in paragraph 5.
7. On the three-phase transmission and distribution lines it is normal practice to

connect all three phases to each other and to ground. An exception is at 230 kV and
higher when only one phase is being worked on, and the underground phases are
well beyond limits of approach.
8. Vehicles involved with high voltage work on the power system are normally grounded
by means of a ground lead connected between the vehicle chassis and the following:
• The station ground grid in a sub-station
• The system neutral or a ground rod elsewhere on the power system
This applies whether or not the line or apparatus is energized, de-energized, or

dead. Workers on the ground must stay clear of vehicles that have booms or
buckets in the vicinity of lines, or apparatus that could be energized at high voltage.
If ground workers are required to approach vehicles, they must use caution because
they are subject to step potential during a fault.
***NOTE: An important exception to paragraph 8 is in the jurisdiction of BC

Hydro, where the policy for aerial man-lifts during work on energized overhead
lines and apparatus, is for the vehicles to remain ungrounded. In this case, if
ground workers are required to approach vehicles they must first request that
the work aloft be suspended. Good communication is necessary between
workers on the ground, and those in the buckets to ensure that workers aloft
do not work in energized conductors unless all ground workers are clear.
Page 9 of 18
These are the safe limits of approach for Valard’s employees. For the most part
they exceed specific utility or provincial requirements. Any deviation of these
limits must be documented on the job plan.
Table 1 – Safe Limits of Approach for Non Insulated Booms Operated by

Competent Workers
Diggers, cranes, etc. and their loads
Only competent workers or workers under the continuous direction Voltage Range Minimum
of a competent worker may approach, work, or allow material or (Phase to Phase) Clearance
conductive tools to approach exposed energized electrical
apparatus to limits as stated. 750 to 25,000 1.2 m (4 ft.)
In planning the task to be performed, consideration must be given to
the worker’s position in relation to the exposed energized
apparatus such that planned movements of the worker’s body or >25,000 to 50,000 1.5 m (5 ft.)
conductive tools, material or vegetation will not result in any
encroachment upon these limits.
The vehicle must be grounded when the boom or load is within 20 >50,000 to 250,000 3.0 m (10 ft.)
feet of an energized circuit.
Note an aerial device with a lower boom insert does not require
grounding, unless local utility practice dictates so. >250,000 to 550,000 6.0 m (20 ft.)
Table 2 – Safe Limits of Approach for Competent Workers

Or workers under the direct supervision of a competent worker
Only competent workers or workers under the Voltage Range Minimum

(Phase to Phase) Clearance
continuous direction of a competent worker may
approach, work, or allow material or conductive tools to
750 to 25,000 0.95 m (3.2 ft.)
approach exposed energized electrical apparatus to
limits as stated.
In planning the task to be performed, consideration must >25,000 to 50,000 1.2 m (4 ft.)
be given to the worker’s position in relation to the
exposed energized apparatus such that planned >50,000 to 150,000 1.7 m (6 ft.)
movements of the worker’s body or conductive tools,
material or vegetation will not result in any encroachment
upon these limits. >150,000 to 250,000 2.2 m (7 ft.)
>250,000 to 550,000 3.7 m (12 ft.)
Page 10 of 18
Table 3 – Absolute Safe Limits of Approach for Competent Workers

Or workers under the direct supervision of a competent worker
Competent workers or a worker(s) in training under Voltage Range Minimum

the continuous direction of an competent Worker may
approach or allow material or conductive tools to
750 to 15,000 0.55 m (1.8 ft.)
approach exposed energized electrical apparatus as
stated in the Absolute Limit section, only when the
following conditions are adhered to: >15,000 to 25,000 .650 m (2.2 ft)
• for all work up to 50 kV, rubber gloves must be
worn while in the Restricted Zone; >25,000 to 50,000 .750 m (2.6 ft.)
• barriers and/or cover-up must be installed where
practical to minimize exposure to energized electrical
apparatus and all second points of contact; >50,000 to 150,000 1.4 m (5 ft.)
• a Dedicated Observer must be in place, who is
competent in the task being performed and having no >150,000 to 250,000 1.9 m (6 ft.)
other duties which would distract from monitoring the
work continuously;
• either the worker performing the work or the >250,000 to 550,000 3.15 m (11 ft)
Dedicated Observer must have successfully completed
the 4th year of formal Power Line Worker apprenticeship
training program or equivalent; and
• the worker’s position in relation to the exposed
energized electrical apparatus shall be such that
movements of the Worker’s body or conductive tools,
material or vegetation will not result in any
encroachment.
Limits of Approach For British Columbia
No employee may approach any exposed electrical conductor that is energized

with a voltage above 750 volts closer than the distances permitted by Table 1
unless the conductive parts are dead, or suitably insulated.
***Note: The distances in these tables are minimum distances. They take no account
of possible voltage hazards due to surges, humidity, etc, and they make no
allowance for unplanned or accidental movement by workers. The term
DEAD means incapable of delivering power and containing no stored energy.
Normally such parts are isolated, grounded, or blocked.
No employee may take any conducting object with the Limits of Approach to any
exposed, normally energized parts, unless the object is held by an approved insulating
handle. The four columns in the Limits of Approach table are explained as follows:
Column 1 is the minimum distance that a qualified person may approach to an

energized source with the constant supervision of another qualified person.
Page 11 of 18
Column 2 is the minimum distance that a qualified person may approach to an

energized source without supervision.
Column 3 is the minimum distance that a qualified person may approach while
operating or directing the operation of equipment.
Limits of Approach for BC

LIMITS OF Column 1 Column 2 Column3 Column 4
APPROACH
Nominal Voltage Absolute Normal Limit of Limit of
Voltage to Phase to Limit of Limit of Approach for Approach for
Ground Kv Phase Approach for Approach Uninsulated All Uninsulated
Qualified Equipment Equipment
Workers Operated by
Qualified
Workers
M Ft M Ft M Ft M Ft
4 & 12 751V to 0.30 1.00 0.60 2.00 0.90 3.00 3.00 10.00
20kV
25 Over 20kV 0.45 1.50 0.75 2.50 1.20 4.00 3.00 10.00
to 30kV
60 Over 30kV 0.60 2.00 0.90 3.00 1.50 5.00 3.00 10.00
to 75kV
138 Over75kV 0.90 3.00 1.50 5.00 3.00 10.00 4.50 15.00
to 150kV
230 Over 150kV 1.40 4.50 2.10 7.00 3.00 10.00 6.00 15.00
to 250kV
287 Over 250kV 1.70 5.50 2.60 8.50 4.50 15.00 6.00 20.00
to 325kV
345 Over 325kV 2.10 7.00 3.00 10.00 6.00 20.00 6.00 20.00
to 425kV
500 Over 425kV 2.70 9.00 3.70 12.00 6.00 20.00 6.00 20.00
to 550kV
Column 4 is the minimum distance that an unqualified person may approach to work or operate
equipment without supervision
Page 12 of 18
Limits of Approach for Alberta

Limits of Approach Distances in Millimeters for Utility Employees
Voltage Levels Utility Employees
Nominal Nominal Maximum Limits of Approach to
Voltage to Voltage Phase Operating Exposed Energized Parts
Ground to Phase Voltage Phase
kV kV to Phase kV
kV
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4(1)
0.6 (DC Only) 800
2.4 4.16 4.58 800
8 13.8 15.18 850
14.4 25 27.5 950
19.9 34.5 37.95 1050
69,72 79.2 1350
138,144 158.4 1650
230,240 285 2150
500 550 3450
NOTE: (1) Limit of approach distances in Column 4 have been calculated using
IEEE minimum tool distances plus 750 mm safety factor, rounded to the
nearest 50 mm.
Limits of Approach Distances in Millimeters for Qualified Utility Employees
Voltage Levels Qualified Utility
Employees
Nominal Voltage to Nominal Maximum Limits of Approach to
Ground Voltage Operating Exposed Energized
Phase to Voltage Phase Parts
kV Phase to Phase
kV kV kV
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4(1)
0.6 (DC Only) 500
2.4 4.16 4.58 500
8 13.8 15.18 550
14.4 25 27.5 650
19.9 34.5 37.95 750
69, 72 79.2 1050
138, 144 158.4 1350
230, 240 285 1850
500 550 3150
NOTE: (1) Limit of approach distances in Column 4 have been calculated using
IEEE minimum tool distances plus 450 mm safety factor, rounded to the nearest
50 mm.
Page 13 of 18
Limit of Approach Distances in Millimetres for Qualified Utility Employees

Performing Live Line Work
Work Using Rubber Gloves
Voltage Levels Qualified Utility Employees

Limit of Approach for Work
Performed from a Rated Insulated
Device
Nominal Nominal Maximum Unprotected Unprotected
Voltage to Voltage Operating Body Parts to Body Parts to
Ground Phase to Voltage Exposed Work Exposed
Phase Phase to Phase Adjacent
Phase Phases,
Structure
kV kV kV mm Surfaces or
Ground Parts
mm
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4(1) Column 5(2)
2.4 4.16 4.58 40(3) 500
8 13.8 15.18 120 550
14.4 25 27.5 210 650
19.9 34.5 37.95 290 750
69,72 79.2 (4) (4)
138,144 158.4 (4) (4)
230,240 285 (4) (4)
500 550 (4) (4)
NOTE:
(1) Limit of approach distances in Column 4 have been calculated using IEEE
minimum tool distances rounded to the nearest 10 mm.
(2) Limit of approach distances in Column 5 have been calculated using IEEE
minimum tool distances plus 450 mm safety factor, rounded to the nearest 50
mm.
(3) Work performed directly from a pole or structure on electrical equipment or lines
operating at voltages below 5 kV between conductors must be done in
accordance with Rule 4-142.
(4) Live line work using rubber gloves is not normally done at these voltage levels.
Rubber insulating equipment may be required to handle isolated and grounded
lines that normally operate at these voltage levels.
Page 14 of 18
ONTARIO’S ELECTRICAL UTILITIES SAFE LIMITS OF APPROACH TABLES
Table 1B
Restricted Limits of Approach for Authorized Workers
Authorized workers or a worker(s) in training under Voltage Range Restricted Minimum
the continuous direction of an competent Worker may (Phase to Phase) Zone Clearance
approach or allow material or conductive tools to 0.9 m to 0.3 m
approach exposed energized electrical apparatus as 750 to 15,000 (3 ft. to 1 ft.) 0.3 m (1 ft.)
stated in the Absolute Limit section, only when the
following conditions are adhered to: 0.9 m to 0.45 m
• for all work up to 50 kV, rubber gloves must be >15,000 to 35,000 (3 ft. to 1 ft.) .45 m (1.5 ft)
worn while in the Restricted Zone;
• barriers and/or cover-up must be installed where
practical to minimize exposure to energized electrical 1.2 m to 0.6 m
apparatus and all second points of contact; >35,000 to 50,000 (4 ft. to 2 ft.) 0.6 m (2 ft.)
• a Dedicated Observer must be in place, who is
competent in the task being performed and having no 1.5 m to 0.9 m
other duties which would distract from monitoring the >50,000 to 150,000 (5 ft. to 3 ft.) 0.9 m (3 ft.)
work continuously;
• either the worker performing the work or the
Dedicated Observer must have successfully completed 2.1 m to 1.2 m
the 4th year of formal Power Line Worker >150,000 to 250,000 (7 ft. to 4 ft.) 1.2 m (4 ft.)
apprenticeship training program or equivalent; and
• the worker’s position in relation to the exposed 3.7 m to 2.75 m
energized electrical apparatus shall be such that >250,000 to 550,000 (12 ft. to 9 ft.) 2.75 m (9 ft)
movements of the Worker’s body or conductive tools,
material or vegetation will not result in any
encroachment.
Table 2A
Non-Insulated Booms and Non-Insulated Portion of Aerial Devices
• Only authorized workers or workers under the continuous Voltage Range Minimum Clearance
(Phase to Phase)
direction of an authorized worker, are permitted to operate
non-insulated booms or non-insulated portion of aerial 750 to 35,000 0.9 m (3 ft.)
devices in proximity to exposed energized apparatus. >35,000 to 50,000 1.2 m (4 ft.)
>50,000 to 150,000 2.4 m (8 ft.)
• The distances stated must be strictly followed for all parts of
the equipment, including the booms, hoisting cables and any >150,000 to 3 m (10 ft.)
part of the load being hoisted. Additional clearance must 250,000
allow for any change in boom angle, swing of the hoisting >250,000 to 4.6 m (15 ft.)
cable and load while it is being moved. 550,000
Page 15 of 18
Table 2B
Certified Insulated Aerial Devices
• Only authorized workers or workers in training under the Voltage Range Minimum
continuous direction of an authorized worker, are permitted
to operate certified insulated aerial devices in proximity to
exposed energized apparatus as per the distances specified. 750 to 15,000 0.3 m (1 ft.)
• For voltages up to and including 50 kV, approved barriers >15,000 to 50,000 0.45 m (1.5 ft.)
and/or cover-up must be installed when the minimum
clearance stated in this table cannot be maintained.
>50,000 to 150,000 0.9 m (3 ft.)
• For voltages greater than50 kV, where there are no approved
barriers, the stated limits in this table must never be reduced.
>150,000 to 250,000 1.2 m (4 ft.)
Note: At all times, “Safe Limits of Approach” for authorized
workers must be maintained.
>250,000 to 550,000 2.75 m (9 ft.)
MANITOBA’s LIMITS OF APPROACH

COLUMN 1 COLUMN 2 COLUMN 3
High Voltage in kV Absolute Limits of *Others Under Direct *Others Not Under
Approach or Supervision of a Direct Supervision of
Qualified Manitoba Qualified Manitoba Qualified Manitoba
Hydro Employees Hydro Employee Hydro Employees
Phase to Phase
cm. Ft. cm ft. cm ft.
AC Voltage
Over 750 volts to 25 30 1.0 60 2.0 300 10.0
Over 25 to 50 60 2.0 120 4.0 300 10.0
Over 50 to 75 75 2.5 150 5.0 300 10.0
Over 75 to 150 105 3.5 240 8.0 450 15.0
Over 150 to 300 150 5.0 300 10.0 450 15.0
Over 300 to 450 210 7.0 450 15.0 600 20.0
Over 450 to 600 300 10.0 600 20.0 600 20.0
DC Voltage (+ or – to ground)
150 and below 150 5.0 300 10.0 450 15.0
Over 150 to 300 210 7.0 450 15.0 600 20.0
Over 300 to 500 270 9.0 600 20.0 600 20.0
Page 16 of 18
Nalcor Minimum Air Insulation Distances (MAID) and Minimum Approach

Distances (MAD) for voltages up to 735 kV
Qualified Persons
Nominal Operating Minimum Air Insulation Minimum Approach
Voltage (MAID) Distance (MAD)
Phase to Phase to
Mm M MM M
phase ground
4.16 kV 2.4 kV 140 0.14 750 0.75
12.47 kV 7.2 kV 140 0.14 750 0.75
13.8 kV 7.96 kV 140 0.14 750 0.75
24.94kV 14.4 kV 290 0.29 900 0.90
33 kV 19.05 kV 390 0.39 1000 1.00
34.5 kV 19.92 kV 390 0.39 1000 1.00
46 kV 26.56 kV 490 0.49 1100 1.10
66 kV 38.105 kV 600 0.60 900 0.90
69 kV 39.837 kV 600 0.60 900 0.90
138 kV 79.674 kV 900 0.90 1200 1.20
230 kV 132.79 kV 1400 1.40 1700 1.70
735 kV 424.35 kV 5400 5.40 5700 5.70
Page 17 of 18
Regulatory Reference:
Alberta
Part 40- Utility Worker – Electrical
British Columbia
Part 19- Electrical Safety
Yukon
Part 9-Electrical Safety
Saskatchewan
Part XXX- Additional Protection for Electrical Workers- Sections 450-467
Manitoba
Ontario
Part II – General Construction – Section 181-196 – Electrical Hazards
NWT
Part V – Construction & Maintenance- Section 95(1)(2)(3)(4)(5) – Electrical
Protection
Page 18 of 18
Document Description Use of Chainsaws
VALARD Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.003
26.003 USE OF CHAIN SAWS

The following are the minimum required practices to be used with this equipment
Tool and Worker Certification
• Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with
sufficient experience to use this tool without supervision, or be under the direct
supervision of a worker who is qualified.
Personal Protective Equipment
Hard Hat, Safety Glasses, Face Shield, Leather Gloves, Protective Leggings,
Safety Boots, Hearing Protection
Use and Maintenance
• Shall be equipped with operational chain brakes and chains designed to

minimize kickbacks
• The correct methods of starting, holding, carrying, or storage and use of the
saw as directed by the manufacturer must be used.
• The chain must be sharp, have the correct tension, and be adequately
lubricated during operation.
• Must be adjusted so that the chain stops when the motor is idling
• Ensure that the chain brake is functioning properly and adequately stops the
chain
• When carrying/transporting a chain saw the bar guard must be in place, the
chain bar must be toward the back and the motor must be shut off.
• Fuelling of the saw must be done in a well-ventilated area. Never fuel a saw
that is running or hot.
• An approved safety container must be used to contain the fuel used along with
a proper spout or funnel for pouring.
• To be started with the chain brake engaged
• The chain saw must not be adjusted when the motor is idling
• The chain saw must not be used for cutting above shoulder height.
• When work is completed make sure the chain brake is engaged
Any employee who uses a chainsaw while aloft on a pole do so only from an
approved elevated work platform.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Use of Chainsaws
For each of the events listed below, chainsaw motors must be stopped and switched off.
For pneumatic, hydraulic, or electric chainsaws the power supply must be disconnected
when:
• Adjusting the chain or cutting bar

• Refueling the saw
• Carrying it between cutting locations
• Handing it to another person
• Leaving it unattended
Regulatory Reference
Alberta
OH&S Code Part 25 Section 376(1) (2)
CSA Standard Z762.1-M-77 “Chainsaws”
OH&S Act Sections 14(1) and 15(1)
OH&S Code Part 25 Section 375 (1) (2) (3) (4)
British Columbia
Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties
Part 12 - Tools, Machinery and Equipment Sections 12.72 and 12.73
Yukon
Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c)
Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker
Part 4 -Hand Tools and Power Driven Portable Tools/ Chainsaws Sections 4.10 & 4.11
Manitoba
Part 1- Definition and General Matters – Definition “Competent”
Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform
Part 16-Machines, tools and Robots Division 1 Chainsaw Requirements Sections
16.7(1) and 16.27(2)
Saskatchewan
Part I – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent”
Part I – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker
Part X - Machine Safety- Sections 146(1) and 146(2)
Ontario
Part I – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c)
Part II- General Construction- 145/00 Section 29 Training of Worker and Sections
112(1)(2)(3) inclusive
NWT
Part I – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Use of Handheld Grinders
26.004 USE OF HAND HELD GRINDERS

 Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with
supervision of a worker who is.
 Hard Hat, safety glasses, safety boots, face shields, gloves, hearing protection,
respiratory protective equipment is required when harmful dusts/vapours are
created.
Use and Maintenance
 Familiarize yourself with the grinder operation before commencing work.

 Never use the grinder for jobs for which it is not designed.
 A 7” Grinding Wheel turning 8600 RPM has a surface speed of 180 MPH.
 A 7” Grinding Wheel mounted on a 4-1/2” grinder turning 11000 RPM will have a
surface speed of 230 MPH.
Safe Mounting of the Wheel
 Always use the correct flange nuts and backing pads
 Nut must centre wheel on spindle
 Run the machine - before grinding run machine, when mounting wire wheels, when
mounting cut-off wheels on grinders or when mounting other wheels to grinders
 Always use safety glasses.
 Wear proper apparel.
 Protect your hearing.
 Remove adjusting keys and wrenches.
 Secure work
 Don’t overreach
 Avoid accidental starting.
 Check for damaged parts.
 Never leave tool running unattended. Turn the power off.
 Inspect the tool and extension cord periodically.
DO NOT USE TOOL IF SWITCH DOES NOT TURN IT ON AND OFF

 Keep handles free from oil and grease.
 Compare the speed marked on the wheel and to the speed marked on the grinder.
 Never exceed the maximum wheel speed (every wheel is marked).
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Use of Handheld Grinders
 When mounting the wheels, check them for cracks and defects, ensure that the
mounting flanges are clean and the mounting blotters are used. Do not over tighten
the mounting nut.
 Before grinding, run newly mounted wheels at operating speed to check for
vibrations.
 Do not use grinders near flammable materials.
 When using a zip disk (cutting disk) do not use it as a grinder. (Do not use the face
of disk to grind or for de-burring).
 Use the correct sized disk as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
 Grinders are never to be used with handles or guards removed. Grinders with
guards or handles removed are to be taken out of service as per Valard
Construction’s defective tools policy.
 When clamping material secure material safely and effectively
Same size material

Angled material Rectangular material
can be stacked
Alberta
Part 25- Tools, Equipment, & Machines- Section 375 (1) (2) (3) (4) – Grinders
British Columbia
Part 12- Tools, Machine, & Equipment – Section 12.44-12.50
Yukon
Part 7- Machinery and Machine Guarding- Section 7.10 (a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)
Saskatchewan
Part X – Machine Safety- Section 145- Grinding Machines
Manitoba
Part 16- Machines, Tools and Robots- Sections 16.22(1)(2)(3)
Ontario
Part II- General Construction- Section 93- Equipment General
NWT
Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 132-136
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Working with Hazardous Chemicals
26.008 WORKING WITH ACIDS/CHEMICALS
The following are the minimum required practices to be used with any hazardous
chemical.
Worker Certification
Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient
experience to work without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker
who is.
Workers that are required to with or in the workspace that chemicals are being used or
stored shall follow the following;
o Shall not work in areas that the occupational exposure limit is exceeded.
Personal Protective Equipment Required

Hard Hat, mono-goggles, face shield, Chemical gloves and protective clothing (consult
MSDS), Respiratory Protective equipment (consult MSDS) and the specific procedures
that address the Chemical or Biological Hazards
Use and Maintenance

• Obtain and review the Material Safety Data Sheet(s) of the Material(s) to be used
for the task.
• Acids/chemicals are volatile and may react with other substances, refer to the
MSDS for information
• Acids/chemicals can create fire and explosion hazards, consult MSDS for
flammability information
• When diluting or preparing solutions, slowly add acid to water to avoid boiling
and splattering.
• If solutions are decanted into containers other than their original ones, they must
have appropriate WHMIS labelling.
• Store in closed containers in well ventilated area
• Post Signs indicating use of acids/chemicals in the area
• Ensure end of the job clean up is performed as per manufacturers instructions,
refer to MSDS.
Alberta
Part 1- Section 1 -Definition of a Competent Worker
Part 1 -Section 14 - (1) Duties of Workers
Part 4 -Chemical Hazards- All Sections
British Columbia
Part 5 – Chemical and Biological Substances – All Sections
Yukon
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Working with Hazardous Chemicals
Part 8-Material and Storage – Section 8.16-8.18 – Hazardous Substance

Saskatchewan
Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent”
Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker
Part XXI- Chemical and Biological Substances – All Sections
Manitoba
Part 36- Chemical and Biological Substances- All Sections
Ontario
Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c)
NWT
Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Welding, Cutting and Burning
26.009 WELDING, CUTTING AND BURNING
Work involving welding, cutting and burning can increase the fire and breathing hazard
on any job, and the following should be considered prior to the start of work.

Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with
Training
All workers that weld, cut or burn shall;
• Shall receive Hot Work training
• Shall receive Permit training as required for Hot Work. (Permit is to be
issued prior to any hot work commences).
•
Personal protective equipment will vary depending on the task being performed, as a
minimum:
• Safety boots, Hardhat, safety glasses
• 20# fire extinguisher (within 25 ft. of work area)
• Fire Resistant Clothing
• Leather Sleeves
Welding
• Hard hat with welder's face shield
• Safety glasses
• Safety boots
• Protective clothing,
• Gloves.
• Respiratory protective equipment may be required depending on the material
being welding (eg. Galvanized, stainless). Check the MSDS before welding.
Cutting
• Hard hat
• Cutting goggles with #5 lens (sunglasses/tinted safety glasses are not
acceptable)
• Gloves
• Safety Boots
• Respiratory protection may be required for some materials, check the MSDS
before cutting
Use and Maintenance

• Always ensure that adequate ventilation is supplied since hazardous fumes can
be created during welding, cutting or burning.
Page 1 of 3
• Where other workers can be exposed to welding flash they must be protected by
the use of screens.
• Always have fire fighting or prevention equipment on hand before starting
welding, cutting or burning.
• Check the work area for combustible material and possible flammable vapours
before starting any Hot Work.
• A permit must be issued prior to any Hot Work commences.
• A welder should never work alone. A fire or spark watch shall be present during
and a minimum of 1 hour after the task is completed to insure that there is no
opportunity for a fire to develop after completion of the work.
• Check cables and hoses for leaks prior to use and protect them from slag or
sparks.
• Never weld or cut lines, drums, tanks, etc. that have been in service without
making sure that all precautions have been carried out and permits obtained.
• Never enter, weld or cut in a confined space without proper gas tests and a
required safety watch.
• When working overhead, use fire resistant materials (blankets, tarps) to control
or contain slag and sparks.
• Cutting and welding must not be performed where sparks and cutting slag will fall
on cylinders (move all cylinders away to one side).
• All cylinders must be equipped with a Flashback Arrestor.
• Open all cylinder valves slowly. The wrench used for opening the cylinder
valves should always be kept on the valve spindle when the cylinder is in use.
• All cylinders must be secured in an upright position; in a separated containment
areas and caps must be replaced after use at all times.
Alberta
Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker
Section 14(2) Direction of Workers
Section 15(1) Worker Training
Part 10-Fire and Explosion Hazards- Section 171(1) (2)(3)(4) (5)(6)(7)(8)-Welding
British Columbia
Part 12- Tools, Machinery, and Equipment – Section 12.112-12.126
Yukon
Part 13- Trades and Miscellaneous – Section 13.08-13.02- Welding cutting and allied
processes
Saskatchewan
Page 2 of 3

Part XXV- Fire and Explosion Hazards- Section 373 – Gas Burning and Welding
Equipment
Manitoba
Part 17- Welding and Allied Processes – All Sections
Ontario
Part II- General Construction – Welding
NWT
Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 154-164- Welding and Burning
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Working with Propane
26.011 USE OF PROPANE

Worker Certification
 Propane users must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient
experience to work without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a
worker who is.
 Hard Hat
 Safety Glasses
 Safety Boots
 Gloves
Use and Maintenance
 20# fire extinguisher must be available near the propane cylinder and its
work area.
 Compressed gas systems must be used, stored and transported in accordance
with manufacturer’s specifications
 All trucks, cranes or equipment used to handle propane tanks must be equipped
with a fire extinguisher appropriate for the size and type of tank being handled
 Tank valves and regulators are to be removed from the tank prior to any
movement of the tank.
 Slings must be used in a "choker" fashion when loading, off-loading or lifting
propane tanks
 "Lifting lugs" provided on tanks are not to be used. Slings are to be wrapped
around the shell of the tank
 Propane bottles are to be transported in the upright position
 A competent qualified worker must do all connections and disconnections
 Tanks are not to be hooked up and used without proper regulators.
 When in use, propane bottles are to be securely held in an upright position.
 All system components must be kept clean and free of oil, grease or other
contaminants that may cause a failure of the system or may burn or explode.
 All propane vale must be clear of obstruction and no material is to be placed on or
near the valves.
 Do not allow sparks, flame or other heat sources come into contact with cylinders,
regulators or hoses. Tanks shall not to be heated to increase flow.
 Propane is heavier than air and invisible, it may collect in confined spaces and low
areas, do not open any propane connection unless all valves are placed in a
closed position.
 Propane bottles must not be placed in any confined space, they must be in well
ventilated areas at all times.
Alberta
Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Working with Propane

Part 10-Fire and Explosion Hazards- Section 171(1) (2)(3)(4) (5)(6)(7)(8)-Welding
British Columbia
Part 12- Tools, Machinery, and Equipment – Section 12.112-12.126
Yukon
Part 13- Trades and Miscellaneous – Section 13.08-13.02- Welding cutting and allied
processes
Saskatchewan
Part XXV- Fire and Explosion Hazards- Section 373 – Gas Burning and Welding
Equipment
Manitoba
Part 17- Welding and Allied Processes – All Sections
Ontario
Part II- General Construction
NWT
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Use of Portable Ladders
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Feb. 21, 2017
26.012 USE OF PORTABLE LADDERS
The following are the minimum required practices to be used with this equipment.
If there are other means to either access a work area or another means of providing an
elevated work area, the use of a ladder will be used if there are no other means to
access work area or to work from.
experience to use this equipment without supervision, or be under the direct supervision
of a worker who is.
Use and Maintenance
Extension Ladders
• When setting up a ladder, secure the base and "walk" the ladder up into place.
• The ladder must be set at the proper angle of “one (1) foot” horizontal to every
four (4) feet vertical.
• Before using a ladder, make sure it is placed on a level base and secured
against movement.
• Only CSA Standard ladders will be used.
• All manufacturer’s labels including load bearing capacity must be legible.
• Ladders shall protrude one metre above the intended landing point.
• Workers shall not work from the top two rungs of a ladder.
• Don't overreach while on a ladder. It is easier and safer to climb down and move
the ladder over a few feet to a new position.
• Always face the ladder when using it. Grip it firmly and use the three-point
contact method when moving up or down.
• The minimum overlap on an extension ladder should be one metre unless the
manufacturer specifies the overlap.
• Keep both metal and wood ladders away from electrical sources.
• Ladders used on electrical work shall be manufactured of non conductive
material
• Ladders are not to be painted.
• Extension ladders must be equipped with safety shoes.
• Wooden ladders must be built to the specifications in the appropriate
Provincial/Territorial Regulations.
• All ladders must be inspected before each use and defective ladders must be
taken out of service.
Step ladders
• No work is to be done from the top two steps of a stepladder, counting the top
platform as a rung.
• The stepladder is to be used in the fully opened position with the spreader bars
locked.
• Don't overreach, climb down and move the ladder over to a new position.
• Only CSA Standard Step ladders will be used.
• Ladders are not to be painted.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Use of Portable Ladders
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Feb. 21, 2017
Alberta
Part 8-Entrances, Walkways, Stairways and Ladders- Section 124-137
British Columbia
Part 13- Ladders, Scaffolds, and Temporary Work Platforms – Section 13.4-13.6
Yukon
Part 10- Construction and Building Safety- Section 10.21-10.29 – Ladders
Saskatchewan
Part XVI- Entrances, Exits, & Ladders – Section 252-256
Manitoba
Part 13- Entrances, Exits, Stairways and Ladders – Section 13.7-13.21
Ontario
Part II- General Construction – Section 78-76 – Ladders
NWT
Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 246-249 - Ladders
Page 2 of 2
Document Description USE OF COMPANY VEHICLES
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 10 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: July 29, 2016
26.013 USE OF COMPANY VEHICLES

The policy of Valard Construction is to ensure that all vehicles on our projects are driven
and maintained in a consistent manner. This guideline is to be considered as a
minimum. All Government or client standards that exceed this guideline will then be
considered as a minimum. No commercial vehicle shall be driven if a major defect is
present on the vehicle. No one including motor carriers, shipper, consignee or other
person is to allow a driver to operate a vehicle if their faculties are impaired to the point
where it is unsafe to drive the unit.
A driver of a National Safety Code vehicle (NSC) (vehicle or combination of vehicles
registered for 11,794 kilograms or more) is required by law to conduct a pre-inspection
of the vehicle or combination of vehicles prior to operating them at the beginning of a
work shift, and a post inspection of these vehicles after the operator ceases to operate
them at the end of a work shift. These drivers must maintain a driver’s log book and
keep it up to date as required by Alberta Transportation please see Addendum 1 for full
details. Other types of Vehicles are to follow Section 25.3 of this manual for inspections.
All collisions must be reported Valardsafety@valard.com as soon as possible and
investigated.
MANDATORY VEHICLE INSPECTIONS TRUCKS AND TRAILERS

All Commercial vehicles registered for a weight of 11,794 must not be operated unless
they have a valid commercial vehicle inspection certificate, please see Addendum 1 for
full details.
PRE TRIP INSPECTIONS

The daily vehicle inspections are intended to ensure early identification of vehicle
problems and defects, and to prevent the operation of vehicles with conditions that are
likely to cause accidents or vehicle breakdown.
• A walk around the vehicle is usually a good way of beginning a pre-trip

inspection to check headlights, signal and brake lights, tire condition and
pressure, fluid levels (oil, transmission, brake etc.), external loads, etc.
• Pre/Post-trip inspection consists of the following as a minimum:

o Condition of Wheels and Rims
o Headlights/taillights and signal lights
o Brakes must be checked including trailer brake connections
o Springs checked for cracks etc.
o Coupling devices
o Steering mechanism (no Play)
o Windshield and wipers
o Rear vision mirrors
o Emergency equipment (as listed in Section 3 below.)
o Horn
o Decals in the right place Side marker lights
o Check Air and Electrical lines
o Check Frame and body
o Cargo Securement
Page 1 of 15
o Fuel tank area

o Parking brake
o Exhaust system
o Dash gauges
o Test low air warning device
• All deficiencies must be logged and reported to the Fleet department in

Leduc, AB.
• A visual check of the driver and passenger compartment is usually
appropriate also.
DRIVER’S RESPONSIBILIIES
1. All vehicle/equipment operators must have a current valid license issued by the
appropriate Government department for the equipment they are operating.
2. Drivers must complete a daily log book if they are operating any
vehicle/equipment, which falls under NSC jurisdiction, please see Addendum 1
for full details. This includes all equipment with the numbers beginning with a 3
series and up and others, which will be identified as to log book requirements.
When operating smaller vehicles all work repairs performed on these vehicle
must be forwarded to the corporate office.
3. Drivers must report all reportable conditions and items not in proper order to the
mechanical shop in their area or work.
4. Drivers/Operators must verify the condition of the equipment they are operating
on a continuous basis and be satisfied that the vehicle remains safe and will not
endanger either the operator or any other worker or person. Long haul operators
must stop every three (3) hours or after 240 kilometers at a safe location to do a
vehicle/load securement inspection and a break from driving
5. No one is permitted to operate any vehicle or equipment while under the
influence of alcohol (over .04) or any illegal drugs or prescribed drugs that may
influence awareness or driving habits, cause drowsiness or other conditions that
may cause any impairment.
6. When parking any vehicle in a parking lot, it is expected that the operator first
drive through in order that the unit is facing out of the parking space, or the unit
is to be backed in. This insures that the unit is driven straight out rather than
having to back out into traffic areas, both vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
7. Drivers are not permitted to talk on a cell phone or text while driving. On ISN
client’s sites it is not permitted to use a cell phone to either talk or text or use a
hands free system. Drivers must turn off the roadway and park in a safe zone
prior to using the phone system.
8. Smoking is not permitted in any company vehicle/equipment.
9. All drivers shall have their drivers abstracts reviewed annually and on the date
which their license expires to insure that a renewal has been obtained.
10. The driver including the passengers must wear their seatbelts at all times while
in the vehicle. This includes while driving on the right of way.
Page 2 of 15
11. If the driver of the unit is backing up and their vision is blocked they must use a
spotter if available.
12. The driver of the vehicle must insure that their vision is not impaired by ice,
snow or dirt.
13. Ignition must be switched off when being refueled. No smoking is allowed within
3 meters of the fueling area
14. Vehicles must be driven with headlights on at all times.
15. Loads must be properly secured.
16. Hard hat, safety glasses, Boots, gloves and a hi-vis vest (to be worn when
inspecting equipment or loading/unloading of truck)
17. The trucks belonging to Valard Construction will be equipped with the emergency
equipment listed below. The driver is responsible for checking all equipment
before the trip begins.
• Back-up alarms when rear vision is restricted.
• First aid kit
• Fire extinguisher (20 lb. minimum)
• Road flares and beacon
• Spare tire and proper tools for tire change. Jack-alls are not allowed
• Survival equipment when needed
• Tow hook, front and back
• VHF radio with utility frequencies
• Flash light
• Matches
• Axe
18. Appropriate permits for road trip
OPERATOR’S TRAINING
The following is a list of training which operators need to receive;
o Use of fire extinguishers, flares, cones and flagging
o Load securement
o Hours of service
o Pre and post vehicle inspections
o Rules of the road and safety laws (Traffic Safety Act)
o Driving evaluations
o Bills of lading, manifests, time recording and weigh slips
RECORD KEEPING
Valard will retain the following documentation in each operator’s drivers’ files;
• Copy of their driver’s license
• Copy of the driver’s abstract, employment history, record of administrative
penalties, collisions and training for a period of 5 years from completion date
• Copy of convictions for a period of current year and previous 4 years
• Copy of dangerous goods training certificate for a period of 5 years
Page 3 of 15
• Copy of vehicle maintenance for a period of the current year and 4 previous
years
• Copies of vehicle trip inspections and driver’s daily record (log Book) for a period
of 6 months after receiving the reports
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS:

The following requirements shall apply to all Valard’s and all leased units;
1. All units must have a scheduled inspection and servicing as per the
manufacturer’s recommendations this maintenance plan must be available in
each location where inspections are carried out and a copy in the place of
business (Edmonton office)
2. Pre and post trip inspections must be performed by each driver operating the
unit a copy must be kept in the unit in case it may be requested by a peace
officer
3. When the person completing to inspection if they believe or suspect a defect of
the unit they must report the defect to Valard Fleet;
• Immediately if the defect as determined by the inspection schedule, or
• In a timely manner, and no later than the next required trip inspection.
4. Trip inspection reports and Copies of daily log book records must be sent to
Fleet Services within 20 days, these shall be recorded within 30 days after
being submitted by the driver and be maintained in chronological order for a
period of 6 months.
JOURNEY MANAGEMENT
All drivers will attend a Journey Management training seminar and will be presented a
copy of this Safe Work Practice for future reference.
This program contains the following information of the company’s expectations and the
drivers’.
EMPLOYER’S RESPONSIBILITIES;
To inform all drivers of this policy.
• Inform drivers that travel needs are to be reviewed prior to travelling.
o This includes the need for the trip
o Number of stops. (Fewer trips and more stops to minimize the number of
driving hours.) Trips should be scheduled to minimize the number of
road trips.
o Trips are to be done during daylight hours. (Wild animals are more
prevalent during dawn and dusk on the road.)
o When travelling in unfamiliar places a map should be available in the
vehicle and a GPS. (Smart phone GPS shall not be used.)
o Trips taken during winter months, the driver must check the road
conditions by calling the provincial motor associations prior to departing.
(If road conditions are in poor condition then the need for the trip needs
to be re-evaluated.)
Page 4 of 15
o All vehicles are to be equipped with a first aid kit, emergency flares and
an emergency kit containing matches, candles, blanket, and a small
shovel as a minimum.
`
Trips that are taken for meetings require the following analysis:
• Is this trip necessary?
• Can utilizing the Video conferencing systems eliminate this trip?
• Is there a safer means of travel (i.e. airplane, train or other mass transit
systems)?
EMPLOYEE’S RESPONSIBILITIES
The following are the responsibility of the employee driving the vehicle:
• Communicate with the supervisor or a foreman as to the expected duration of the
trip.
• The destination of the trip.
• The anticipated time of the return (provided that this is not a one way trip).
• Insure that there is a means of communication in case of an incident. This may
be either a cell phone or if equipped a truck CB radio or truck to truck
communication system.
• Rest beaks must be taken at regular intervals, maximum of 3 hours driving then a
15-minute break, as a minimum must be taken. This is in order to be able to
stretch out limbs, get fresh air etc.
• If driving late at night consider stopping and getting a hotel room to sleep before
continuing the trip.
FLEET SAFETY ADVISOR
Duties and Responsibilities are:
1. Audit log books, infractions
2. Address log book deficiencies with the driver in question
3. Send letter and a copy of the deficiency along with a signed and dated letter
stating a plan to address the deficiency. Signed by both driver and the Fleet
Safety Advisor and put a copy in the Driver’s file.
4. Do ride along with the drivers (checking for bad habits) Provide written feedback
with an action plan, do follow-up and document results in Driver’s file.
5. Complete spot checks of vehicles.
6. Train drivers are to be instructed on fire extinguisher use, Use of Flags and
flares, googles (safety glasses) and hardhats.
PARKING AND WORKING NEAR VEHICLES

1. Vehicles must always be parked to the right and clear of the road if possible. If
parking on the road is necessary, hazard flashers must be put on.
2. If two or more trucks are to be parked along a roadway, they must be parked on
the same side of the road.
3. Doors must only be opened when traffic is clear.
4. Hydraulic brake locks must not be used for parking.
5. On sloping grade, vehicles must be prevented from rolling.
Page 5 of 15
6. Traffic must be controlled whenever its presence at a job site might cause a
hazard to workers or to the public. The use of flag-persons or cones should be
pre-planned.
7. Workers near traffic must wear high-visibility vests or coveralls.
8. Ignition keys must not be left in unattended vehicles.
LOADING AND UNLOADING

1. All loads must be properly secured.
• Decks of trucks and trailers must be level for loading and unloading.
• Decks must be kept free of gravel, mud, and loose tools, etc.
• People not actually involved in loading and unloading must be kept clear.
• No person may stand or walk beneath a suspended load.
• When a winch is pulling a load on a vehicle deck, no person is allowed on the
deck.
• When a vehicle-mounted crane is used for lifting a load, the outriggers must
be extended.
• Loads that extend more than 1.5m beyond the rear of a truck, the projecting
end must be marked with a red flag during daylight and a red light after dark.
DAILY DRIVING AND ON-DUTY TIME

• No motor carrier shall request, require or allow a driver to drive and no
driver shall drive after the driver has accumulated 13 hours of driving time
in a day.
• No motor carrier shall request, require or allow a driver to drive and no
driver shall drive after the driver has accumulated 14 hours of on-duty time
in a day.
MANDATORY OFF-DUTY TIME

• No driver shall drive after the driver has accumulated 13 hours of driving
time unless the driver takes at least 8 consecutive hours of off-duty time
before driving again.
• No driver shall drive after the driver has accumulated 14 hours of on-duty
time unless the driver takes at least 8 consecutive hours of off-duty time
before driving again.
• No driver shall drive after 16 hours of time have elapsed between the
conclusion of the most recent period of 8 or more consecutive hours of off-
duty time and the beginning of the next period of 8 or more consecutive
hours of off-duty time.
• No driver shall operate a vehicle for more than 70 hours. A minimum of 36
consecutive uninterrupted off duty hours must be taken before commencing
driving again.
DAILY OFF-DUTY TIME

• The driver shall take at least 10 hours of off-duty time in a day.
Page 6 of 15
• Off-duty time other than the mandatory 8 consecutive hours may be

distributed throughout the day in blocks of no less than 30 minutes each.
• The total amount of off-duty time taken by a driver in a day shall include at
least 2 hours of off-duty time that does not form part of a period of 8
consecutive hours of off-duty time as required by legislation.
DAILY LOGS
INTERPRETATION
• A requirement that a driver record time in a daily log is a requirement to
record the time using the local time at the driver's home terminal.
REQUIREMENT TO FILL OUT A DAILY LOG

• Every driver shall fill out a daily log each day that accounts for all of the
driver's on-duty time and off-duty time for that day.
This section does not apply if:
• The driver operates a commercial vehicle within a radius of 160 km of the
home terminal;
• The driver returns to the home terminal each day to begin a minimum of 8
consecutive hours of off-duty time;
• The motor carrier maintains accurate and legible records showing, for each
day, the driver's duty status and elected cycle, the hour at which each duty
status begins and ends and the total number of hours spent in each status
and keeps those records for a minimum period of 6 months after the day on
which they were recorded.
CONTENT OF DAILY LOGS

At the beginning of each day, the driver shall enter legibly the following information
in the daily log:
• The date, the start time if different than midnight, the name of the driver.
• The commercial vehicle license plates or unit numbers;
• The odometer reading of each of the commercial vehicles operated by the
driver;
• The names and the addresses of the home terminal and the principal place
of business of every motor carrier by whom the driver was employed or
otherwise engaged during that day;
• In the "Remarks" section of the daily log, if the motor carrier or driver was not
required to keep a daily log immediately before the beginning of the day, the
number of hours of off-duty time and on-duty time that were accumulated by
the driver each day during the 14 days immediately before the beginning of
the day; and
• The driver shall record in the daily log the hours in each duty status during
the day covered by the daily log, and the location of the driver each time their
duty status changes, as that information becomes known.
• At the end of each day, the driver shall record the total hours for each duty
status and the total distance driven by the driver that day, excluding the
distance driven in respect of the driver's personal use of the vehicle, as well
Page 7 of 15
as the odometer reading at the end of the day and sign the daily log attesting
to the accuracy of the information recorded in it.
POSSESSION OF DAILY LOGS AND SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS BY

DRIVERS
• No driver who is required to fill out a daily log shall drive unless the driver has
in their possession.
• A copy of the daily logs for the preceding 14 days;
• The daily log for the current day, completed up to the time at which the last
change in the driver's duty status occurred.
DISTRIBUTION AND KEEPING OF DAILY LOGS

• A driver shall, within 20 days after completing a daily log, forward the original
daily log and supporting documents to the home terminal.
Page 8 of 15
DUTY STATUS (OVERVIEW & Explanation)

____________________________ ________________________
NAME DATE
Cycle 1 (7 days) ___
_______(Hour at which day begins -- Use local time at home
terminal)
Total
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Hours
1. Off-duty
time other
than time
spent in
a sleeper
berth
2. Off-duty
time spent in
a sleeper
berth
3. Driving
time
4. On-duty
time other
than driving
time
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Remarks ________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Total distance driven _____________
____________________
Signature
Page 9 of 15
INSTRUCTIONS
Fill out the grid as follows:

1. For each duty status,
• Mark the beginning time and the end time, and
• Draw a continuous line between the time markers;
2. Record the name of the municipality or give the location on a highway or in a legal sub-
division and the name of the province or state where a change in duty status occurs;
3. If the driver is engaged in making deliveries in a municipality that result in a number of
periods of driving time being interrupted by a number of short periods of other on-duty
time, the periods of driving time may be combined and the periods of other on-duty time
may be combined; and
4. Enter on the right of the grid the total number of hours of each period of duty status,
which total must equal 24 hours.
LOAD SECUREMENT
The legal requirements for load securement are to insure that the load may not shift, slip,
blow off or fall off during transport. It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the load is
secure, and in place at all times as per NSC Standard 10: Load Securement.
Loose objects on the truck/trailer must be secured or stored in a confined space. This
includes deck pins, slings, hoses, buckets, catch pans, tools etc. Deck pins, boomers chains
should be removed from truck or trailer and stored or secured properly.
Loose mud/rocks must be cleaned from the loads prior to transporting loads on the highway.
Truck and trailer decks must be clean of any loose material left by the load, prior to travel on
the highway.
INSPECTION
1. The driver of a vehicle shall inspect the vehicle’s cargo and the cargo Securement
system used and make the necessary adjustments:
• Before driving the vehicle, and
• Not more than 80 kilometres from the point where the cargo was loaded,
• If the unit is driven daily the vehicle must be inspected every 24 hours as a
minimum.
2. The driver of the vehicle shall re-inspect the vehicle’s cargo and the Securement system
used to make necessary adjustments to the cargo or Securement as necessary,
including adding more securing devices, at the earliest time:
• There is change of the duty status of the driver,
• The vehicle has been driven for 3 hours
• The vehicle has been driven for 240 kilometres
Page 10 of 15
GENERAL REQUIREMENT
Cargo shall be firmly immobilized or secured on or within a vehicle by structures of adequate
strength, blocking, bracing, dunnage or dunnage bags, shoring bars, tiedowns or a
combination of these.
PLACEMENT OF ARTICLES OF CARGO

Where the articles of cargo on or within a vehicle are placed beside each other and secured
by tiedowns that pass over 2 or more articles, the articles shall be:
• Placed in direct contact with each other, or
• Prevented from moving towards each other while the vehicle is on the highway
PREVENTION OF ROLLING
Where any cargo or portion thereof may roll, it shall be restrained by chocks, wedges, a
cradle or another securing device that prevents the cargo from rolling.
MINIMUM NUMBER OF TIE DOWNS

Where an individual article of cargo is not blocked or immobilized by a front end structure,
bulkhead, by other immobilized cargo or by another device that prevents it from moving
forward, it shall be secured by at least:
• 1 tie down where the article is 1.52 metres (5 feet) or shorter and weighs not more
than 500 kilograms,
• 2 tie downs where the article is
o 1.52 metres or shorter and weighs more than 500 kilograms, or
o Longer than 1.52 metres but no longer than 3.04 metres regardless of its
weight, or
• Where the article is longer than 3.04 metres
o 2 tie downs for the first 3.04 metres of length, and
o 1 extra tie down for each additional 3.04 metres or fraction of 3.04 metres.
POLE TRAILERS
This applies to logs, regardless of the length of individual logs, transported on pole trailers.
The logs shall be secured by:
• One or more tie downs at each bunk the first tie down must be within the first metre
from the front of the pole.
• Two or more tie downs used as wrappers that encircle the entire stack of logs at
sufficient locations along the stack to secure it effectively.
Where wrappers are used on a stack of logs, the wrappers at the front and rear ends of the
stack shall not be less than 3.04 metres (10ft.) apart.
Where the vehicle is transporting one or two logs with diameters greater than 0.6 metres
(2ft.), each log shall be immobilized with chocks or an equally effective method that prevents
the logs from moving.
Where the log with a diameter greater than 0.6 metres (2 ft.) rises above the bunk, it shall be
secured to the underlying logs with at least 2 additional tie downs used as wrappers.
Page 11 of 15
HEAVY VEHICLES AS CARGO

Heavy Vehicles shall be transported and secured:
• Accessory equipment on a heavy vehicle shall be completely lowered and secured to
the vehicle (e.g. buckets, augers and all loose items).
• Articulated vehicles shall be restrained in a manner that prevents articulation.
• A heavy vehicle with crawler tracks or wheels shall be restrained against moving
sideways, forward, rearward and vertically by at least 4 tie downs. These tie downs if
chain type must be marked with grades or Working Load Limits. Utility chain is not
acceptable.
VEHICLE WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS

• All loads must be transported at the Legislative legal weights and dimensions.
• Any load that exceeds legal weight and dimension must have a special permit.
• This permit must be arranged through Fleet Services.
• All conditions must be met.
• It is the driver's responsibility to ensure he has read and understood the conditions.
• When operating at legal axle weights, the truck shall be registered for the weight that
it carries.
• Legal dimensions (size):
 Width: 2.6 metres (8' 6")
 Height 4.15 metres (13' 6")
 Length:
o Single vehicle 12.5 metres (41'0")
o Truck-trailer and semi-trailer 23.0 metres (75'6")
o Truck and towed trailer combination 23.0 metres (75'6")
o Truck-trailer, semi-trailer and full trailer
and or semi-trailer in combination 25.0 metres (82'0")
Permits are required for the movement of vehicles and their loads that exceed the
above legal dimensions.
LEGAL WEIGHTS
• Legal weights are dependent on a variety of factors including the number of axles
and tire size.
• Permits are required for the movement of these vehicles and their loads, which
exceed the legal weight.
ROAD RESTRICTIONS AND SEASONAL ROAD BANS

• From time to time, roads are restricted due to construction, maintenance or seasonal
conditions such as spring thaw.
• If there is movement of vehicles on unnumbered highways and on county roads
during spring thaw, the local county office must be contacted to determine the road
conditions if any are in effect.
There are also route restrictions due to dimensional constraints of highway by overhead
structures and bridges.
Page 12 of 15
There are areas in Alberta identified as "the High Load Corridor" which has overhead
utility lines raised to accommodate loads up to 9 metres high. Permits for moving these
high loads through these corridors are required and can be obtained through Fleet
Services.
BUCKET TRUCK PROCEDURES

1. “Bucket Truck” - is a vehicle-mounted aerial lifting device with an articulating or
telescopic boom used to position workers.
2. When traveling to and from the job site, the boom must be cradled in a padded support
and fastened down. Outriggers must be retracted and the power takeoff disengaged.
3. When using the bucket, outriggers must be extended to stabilize the vehicle at all times.
4. The vehicle must be legally parked, with traffic cones and flag persons properly
positioned when required.
5. When maneuvering an elevated bucket, the operator must face the direction of motion
and keep checking the elbow of the boom.
6. When two workers are elevated, signals must only be given by one of them.
7. Climbing spurs must not be worn while working in buckets.
8. Buckets must be kept clean. All tools not in use must be properly secured or removed.
When a hydraulic power tool is not in use, it must be disengaged from its power source.
No electrical power tools may be used in a bucket near primary conductors.
9. The insulated section in the boom must be at least 1.5m and never less than the normal
limits of approach for the voltage being worked on. In order for a telescoping boom to be
acceptable, the required clear insulation must be effective in all positions of the boom,
including fully retracted.
10. The outer boom may be brought to a position that puts the workers up to, but not inside,
normal (column 2) limits of approach unless other guarding precautions have been
taken. The lower steel boom and knuckle must maintain Column 3 Limits of Approach.
11. Each bucket truck must undergo annual tests and have a valid sticker to certify its
insulation. Without this, the vehicle is considered un-insulated.
12. If a worker has to approach a high voltage line or equipment in such a way, as not to
have the insulated portion of the boom as back-up protection, then the bucket must be
kept no closer than Column 3 Limits of Approach. An example would be working on a
grounded circuit over live under build.
13. The buckets themselves may have no insulated value. They must not be relied upon to
provide back-up protection.
14. It is mandatory that people on the ground stay well clear of aerial lifting devices that are
working on energized equipment. They must maintain Column 2 Limits of Approach
from the vehicle until the following conditions prevail:
• Work aloft has ceased, and conductors are controlled and stable.
• The person aloft, or in the vehicle has given verbal permission for the ground
workers to touch the vehicle.
• Work aloft or in the vehicle must not resume until the ground workers have moved
away, and verbally indicated their intention to remain clear.
15. At no time is it permissible to move the vehicle with a worker in the bucket.
16. In Alberta when operating any equipment such as Backhoe, Trackhoe, Grader, Dozer
the following Limit of Approach chart must be complied with.
Page 13 of 15
Safe Limits of Approach distances from overhead lines for persons and equipment.
Operating voltage between conductors of Safe Limit of Approach distance for
overhead powerlines persons and equipment
0-750 Volts
300 millimetres
Insulated or polyethylene covered conductors
0-750 Volts
1.0 metre
Bare, uninsulated
Above 750 Volts
1.0 metre
Insulated conductors (1) (2)
750 – 40 kV 3.0 metres
69 – 72 kV 3.5 metres
138 – 144 kV 4.0 metres
230 – 260 kV 5.0 metres
500 kV 7.0 metres
(1) Conductors must be insulated or covered throughout their entire length to comply
with this group.
(2) Conductors must be manufactured to rated and tested insulation levels.
POWERED MOBILE EQUIPMENT

All workers operating any powered mobile equipment must be qualified, trained and deemed
competent by a trainer using the skills checks as per the training manual. Skill checks are
required on a 3-year renewal schedule for all operators.
1. Equipment must be checked daily prior to its use. (Equipment check form) Any defects
must be reported to fleet management to have the unit repaired before operating it.
2. All maintenance records must be kept on the Fleet management program.
3. All powered equipment is serviced based on operating hours. Items that are to be
inspected are any safety devices, oil level (change if required), condition of glass, and
including all manufacturers’ recommendations.
4. All powered Equipment must have an overhead guard including Roll Over protection to
prevent any injury to the operator from falling objects.
5. When leaving any powered mobile equipment it must be secured to prevent its
movement, this includes insuring that any equipment that has a boom or arm that can be
raised must be placed on the ground to prevent it from dropping.
6. Seatbelts must be worn at all times when operating any powered mobile equipment.
Alberta
Act, Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker
Act, Section 14(2) Direction of Workers
Act, Section 15(1) Worker Training
Part 19 -Powered Motorized Mobile Equipment -All Sections
Page 14 of 15
Regulation 315/2002TrafficSafety Act- Commercial Vehicle Dimensions and weight

Regulations
British Columbia
Part 16- Mobile Equipment – All Sections
Yukon
Saskatchewan
Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker.
Part XI – Powered Mobile Equipment- All Sections
Manitoba
Part 22- Powered Mobile Equipment
Ontario
Part II- General Construction- Sections 93-105
NWT
ADDENDUM 1 – NSC VEHICLES
Page 15 of 15
Document Description NSC Vehicles – Addendum 1
Date: July 27, 2016 Revision: Revised by: Date:
AUTHORIZED DRIVERS
Authorized drivers include all employees that are permitted to operate National Safety Code vehicles
registered to Valard Construction. Authorized drivers include:
• managers/owners who drive;
• part-time or occasional drivers;
• company mechanics who test drive vehicles or drive part-time;
• safety staff who train drivers;
• lease operators who have their vehicles registered to the company;
• contractors who have their vehicles registered to the company;
• anyone else authorized to operate a company vehicle.
All authorized drivers must follow the policies and procedures found in this safety program. By
following the policies in this program, all authorized drivers will be more aware of how to operate
safely and to prevent collisions.
Page 1 of 33
SAFE USE AND OPERATION OF VEHICLES

Valard Construction will ensure all drivers are aware of the safe use and operation of commercial
vehicles. Drivers must comply with all transportation safety laws, including those related to:
SPEED LIMITS
Drivers must obey all posted speed limits and reduce speed according to road, weather, visibility
conditions and vehicle type.
SEAT BELT USE
All authorized drivers, while operating or travelling as a passenger in company vehicles, must wear
seat belt(s) at all times.
DRUG AND ALCOHOL USE
The possession and/or consumption of alcohol, illegal drugs, or the misuse of prescription drugs are
strictly prohibited while drivers operate company vehicles and other equipment.
DEFENSIVE DRIVING
Authorized drivers must operate company vehicles in a professional and courteous manner. Drivers
must be prepared to avoid collision causing situations by practicing and by promoting the principles of
defensive driving.
For example, drivers must be aware of their surroundings and look ahead. Drivers should leave a safe
distance between vehicles, keep the vehicle under control at all times and be prepared for changes in
road, weather and traffic conditions.
Distracted Driving
As part of practicing the principles of defensive driving, authorized drivers must remain focused
and follow all distracted driving laws. The following activities conducted while driving are
considered distracted driving:
• using hand-held cell phones;
• texting or emailing (even when stopped at red lights);
• using electronic devices like laptop computers, video games, cameras, video entertainment
displays, and programming portable audio players (e.g. MP3 players);
• entering information on GPS units;
• reading printed materials in the vehicle;
• writing, printing or sketching; and
• personal grooming (brushing teeth, putting on makeup, clipping nails, shaving, etc.).
Page 2 of 33
CARGO SECUREMENT
The carrier and driver must ensure that all cargo transported is contained, immobilized or secured in
accordance with National Safety Code Standard 10. The following are some general guidelines for
ensuring cargo is secured in a safe manner. Generally, cargo transported on a commercial vehicle
must not:
• leak, spill, blow off, fall from, fall through or otherwise dislodge from the commercial vehicle;
or
• shift upon or within the commercial vehicle to such an extent that the commercial vehicle’s
stability or maneuverability is adversely affected.
Drivers must inspect the cargo and its securing devices within the first 80 kilometres after beginning a
trip. Drivers must re-inspect cargo when any one of the following occurs:
• change of duty status (e.g. from “driving" to “on-duty not driving”);
• after driving for 3 hours; or
• after driving 240 kilometres.
An employee or driver will not use any vehicle to transport goods unless;
• the vehicle is constructed to carry the goods, and
• there is equipment on the vehicle or attached to the vehicle that is capable of securing the
goods to ensure the vehicle can be operated safely when loaded without danger of turning
over the vehicle or the load shifting, swaying, blowing off, falling off, leaking or otherwise
escaping.
Drivers are not permitted to transport any cargo unless it is properly secured. For more detailed
information, refer to the company cargo securement training program.
FUELLING
Before fuelling, the driver must:
• shut off engine;
• not smoke;
• check for fuel leaks;
• not overfill the tank;
• not leave nozzle unattended; and
• replace filler cap when finished fuelling.
Page 3 of 33
PROPER RECORD COMPLETION

Valard Construction will train staff in hours of service records, bill of lading/manifests, dangerous goods
records, weigh slips, and other documents that are required to be completed by law. A record will be
maintained on each driver’s file showing that the employee has this knowledge or any training received.
The company will evaluate each type of record for proper completion.
1. Hours of Service Records
Refer to the following resources for more information on federal hours of service requirements:
Commercial Vehicle Drivers Hours of Service Regulations (SOR/2005-313)
Reference Guide for Hours of Service Training Development
Module 7 of the Commercial Vehicle Safety Compliance in Alberta manual
Daily Log Completion

Unless exempted by law, all authorized drivers must complete daily logs for every calendar day
they are employed by the company. The following information provides a brief summary for
what must be included in a daily log:
At the beginning of each day:
• the start time of day if different than midnight, the name of the driver and, if the driver is a
member of a team of drivers, the names of the co-drivers;
• in the case of a driver who is not driving under the provisions of an oil well service permit,
the cycle that the driver is following;
• the commercial vehicle licence plates or unit numbers;
• the odometer reading of each of the commercial vehicles operated by the driver;
• the names and the addresses of the home terminal and the principal place of business of
every motor carrier by whom the driver was employed or otherwise engaged during that day;
• in the “Remarks” section of the daily log, if the motor carrier or driver was not required to
keep a daily log immediately before the beginning of the day, the number of hours of off-duty
time and on-duty time that were accumulated by the driver each day during the 14 days
immediately before the beginning of the day; and
• if applicable, a declaration in the “Remarks” section of the daily log that states that the driver
is deferring off-duty time under section 16 and that clearly indicates whether the driver is
driving under day one or day two of that time.
Page 4 of 33
During the course of the day:

• the hours in each duty status during the day covered by the daily log, in accordance with
Schedule 2, and the location of the driver each time their duty status changes, as that
information becomes known.
At the end of each day:
• the total hours for each duty status and the total distance driven by the driver that day,
excluding the distance driven in respect of the driver’s personal use of the vehicle, as well
as the odometer reading at the end of the day and sign the daily log attesting to the
accuracy of the information recorded in it.
Electronic Daily Logs
Electronic daily logs generated by Electronic Logging Devices (ELDs) may be submitted as long
as they contain the same information in the same format that is required by regulation for a
handwritten daily log. Failing to produce an electronic daily log will be treated the same as
failing to produce a daily log in handwritten format. This includes if the electronic daily log data
is:
• illegible;
• inoperable due to driver error;
• inoperable due to device malfunction, or
• unavailable for any other reason.
For more information, refer to the Electronic Log Policy:

www.transportation.alberta.ca/5610.htm
Retention and Distribution of Log Books

Drivers must forward the original copy of their daily log and supporting documents to their home
terminal within 20 days of the completion of the daily log.
Within 30 days of receiving the daily logs and supporting documents, the company will deposit
these records at the principal place of business and retain all daily logs and supporting
documents in chronological order for each driver for at least 6 months.
Hours of service records will be maintained at the following location:
Valard Construction
#204, 4209 – 99 Street
Edmonton, AB T6E 5V7
Page 5 of 33
Time Records for Drivers Operating within 160 kilometers of the Home Terminal
Authorized drivers are not required to maintain a daily log where ALL of the following conditions
are met:
• Driver/vehicle does not operate beyond 160 kilometers radius of the home terminal;
• Driver returns to home terminal each day to begin a minimum of 8 consecutive hours of off-
duty time;
• The company maintains and retains for a period of 6 months accurate and legible records
showing, for each day the driver’s duty status and elected cycle, the hour at which each duty
status begins and ends and the total number of hours spent in each status;
• The driver is not driving under a permit issued under the Commercial Vehicle Drivers’ Hours
of Service Regulation.
When a driver was not required to keep a daily log before the beginning of the day (radius
operation), the driver shall in the “remarks” section of the daily log record the number of hours of
off-duty time and on-duty time that was accumulated by the driver for each day during the 14
days immediately before the beginning of the day.
2. Shipping Documents
Bills of Lading
Where applicable, a Bill of Lading shall be identified by a numerical code or other means of
identification and shall set out at least the following:
• name and mailing address of the consignor;
• date of the consignment;
• point of origin of the shipment;
• name of the originating carrier;
• names of connecting carriers, if any;
• name and mailing address of the consignee;
• destination of the shipment;
• particulars of the goods comprising the shipment, including weight and description;
• a space for the signature of the consignor or his agent;
• a provision stipulating whether the goods are received in apparent good order and condition;
• a space in which to show the declared value of the shipment;
• where charges are to be prepaid or collected;
• a space in which to indicate whether the charges are prepaid or collect;
Page 6 of 33
• a space in which to show whether the C.O.D. fee is prepaid or collect;

• a space in which to show the amount to be collected by the carrier on a C.O.D. shipment;
• a space in which to note any special agreement between the consignor and the carrier;
• a statement in conspicuous form indicating that the carrier’s liability is limited by a term or
condition of the applicable schedule of rates or by other agreement, if such a limitation
exists.
The person who is the originating carrier of the goods being shipped shall, on the bill of lading
issued for those goods:
• acknowledge receipt of the goods by signing the bill of lading, and
• indicate the condition of the goods and give details of any defect.
Waybills
Instead of carrying a bill of lading for the goods transported, the company may carry a waybill
for the goods issued by the consignor or carrier. A waybill shall be identified by the numerical
code or other means of identification set out on the bill of lading and set forth at least the
following:
• particulars of the goods carried on the vehicle;
• name and mailing address of the consignor;
• point of origin of the shipment;
• name and mailing address of the consignee;
• destination of the shipment;
• names of connecting carriers, if any; • whether the charges are prepaid or collect;
• date of the consignment.
Note: See Section 2 of the Bill Of Lading and Conditions of Carriage Regulation (AR 313/2002)
for exemptions (e.g. owner’s own goods).
Dangerous Goods Shipping Documents
If Valard transports Dangerous Goods, a Dangerous Goods Shipping Document shall contain,
at minimum, the following information:
• Consignor’s name and address in Canada;
• Date of shipment;
• Description of the goods: (in the following order)
1. UN number (e.g. UN1230);
2. Dangerous goods shipping name (e.g. Methanol);
3. Primary class and subsidiary class (e.g. 3(6.1));
Page 7 of 33
4. If applicable, the packing group in roman numerals (e.g. I, II or III) or the compatibility
group letter for explosives;
5. If applicable, the words "toxic by inhalation" or "toxic – inhalation hazard" for dangerous
goods subject to Special Provision 23 (Class 6.1, PGI, toxic due to inhalation);
• The quantity in metric measurement (e.g. kg or L) for transport originating in Canada;
• The “24-hour number” of a person who can provide technical information on the dangerous
goods; and
• The consignor’s certification.
In some cases, more information may need to be included, such as:
• The number of small means of containment (e.g. volume of 450 L or less) that require
labels;
• The technical name or the statement “not odorized”;
• The Emergency Response Assistance Plan (ERAP) number and its activating telephone
number; Note: An ERAP is only required for certain dangerous goods in certain quantities.
To learn more about ERAP, please consult Part 7 of the TDG Regulations.
• The flash point, if the product is a Class 3 flammable liquid and is being transported on a
ship; (e.g. gasoline, diesel, etc.);
• Special instructions, such as the control and emergency control temperatures of Classes 4.1
and 5.2; and
• The number of any applicable Transport Canada Equivalency Certificates.
Shipping documents must be carried within the driver’s reach and, when the driver leaves the
cab, the shipping documents must be left on the driver’s seat, in a pocket on the driver’s door or
in an obvious place in the cab. If the vehicle is left in a supervised area, a copy of the shipping
document must be left with the person in charge.
Note: There may be exemptions to regulations. Refer to Part 3 of the Transportation of
Dangerous Goods Regulations (SOR/2001–286).
For more information refer to the web site: www.transportation.alberta.ca and/or contact the
Dangerous Goods Coordination and Information Centre at 800-272-9600 for further information
on bulletins, permitting and general information.
Weigh Slips
Valard Construction will obtain accurate vehicle weights and weigh slips for vehicles that are
required to be weighed under the Bill Of Lading and Conditions of Carriage Regulation (AR
313/2002).
Page 8 of 33
COMPLIANCE WITH THE LAW
SAFETY LAWS
Drivers operating vehicles owned by Valard Construction will comply with all transportation safety
laws as required. The Commercial Vehicle Certificate and Insurance Regulation (AR 314/2002)
identifies that:
“safety laws” means, as the context requires,
i) the Act (Traffic Safety Act) and regulations made under the Act;
ii) the Dangerous Goods Transportation and Handling Act and the regulations made under that
Act;
iii) the laws of a jurisdiction outside Alberta, respecting the same, similar or equivalent subjects as
those regulated or controlled by the laws referred to in sub clauses (i) and (ii).
SAFE VEHICLES
Vehicle Condition
Drivers will not operate and Valard will not permit a person to operate a commercial vehicle if the
vehicle or any equipment related to the commercial vehicle is in a condition likely to cause danger to
persons or property.
Page 9 of 33
USE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT
USE OF WARNING DEVICES

During the night time a commercial vehicle will not be stationary on a highway outside the limits of an
urban area unless;
• the hazard lights are alight if functional; and
• advanced warning triangles are placed without delay on the highway in line with the commercial
vehicle at a distance of approximately 30 metres behind and in front of the commercial vehicle.
When there is insufficient light or conditions where objects are not clearly discernable at 150 metres,
commercial vehicles will not be stationary outside of the limits of an urban area unless;
• the hazard lights are alight if functional, and
During the day time a person will not permit a commercial vehicle to be stationary on a highway outside
the limits of an urban area unless;
• the hazard lights are alight if functional, and
Warning triangles and hazard lights are used to make other traffic aware of parked commercial
vehicles.
USE OF FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
If the need to use a fire extinguisher arises:
Remember the word PASS
• Pull - Pull the safety pin by breaking the seal;
• Aim – Aim the nozzle, horn or hose at the base of the fire;
• Squeeze - Squeeze the handle;
• Sweep – Sweep from side to side moving carefully toward the fire keep the extinguisher aimed at
the base of the flame and sweep back and forth until the flames appear to be out.
Safety Instructions
• remove the fire extinguisher from its bracket;
• approach the fire from upwind if possible;
• hold the extinguisher in an upright position;
• continue to use until the fire is out and the fire extinguisher is empty;
Page 10 of 33
• replace the safety pin and return it to your compartment;

• have extinguisher recharged immediately or replaced before your next run;
• report use of fire extinguisher to supervisor.
USE OF PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)

Valard Construction will ensure all employees are educated on the proper use of all issued PPE (e.g.
safety glasses, hard hats, breathing apparatus, etc.).
Note: Reference Occupational Health and Safety Act for specific instructions and the use of PPE.
This legislation may also require additional components to be covered in the safety program. The
Occupational Health and Safety Act is available online at: http://work.alberta.ca/occupational-health-
safety/307.html.
Page 11 of 33
DRIVER CONDUCT AND DISCIPLINE

DRIVER CONDUCT
Drivers must practice good conduct by keeping the following policies in mind:
• safely operate company vehicles on the highway with a professional attitude and obey posted
speed limits;
• drive in a defensive manner, be aware of surroundings and look ahead. Leave a safe distance
between vehicles and be a professional and courteous driver;
• keep the vehicle under control at all times and reduce speed due to changes in road, weather and
traffic conditions;
• be prepared to avoid collision producing situations by practicing and promoting safe driving skills;
• report all significant events on road to the Safety Advisor, including violations, near misses, etc.
DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURES (STEPS)
All disciplinary steps taken by Valard Construction will be progressive in nature. All actions taken,
including verbal warnings, will be documented. Disciplinary action may be taken with employees for
any:
• regulatory violations (identified on the Carrier Profile, driver’s abstract or through internal
evaluations/audits).
• significant company policy violations (identified through internal audits, direct observation, reports
from other staff, and reports from the public/customers).
As appropriate, disciplinary action may include:
• written warnings;
• suspension; or
• termination.
The disciplinary process may also require corrective measures, such as re-training. For severe
violations that pose a significant risk to public safety, Valard may take disciplinary action at any stage
based on the severity of the violation.
Where any form of disciplinary action is taken against a driver, this action must be documented and
recorded in the driver’s file.
Page 12 of 33
DRIVER QUALIFICATIONS
DRIVER QUALIFICATIONS
When hiring new drivers, Valard Construction will ensure the driver is qualified for the job by reviewing
their driver abstract. By reviewing the commercial driver abstract, the company will ensure the driver
has a valid operator’s licence for the class of vehicle they will be operating. The company will also
examine the driver’s history to determine whether they are qualified to operate a commercial vehicle
safely.
When hiring new drivers, Valard may also:
• conduct a personal interview to evaluate attitude, driving skills and professionalism;
• contact references and past employers;
• conduct a road test to include: use of two and four lane highways, city driving, and yard backing
and parking, shifting, turning, mirror usage, speed and general awareness;
• evaluate the skills and knowledge of a driver by conducting a written exam;
• address any special training requirements (e.g. dangerous goods, long combination vehicle, etc.);
• implement a maximum abstract point threshold (e.g. specify maximum demerit points allowed within
a three year period and do not hire if exceeded);
• implement a maximum collision threshold (e.g. consider if your threshold will include preventable
collisions only or all collisions. Do not hire the applicant if the threshold is exceeded);
• implement a policy addressing procedures for suspended licence.
• implement a policy requiring drivers to immediately report changes of their Driver's Licence status
to their employer (for example, suspensions or medical requirements/conditions).
Page 13 of 33
DRIVER EVALUATIONS
The company will perform written driver evaluations according to the intervals in the chart below:
Driver Evaluation
Type Evaluation Interval Comments
Complete written driver evaluation

New Hire Evaluate on hire
form and place on driver file.
Complete written driver evaluation
Probationary form and ensure driver has
3 Months
Driver corrected any issues identified in
evaluation conducted at hire.
Monthly Complete written driver
Non-compliant evaluations until satisfied the
Driver driver understands and can
comply with requirements.
Yearly Complete written driver evaluation
Normal Driver
form and place on driver file.
Drivers will be evaluated for skills involving: driving in traffic, backing up, connecting a trailer, fuelling,
driving in the mountains, driving defensively, conducting daily Trip Inspections, and identifying and
reporting defects to the carrier. Valard maintains an ongoing program for evaluating employees’ driving
skills using:
• road tests (see Evaluation form on the next page);

• internal audits of records (logbooks, time records, etc.).
Drivers may also be required to take written exams to test driver skills and knowledge of (as
applicable):
• hours of service;
• cargo securement;
• dangerous goods;
• daily trip inspections;
• other:
Driver Evaluation results will be retained on each driver’s file. A sample driver evaluation form is
attached.
Page 14 of 33
DRIVER EVALUATION
Carrier Name: Current Class of Operator’s Licence
1 2 3 4 5
Driver Name: Date: Signature of Driver: Date:
DRIVER ACTIONS Performance Assessment DRIVER ACTIONS Performance Assessment

Good Fair Poor Good Fair Poor
A. CONTROLS E. TRAFFIC LIGHTS / SIGNS
1. Knowledge and/or use of equipment 1. Fails to anticipate / observe
2. One-handed steering – hand position 2. Judgment – green / amber / red
3. Steering Control – wanders / recovery 3. Judgment – stop / yield / other
4. Shifts too soon / late / lugs
5. Improper use of gears / grinds F. RIGHT-OF-WAY
6. Improper use of clutch / stalls/ coasts 1. Uncertain / hesitant
7. Improper use of brake / park brake 2. Fails to assume own right of way
8. Improper use of accelerator 3. Aggressive / Judgment
9. Signals too soon / late
10. Signals – improper / not cancelled/none G. SPEED
1. Too fast for conditions
B. PARKING / STARTING / BACKING 2. Too slow for conditions
1. Fails to set brake / gear
2. Observation – backing / starting H. BACKUP / TURN AROUND
3. Judgment – vehicle / wheels / angle 1. Poor observation – before / during
5. Rolls back 2. Judgment of distance / position
6. Unsure / too slow
C. LANE DRIVING / CHANGING / POSITION I. ROAD TEST DISQUALIFICATION

1. Fails to check mirror 1. Overall poor performance
2. Fails to check blind spot / late 2. Right of way violation – vehicle /

pedestrian
Page 15 of 33
3. Uncertain / hesitant 3. Traffic light violation
4. Road position – straddles lane 4. Stop sign violation
5. Too close / far – stop / pass / follow 5. Speeding violation
6. Improper lane change / late / slow 6. Other violation
7. Fails to observe signs / conditions 7. Climbs over curb
8. Lacks caution at uncontrolled

intersection
D. INTERSECTIONS / TURNS / RR 9. Obstructs traffic
1. Block crosswalk / intersection / stop line 10. Unable to perform skill maneuver
2. Stops too far back 11. Hits vehicle / object
3. Unnecessary stop 12. Lacks skill and control
4. Fails to leave parking lot 13. Unsafe action
5. Fails to observe conditions / late 14. Trip inspection failure
6. Left turn – cuts corner / turns wide
7. Left turn – wrong lane – before / after J. GENERAL DRIVER KNOWLEDGE
8. Right turn – cuts corner / turns wide 1. Hours of Service
9. Right turn – wrong lane – before / after 2. Trip Inspections
10. Incorrect position – vehicle / wheels 3. Cargo Securement
11. Too fast – before / during 4. Weights and Dimensions
12. Too slow – before / during
TEST ADMINSTRATION INFORMATION: COMMENTS:

Authorized to drive: Yes: No:
Safety Advisors Name: Signature:
Page 16 of 33
DRIVER RECORDS AND RECORD RETENTION

DRIVER FILES
Valard Construction will keep a driver record for every person authorized to operate company vehicles,
including owner(s) and management. These records will include the following information:
• the driver’s completed application form for employment with the registered owner, where applicable
(note: the driver’s resume is considered to be an acceptable application);
• the driver’s employment history for the three years immediately preceding the time the driver started
working for the carrier, where applicable;
• a copy of the driver’s abstract in a form satisfactory to the Registrar when the driver is first hired or
employed, dated within 30 days of the date of employment or hire;
• annual updated copies of the driver’s abstract in a form satisfactory to the Registrar;
• a record of the driver’s convictions of safety laws in the current year and in each of the 4 preceding
years;
• a record of any administrative penalty imposed on the driver under safety laws;
• a record of all collisions involving a motor vehicle operated by the driver that are required to be
reported to a peace officer under any enactment of Alberta or a jurisdiction outside Alberta;
• a record of all training undertaken by a driver related to the operation of a commercial vehicle and
compliance with safety laws;
• a copy of any training certificate issued to the driver, in electronic or paper form, for the period
starting on the date the training certificate is issued and continuing until 2 years after it expires, in
accordance with Part 6.6 of the Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations under the
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992; and
• a copy of a current medical certificate for all Class 1, 2 or 4 licences and Class 3 or 5 with a licence
endorsement code “C” requiring a periodic medical. If medical certificate is not presented or
available, retain a copy of valid driver licence, a Commercial Driver’s Abstract or a note from the
medical doctor in lieu of the medical certificate.
DRIVER RECORD RETENTION
Valard Construction will keep all driver files at the principal place of business in Alberta. These records
will be:
• retained for at least five years from the date they are created, established or received (unless
specified otherwise by specific legislation); and
• available for inspection by a peace officer during the carrier’s regular business hours.
Page 17 of 33
EMPLOYEE TRAINING
TRAINING AREAS
Valard Construction will ensure all drivers have met training requirements prior to operating company
vehicles. This training must be conducted to increase knowledge, reduce violations and reduce the
likelihood of collisions.
All employees will receive training in the following subjects, as applicable:
• company safety program;
• safe vehicle operation;
• company maintenance program;
• Traffic Safety Act and relevant transportation safety laws including;
• Hours of service;
• Daily trip inspections;
• Weights and dimensions;
• Cargo securement; and
• Other regulations, as applicable to company operations.
• the Dangerous Goods Transportation and Handling Act and regulations made under that Act;
• any other laws (e.g. Occupational Health and Safety) or laws of another jurisdiction if operating
outside of Alberta.
Employees will be trained: ☐ In House ☐ By an External Organization ☐ Both
All drivers will have records of training in their file (e.g. training certificates or other records
showing the time, date and type of training). A copy of applicable legislation will be made available
for all staff (e.g. web site access, hard copy, or disk).
Note: Training information is available in the Commercial Vehicle Safety Compliance in Alberta
education manual and in the Reference Guide for Hours of Service Training Development
ORIENTATION
All new hires will receive training on Valard’s safety and maintenance policies. Orientation must be
completed before drivers drive to ensure they know the laws that apply on that first trip. New
employees will also receive training in the following subjects upon hire:
Page 18 of 33
X Hours of Service
X Daily Trip Inspections
X Load Securement
ONGOING TRAINING
Employees will receive ongoing training throughout their employment in the following subjects:
• hours of service (logbooks and/or time records) – Valard will assess the need for additional training
by conducting daily and periodic internal audits of:
o driver's hours of service records to ensure documents are not falsified;
o daily log completion to ensure they meet the legislated requirements (form and
manner); and o other fatigue related issues, such as, operating beyond the legislated
hours of service limits, inadequate rest or off duty periods, etc.
• daily trip inspections – Valard will provide ongoing training through spot checks and monitoring of
vehicle defects.
• dimensions – dimensions and permits must be checked before leaving the yard.
• load securement – ongoing training and monitoring of compliance with Cargo National Safety Code
Standard 10 through direct spot checks and monitoring the Carrier Profile.
• other regulations, as applicable to company operations.
All employees will be evaluated on a regular basis to ensure they understand minimum transportation
safety requirements. If a knowledge gap is identified in a driver evaluation, Valard will ensure that the
driver is trained as necessary. Employees may also be subject to additional training throughout the
year when:
• Regulations or policies concerning any of the subjects above have changed;
• An employee has demonstrated non-compliance in one of the above areas; or
• An employee has indicated they do not understand the minimum transportation safety
requirements.
Valardwill ensure all employees are evaluated on their knowledge of the information received during
training.
Page 19 of 33
MONITORING HOURS OF SERVICE COMPLIANCE

Valard Construction will monitor the compliance of each driver with the Commercial Vehicle Drivers
Hours of Service Regulations (SOR/2005-313). Valard has a responsibility to monitor the compliance of
drivers’ hours of service records. The purpose of monitoring these records is to prevent collisions
involving fatigued driving. During the monitoring process, the company will address all fatigue-related
violations found in these records. Hours of service violations considered to be “fatigue-related” include:
• False records (identified using independent supporting documents);
• More than one record for each day;
• Missing records (every day must be accounted for);
• Records not current to the last change of duty status;
• Driving over any hour limits specified in regulation;
• Drivers not meeting off-duty requirements or taking time breaks as required by regulation;
• Using the 160 kilometer radius exemption when the driver does not meet all specified criteria;
• Failing to meet any condition of a permit related to hours of service.
The process used to monitor drivers for compliance must produce measureable results. The goal of the
company is to work towards achieving a Fatigue Violation Rate of 0% (i.e. no fatigue-related violations
by any drivers).
Valard will adopt the following approach when reviewing driver records for hours of service violations:
• Document written policies in the safety program that address compliance requirements;
• Assign a person to be responsible for monitoring, taking remedial action when violations are found,
etc.
• This person should also be responsible for ensuring they and other applicable employees have the
necessary skills and knowledge to accurately analyze hours of service records;
• Verify that all authorized drivers have a record for every calendar day (including days off and
holidays);
• Verify all authorized drivers understand and apply the appropriate hours of service regulations;
• Check all authorized drivers for form and manner violations for every day. This includes checking
for name, address, date, daily hour totals, and odometer readings on the record;
• Check all authorized drivers for fatigue-related violations (see list of fatigue violations above);
• Use independent supporting documents (that cannot be created or modified by the driver) to verify
the accuracy of each driver’s records. Supporting documents may include fuel receipts, bills of
lading with shipping times, GPS records, or meal/hotel receipts, toll receipts, etc.
Page 20 of 33
• Check recently trained drivers and drivers with a history of violations more often. Regularly check
these drivers until the company is satisfied they understand and apply the appropriate hours of
service requirements.
• When a new driver is hired, obtain hours of service records from their previous employer. If this is
not possible, then obtain a signed statement from the driver that specifies their total on-duty and off-
duty hours for each of the previous 14 days prior to authorizing them to drive.
• Where an Electronic Onboard Recording Device (EOBR) is used in place of a hardcopy log, verify
that the driver’s on-duty and off-duty hours are accurate. For example, ensure that the EOBR has
not recorded loading or unloading time as “off-duty” time.
• When violations are identified in a driver’s records, take appropriate remedial action. All action(s)
taken must be documented in the driver’s file and must include the date the violation was identified
and date issue was addressed.
• Prepare a monthly report of your findings and any corrective action(s) taken. Retain all reports for
the current year and the preceding 4 years. The report should include a calculation of each driver’s
Fatigue Violation Rate (FVR) and of the company’s overall FVR using the formula below:
FVR = Number of days with 1 or more fatigue-related violations x

100% Total number of days checked
• The report should also include a calculation of every driver’s Form and Manner Violation Rate
(FMVR) using the formula below:
FMVR = Number of days with 1 or more form and manner violations x

100% Total number of days checked
• It is recommended that carriers with one to ten drivers check every driver at least once a month for
hours of service violations.
• Carriers with more than ten drivers should check at least ten drivers plus 10 per cent of the
remaining drivers on a monthly basis. For example, a carrier with 30 drivers would check 10 drivers
plus 10 per cent of the remaining 20 drivers, for a total of 12 drivers each month. In a larger
company, every driver should be checked for hours of service compliance at least once annually.
NOTE: A “driver” includes any person authorized to operate an NSC vehicle registered to the carrier.
This includes full or part time employees, volunteers, mechanics, salespeople, dispatchers, office staff,
owners, managers, supervisors, etc.
For more information about hours of service monitoring requirements, visit the Alberta Transportation
website at: www.transportation.alberta.ca/5610.htm.
Page 21 of 33
OVERVIEW
All NSC commercial vehicles (commercial vehicle registered solely or in combination for more than 4,500
kilograms including but not limited to trucks, truck tractors, trailers, converter dollies, jeeps and boosters)
registered to the company are required to comply with the company's maintenance and inspection
program policies and procedures, including:
• lease operators that have their vehicles registered Valard; or
• if lease operators follow their own maintenance program, then they must;
• provide a copy of the lessee’s maintenance and inspection program that meets the minimum
regulatory requirements;
o the registered owner must document that the maintenance and inspection program is
“acceptable”;
o the registered owner must ensure the lease operator is following the maintenance and
inspection program.
The preventive maintenance and inspection program will address the following areas:
• daily trip inspections;
• repairs;
• routine scheduled maintenance;
• annual CVIP inspections;
• recordkeeping of all inspections, repairs, and routine maintenance.
A person shall not operate or permit another person to operate a commercial vehicle if the vehicle or any
equipment related to the commercial vehicle is in a condition likely to cause danger to persons or property.
It is illegal to operate a vehicle on a highway with any defect that is a violation under any
legislation.
Valard’s written maintenance and inspection program will be kept at the company’s principal place of
business in Alberta. Copies of the maintenance and inspection program will be available at each location
of the carrier where the maintenance and inspection of the carrier’s commercial vehicles is carried out. A
copy of the program shall be readily accessible to employees of the carriers who carry out the
maintenance and inspection program.
DESIGNATION OF MAINTENANCE OFFICER
The person is responsible for maintaining and implementing this preventative maintenance program:
Name: Mr. Lynn Torgerson Title: Fleet Manager
Ms. Bev Whittaker Fleet Administrator
Phone: (780) 980-5456 Email: ltorgerson@valard.com
bwhittaker@valard.com
Page 22 of 33
SCHEDULED VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

Valard Construction will routinely inspect applicable vehicle components as listed in:
• Alberta's Vehicle Inspection Regulation (AR 211/2006),
• Schedule 2 of Alberta’s Commercial Vehicle Safety Regulation (AR 121/2009), and
• Schedule 1 of NSC Standard 13 Part 2 (daily trip inspection).
Any component identified as being in need of repair and/or maintenance will be serviced as required.
The records documenting the maintenance will be retained on the appropriate vehicle file. Valard will
conduct regular and continuous maintenance inspections and repairs in accordance with the following
intervals:
Inspection Interval
Vehicle
Inspection Type (Kilometres, Time or Comments
Type
Hours)
Trucks, Complete written Daily Trip
Daily Trip Tractors, Inspection form if required. Report
Every 24 hours
Inspection: Trailers all defects and document all
repairs.
500 Hours
Trucks
Lubrication Interval
(Oil changes and
Tractors 500 Hours
greasing)
Trailers Monthly
500 Hours
Trucks
Scheduled
Maintenance Tractors 500 Hours
Inspection
Trailers Monthly
“CVIP” Inspection: All Types Annually Required every 12 months before

(Truck, next CVIP expires - to be
Tractor, completed by a Certified CVIP
Trailer) Station.
Note: Only fill in the above chart for vehicle types that are registered to the company. For example, if the
company does not have trailers registered; do not fill in intervals for trailers.
Page 23 of 33
DAILY TRIP INSPECTIONS

NATIONAL SAFETY CODE (NSC) STANDARD 13
Valard Construction will ensure that:
• a copy of Schedule 1 is located in each commercial vehicle. Drivers shall produce the Schedule when
requested by a peace officer.
• a daily trip inspection is valid for a maximum of 24 hours from the time recorded on the trip inspection
report. Vehicle components will be inspected as required by Section 10(4)(b) of Alberta’s Commercial
Vehicle Safety Regulation (AR121/2009). The daily inspection must include all components as
specified in the list of items in Schedule 1 of NSC Standard 13 Part 2.
• any of the components that are routinely inspected may be added to the daily trip inspection and any
components that are not applicable to the vehicle may be deleted from the daily trip inspection.
COMPLETION OF THE DAILY TRIP INSPECTION REPORT
Drivers conducting a daily trip inspection will prepare a trip inspection report including the following
information:
• the licence plate, identification number or unit number,
• the odometer or hub meter at the time of inspection,
• the name of the carrier operating the commercial vehicle,
• the name of the municipality or location on the highway where the inspection was conducted and the
time and date that the report was made,
• any defect related to the operation of any item required to be inspected or that no defect was detected,
• the name of the person who inspected the vehicle and a statement signed by that person stating that
the vehicle has been inspected in accordance with section 10 of the Commercial Vehicle Safety
Regulation (AR 121/2009)
• the name and signature of the person making the report.
Note: A sample trip inspection report is attached. Drivers may use this report or Valard may attach a
different report for them to use.
DEFECTS OBSERVED DURING OPERATION OF THE VEHICLE

If a driver observes any safety defects as specified in Schedules 1 or 2 of NSC Standard 13 while driving
the vehicle, the driver will record the defects in the attached trip inspection report or in a written
document and report those defects to the company as required.
Drivers will produce this trip inspection report or other document approved by Valard when requested by
a peace officer.
Page 24 of 33
DISTRIBUTION AND RETENTION OF TRIP INSPECTION REPORTS

• The person who completed the trip inspection report will forward that report to their home terminal
within 20 days of completion of the report;
• Valard is responsible for ensuring the trip inspection report is submitted as required. That report must
be maintained at the principal place of business within 30 days of receiving the report; and
• The original report will be retained in chronological order by Valard for the month it was created and an
additional 6 months.
REQUIREMENT TO REPAIR, CORRECT AND REPORT DEFECTS
• Drivers will not drive a commercial vehicle with any uncorrected or unrepaired major defect (see
Schedule 1 of NSC Standard 13 part 2 for a description of a major defect);
• Anyone conducting a daily trip inspection is required to document any defects on the written trip
inspection report;
• Valard Construction will certify on the report that the defect has been repaired/corrected or certify on
the report the repair/correction is unnecessary;
• If a driver or person authorized by Valard believes or suspects there is a safety defect in the
commercial vehicle, they shall report the safety defect to the carrier;
o without delay if the defect is a major defect,
o or in a timely manner but not later that the next required daily trip inspection in all other cases.
Page 25 of 33
NSC STANDARD 13 PART
2 Schedule 1 – Truck, Tractor &
Trailers
Application:
This schedule applies to trucks, tractors and trailers or combinations thereof exceeding a registered gross vehicle
weight of 4500 kg.
1. Air Brake System
Defect(s) Major Defect(s)

• Audible air leak. • Pushrod stroke of any brake exceeds the
• Slow air pressure build-up rate. adjustment limit.
• Air loss rate exceeds prescribed limit.
• Inoperative towing vehicle (tractor) protection
system.
• Low air warning system fails or system is
activated.
• Inoperative service, parking or emergency brake.
2. Cab

• Occupant compartment door fails to open. • Any cab or sleeper door fails to close securely.
3. Cargo Securement

• Insecure or improper load covering (e.g. wrong • Insecure cargo.
type or flapping in the wind). • Absence, failure, malfunction or deterioration of
required cargo securement device or load
covering.
4. Coupling Devices

• Coupler or mounting has loose or missing • Coupler is insecure or movement exceeds
fastener. prescribed limit.
• Coupling or locking mechanism is damaged or
fails to lock.
• Defective, incorrect or missing safety
chain/cable.
5. Dangerous Goods
Major Defect(s)
• Dangerous goods requirements not met.
Page 26 of 33
6. Driver Controls
Defect(s)
• Accelerator pedal, clutch, gauges, audible
and visual indicators or instruments fail to
function properly.
7. Driver Seat

•Seat is damaged or fails to remain in set • Seatbelt or tether belt is insecure, missing or
position. malfunctions.
8. Electric Brake System

• Loose or insecure wiring or electrical • Inoperative breakaway device.
connection. • Inoperative brake.
9. Emergency Equipment & Safety Devices

Defect(s)
• Emergency equipment is missing, damaged or
defective.
10. Exhaust System
• Exhaust leak. • Leak that causes exhaust gas to enter the occupant
compartment.
11. Frame and Cargo Body
• Damaged frame or cargo body. • Visibly shifted, cracked, collapsing or sagging frame
member(s).
12. Fuel System
• Missing fuel tank cap. • Insecure fuel tank.
• Dripping fuel leak.
13. General
Major Defect(s)
• Serious damage or deterioration that is noticeable
and may affect the vehicle’s safe operation.
Page 27 of 33
14. Glass and Mirrors
Defect(s)
• Required mirror or window glass fails to
provide the required view to the driver as a
result of being cracked, broken, damaged,
missing or maladjusted.
• Required mirror or glass has broken or
damaged attachments onto vehicle body.
15. Heater/Defroster

• Control or system failure. • Defroster fails to provide unobstructed view
through the windshield.
16. Horn
Defect(s)
• Vehicle has no operative horn.
17. Hydraulic Brake System
• Brake fluid level is below indicated minimum • Parking brake is inoperative
level. • Brake boost or power assist is inoperative.
• Brake fluid leak.
• Brake pedal fade or insufficient brake pedal
reserve.
• Activated (other than ABS) warning device.
• Brake fluid reservoir is less than ¼ full.
18. Lamps and Reflectors
• Required lamp does not function as intended. When lamps are required:
• Required reflector is missing or partially • Failure of both low-beam headlamps.
missing. • Failure of both rearmost tail lamps.
At all times:
• Failure of a rearmost turn-indicator lamp.

• Failure of both rearmost brake lamps.
19. Steering
• Steering wheel lash (free-play) is greater than • Steering wheel is insecure, or does not respond
normal. normally.
• Steering wheel lash (free-play) exceeds required
limit.
Page 28 of 33
20. Suspension System
• Air leak in air suspension system. 1
• Broken spring leaf. • Damaged or deflated air bag.

• Suspension fastener is loose, missing or • Cracked or broken main spring leaf or more than
broken. one broken spring leaf.
• Part of spring leaf or suspension is missing,
shifted out of place or in contact with another
vehicle component.
• Loose U-bolt.
_____
1
patched, cut, bruised, cracked to braid, mounted
insecurely.
21. Tires
• Damaged tread or sidewall of tire. • Flat tire.
• Tire leaking (if leak can be felt or heard, tire is • Tire tread depth is less than wear limit.
to be treated as flat). • Tire is in contact with another tire or any vehicle
component other than mud-flap.
• Tire is marked “Not for highway use”.
• Tire has exposed cords in the tread or outer side
wall area.
22. Wheels, Hubs and Fasteners

• Hub oil below minimum level. (When fitted • Wheel has loose, missing or ineffective fastener.
with sight glass.)
• Damaged, cracked or broken wheel, rim or
• Leaking wheel seal. attaching part.
• Evidence of imminent wheel, hub or bearing
failure
23. Windshield Wiper/Washer
• Control or system malfunction. When necessary for prevailing weather condition.
• Wiper blade damaged, missing or fails to • Wiper or washer fails to adequately clear driver’s
adequately clear driver’s field of vision. field of vision in area swept by driver’s side wiper.
Page 29 of 33
TRUCK/TRAILER TRIP INSPECTION REPORT
Carrier Name: NSC Number:
☐ Pre-Trip Time of Inspection: Date of Inspection: Location of Inspection:

☐ Post-Trip
Odometer Reading: Vehicle Plate or Unit Number: Trailer Plate or Unit Number:
Inspector/Driver Name: Inspector/Driver Signature:

☐ No Defects Found
When item inspected, check “I” column. If defect identified during inspection, check “RR” (requires repair) column.
I RR Item Inspected I RR Item Inspected
Air Brake System Glass and Mirrors
Cab Components / Doors Heater/Defroster
Cargo Securement Horn
Coupling Devices Hydraulic Brake System
Dangerous Goods Inspection Decals
Driver Controls Lights and Reflectors
Driver Seat / Seatbelts Mud flaps and Fenders
Electric Brake System Spare Fuses / Bulbs / Lights
Emergency Equipment and Safety Devices Steering
Engine Fluid Levels Suspension System
Engine Components Tires
Exhaust System Tire Chains / Hanger
Frame and Cargo Body Tools
Fuel System Unit Documents
Exhaust System Wheels, Hubs and Fasteners
General Windshield Wipers/Washer
Other: __________________________________________________________________________
Details of defect(s) detected at any other time(s)
Page 30 of 33
Certification of Repairs Completed
☐ Above defects repaired ☐ Above defects do not affect safe operation of vehicle, repair unnecessary
Name of person inspecting: Signature of person inspection: Date and time:
Repairman Name (if applicable): Repairman Signature (if Date and time:
applicable):
Page 31 of 33
RECORD KEEPING
VEHICLE FILES
Valard Construction will maintain vehicle files to ensure that all vehicles are adequately maintained in a
satisfactory mechanical condition. Each commercial vehicle registered to Valard will have a vehicle file
that includes the following information:
1. Identification of the vehicle, including
• a unit number, the manufacturer’s serial number or a similar identifying mark,
• the make of the vehicle, and
• the year of manufacture.
2. A record of the inspection of the vehicle under the Vehicle Inspection Regulation (AR 211/2006), and
repairs, lubrication and maintenance for the vehicle, including
• the nature of the inspection or work performed on the vehicle, and
• the date on which that inspection or work took place and the odometer or hubometer reading on
the vehicle at that time;
3. Notices of defect received from the vehicle manufacturer and the corrective work done on the vehicle
in relation to those notices;
4. Trip inspection reports prepared under Section 12 of Alberta’s Commercial Vehicle Safety Regulation.
5. Unless otherwise authorized through a permit, we shall maintain the records at our principal place of
business.
Valard will ensure that the records required to be maintained under this section are true, accurate and
legible.
RECORD RETENTION
Valard Construction will retain all trip inspection reports for the month they are created and an additional 6
months. The other records identified above will be retained for the year they are created and an additional
4 years. All records will be kept for 6 months after the vehicle is retired or disposed of. These records may
be maintained in electronic or hardcopy format as long as they can be readily produced to a peace officer
upon request.
The person conducting the trip inspection will certify that any major defect has been repaired/corrected
or certifies on the report that repair/correction is unnecessary; a driver shall not drive or be permitted to
drive until all major defects have been repaired.
Page 32 of 33
DECLARATION OF COMMITMENT TO TRANSPORTATION SAFETY
X I/we, the company’s authorized representative(s), are committed to ensuring all employees are aware
of and dedicated to following transportation safety laws as outlined in this safety and maintenance
program. I/we are committed to ensuring the designated safety officer has the necessary resources to
ensure the implementation of this program.
X I/we acknowledge that an audit may be conducted on our operations at any time to measure our
compliance to regulatory requirements. Should deficiencies be identified during the audit, I/we
understand that disciplinary actions may be taken including but not limited to, the issuance of
administrative penalties and the Safety Fitness Rating downgraded.
X I/we certify that the information disclosed is true and accurate. I/we acknowledge that providing false or
misleading information may result in the suspension or cancellation of the Safety Fitness Certificate
and/or vehicle registration. I/we acknowledge that providing false or misleading information may also
results in being charged with offence(s) or administrative penalty(s).
This declaration must include individuals named on the vehicle registration. When vehicle registration
shows a corporate, society or organization name, then the declaration must include the owner(s),
manager(s), or director(s).
Name: Position in Company:

Andrew Felczak Executive Vice President Health and
Safety
Phone: Email: Date:
780-436-9876 afelczak@valard.com July 25, 2016
DESIGNATION OF SAFETY OFFICER
The person responsible for maintaining and implementing this safety and maintenance program
is:
Name: Position in Company:
Andrew Felczak Executive Vice
President Health
and Safety
Phone: Email: Date:
780-436-9876 afelczak@valard.com July 25, 2016
Page 33 of 33
Document Description Environmental Work
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Mar. 12. 2015
26.014 ENVIRONMENTAL WORK PRACTICES

Right of Way Construction Guidelines
Construction traffic shall be restricted to the right-of-way and approved extra workspace
only. If possible, traffic shall be confined to a single trail along the right-of-way.
Construction vehicles and equipment shall be operated at speeds safe for existing roads
and traffic conditions.
Waste generation shall be determined prior to work commencing and appropriate type of
waste containment shall be arranged. Any additional waste that may be generated and
is not the normal waste such as: cut-off sections of pole pieces, pieces of crossarm,
small pieces of wire, empty wire rolls, and discarded wire covers shall be evaluated and
the appropriate number of waste bins be provided on site. This is the responsibility of the
Project Manager and site Construction Manager. The bins shall be clearly labeled as to
what is to be placed in each one. The superintendent shall be responsible to insure bins
are emptied when they are full and arrange for a local waste disposal firm to pick up the
waste when required. On projects where Valard is not the Prime and the client requests
that they be notified of the type of waste generated, the client may have a process in
place for disposal. Valard will adhere to the project’s waste protocol.
Valard Construction shall ensure that access through sensitive areas (i.e., critical wildlife
habitat, erodible soils, recreational sites, historical sites, etc.) is pre-planned in advance
of construction initiation. The number of vehicles and trips in these areas shall be
minimized to reduce or eliminate potential impacts.
All surface disturbances shall be kept to a minimum. Every effort shall be made to
preserve topsoil, and prevent topsoil/subsoil mixing and compaction, loss of organic
matter, and rutting. During the onset of a winter thaw, wet weather, and other saturated
soil conditions, the Field Representative shall have the authority to suspend equipment
travel on the right-of-way to reduce or eliminate impacts. Equipment travel shall resume
only after soils are sufficiently dry or frozen.
Vehicle travel in areas susceptible to poor ground frost conditions or general unstable
soil shall be closely monitored. Re-routes may be necessary to avoid low frost areas or
employ alternate construction procedures such as swamp mats, log corduroy, rip-rap, or
filter fabric. Approval of all re-routes shall be obtained from Valard Construction. All
seasonal road bans shall be respected when and where applicable.
Notification of Concerned Parties

1. Prior to commencement of right-of-way preparation, and construction activities, a
list of contacts within the appropriate agencies shall be made available to Valard
Construction.
2. Valard Construction shall inform the appropriate government agencies of the
proposed project schedule, and any changes to the schedule as soon as
possible (i.e., 48 hours prior to any changes).
3. Leaseholders, owners of registered trap lines, and individuals with similar
land ownership responsibilities shall be notified by registered letter
followed by a personal contact by a Valard employee in advance of right-
of-way preparation.
Page 1 of 14
4. Valard Construction shall notify authorities having jurisdiction over existing rights-
of-way of proposed project activities.
5. Valard Construction shall notify the landowner/leaseholder of any damage to
crops, property, irrigation facilities, contamination or degradation of water, or
injury to livestock caused by the construction activities
Brushing and Clearing

All efforts shall be made to minimize surface disturbance, soil compaction, and loss of
topsoil. In sensitive areas (i.e., steep side slopes, wet muskeg), protection measures
shall be employed to minimize these impacts.
The terrain shall be graded only where necessary and at the approval of the appropriate
governing agency. Changes in grade, excessive cuts, and fills along the right-of-way
shall be minimized as much as possible. Graded materials shall not be pushed or stored
into treed areas. Original contours and surface drainage shall be re-established following
construction. Vegetation removal shall be restricted to areas indicated and delineated by
flagging and/or staking. Trees shall be felled in such a way that they fall within the
clearing boundaries. “Leaners” or felled trees which inadvertently fall into adjacent
undisturbed vegetation shall be either bucked into manageable lengths then removed to
disposal areas on the right-of-way, or flattened to the ground and left. Whichever method
results in the least damage to the surrounding vegetation as instructed by the Forest
Service Officer (or an Environmental Supervisor) will be used.
Merchantable stands of coniferous (i.e., lodgepole pine, white and black spruce), and
deciduous (i.e., aspen) trees shall be salvaged as instructed.
Merchantable timber shall be salvaged using chainsaws, feller bunchers, or other
approved equipment. Locations of merchantable timber are subject to ground-truthing
and confirmation by the landowner.
All merchantable timber shall be cut at ground level with no more than a 15-cm high
stump.
All non-merchantable timber and brush shall be machine cleared with a bulldozer, or KG
blade equipped tractors to achieve clean breaks and restrict root grubbing.
Narrow residual strips of forest cover (i.e., <l0m) shall not be left standing between
existing rights-of-way and parallel easements.
All merchantable timber shall be limbed, topped, and decked with the butt ends facing
the same direction adjacent and perpendicular to the proposed access where possible at
approved decking sites.
Decking sites shall be located at appropriate intervals depending on timber quantity.
Decking sites shall be located on existing clearings wherever possible, or shall be

cleared immediately adjacent to the right-of-way. These decking sites shall not be
located within l00m of any watercourse or water body, and shall be well back from the
crest on any hill requiring grading.
It is permissible that a centrally located access trail be stumped (i.e., root grubbed) and
graded as required. However, general root grubbing shall be avoided, particularly within
2 meters of the edge of the right-of-way in forested areas to prevent root damage to
adjacent trees. Unnecessary traffic, dumping, and storage of materials over the root
zone shall be avoided.
Page 2 of 14
Those sections of the right-of-way subjected to root grabbing shall be stripped of the
organic "duff' layer (i.e., leaf litter, root fragments, sod, burn pile residue) remaining on
the right-of-way following root grubbing to a depth of 15 centimeters. This material shall
be windrowed at both edges of the right-of-way. During clean up, this material shall be
redistributed across the right-of-way to supplement the organic content of the remaining
soil.
Where windrowed snow and/or "duff" material along the edges of the right-of-way
exceeds 75 centimeters in height, 10 meter gaps shall be left at approximately 400 meter
intervals to facilitate movement of wildlife across the right-of-way. If requested by the
trapper, gaps shall also be left at all crossings of active trapper's trails.
Slash (i.e., stumps, tops, and limbs of merchantable timber, and all non-merchantable
timber) shall be piled, and burned with the exception of rollback requirements as
identified by the landowner. Slash shall be pushed into piles off to one side of the
centerline with brush rake attachments to minimize disturbance to ground cover. A 5
meter minimum clearance to the edge of the clearing shall be maintained. Windrowed
piles shall not exceed 20 meters in length and shall be separated by 5 meter firebreaks.
Piles shall not be located within 50 meters of any watercourse or water body.
Water Crossings
Where adequate ice cover has developed at major water crossings, an ice bridge shall
be installed by Valard Construction to support equipment travel, and minimize
disturbance to the banks and bed of the watercourse. The bridge shall be constructed of
water drawn from the stream and/or 'clean" snow ploughed in from adjacent areas.
Portable bridges may be installed as an option to natural ice bridges at the approval of
Valard Construction.
Flow shall not be interrupted or diverted on any watercourse during construction.
All trees shall be felled away from a watercourse.
Trees and debris inadvertently deposited within the high water mark of any watercourse
shall be removed immediately in such a manner as to minimize disturbance to the bed
and bank.
Logs shall not be skidded across any watercourse, unless an adequate ice/snow or
portable bridge is in place.
Burn areas shall not be located within 50 meters of any watercourse.
Slash shall be piled and retained for use in erosion control on steep and moderate
slopes. Locations shall be determined and confirmed through ground-truthing by Valard
Construction and the landowner.
Trees shall be hand cleared with chainsaws to minimize terrain disturbance, and to
preserve compatible trees (e.g., low growing spruce and pine), and shrubs while
removing incompatible trees (e.g., aspen and birch) within 30m of any watercourse or
water body, or on steep and moderate slopes at the discretion of Valard Construction.
Under no circumstances shall trees be “walked" down using tracked dozers or any other
heavy equipment. Low shrubs and ground cover shall be left intact.
Page 3 of 14
Table 8-1. Watercourse Vehicle Crossing Methods

(Adapted from Alberta Forestry, Lands, and Wildlife 1989)
WATERCOURSE <6 m Wide 6-15 m Wide >15 m Wide

TYPE <0.6 TV' Deep 0.6-1.0 m Deep >1.0 m Deep
Environmental
Sensitivity L M H L M H L M H
CROSSING METHOD
Ford X
Logfill X X
Culvert (X) X X X
Ice Bridge (X) X X X X X XXX
Temporary Bridge (X) (X) X (X) (X) X XXX
Existing Bridge (X) (X) X (X) (X) X XXX
NOTES:
This table is intended as a general guide to environmentally acceptable crossing
methods in the absence of specific conditions of regulatory approval. Other factors to be
considered include stability and composition of the bed and bank, bank height, water
velocity, financial cost, and engineering requirements.
X Denotes the method is environmentally acceptable.
(X) Denotes the method is environmentally acceptable, however, it is not
practical in most cases, considering lower environmental sensitivity and higher
construction costs
Environmental sensitivity levels are defined as follows. Be aware that the Alberta Forest
Service Officer and/or the Fish and Wildlife Division may further define specific
environmental sensitivities.
LOW (L)
 No downstream water users.
 Sport fish absent or present in low numbers during non-sensitive period.
MODERATE (M)
 Downstream water users.
 Warm water sport fish habitat within zone of potential crossing, related
sedimentation.
HIGH (H)
 Downstream water users cannot tolerate increased sediment load.
 Cold water sport fish habitat within zone of potential crossing, related sedimentation.
A brush screen shall be retained approximately 3 meters high and 25 meters deep on
both sides of road and trail crossings. Compatible trees (e.g., low growing spruce and
pine), and shrubs shall be preserved while removing incompatible trees (e.g., aspen and
Page 4 of 14
birch), and all danger trees as defined by Valard Construction specifications.

A brush strip (i.e., a minimum of 5 meters above the high water mark) shall be retained
at water crossings at both sides of the watercourse as indicated on the alignment
sheets. The only vegetation to be removed shall be at the vehicle crossing, if one is
required. If grading is required at these sites, grading of the bank shall be directed away
from the watercourse to prevent introduction of debris and spoil into the channel.
Compatible trees (e.g., low growing spruce and pine), and shrubs shall be preserved
while removing incompatible trees (e.g., aspen and birch).
Banks along watercourses and water bodies shall be restored to stable contours
immediately following construction.
Following construction, ice bridges shall be scraped clean of spoil inadvertently
introduced onto the ice, and physically broken up to prevent ice jams and subsequent
flooding during spring break up. Portable bridges shall be removed and the banks
restored to pre-construction conditions.
Log cribbing may be required, and shall be installed during clean up to rehabilitate
graded portions of the banks of watercourses and water bodies at the discretion of
Valard Construction.
Table 8-1 shall be followed as a general guide for selection of methods for vehicle
crossing of all watercourses.
Should excessive flows in watercourses occur due to winter thaw or wet weather,
vehicular crossings shall be postponed until flows drop to acceptable levels as
determined by Valard Construction.
Flagging
Right-of-way boundaries, and any extra workspaces shall be clearly flagged and/or
staked prior to construction. Stakes and flags shall be placed at intervals not exceeding
l00 meters. All operations shall be confined to these work limits. All flagging/stakes
shall be maintained for the duration of the construction period.
Merchantable timber stands to be salvaged shall be clearly flagged and/or staked.
All compatible vegetation patches shall be clearly flagged and/or staked so that they
may be retained without endangering line integrity.
All known archaeological sites adjacent to, or in the proximity of the right-of-way shall be
fenced to avoid inadvertent damage during construction. Fences shall also be installed.
WASTE MANAGEMENT
Waste management is regulated by provincial and federal statutory authorities. Valard’s
waste management in offices, shops, and field areas will comply with all relevant
legislation, regulation and policies, permits and codes and orders including regional
waste management plans, landfill and recycling guidelines applicable. Valard
employees and contractors will be trained in the waste disposal requirements at each
site.
Office Operations
Office operations shall ensure that a waste paper recycling program has been
implemented whenever possible. It shall be the responsibility of each respective Office
Manager (or designate) to ensure a recycling program has been established. Further,
each office Manager or designate shall ensure that office staff is participating in the
recycling program.
Page 5 of 14
Field and Maintenance Shop Operations

Various forms of waste are produced in the normal course of field and maintenance
shop operations. Due to chemical composition, physical and/or biological properties,
wastes are generally categorized as Hazardous or Non-Hazardous.
All waste generated at projects/shops that can be classified as hazardous must be
handled, stored, and disposed of in accordance with local government regulations. It is
the responsibility of the Project Superintendent (worksites) or Shop Manager (Shops) to
ensure compliance with all applicable legislation including cleanup and disposal. On
construction sites the superintendent shall be responsible to insure that all waste is
stored and disposed as per each locales waste disposal legislation/ regulations/ Bylaws.
Non-hazardous wastes generated during construction, and maintenance must be
recycled, whenever possible. It is the responsibility of the Project Superintendent to
ensure a system of reusing or recycling of materials is implemented, whenever possible.
Waste and Hazardous Material Handling and Disposal
(Pollution Control):
Equipment maintenance shall be restricted to designated and approved areas to prevent
contamination of soils by accidental spills of toxic or hazardous materials (i.e., as defined
in the Glossary of Terms).
In order to prevent any spills, all hazardous, toxic, contaminated, and dangerous wastes
shall be stored, transported, and disposed of in conformance with the Hazardous
Chemicals Act, WHMIS guidelines, and Hazardous Waste Regulations for the
Province/Territory and Federal Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act. All Hazardous
materials shall be stored in a manner to eliminate the potential for spills. This can be by
using spill containments under all approved storage devices. WHMIS information shall
be made available to all employees. Employees who may be required to store or work
with hazardous material shall be trained in its storage and handling requirements.
Fuelling and servicing of equipment shall be prohibited within 100 meters of the high
water mark of any watercourse or standing water body.
The right-of-way shall be maintained in an orderly condition, free of accumulated waste
products, debris, and litter. All waste shall be kept in an approved container, such as
storage in spill proof container and approved facility. All large drums shall be returned to
the vendor, or washed, crushed, and disposed of at an approved facility. Due care and
attention shall be taken to prevent accidental spills of residual contents during transport
and disposal. During disposal of any waste workers shall wear appropriate gloves,
protective clothing including face shield if material is a liquid and not contained in a
sealed container. Where material is a solid, gloves must be worn to protect hands from
any abrasions or contamination. Material that is a controlled product the MSDS must be
reviewed and the identified PPE must be worn.
Hazardous material such as used paint, batteries, oil, and cleaning agents, and water
contaminated by freezing depressants will be collected and recycled or disposed of as
hazardous waste.
Construction debris and waste materials shall not be buried on-site, or burned in open
barrels. Appropriate waste collection containers and facilities will available where
hazardous materials are stored.
Emissions from equipment shall be controlled as required by Environment Canada.
The washing of construction equipment in watercourses or water bodies shall be strictly
Page 6 of 14
prohibited.
Contaminated soils will be managed according to their concentration of contaminates
and there leach-ability. Appropriate disposal operations will be determined in
consultation with the relevant environmental protection authorities.
Sanitary Waste
The contractor will provide portable sanitary waste facilities at construction sites.
If required, sanitary waste will be removed from the construction sites and disposed of in
a manner approved by the relevant regional local municipality
Solid Waste
Solid waste will be transported to a landfill site, disposal or transfer station, or recycling
center approved by the applicable district. Where an incinerator is available and
approved, non-recyclable solid waste may be incinerated.
All construction material, including survey material, will be removed from the work site
and right of way.
Woody debris from the right of way preparation will be disposed of according to
applicable permits, regulations or landowner directions. In certain cases where offsite
disposal or burning is not acceptable, woody material will be chipped and left on site.
Any debris burning will be subject to permits and the requirements of the Provincial
Waste Management Act / Open Burning Smoke Control Regulation, The Forest and
Range Act, and / or any applicable regional, municipal or improvement district bylaw.
Erosion and Sediment Control
The following meetings shall beheld:

1. Pre-job meetings must be held to plan for the least amount of disturbance as
necessary and what control measures need to be put into place.
2. Job planning shall be conducted during construction to ensure that erosion and
sediment control measures are in place and the procedures are being followed.
3. Post-job planning shall be in place to ensure that temporary controls have been
removed and that all potential problem areas have been addressed.
When clearing, stripping land, and excavating during construction activities, the schedule
must include a plan to minimize the amount of time that the bare soil is left exposed and
to minimize the extent of soil exposure at any one time in order to reduce the amount of
erosion and sedimentation that occurs.
Whenever the soil is disturbed, Valard shall utilize erosion control devices to prevent
erosion and ultimately to help prevent sedimentation. The following devices can provide
erosion control:
 Temporary seeding
 Temporary mulching
 Permanent sodding
 Erosion control blankets
 Vegetative buffer strips
Page 7 of 14
Entry and exit points for any water runoff must be controlled with the use of sediment
control devices to prevent sediment from entering any waterways. Commonly, storm
drain inlets are protected to prevent sediment from entering the storm drain. Types
sediment control devices that are approved:
 Silt fencing
 Straw bales
 Storm inlet traps
 Sediment ponds
 Rock check dams
 Intercepting berms.
Valard will insure that all erosion and sediment control devices shall be inspected and a
maintain program is to be in place. A set inspection schedule will be established to view
all areas where erosion and sediment control devices are used as well as all disturbed
areas. Any erosion or sediment control devices that are damaged or deficient during the
inspection shall be corrected as soon as possible. Maintenance must also include
removing semidation to prevent a breakthrough.
All employees who are responsible for erosion and sediment control devices must be
trained and be competent in the design, installation, and maintenance of the devices.
Wastewater Handling and storage
Valard will train all employees Before there is any discharge of wastewater the content
must be known If the contents of the wastewater are hazardous (toxic, corrosive,
flammable, etc.), the wastewater needs to be disposed of in a facility authorized to
dispose of hazardous waste.
When working for a client Valard will coordinate with the client to ensure proper disposal
of wastewater. Valard will insure ensure the client is aware of how wastewater is
disposed of to ensure compliance with applicable permits.
Valard will train all workers involved in the handling and disposal of wastewater prior to
being permitted to do these tasks.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES AND CONTINGENCY PLANS

1. Contingency plans shall be developed prior to the initiation of construction
activities. Construction personnel shall be made aware of their required response
to potential problems, and to act quickly as required.
2. A spill contingency plan shall be developed and adopted by Valard. This plan
shall contain concise information to assist the operating personnel in the event of
a spill or other emergency. The plan shall include the following:
 A definition of emergencies covered by the plan.

 Procedures for alerting company personnel and affected outside parties.
 Clear definitions of the responsibilities of everyone involved.
 Guidelines for reaction and control, including shut down procedures, spill
containment, watercourse protection, etc. as required.
Page 8 of 14
 Methods for initiating immediate corrective action including spill control

and containment, restoration and rehabilitation of the affect resource.
 Guidelines for protection of the operating personnel and the general
public.
 Guidelines for post-restorative inspection.
 Guidelines for the public relations and the dissemination of information.
 A telephone contacts summary.
3. When a spill of construction fluids occurs, Valard shall ensure that the
contingency plan be activated as quickly as possible to contain, and clean up a
spill. All construction vehicles must have access to an industrial response kit.
However, as a minimum requirement, all service vehicles shall carry a minimum
of 10 kilograms of commercial adsorbent material for spill clean up (i.e.,
Matasorb; tiger tails TM, & Sorbex).
4. In the event of a “typical" spill (i.e., as defined in the Glossary of Terms), response
steps as outlined in the spill contingency plan should include, but are not limited to:
i) Spill containment: Containment of the spill may be achieved by damming

road ditches down-slope of the spill. Spills must be contained in a road ditch,
or other depression area until they may be effectively cleaned up. Under NO
circumstances shall spills be allowed to mix with local water sources.
ii) Spill recovery: All fluids shall be pumped immediately into a holding tank,
or facility, then transported to an approved disposal site. Unconsolidated
solvent material must be applied liberally over the contaminated area, on
contaminated road and ground surfaces, and then salvaged and disposed
of at an approved facility or site. Burning of fuel spills can be an effective
recovery method in some circumstances. However, this method is site
specific and use of this method shall be approved at the discretion of Valard
Construction.
iii) Disposal of Contaminated Soil: All contaminated soil and vegetation shall
be excavated, and disposed of at an approved location. Replacement soil
and topsoil may have to be transported to the site as a rehabilitation
measure. This will be at the discretion of Valard Construction.
iv) Notification of Spill: The proper authorities (i.e., government agencies and
leaseholders) shall be briefed with respect to the location, size, and
contents of the spill. Spill response measures shall be implemented
immediately. Valard Construction shall take all responsibility for reasonable
satisfactory cleanup in consultation with the property owner of the affected
property.
A fire contingency plan shall be developed and adopted by the Contractor. This fire
contingency plan shall provide for an effective fire observation and detection system,
and must ensure that the construction crews have the necessary fire fighting equipment
on hand which is capable of controlling any fire that may occur as a result of their
activities.
In the event of accidental fire, the fire contingency plan shall be activated. The
Contractor shall ensure the risk of accidental fire is reduced by making all personnel
Page 9 of 14
aware of proper disposal of cigarette butts, and by forbidding any fires on the right-of-
way when the fire hazard is high or extreme. In addition, the Contractor shall ensure
that all equipment has spark arrestors installed, exhaust and engine systems are in good
repair, and free of dried grass and other combustibles. All fires shall be reported
immediately to the Forest Service Officer, landowner, or leaseholder, and upon their
request, the Contractor shall make all equipment and personnel available to control the
fire.
The following numbers are for reporting Environmental spills and are only accessible in
the applicable province.
Alberta: 1-800-222-6514
British Columbia 1-800-663-3456
Saskatchewan 1-800-667-7525
Manitoba 1-204-994-4888
Ontario 1-800-268-6060
Yukon 1-867-667-7244
NWT/Nunavut 1-867-920-8130
Newfoundland 1-800-563-9089
HISTORICAL RESOURCES
1. The collection and disturbance of artifacts of possible historic significance by project
employees is strictly prohibited.
2. Archaeological or historical artifacts include but are not limited to bones, skeletons,
graves, effigies, fossils, and lithics.
3. Should artifacts of obvious historic significance be uncovered during construction,
Valard Construction shall ensure that all operations in the immediate vicinity of the
find (i.e., within 50 meters) be suspended until a Culture archaeologist has reviewed
the site, and approved the continuation of construction.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Construction, including clearing and brushing may be restricted or prohibited at certain

times of the year in certain areas in order to minimize terrain disturbance, and to ensure
traffic on the right-of-way is not impeded, and environmental impacts remain minimal.
Exemptions to timing constraints shall be allowed only when the Contractor can clearly
demonstrate that no environmental impacts will occur as a result, and these exemptions
are authorized and approved by Valard Construction.
The construction schedule shall make provisions to minimize construction activity in

proximity to all watercourses during the ice-free season to reduce or eliminate surface
disturbance, and major impacts on aquatic habitats.
FISH AND WILDLIFE RESOURCES

1. All project related road-kills, potentially dangerous wildlife encounters, and/or
"nuisance animals" shall be reported to the local Fish and Wildlife Division
personnel as soon as possible.
2. Construction personnel shall not be permitted to have dogs or firearms on the
right-of-way. In addition, recreational use of all-terrain vehicles or snowmobiles
Page 10 of 14
on the right-of-way shall be strictly prohibited at all times.

3. The Contractor shall not intentionally disturb wildlife in the vicinity of the project.
The feeding and harassment of wildlife shall he strictly prohibited.
4. Wherever possible, clearing activities shall be undertaken in a fashion that
minimizes damage to raptor tree nests where Fish and Wildlife personnel identify
them. The Field Representative, and the Fish and Wildlife personnel to mitigate
potential impacts on raptor nests shall develop appropriate protective measures
jointly.
5. Local Fish and Wildlife personnel shall be notified if construction activities will
damage beaver dams, ponds, and lodges, muskrat push-ups, or other aquatic fur
bearing habitats.
Employee Responsibilities
1) Assess the situation to determine to source and the substance for immediate
danger.
2) Stop and control the spill if possible
3) Report the spill immediately to your supervisor. (i.e. ATCO, Aquila, Enmax)
4) Report spill to Valard Construction Head Office.
5) Begin cleanup of site.
If for any reason there are questions or uncertainty, seek assistance from your
supervisor, or department contact.
Once spills have been reported to utility be sure to fill out the appropriate paper work.
Oil spills involving Hydraulic oil, Gasoline, or Antifreeze.
1) Assess the situation and take appropriate measures to contain the spill.
2) Use absorbal rags and floor dry to clean up the spill.
3) Contact your supervisor to report spill and receive further instructions.
4) If spill is less than 5 litres report it to Valard Construction.
5) If spill is larger than 5 litres the Alberta Environmental Protection Branch must
be notified. On spills of this size it is very important to contain the spill as
soon as possible.
6) Complete the environmental spill release form and fax to the office and to
Environment Canada
The following list is for reportable quantities for common substances.
Oils (hydraulic, used, non PCB). >/- 5 litres

Gasoline, Diesel, or Glycol >/- 50 litres
PCBs > 50 ppm
SPILL KITS
5 GALLON PAIL
15 LBS QUALISORB SUPER ABSORBANT

10 - 24” x 24” ABSORBANT PADS
2 PAIRS OF RUBBER GLOVES
2 - 3M 8210 RESPIRATORS
Page 11 of 14
CAN ROSS SPILL KIT
GZ – PCOD DRY PLUGGING COMPOUND

GZ – PCOM PRE-MIXED PLUGGING COMPOUND
2 PAIRS OF RUBBER GLOVES
10’ OB-210 LIQUITROL
1 – 16” x 16” OB-4 PAD
3 – THICK PLASTIC BAGS
Page 12 of 14
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
DEFINITIONS
Brushing- A silvicultural technique to remove brush and weed species that compete
with seedlings for sunlight, water, and soil nutrients.
Brush Strip- A strip of land (often including undisturbed or brush screen vegetation)
where disturbance is not allowed or is closely monitored to preserve or enhance
aesthetic and other qualities along or adjacent to roads) trails, watercourses, and
recreation sites
Coniferous- Cone bearing trees having needles or scale-like leaves, usually evergreen,
and producing wood known commercially as “softwoods”.
Critical Wildlife Habitat- An area or region that is seasonally important to the life cycle
of the animal inhabiting that area.
Crown Land- Land that is owned by the Crown, or Province.
Cutbank- The excavated bank from a ditch line to the top of the undisturbed slope of a
road.
Deciduous-Term applied to trees, commonly broadleaf, that usually shed their leaves
annually. Also known commercially as 'hardwoods'.
Dominant- Trees with crowns extending above the general level of the canopy and
receiving full light from above and partly from the side; taller than the average trees in
the stand with crowns well developed.
Flagging tape- Colored plastic tape which comes in rolls and is used to mark (flag)
boundaries or identify certain trees or objects.
Ground trothing- A procedure employed to confirm and verify that environmental
conditions in the field match conditions determined during office studies. This is often
used when identifying vegetation communities and/or terrain features from aerial
photographs versus the “real world”.
Log cribbing- A wall constructed of logs that is anchored and secured into the ground to
stabilize the banks along a watercourse or water body to prevent erosion.
Merchantable timber- A tree or stand that has attained sufficient size, timber quality
and/or volume to make it suitable for harvesting.
Mitigative- Measures Procedural, location, timing constraints, and methods employed
to address project related impacts. Mitigative measures can address both positive and
negative impacts.
Microclimate- Generally the climate of small areas, especially insofar as this differs
significantly from the general climate of the region.
Right-of-way- The strip of land over which a power line, railway, road, etc. extends.
Slash- The residue left on the ground after felling, including unused logs) uprooted
stumps, broken tops, etc.
Spill- The release of dangerous goods in quantities greater than those specified in the
Dangerous Goods Compliance Guidelines and which represent a danger to health, life,
property, and the environment.
Page 13 of 14
Understory- That portion of the trees or other vegetation in a forest stand below the
main canopy level.
Hazardous Waste- Those wastes that are potentially hazardous to human health and/or
the environment due to their nature and quantity, and require special handling.
Non-Hazardous Waste- Any waste not regulated by the Federal Transportation of
Goods Regulations
Waste Management- Programs that lead to the Reduction, Reuse, Recycling, of all
wastes. All environmentally hazardous wastes generated by our operations shall be
disposed of at government-approved facilities.
Page 14 of 14
Document Description Use of Compressed Air
26.017 USE OF COMPRESSED AIR

The following are the minimum required practices to be used with compressed air:

• Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with
sufficient experience to use it without supervision, or be under the direct
supervision of a worker who is. All pressure vessels must be recertified as per
provincial legislation, this test must be done as a minimum every 10 years.
• Hard Hat
• Safety Glasses
• Safety Boots
• Hearing protection, depends on the equipment being powered by the
compressed air
• Metatarsal protection (if using any equipment that breaks concrete)
• Face shields may also be required
Use and Maintenance
• Compressed air must not be used to blow foreign substances from any worker's
clothes.
• Ensure that the air pressure has been turned off and the line pressure relieved
before disconnecting the hose or changing tools.
• All hose connectors must be of the quick disconnect pressure release type with a
"safety chain/cable".
• Hoses must be checked on a regular basis for cuts, bulges, or other damage.
Ensure that defective hoses are repaired or replaced.
• A proper pressure regulator and relief device must be in the system to ensure
that correct desired pressures are maintained.
• The correct air supply hoses must be used for the tool/equipment being used.
• The equipment must be properly maintained according to the manufacturer's
requirements.
• Follow manufacturer's general instructions and comply with legislated safety
requirements.
Alberta
Section 1(1)g Definition “Competent Worker”
British Columbia
Yukon
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Use of Compressed Air
Saskatchewan
Manitoba
Ontario
NWT
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Use of Fire Extinguishers
26.018 USE OF FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Good Housekeeping is essential in the prevention of fires. Fires can start anywhere and
at any time. This is why it is important to know which fire extinguisher to use and how to
use it. Workers must be trained in the use of hand held fire extinguishers.
Always keep fire extinguishers visible and easy to get at. Fire extinguishers have to be
properly maintained to do the job. Where temperature is a factor, ensure that care is
taken in selecting the right extinguisher. Fire Extinguishers must be visually checked
monthly and recorded on the attached tag. See inspection form in Section 9 of the HS&E
Policies Manual.
Fire Protection.
The following must be addressed prior to commencing any project:
1. All flammable liquids/solids/gases must be stored in an approved container to
prevent any type of fire or explosion. The material must be stored a minimum of
30 metres away from any underground shafts, air intakes, combustible engines
and any furnaces/burners that have a fire box and require fresh air to operate.
2. Gas and diesel must be stored in an approved container and meet the CSA
standard B376-M1980 (R2008) for Gasoline and other Petroleum fuels.
3. All flammable gases must be stored away from compressed Oxygen, and are not
to be placed in the same storage area (including outdoor storage). All valves on
compressed cylinders must be protected from any possible damage. The valve
metal cover must be in place whenever moving or transporting any compressed
cylinder. All hoses, fittings, regulators must be kept clean and free of oil or
grease. All cylinders must be handled and stored as per the manufacturers
recommendations.
4. All internal combustion engines such as compressors, portable lighting plants or
generators must be placed in an area preventing providing a source of ignition
when located in any possible hazardous area. A hazard assessment must be
done to insure that all hazards a re identified and addressed, by either preventing
any gases from entering the area, insuring that the exhaust gases temperature is
less that the combustion temperature of the local gases. These engines must be
equipped with a flame arrestor exhaust system.
5. All motorized equipment including the maintenance shops must be equipped with
a 20lb. fire Extinguisher. The fire extinguisher must be mounted in a location,
which is easily accessible in case of a fire. The only exception is for Offices
ATVs, UTVs and Argos where a 10 lb. fire extinguisher is acceptable (some
clients may require a 20 lb.) Client must be asked for their site requirements
prior to sending one of these units to their sites.
Page 1 of 3
Types of Fire Common to Construction
Type of Definition Recommended Method of Use

Fire Extinguishers
Class A Fire Fires involving Water from a hose, pump Soak the fire completely
ordinary type water can or pressurised including smoking
combustibles such extinguisher, and soda acid embers. (water)
are wood, paper, extinguishers.
rags and rubbish ABC units. Start at the base of the
fire and use a swinging
motion from left to right,
always keeping the fire
in front of you. (ABC)
Class B Fire Fires involving ABC units, dry chemical, Start at the base of the
flammable liquids, foam and carbon dioxide fire and use a swinging
oils and greases. extinguishers. motion from left to right,
always keeping the fire
in front of you.
Class C Fire Electrical Fires Carbon dioxide and dry Use short bursts on the
chemical (ABC units) fire. When the electrical
extinguishers. current is shut off on a
Class C fire, it can
become a Class A fire if
the materials around the
electrical fire are ignited.
During the fire season, company vehicles must have fire-fighting equipment on
them. This includes shovels pulaskis and water packs.
In case of a fire that workers are unable to control, notify the fire department
nearest your location, or in the event of a forest fire in Alberta call 310-3473 (310-
FIRE) as per Table A (following page)
Page 2 of 3
TABLE “A”
Forest and Prairie Protection Regulations

REQUIRED
EQUIPMENT
MEN EMPLOYED AT THE SITE OF OPERATIONS
FOR FIRE
CONTROL
Shovels 1 2 3 4 5 6-10 11-20 21-30 31-40 40+
Backpack
with pump 1 1 2 2 3 5 10 15 20 Same
Axe/Pulaski as
0 0 1 2 3 5 10 15 20 31-40
Fire pump 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 increase
Fire hose by
(metres) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 450 450 Director
Power Saw 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Alberta
Part 10- Fire and Explosion Hazards – Section 171
British Columbia
Part 4- General Conditions – Section 4.16 – Training
Yukon
Part 1- General- Section 170(1)(2)(3)(4)- Fire protection
Saskatchewan
Part XXV- Fire and Explosion Hazards- Section 361
Manitoba
Part 19-Fire and Explosive Hazards- Section 19.2-19.3
Ontario
Part II- General Construction- Section 52-54- Fire Protection
NWT
Part V- Construction and Maintenance – Section 95(1)(5) – Fire Protection
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Use of Cleaning Solvents
26.019 USE OF CLEANING AND FLAMMABLE SOLVENTS
The following are the minimum required practices to be used with these chemicals

• Users of these chemicals must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with
Training
The following training shall be provided to all workers in the safe handling of flammable
and combustible substances prior to performing any work activities. The training shall
consist of:
• Safe Handling
• Use and storage of the substances
• Proper disposal methods
• The means of identifying the product, its nature and the potential hazards

PPE requirements vary greatly from chemical to chemical. Check the MSDS for
specific requirements before using. In addition to standard PPE some chemicals
require the use of a face shield, monogoggles, protective gloves, protective
clothing and aprons, 20 lb. ABC fire extinguisher, rubber boots and/or respiratory
protective equipment.
Use
• Use non-flammable solvents for general cleaning.
• When flammable liquids are used, make sure that no hot work is permitted in the
area.
• When transferring any Flammable/combustible containers must be electrically
grounded to each other.
• Store flammable and combustibles in separate designated storage areas.
• Flammable liquids must be stored away from any ignition sources. They must be
stored in areas away from substances that may cause a reaction, such as a
oxygen cylinder or tank.
• Provide adequate ventilation where all solvents and flammable are being used.
• Workers must not enter or remain in a work area if more than 10% of the lower
explosive limit (LEL) of the explosive substance is present in the atmosphere.
• Never leave solvents in open tubs or vats - return them to storage drums or tank
that has a means of containment, which prevents any spillage.
• Ensure that proper containers are used for transportation, storage and field use of
solvents/flammable.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Use of Cleaning Solvents
• Waste material contaminated with a solvent, oil, grease, paint, or other flammable
substance shall be placed in covered metal containers before disposal and shall
not be stored in work areas.
• A 20 lb. ABC Fire Extinguisher must be within reach at all times. The inspection
date must be verified that the inspection was performed and the gauge is checked.
Ensure all WHMIS requirements are met.
Alberta
Part 10 -Fire and Explosive Hazards- All Sections
Part 29 - WHMIS -All Sections
British Columbia
Part 5- Chemical and Biological Substances – All Sections
Yukon
Part 1- General Section 1.06- Training of Worker
Part 8- Materials and Storage – All Sections
Saskatchewan
Part XXV- Fire and Explosive Hazards – All Sections
Part XXII- WHMIS
Manitoba
Part 19- Fire and Explosive Hazards – All Sections
Part 35- WHMIS
Ontario
Part II – General Construction – Section 52-58- Fire Safety
NWT
Part V- Construction and Maintenance – Section 95(1)(5)
Page 2 of 2

Use of Elevated Work Platforms/Manlifts

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 3 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: June 10, 2016
26.020 ELEVATING WORK PLATFORMS (MANLIFTS/BUCKETS)


Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably
trained and with sufficient experience to use it without supervision,
or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is. The user
must be also trained in Fall Prevention.

• Hard Hat
• Safety Glasses
• Safety Boots
• Harness c/w Lanyard
Use and Maintenance

• A manlift device should only be operated by a worker who has been instructed
and trained in the machine’s operation.
• Inspection to be done on a daily basis as per manufacturer’s instructions if
defects are found the equipment shall be taken out of service and sent for
repairs.
• All workers on manlifts to wear Harnesses & Lanyards at all time and anchored
as per manufacturer’s specifications.
• No material is permitted to be tied off to any part of the Manlift.
• Manlift devices only to be used on working surfaces for which the machine was
designed.
• Manlift devices to be used up to and not exceeding maximum rated working
loads. All loading to be evenly distributed.
• No over hanging load to be lifted on a manlift platform.
• All equipment is to have alarms and emergency controls.
• Do not place makeshift platforms such as boxes or proper access equipment
such as ladders and scaffolds or a manlift platform to gain access to areas
above.
• Feet must be placed on the base of the Manlift. Side rails are not to be used to
gain reach.
• A manlift shall not be driven in a raised position.
• The platform on a manlift device shall not be extended by any means other than
manufacturer’s platform extension devices.
• Planks or similar platform materials shall not be used to bridge a gap between
manlift platform and other work areas.
• Manlift devices shall not be used in high wind conditions.
• Manlift devices shall not be used for pulling, pushing and/or dragging materials.
• Manlift devices when not in use are to be turned off in an enclosed work area to
prevent the accumulation of exhaust fumes.

Page 1 of 2

Use of Elevated Work Platforms/Manlifts

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 3 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: June 10, 2016
Alberta
Part 23- Elevated Work Platforms and Aerial Devices- Section 346-347
British Columbia

Part 13- Ladders, Scaffolds and Temporary Work Platforms – Division 5, Section
13.20-13.33

Yukon
Part 10- Construction and Building Safety – Section 10.53

Saskatchewan
Part XI – Scaffolds, Aerial Devices and Elevated Work Platforms- Section 28.21-
28.47

Manitoba
Part 28- Scaffolds and Other Elevated Work Platforms – Section 28.21-28.47

Ontario
Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c)Part II- General
Construction- Sections 93-105
Part II- General Construction – Section 143-149- Elevated Work Platforms

NWT
Part V- Construction and Maintenance – Section 269-272 Scaffolds Planks and
Platforms

Page 2 of 2
Document Description Electrical Extension Cords
26.021 ELECTRICAL EXTENSION CORDS

Extension cords can cause serious accidents if used improperly. The following practices
are to be followed:
• All electrical cords must be kept in a safe condition.

• Cords that are being used are designed for its intended use.
• Each cord end must be of an approved design and rated for its intended use.
• All electrical extension cords must be designed for external use and rated 16/3.
(Grounded)
• Extension cords to be protected against damage.
• All extension cords to be placed in such away that they will not be a tripping or
falling hazard.
• All extension cords used in hazardous areas or in damp locations to be protected
by an approved ground fault protection.
• All extension cords shall be inspected monthly and prior to each use.
• All frayed, cut or spliced extension cords are to be tagged and removed from
service.
Page 1 of 1
Document Description Use of Combustible Fuels
26.023 HANDLING OF COMBUSTIBLE FUELS

Gasoline is made for one purpose: to cause an explosion and thereby release energy for
power. If misused, it can cause serious injury or death. The following minimum
requirements are to be adhered to.

Users of these substances must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with
sufficient experience to use them without supervision, or be under the direct supervision
of a worker who is.

Minimum protection required for dispensing includes hardhat, safety glasses, impervious
gloves and safety boots. Some applications may require the use face shields, aprons,
respiratory protection or mono goggles, consult the MSDS
Safe Usage
• Fuels must always be kept in a CSA approved container.
• All Fuel containers must have a WHMIS workplace label.
• Never under any circumstances, use combustible fuels for cleaning purposes
• Avoid inhaling vapours. Always use in a well-ventilated area.
• Always clean up spills as per the environmental section in this manual.
• Never smoke around open combustible fuels.
• Never leave any equipment running while refuelling.
• Always use ground while refuelling with electric fuel pumps.
• Fuel storage areas must be in compliance with Government Regulations and/or
Client’s Safety Program.
Alberta
Part 10 –Fire and Explosion Hazards- Section 162(1)(2)(3)(4)(5) 163(1)(2)(3) 164 (1)
(2)
British Columbia
Yukon
Part 8-Materials and Storage – All Sections
Saskatchewan
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Use of Combustible Fuels

Part XXV- Fire and Explosive Hazards
Manitoba
Part 19- Fire and Explosive Hazards
Ontario
Part II-General Construction- Section 52-58
NWT
Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 95(1)(5)- Fire Protection
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Use of Hand Tools
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 4 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Mar. 24, 2016
26.025 USE OF HAND TOOLS

experience to perform the work without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of
a worker who is.
Tools used at Elevations:
Individuals who are working at heights, either on Power poles/structures or within
Manbaskets/RBD buckets or Elevated work platforms must insure that the tools do not
fall to the ground. These tools must be either tethered to the equipment or to the
worker’s belt to prevent any tool from falling. Following images are an example of tool
tethers. See SWP 26.077 Establishing and Maintaining Drop Zones for further
information.
Equipment Required
• Hard Hat
• Safety Glasses
• Safety Boots
• Gloves
Use and Maintenance

• Only use hand tools for their intended purpose. Do not for example use
screwdrivers as chisels.
• All hand tools must be in good condition. Any hand tools that are unsafe due to
damage should be removed from service as per Valard Construction’s Defective
Tools/Equipment policy.
• Maintenance records must be kept for all tools, which have been repaired.
• Tools, which are struck by hammers, such as chisels or punches should have the
head ground periodically to prevent mushrooming.
• Never backup any work with your hand in which the blade can slip and cause
injury.
• Always keep all cutting edges sharp, replace or re-sharpen.
• When working with tools always place them in a position in which they cannot fall
on others and they do not impose a tripping hazard.
• Always store tools in proper containers to avoid damage to tools and injury to
one’s self.
• When new hand tools are purchased, each must be evaluated by considering
their ergonomic design. This must be considered during the purchase request.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Use of Hand Tools
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 4 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Mar. 24, 2016
• Never carry hand tools such as chisels and screwdrivers in a pocket; they can
cause injury when you bend over or in the event of a fall. When carrying tools
protect the cutting edges and carry the tools in such a way that you will not
endanger yourself or others.
• All screwdrivers that are to be used on electrical work shall have an insulated
handle in perfect shape.
• All power hand tools must be connected to a Ground Fault Circuit interceptor
(GFCI)
• Spud (type) wrenches or combination with open-ended wrenches are not to be
used to tighten bolts or nuts. A box ended spud wrench or a combination style of
tool must be used with the box end used for tightening.
Alberta
British Columbia
Yukon
Saskatchewan
Manitoba
Ontario
NWT
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Use of Jack Hammer
26.026 JACKHAMMER/CHIPPING HAMMER

The following are the minimum required practices to be used with this equipment.

experience to work without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker
who is.
Personal Protective Equipment Required:

• Hard Hat
• Safety Glasses and Face Shield
• Safety Boots
• Metatarsal Protection
• Respiratory Protection may be required in some cases
Use and Maintenance
The following applies to electric and pneumatic hammers:

• Ensure the area is clear of workers that are unauthorized or do not have the
correct PPE.
• The equipment must be properly maintained according to the manufacturer's
requirements.
• Follow manufacturer's general instructions and comply with legislated safety
requirements
The following applies to pneumatic hammers only:

• Ensure that the air pressure has been turned off and the line pressure relieved
before disconnecting the hose or changing tools.
• All hose connectors must be of the quick disconnect pressure release type with a
"safety chain/cable". All fittings must be pinned or wired together.
• Hoses must be checked on a regular basis for cuts, bulges, or other damage.
Ensure that defective hoses are repaired or replaced.
• A proper pressure regulator and relief device must be in the system to ensure
that correct desired pressures are maintained.
• The correct air supply hoses must be used for the tool/equipment being used.
Alberta
British Columbia
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Use of Jack Hammer
Yukon
Saskatchewan
Manitoba
Ontario
NWT
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Spotters and Signaler Practice
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Sept. 7, 2018
26.027 SPOTTERS AND SIGNALERS

The employer is responsible to ensure that the traffic is controlled to ensure worker
protection. The workers must be visible and / or physically protected from traffic and the
following are the minimum required practices for signallers.
All other employees must wear a high visibility vest and clothing at all times when
working either near a highway/roadway or on any site that Valard is working on.
Spotter/Signaller must stand behind a concrete jersey barrier if working on any roadway,
if off road then a yellow coloured barricade must be set up.

Signallers must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience to
perform this work without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who
is. If worker is being a flag person on a highway, he/she must be trained as a Flag
person and must wear Hi-Vis outerwear meeting the provincial regulations. If the person
is required to spot work or equipment near or travel under energized lines then that
person must be a Qualified Utility Worker (journeyman status), as defined in Alberta’s
EUC. Code 2007 p. 7.
• Hard hat
• Safety glasses
• Safety boots
• Reflective vest
• Flashlight or other illumination is required after dark
• Yellow/Lime Green Reflective outerwear (If Flag person on Highway)
STANDARDS
SPOTTING EQUIPMENT AWAY FROM ENERGIZED LINES/ EQUIPMENT
• After completion of Tailboard spotters and signallers will be used as required.
• Spotters and signallers must wear appropriate signal vest.
• Spotters must be used whenever operating any equipment/vehicle in substations
with 3 metres (10 ft.) of any obstacle or obstruction.
• Spotter must insure that they check the area where the equipment/vehicle is to go
and inform the operator of all hazards that are present in the direction of required
route or change the route to be used.
• Spotters and signallers must communicate with equipment or vehicle operator using
appropriate hand signals. Review of hand signals for operator and signaller/spotter
prior to starting work.
• Spotter will watch all activity surrounding the equipment work area.
• Before each signal, spotters shall ensure that no hazards exist that endangers any
workers, equipment or property in the work area.
• Equipment operator shall move only with instruction from the designated signal
person with the exception of “Emergency Stop” which can be given by any worker.
Page 1 of 3
• Designated signaller/spotter to be in view of and maintain eye contact with operator

at all times.
• Designated signaller/spotter must know hand signals.
• Designated signaller/spotter must plan an escape route.
• Keep at all times, a safe distance away from equipment in the event of an
unexpected rollover.
• Copy of Safe Work Practice to be given to equipment operator.
• If required, a second spotter will be used.
• When spotters are changed the equipment operator is to be notified.
• The spotter has the right to stop work at any time if he feels the work area becomes
unsafe.
• All workers working in an area where traffic is present barricades and signage must
be in place prior to work commencing.
SPOTTING NEAR ENERGIZED LINES

• Complete Tailboard and identify the spotter used, operating voltage of energized
line(s) or equipment and appropriate Limits of Approach distances as outlined in
Alberta Electrical Utility Code 2007.
• When spotting near energized lines the spotter must be a qualified utility
worker.
• Tailboard must contain Limits of Approach distance as specified in the Alberta
Electrical Utility Code 2007 table 4.2, column 4, p. 60.
• Both operator of the equipment and Qualified Electrical Worker (QEW) are to know
which line is energized including its voltage and height prior to commencing work.
• Spotters must wear a signal vest.
• Spotters must communicate with equipment operator using appropriate hand signals.
Review of hand signals for operator and signaller/spotter prior to starting work.
• Spotter will watch all activity surrounding the equipment work area.
Alberta
Section 1(1) g Definition “Competent Worker”
British Columbia
Yukon
Page 2 of 3
Saskatchewan
Manitoba
Ontario
NWT
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Fall Prevention
Created By: Andy Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.028
26.028 FALL PREVENTION

Purpose
To establish minimum requirements and guidelines to provide maximum prevention/
protection against falls from elevation and a minimum standard of training necessary to
ensure personnel understanding and compliance with the program.
Goal
Achieve 100% fall prevention/protection for all personnel exposed to potential falls.
Responsibility
Project management and front line supervision are responsible for supporting and
enforcing this program to ensure 100% compliance by all personnel. Workers must wear
a full body harness and shock absorbing lanyard system and secured where there is a
fall exposure of 10 feet (10’) or more. The Safety Department’s primary responsibilities
will be to support the crafts ownership of the program and to assist in any training
deemed necessary to ensure personnel have sufficient understanding of the program for
successful compliance. At certain worksites Valard’s clients may require that the worker
tie off at six feet (6 ft.)
A Tailboard is to be given to each person assigned work in elevated areas, or in areas,
which present any possibility of falls. Supervisors shall analyze all tasks for their
individual fall potential and then ensure that an adequate fall prevention/ protection
system, which includes rescue plan to address emergencies prior to any work beginning.
Furthermore, supervisors will actively question their employees’ knowledge of the
system being utilized, its proper methods of use, and emergency procedures associated
with the task. A fall protection plan (see page 23) must be in place prior to using the
equipment including a Free Fall Calculation Form (see page 25)
Definitions
• Anchorage - A secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards, or deceleration
devices.
• Valard’s Employee Record Database - Electronic database utilized for storage of all
training records.
• Tailboard - which is performed prior to any task being performed. This is to identify
any hazards associated with the activity and the controls required to minimize them.
• Buckle - Any device for holding the full body harness closed around the employee’s
body.
• Connector - A device, which is used to couple (connect) parts of the personal fall
arrest system and positioning device systems together. It may be an independent
component of the system, such as a carbineer, or it may be an integral component of
the system (such as a buckle or D-ring sewn into a full body harness, or a snap hook
spliced or sewn to a lanyard or retractable lifeline).
• Dangerous Equipment - Equipment (such as pickling or galvanizing tanks,
degreasing units, machinery, electrical equipment, and other units) that, as a result
of form or function, may be hazardous to employees who fall onto or into such
equipment.
Page 1 of 26
• Deceleration Device - Any mechanism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch lanyard,

specially woven lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyard, automatic self-retracting
lifelines, etc., which serves to dissipate a substantial amount of energy during a fall
arrest, or otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee during fall arrest.
• Deceleration Distance - The additional vertical distance a falling employee travels,
excluding the lifeline elongation and free fall distance, before stopping, from the point
at which the deceleration device begins to operate. It is measured as the distance
between the location of an employee’s full body harness attachment point (D-ring) at
the moment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration device
during a fall, and the location of that attachment point after the employee comes to a
full stop.
• Failure - Load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. Load refusal is
the point where the ultimate strength is exceeded.
• Freefall - The act of falling before a personal fall protection system begins to apply
force to arrest the fall.
• Freefall Distance - The vertical displacement of the fall protection attachment point
on the employee’s full body harness between onset of the fall and just before the
system begins to apply force to arrest the fall. This distance excludes deceleration
distance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, but includes any deceleration device slide
distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard extension before they operate and fall
arrest forces occur.
• Full Body Harness - Straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner
that will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest
and shoulders with means for attaching it to other components of a personal fall
arrest system.
• Guardrail System - A barrier erected to prevent employees from falling to lower
levels.
• Hole - A gap or void four inches (4”) or more in its least dimension, in a floor, roof, or
other walking/working surface.
• Lanyard - A flexible line of wire rope or nylon strap which generally has a connector
at each end for connecting a full body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline, or
anchorage.
• Leading Edge - The edge of a floor, roof, or formwork for a floor or other
walking/working surface (such as a deck) which changes location as additional floor,
roof, decking, or formwork sections are placed, formed or constructed. A leading
edge is considered to be an “unprotected side and edge” during periods when it is
not actively and continuously under construction.
• Lifeline - A component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage at
one end to hang vertically (vertical lifeline), or for connection to anchorages at both
ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which serves as a means for
connecting other components of a personal fall protection system to the anchorage.
• Low Slope Roof - A roof having a slope less than or equal to 4 in 12 (vertical to
horizontal).
Page 2 of 26
• Lower Levels - Those areas or surfaces to which an employee can fall. Such
areas or surfaces include, but are not limited to, ground levels, floors, platforms,
ramps, runways, excavations, pits, tanks, material, water, equipment, structures, or
portions thereof.
• Mechanical Equipment - All motor or human propelled wheeled equipment used for
roofing work, except wheelbarrows and mopcarts.
• Opening - A gap or void thirty inches (30”) or more high and eighteen inches (18”) or
more wide, in a wall or partition, through which employees can fall to a lower level.
• Personal Fall Protection System - A system used to arrest an employee in a fall from
a working level. It consists of anchorage, connectors, a full body harness, and a
shock absorbing lanyard and may include a deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable
combinations of these.
• Positioning Device System - A body belt or body harness system rigged to allow an
employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall, and work
with both hands free while leaning. This system must prevent fall potential of
greater than three feet (3’) and be supported with a secured personal fall protection
system.
• Primary Fall Prevention - Elimination of fall exposures through use of guardrail
systems, aerial lifts, scaffolds or alternate work methods such as pre assembly at
ground level.
• Rope Grab - A deceleration device that travels on a lifeline and automatically, by
friction, engages the lifeline and locks so as to arrest the fall of an employee. A rope
grab usually employs the principle of inertial locking cam/level locking, or both.
• Roof - The exterior surface on the top of a building. This does not include floors or
form work, which, because a building has not been completed, temporarily becomes
the top surface of a building.
• Roofing Work - The hoisting, storage, application and removal of roofing materials
and equipment including related insulation, sheet metal, and vapor barrier work, but
not including the construction of the roof deck.
• Secondary Fall Protection - Utilization of fall arrest equipment as a backup to primary
fall prevention systems or in the absence of primary fall prevention systems.
• Self-Retracting Lifeline/Lanyard - A deceleration device containing drum wound line,
which can be slowly extracted from or retracted onto, the drum under slight tension
during normal employee movement, and which, after onset of a fall automatically
locks the drum and arrests the fall.
• Snaphook - A connector comprised of a hook-shaped member with a normally
closed keeper, or similar arrangement, which may be opened to permit the hook to
receive an object and, when released, automatically closes to retain the object. The
locking type with a self-closing keeper which remains closed and locked until
unlocked and pressed open for connection is the only authorized snaphook. Non
locking snap hooks are expressly forbidden for fall prevention/protection purposes.
• Steep Roof - A roof having a slope greater than 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal).
Page 3 of 26
• Toe board - A low protective barrier (minimum of 6 inches in vertical height from
their top edge to the walking/working surface and no more than ¼ inch clearance
above the walking/working surface), that will prevent the fall of materials and
equipment to lower levels and provide protection from falls to personnel.
• Unprotected Sides and Edges - Any side or edge (except entrances to points of
access) of a walking/working surface, e.g., floor, ramp, or runway where there is no
wall or guardrail system at least 36 inches high.
• Walking/Working Surface - Any surface, whether vertical or horizontal on which an
employee walks or works, including, but not limited to floors, roofs, ramps, bridges,
runways, form work and concrete reinforcing steel but not including ladders, vehicles,
or trailers, on which employees must be located to perform their duties.
• Warning Line System - A barrier erected on a low pitch roof, to warn employees that
they are approaching an unprotected side or edge, and which designates an area in
which roofing work may take place without the use of a guardrail, full body harness, or
safety net systems to protect employees within that enclosed area.
• Work Area - The portion of a walking/working surface where job duties are being
performed.
Tie- Off Requirements:
A travel restraint system shall consist of a full body harness with adequate attachment
points or a safety belt. The full body harness or safety belt shall be attached by a lifeline
or lanyard to a fixed support. A fall arrest system shall consist of a full body harness with
adequate attachment points and a lanyard equipped with a shock absorber or similar
device. The fall arrest system shall be attached by a lifeline or by the lanyard to an
independent fixed support. The fall arrest system shall be arranged so that a worker
cannot hit the ground or an object or level below the work. The fall arrest system shall
not include a shock absorber if wearing or using one could cause a worker to hit the
ground or an object or level below the work. The fall arrest system shall not subject a
worker who falls to a peak fall arrest force greater than 8 kilonewtons.
Primary Fall Prevention Systems

Primary fall prevention systems are the preferred choice for performing work in elevated
areas. These systems provide walking and working surfaces that are free from floor/wall
openings and are equipped with standard guardrail systems on all open sides. In most
cases, primary fall prevention systems are sufficient fall prevention methods in
themselves and do not require the use of additional (secondary) fall protection systems
such as harness/lanyard systems. Secondary fall protection systems should only be
utilized after all efforts to employ primary fall prevention systems have been exhausted
or when being used in concert with primary systems.
Inspections
All Harnesses are to be inspected daily by the user who is competent and in addition An
annual inspection is to be performed by an qualified employee who is trained in
inspecting Fall Arrest Harnesses. A tag shall be attached to the chest strap identifying
the last annual Inspection date.
Page 4 of 26
Scaffolding/Temporary Work Platforms

Every effort shall be made to ensure all temporary platforms/walkways are equipped with
solid decking free of openings and standards guardrail systems.
• Personnel working or traveling on temporary elevated platforms shall wear an
approved safety harness/lanyard system at all times.
• Personnel working/traveling on temporary platforms with fall exposure shall secure
their lanyards to an anchorage point capable of supporting 5,000 pounds or
designed as part of a complete personal fall arrest system which maintains a safety
factor of at least two (2).
• Personnel working/traveling on complete temporary platforms, free from deck
openings and equipped with standard guardrails are not required to secure their
lanyards if they remain within the confines of the temporary platform and guardrail
system.
• All temporary platforms shall meet engineering and manufactures specifications,
prior to any employee usage of the platform.
• Temporary work platforms shall be inspected daily by designated competent persons
prior to use by any personnel. A tag shall be placed on the platform to readily
identify the platform as inspected and safe for use.
• Every temporary work platform shall be provided with a safe means of
access/egress. Retractable lifelines shall be used while ascending or descending
access ladders to temporary work platforms or walkways with a fall hazard greater
than ten feet (10’).
Guardrail Systems
Guardrail systems are an integral part of many primary fall prevention systems which are
to be used whenever practicable and whenever utilized, must be constructed with
absolute certainty of integrity and structural soundness. Guardrail systems must meet
the following minimum requirements:
• Top rail must be 39 inches + or - 3 inches, above the walking/working surface
• Midrails must be installed at a height midway between the top edge of the guardrail
system and the walking/working level.
• Guardrail systems shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least
200 pounds applied within 2 inches of the top edge, in any outward or downward
direction at any point along the top edge.
• When a 200-pound load is applied to the top handrail it shall not deflect to a height
less than 39” above the walking/working level.
• Midrails must be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 150
pounds applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the midrail.
• If wire rope is used for top rails, it must be flagged at not more than 6 foot intervals
with high visibility material.
Page 5 of 26
Ladders
• Permanent caged ladders being used to access complete structures where no fall
exposure exists, may be ascended/descended without wearing a safety
harness/lanyard.
• Temporary construction ladders shall extend at least thirty-six inches (36”) above the
upper landing being accessed and be secured against displacement.
• Temporary construction ladders and portable ladders (e.g., extension ladders, step
ladders, etc.) placed for repeated access/egress to elevations with a fall hazard
greater than twelve feet (12’) shall be equipped with retractable lifelines. Personnel
ascending or descending these ladders shall secure the retractable lifeline to their
safety harness prior to ladder use.
• One time access/egress on a portable ladder does not require the use of a
retractable lifeline. The following procedure shall be utilized when a retractable
lifeline is not required.
a) Personnel preparing to perform a new work activity must receive a specific
Valard Tailboard concerning the use of portable ladders and associated fall
protection techniques.
b) Personnel ascending ladders that are not yet secured at the top must have
another employee hold the ladder at the bottom until it can be properly
secured. This also includes the last trip down after untying the ladder at the
top.
c) Upon reaching the elevation where the work is to be performed, the employee
shall secure their shock-absorbing lanyard prior to proceeding with the task.
The ladder should then be properly secured and the task may begin. When
the task is completed, this process should be reversed with the shock-
absorbing lanyard being the last protective device to be released prior to
descent.
d) Absolutely no objects, tools, or materials are to be carried in hands while
ascending/descending ladders.
Covers
Covers for holes in floors, roofs, and other walking/working surfaces shall meet the
following requirements:
1. Covers located in roadways and vehicular aisles shall be capable of supporting,
without failure, at least twice the maximum axle load of the largest vehicle or piece of
equipment expected to cross over the cover.
2. All other covers shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least twice the
weight of employees, equipment, and materials that may be imposed on the cover at
any one time.
3. All covers shall be secured when installed so as to prevent accidental displacement
by the wind, equipment, or employees.
4. All covers shall be marked with the words “HOLE COVER - DO NOT REMOVE” in
order to provide adequate warning of the hazard.
Page 6 of 26
5. Only authorized personnel shall be permitted to remove hole covers.

6. Prior to removing covers, the area shall be barricaded to prevent employees from
accidentally stepping through an opening.
7. For short duration tasks (single shift), barricade tape may be used to warn
employees provided the opening is attended by a monitor at all times. The monitor
shall have no other duties.
8. Barricade tape shall be erected a minimum distance of 6 feet from the opening.
Warning Lines
Warning line systems are designed to be utilized while performing work on low-slope
roofs or flat work areas. The warning line allows employees to readily note when they
are approaching an unprotected edge.
a) The warning line shall be erected around all open sides of the work area.
b) When mechanical equipment is not being used, the warning line shall be erected not
less than six feet (6’) from the edge.
c) When mechanical equipment is being used, the warning line shall be erected not
less than six feet (6’) from the edge which is parallel to the direction of mechanical
equipment operation, and not less than ten feet (10’) from the edge which is
perpendicular to the direction of mechanical equipment operation.
d) Points of access, material handling areas, storage areas, and hoisting areas shall be
attached to the work area by an access path formed by two (2) warning lines.
e) When the path to a point of access is not in use, a rope, wire, chain, or other
barricade, equivalent in strength and height to the warning line system, shall be
placed across the path at the point where the path intersects the warning line system
placed around the work area, or the path shall be offset such that an employee
cannot walk directly into the work area.
f) Warning lines shall consist of rope or wire cables, and supporting stanchions
erected as follows:
g) The rope or wire cable shall be flagged at not more than 6 feet (6’) intervals with
high visibility material.
h) The rope or wire cable shall be rigged and supported in such a way that its lowest
point (including sag) is no less than thirty-one inches (31”) from the walking/working
surface and its highest point is no more than thirty-nine inches (39”) from the
walking/working surface.
i) After being erected, with the rope or wire cable attached, stanchions shall be capable
of resisting, without tipping over, a force of at least sixteen pounds (16 lbs.) applied
horizontally against the stanchion, thirty inches (30”) above the walking/working
surface, perpendicular to the warning line, and in the direction of the floor, roof, or
platform edge.
j) The rope or wire cable shall have a minimum tensile strength of five hundred
pounds (500 lbs.), and after being attached to the stanchions, shall be capable of
supporting, without failure, the loads applied to the stanchions as prescribed in
paragraph (C) of this section.
Page 7 of 26
k) The line shall be attached at each stanchion in such a way that pulling on one
section of the line between stanchions will not result in slack being taken up in
adjacent sections before the stanchion tips over.
Personnel working outside the protection of a warning line system shall be protected by
either a personal fall protection system or a safety net system at all times when there is a
fall potential of ten feet (10’) or more. A warning line system DOES NOT allow workers
to be unprotected from potential fall exposures.
Personnel Restraint Systems

Restraint systems are designed to restrain movement so that a fall is not possible. The
system must have the capacity to withstand at least 3,000 pounds, or twice the
maximum expected force that is needed to restrain the person from exposure to the fall
hazard. In determining this force consideration should be given to site specific factors
such as, but not limited to, the force generated by a person walking, leaning, or even
sliding down a steep roof.
Secondary Fall Protection Systems

These systems must be worn and used in the absence of Primary Fall Prevention
Systems.
Full Body Harness/Shock Absorbing Lanyards

• A full body harness and shock absorbing lanyard system shall be worn and secured
where there is a fall exposure of ten Feet (10) or if required by client or owner may
be superseded with their requirements of a 6 ft. or greater fall exposure.
• If the work is located on a permanent structure and no fall potential is created by the
work or by the condition of the structure, full body harnesses are not required.
• If the work is located on a complete scaffold where no fall potential is created by the
work or the condition of the scaffold, full body harnesses shall be worn but tie off is
not required.
• When accessing a complete permanent structure by climbing a permanent caged
ladder, a full body harness is not required.
• NOTE: If at any time an employee is forced to reach, or position any part of their
body beyond the plane of the structures boundaries (i.e. guardrail system), full body
harnesses shall be worn and secured to ensure 100% fall protection.
Shock Absorbing Lanyard

Page 8 of 26
To ensure the integrity of the equipment being used and success of the Fall
Prevention/Protection Program, the following shall be strictly adhered to:
• Only full body harnesses/shock absorbing lanyard systems approved by Valard may
be used on any project. Personal safety harnesses/lanyard systems are strictly
forbidden.
• Lanyards must be of the shock absorbing type when used for fall protection.
• Shock absorbing lanyards shall only be used for fall protection and are never to be
used for positioning or material transport.
• The shock-absorbing lanyard shall be secured to the D-ring located on the back of
the harness between the shoulder blades.
• The shock absorbing or deceleration device shall be secured adjacent to the harness
D-ring.
• D-rings located at the waist may only be used for positioning or with rail-type ladder
climbing devices.
• D-rings located on the front of the harness shall only be used for attachment to rail-
mounted ladder climbing devices.
• Full body harnesses/shock absorbing lanyards shall be attached to an anchorage
point capable of supporting an impact load of 5,000 pounds or twice the potential
impact load of the engineered fall protection system.
• Full body harnesses and shock-absorbing lanyards shall be secured to limit potential
free-fall distance to 11 Feet (11’) or less.
• When connecting to a metal Sling (dog leash type) with red coating shall have to
loops connected to each other with a locking type carabiner to which the Lanyard
snap hook is to be connected to. Connecting the snap hook directly to the loops is
prohibited.
• Snap hooks attached to shock absorbing lanyards shall be of the double
action/locking type design. Simple spring resistant snap hooks shall not be used for
fall protection.
• Employees using a full body harness and shock absorbing lanyards shall inspect
them for wear, damage and other deterioration prior to each use.
• All full body harnesses and shock absorbing lanyards shall be inspected annually by
a designated competent person(s) and completed on the Fall Arrest Inspection Form
on Page 22 of this SWP to indicate a current inspection.
• Defective full body harnesses and shock absorbing lanyards shall be tagged
“DEFECTIVE - DO NOT USE” and immediately removed from service.
• Full body harnesses and shock absorbing lanyards subjected to impact loading shall
be immediately removed from service and shall not be used again for employee
protection until inspected and determined by a competent person to be undamaged
and suitable for reuse.
Page 9 of 26
Anchorage Points
Anchorage Points - The strength of a personnel fall arrest system is based on its being
attached to an anchorage system, which does not reduce the strength of the system.
The following equipment and structure will not meet the requirements of the OH&S fall
protection standard and shall not be used for anchorage points.
a) Screw Pipe
b) Conduit
c) Cable Tray (Use requires engineering approval)
d) Welded Pipe Less Than 2”
e) Wooden Handrails
Positioning Device Systems
Work positioning systems are sometimes required for specialized tasks such as
installing vertical rebar walls. Personnel utilizing positioning systems must adhere to the
following minimum guidelines.
• Personal positioning belts will only be allowed after they have been inspected and
found acceptable by the onsite safety representative. A method for readily
identifying inspected belts must be developed by the jobsite to ensure all positioning
belts in use have been approved.
• Positioning belts of any kind shall not be used as fall protection systems at any time.
• Work positioning lanyards are to be attached to D-rings at the waist belt location and
be supported by an appropriate work belt/harness. Positioning lanyards shall not be
of the shock absorbing type and shall not be used for fall protection.
• The positioning type lanyard shall limit fall potential to three feet (3’) or less.
• The positioning lanyard must always be backed up by a properly secured shock
absorbing fall protection lanyard or retractable lifeline reel.
• While ascending or descending vertical rebar walls, 100% fall protection shall be
maintained by utilizing the shock absorbing double lanyard system or retractable
lifeline reels.
• Snap hooks on positioning lanyards shall be of the double action/locking type design.
Simple spring resistant hooks shall not be used.
• Employees using positioning belts/harnesses and lanyards shall inspect them for
wear, damage and other deterioration prior to each use.
• All positioning belts/harnesses and lanyards shall be inspected at least monthly by a
designated competent persons(s) and subsequently color-coded or tagged to
indicate a current inspection.
• Defective positioning belts/harnesses and lanyards shall be tagged “DEFECTIVE -
DO NOT USE” and immediately removed from service.
• Positioning devices shall be secured to an anchorage capable of supporting at least
twice the potential impact load of an employee’s fall or 3,000 pounds, whichever is
greater.
Page 10 of 26
Lifeline Systems
Lifeline systems are points of attachment for fall protection lanyards and harnesses.
Lifelines may be mounted either vertically or horizontally and are designed to provide
fall protection for personnel working in elevated areas.
• Lifelines shall not be used for any other purpose than fall protection.
• Lifelines shall be protected against being cut or abraded (i.e. Softeners around
lifelines at anchorage point.)
• Lifelines shall be inspected, by a competent person(s) at least weekly to ensure
system and equipment integrity. The project shall develop a method to readily
identify that the lifeline has been inspected and is fit for use prior to beginning any
work involving the lifeline system.
Lifeline Placement/Installation
Utilize the engineered systems included as part of this procedure or the project will be
required to design and engineer a system for their particular needs. Approved
engineered drawings must be kept on file at the project. A registered professional
engineer must approve all engineered systems.
Lifelines must be installed and used under the supervision of a qualified person. Only
designated qualified persons that have been approved by the project
manager/superintendent and safety representative will be allowed to supervise the
installation. Written documentation on personnel qualified to supervise the installation of
lifelines shall be kept on file at the project.
Horizontal Lifelines
• Systems must be designed and engineered to maintain a safety factor of at least two
(2).
• Utilize the engineered systems included, as part of this procedure or the project will
be required to design and engineer a system for their particular needs. This must be
done under the approval of a professional engineer. Approved engineered drawings
must be kept on file at the project.
• Lifelines shall be installed, removed and used under the supervision of a designated
qualified person(s).
• Written documentation on personnel qualified to supervise the installation of lifelines
will be kept on file at the project.
Carabiner
Page 11 of 26
Vertical Lifelines
• Must have a minimum breaking strength of at least 5000 pounds.
• Utilize the engineered systems included in this procedure (see appendices) or the
project will be required to design and engineer a system for their particular needs.
Approved engineered drawings must be kept on file at the project.
• Only designated qualified persons that have been approved by the superintendent
and safety representative will be allowed to supervise installation.
• Written documentation on personnel qualified to supervise the installation of lifelines
will be kept on file at the project.
Retractable Lifeline System
• Retractable lifelines are devices that when properly utilized, will serve to stop the free
fall of an employee prior to the employee striking a lower surface.
• Retractable lifeline devices shall be attached to an anchorage point capable of
upporting 5,000 pounds or designed and installed as part of a fall arrest system that
maintains a safety factor of two (2).
• Retractable lifelines shall be secured by, as a minimum 3/8” wire rope chokers or
slings and ½” shackles. The slings and shackles designated for fall protection shall
only be used for fall protection purposes. ROPE (synthetic or natural fiber) SHALL
NOT BE USED TO SECURE THESE DEVICES.
Retractable
Wire Sling
Nylon Sling
• A competent person(s) shall inspect all slings, chokers and shackles annually.
• Each retractable lifeline device shall be equipped with a rope tag line for extending
• Lifelines shall be placed above every temporary construction ladder that is to be
used for repeated access/egress and exposes employees to a fall hazard greater the
device to elevations below the point of attachment.
• Retractable than twelve feet (12'). The retractable device shall be attached in such a
manner that it does not interfere with the employee who is using the ladder for
access or egress.
Page 12 of 26
• A competent person shall inspect retractable lifeline systems, at least monthly.

• Retractable lifelines devices shall only be installed by employees specifically trained
and designated competent for that task.
ANCHOR
M O UN T N
I G SUR FAC E
W ARN NI G
W HEN NI U SE
C LO SE AND LO CK
KEEPER M U ST
Connectors Toggles
These devices lock into structural steel bolt holes to provide an anchorage point for a
shock-absorbing lanyard. These devices are to be used by structural iron connectors
and bolt up personnel during steel erection.
• Connectors toggles shall be able to withstand 5000 pounds impact load or twice the
potential impact load of an engineered fall protection system.
Concrete Form Anchorage Points
These devices attach to patented concrete forms to provide an attachment point for a
shock-absorbing lanyard. They are to be used when placing concrete forms at
elevations where a fall exposure exists.
Concrete form anchorage points shall be able to withstand 5000 pounds impact load or
twice the potential impact load of an engineered fall protection system.
Reinforcement Steel/Concrete Form Work
Personnel working on rebar walls, piers and on concrete form walls must have fall
protection 100% of the time they are exposed to a potential fall. This fall protection can
be achieved by utilizing one of the following options.
a) Double lanyard system
b) Retractable lifelines
c) Manlifts
Personnel working towers/poles generally require the use of work positioning belt and
lanyard. The positioning belt/lanyard shall be used in conjunction with a harness/lanyard
that has been properly secured to provide fall protection.
Page 13 of 26
Positioning Harness
Structural Steel Erection

Personnel erecting skeletal steel structures shall maintain 100% fall
prevention/protection through the use of personal fall protection systems, retractable
lifelines, connectors toggles, and aerial lifts (JLG, Snorkel, etc.).
• Access to structural steel shall be obtained by use of ladders, aerial lifts, or other
approved personnel hoisting devices. Climbing of structural steel members such as
columns and diagonal braces is expressly forbidden.
• Prior to and during lifeline system placement, personnel shall crawl (coon) steel
members with shock absorbing lanyards secured around said steel members.
Retractable lifeline systems secured at elevations above the operation may be used
in some situations.
Personnel Lifts/Hoisting Device
Aerial Lifts/ Buckets (JLG, Scissors, Snorkel, Etc.)
Personnel riding in or working from these lifts must secure their safety lanyard to the lift
basket. When using a bucket type (truck mounted) the lanyard must be attached to either
the boom with a sling and a carabineer or the approved anchor point if it is available.
Crane Hoisted Personnel Baskets

Use of these devices shall comply with the safety procedures set forth in the OH&S regs.
Personnel riding in or working from personnel baskets must secure their lanyard to the
basket or an overhead attachment point at all times while aloft.
Page 14 of 26
ROOFING
Low Slope Roof Applications
Employees engaged in work activities on low slopes roofs, with unprotected sides and
edges ten feet (10’) or more above a lower level, shall be provided 100% fall prevention/
protection by utilizing guardrail systems, personal fall protection systems, safety net
systems, or warning lines.
When warning line systems are used, the line shall be placed at least six feet (6’) away from
any unprotected side or edge, except when mechanical equipment is being utilized a
minimum of ten feet (10’) is required. Any employee working between the roof edge and
warning line must be protected by a personal fall protection system.
High Slope Roof Applications
Employees engaged in work activities on high slope roofs, with unprotected sides and edges
ten feet (10’) or more above a lower level shall be provided 100% fall prevention/ protection
by guardrail systems, personal fall protection systems, safety net systems, or lifeline
systems.
Personal fall protection systems must remain secured at all times while the fall exposure of
ten feet or more is present.
Employees shall receive tailboard prior to beginning any task located on a high slope roof.
Excavations
Excavations where workers are required to work closer than 6 feet (6 ft) to the excavation
be provided with fall prevention/protection devices adequate to protect personnel working or
traveling adjacent to them. The preferred method for safeguarding this fall exposure is with
rigid guardrail systems immediately adjacent to the excavation. Where personnel are
required to work immediately adjacent to the excavation and guardrail systems do not
provide adequate protection, employees shall be provided fall restraint and/or lifeline
systems to which they can secure their safety lanyard/harness.
Employees shall remain secured to a lifeline or restraint system when working within six feet (6’)
of an excavation with unprotected sides or edges.
Systems and employee restraint systems shall meet engineered drawing and technical
specification prior to use.
Fall Protection on Wood Poles:
When climbers have to pass obstacles such as telephone cables or cross arms, they must wear
a retracting lanyard.
On the way up and on the way down, the ends of the (first) pole strap is attached to both of the
lateral D-rings. When an obstacle is reached the retracting lanyard is passed round the pole
above the obstacle.
The first pole strap must remain in place until the retracting lanyard is anchored to the opposite
D-ring or to itself. It is then unsnapped at one end and reconnected above the obstacle on the
way up, or below it on the way down. All workers who climb wooden poles including supervisors
must have completed their First Aid/CPR training and annually perform a Pole Top Rescue as
Page 15 of 26
per SOP 27. 003 - Pole Top Rescue. Rescue Equipment for both Pole Top and Structure
rescue must at the worksite at all times. This equipment must be checked prior to any climbing.
Fall Protection on Metal Towers:
For qualified and authorized workers, free climbing without the use of fall protection equipment
is not permitted for ascending, descending, or lateral movement. Two belts with large snap
hooks can be used. All workers who perform work on Structures including the supervisors must
receive First Aid/CPR and Structure Rescue as per SOP 27.001 Tower Rescue.
For performing conductor assessments, a personal fall protection system is necessary. A
typical way of achieving this is to suspend a 6m retracting life-line block above the insulator
string, or work position and attach its free end to the dorsal D-ring on the worker’s body
harness. A work-positioning strap is used as well. (Some utilities attach the retracting lifeline
hook to a strong hook at the end of a lightweight pole, called a shepherd’s crook). The climber
attaches the end of the life-line to his dorsal D-ring, then reaches up with the pole and places
the hook on a cross member above him. The lifeline retracts as he climbs, and the process is
repeated as necessary.
• Accepted and tested equipment for use with a shock absorber and lanyard as part of the fall
arrest system:
• Jelco or Fujii Denko hooks when connecting directly to the lattice steel members and joints
• MSA FP CE0639 Aluminum hooks when connecting to the step bolt
Approved Fall Protection Devices are:
• Miller pole straps
• Jelco pole straps
• Jelco retractable
• Miller retractable
Dangerous Equipment Application
• Each employee less than 10 feet (10’) above dangerous equipment shall be protected from
falling into or onto dangerous equipment by guardrail systems or by equipment guards.
• Each employee ten feet (10’) or more above dangerous equipment shall be protected from
fall potential by guardrail systems, secured personal fall protection systems, safety net
systems, or employee restraint systems.
• Lifeline and restraint systems shall meet engineered drawing and technical specifications
prior to use.
Free Fall Calculation
All workers that are required to work aloft must complete;
• Fall Protection Plan
• Free Fall Distance Calculation Form
Training
• Employees that have the potential to be exposed to a fall hazard shall be trained prior to
starting work.
Page 16 of 26
• A competent person designated by the project manager/ superintendent and site safety
representative must conduct training.
• As a minimum training shall include the following:
1. Valard Construction’s Fall Prevention training program (See ATTACHMENT I)
2. Any fall protection equipment, procedures, or hazards unique to the site that are not
included in the Fall Prevention Training Program.
Training must be documented with a written certification record and entered into the Employee
Training Database System.
1. Certification records must include the following information:
a) Title and summary of the training.
b) The identity of the employee(s) trained (name, signature)
c) Date and location of the training (project name, number, and location).
d) Name and signature of the competent person that conducted the training.
2. Personnel performing the training shall be designated in writing with documentation
being maintained by the project safety and health representative.
3. Personnel performing the training must be qualified in the following areas:
a) The nature of fall hazards in the work area.
b) The correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, disassembling, and inspecting the
fall protection system to be used.
c) The use and operation of guardrail systems, personal fall protection systems, safety
net systems, warning lines systems, and other protection to be utilized.
d) The limitations on the use of mechanical equipment during the performance of
roofing work on low-sloped roofs.
e) The correct procedures for the handling and storage of equipment and materials and
the erection of overhead protection.
Retraining
• Retraining in fall protection must be conducted anytime there is a reason to believe
that an employee does not have the necessary knowledge and skills to comply with
the fall protection/prevention program.
• A designated competent person must conduct retraining.
• Retraining is required under the following circumstances:
• Changes in the workplace render previous training obsolete.
• Changes in the types of fall protection system or equipment to be used render
previous training obsolete.
• Observations of inadequacies in an affected employee’s knowledge or use of fall
protection systems/equipment indicate that the employee has not retained the
requisite understanding or skill.
Page 17 of 26
• Employee infractions of the fall prevention/protection program must be

documented and the employee retrained in the applicable area of the program
violated.
• Retraining must be documented with a written certification record and entered into
Valard’s Employee Training Records Database (same requirements as for initial
training).
ATTACHMENT I
FALL PREVENTION/PROTECTION TRAINING PROGRAM
INTRODUCTION
A. Falls are the leading cause of work related death in the construction industry.
B. Falls account for 40,000 to 75,000 work related injuries and 80 to 100 fatalities
annually.
RECOGNITION OF POTENTIAL FALL HAZARDS

A. Unprotected sides and edges.
1. Platforms
2. Walkways and ramps
B. Floor Openings
C. Wall Openings
D. Pipe Racks and Skeletal Steel
E. Scaffolds
F. Ladders
1. Extension
2. Step
G. Roofs
H. Vertical Walls
1. Reinforcing steel work
2. Concrete form installation
I. Excavations
J. Pits, shafts and manholes
K. Equipment (crane booms, maintenance, etc.)
OVERVIEW OF VALARD’S PROCEDURE
Be sure to add any job specific procedures, equipment or hazards that are not included
in the Engineering and Construction Procedure. Emphasis should be placed on
elimination of the exposure first and utilization of fall protection equipment as a last
resort.
Page 18 of 26
HANDS ON DEMO OF EQUIPMENT

(Set up a mock work area where the instructor can demonstrate and employees can
practice hands on use of equipment. As a minimum the demo shall include the following
items.)
A. Harness and Lanyard
1. Teach and demonstrate proper donning procedure (per manufacturer’s guideline).
a) Proper fit
b) Proper positioning
c) Proper equipment inspection protocol.
2. Demonstrate correct use and storage of lanyards.
a) Secure overhead to limit fall potential to a maximum of eleven feet (11’).
b) Minimize swing fall hazard by securing lanyard directly overhead.
c) Allow adequate clearance to prevent striking objects below (Shock absorber
will elongate upon activation.)
d) Never snap two (2) lanyards together for extra length.
e) Never tie knots in a lanyard.
f) Steel lanyard required for welders.
g) Shock absorber end must be secured adjacent to harness.
h) Never hook shock-absorbing lanyards to a retractable reel.
i) Store lanyards rolled up out of the way to eliminate a trip or snag hazard.
3. Explain and demonstrate proper use of “D”-Rings.
1. Front “D”-Ring must only be utilized for attachment to rail-mounted ladder
climbing devices.
2. Side “D”-Rings are designed only for positioning.
3. Back “D”-Ring located between the shoulders must be utilized to attach
shock-absorbing lanyard to the harness. (Also to be utilized for direct hook up
to retractable lifelines.)
4. Review manufacturers recommended inspection procedure (by user before each
use).
a) Faulty latches or snaps
b) Cuts and abrasions
c) Burns
d) Dry rot
e) Chemical Damage
f) Excessive wear
g) Loose or torn stitches
Page 19 of 26
5. Movement and access in elevated areas

a) Always tie-off before accessing work areas where a fall exposure exists.
b) Two (2) lanyards will be required to provide continuous tie-off while climbing
through pipe racks or structures.
c) Tie-off to approved anchorage points (reference written procedure).
d) IF FALL PROTECTION TIE-OFF IS NOT AVAILABLE DO NOT ACCESS
THE AREA!
e) ALWAYS connect the second lanyard before unfastening the first lanyard
when traveling in elevated areas.
B. Explain and demonstrate use of anchorage devices such as straps, connector
toggles, etc.
C. Retractable Lifelines
1. Inspect daily prior to use.
a) Check housing for dents or signs of abuse.
b) Check cable for kinks, caging, unlaying, broken wires, heat damage and
excessive wear.
c) Pull on cable and make sure it moves smoothly.
d) Give the cable a quick pull to ensure the brake is engaging properly.
e) Check snap hooks for sign of alternations, distortions, cracks, dents or cuts.
f) Check pressed metal sleeves on cable for cracks or excessive wear.
g) Check anchorage for proper connections.
2. Proper care of unit.
a) Never drop the unit from any height.
b) Protect the cable from sharp corners and edges.
c) Don’t allow foreign matter to enter the housing.
d) NEVER permit the cable to re-reel uncontrollably back into the device.
e) Do not leave cable extended for prolonged periods of time.
f) Do not stretch welding leads or electrical cords across the cable.
3. Demonstrate and review proper use of unit.
a) Snap hook shall be secured directly to the back “D”-Ring (Do Not Use safety
lanyard for attachment to retractable lifeline.)
b) Swing fall must be minimized. Never install the unit where the cable will make
an angle of greatest than thirty degrees (30°) with vertical.
c) Allow a minimum clearance of forty inches (40’) in the event of a fall.
Page 20 of 26
d) Do not work with cable at full extension (at least three feet [3’] must remain
on the device).
e) Cable should not pass over sharp corners.
f) Only designed for one (1) person at a time (75-300 lbs.).
g) Never to be used as a work positioning device.
h) Do not allow cable to pass under arms, between legs, or wrap around any
part of the body.
i) Do NOT climb above the anchorage point.
j) If used to arrest a fall, a competent person must inspect the unit prior to it
being put back in service.
Alberta
Part 9 -Fall Protection -All Sections
British Columbia
Part 11- Fall Protection- All
Yukon
Part 1- General- Section 1.37-1.43- Fall Arrest
Saskatchewan
Part VII- Personal Protective Equipment – Section 101-107 – Fall Arrest
Manitoba
Part 14 – Fall Protection –All
Ontario
Part II- General Construction – Section 26&27
NWT
Part II – Personal Protective Equipment – Section 57-60
Page 21 of 26
9.7 FALL ARREST EQUIPMENT INSPECTION FORM
Employee Name: _____________________________________ Date:______________________________

Print Full Legal Name
Employee Signature: ____________________________________ Employee Code: _____________________
Competent/Trained Inspector: _________________________________________

LANYARD Safe Unsafe N/A Comments
Check rope for damaged fibers and strands ☐ ☐ ☐
Inspect the splices for loose strands ☐ ☐ ☐
Thimbles in good shape / secure ☐ ☐ ☐
Hooks – free of cracks, corrosion pits or
☐ ☐ ☐
distortion
Keeper freely without binding and the spring
exerts enough pressure to remain firmly ☐ ☐ ☐
closed
Check shock absorber for signs of over
☐ ☐ ☐
tension
Identification tag and labels are in place and
☐ ☐ ☐
legible
BODY BELTS Safe Unsafe N/A Comments
D-rings not bent or corroded ☐ ☐ ☐
Free from cuts or tears ☐ ☐ ☐
Rivets and stitching intact and secure ☐ ☐ ☐
Seat belt free from contamination ☐ ☐ ☐
No handmade hooks ☐ ☐ ☐
Hardware attachments in good order (no
☐ ☐ ☐
burns or loose stitching)
Properly attached tool bag ☐ ☐ ☐
HOOKS / GAFFS Safe Unsafe N/A Comments
Acceptable hook length ☐ ☐ ☐
Nylon straps in acceptable order ☐ ☐ ☐
Hooks acceptably sharpened ☐ ☐ ☐
Gaffe screws tight ☐ ☐ ☐
All adjustable and replaceable parts in good
☐ ☐ ☐
order and securely fastened
BODY HARNESS Yes No N/A Comments
D-ring pad free of rips ☐ ☐ ☐
Rivets tightly secured ☐ ☐ ☐
Grommets must be tight ☐ ☐ ☐
Buckles are working properly and not bent ☐ ☐ ☐
Webbing free from cuts, broken / pulled
☐ ☐ ☐
stitches, frayed or damaged strands
Buckles and D-rings free from cracks and
☐ ☐ ☐
deformities
POLE STRAPS Yes No N/A Comments
Free from wear and cuts ☐ ☐ ☐
Attachments in good order ☐ ☐ ☐
WORK:
To be completed annually by the employee. Send forms to valardsafetyadmin@valard.com.
Page 22 of 26
Document Description Fall Protection Plan
Date: Mar. 24, 2015 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Sept 20, 2018
Work Location: Supervisor: Date:
Job #: Scope of Work:
Fall Hazards
☐ Falling from Structure ☐ Open Holes ☐ Missing Guardrails Other:
☐ Falling from Wooden Pole ☐ Trip Hazards ☐ Moving Equipment ☐
☐ Unguarded Edges ☐ Obstruction ☐ Wind Hazards ☐
☐ Ladders Below ☐ Manholes ☐
☐Boom Supported
Platforms
Describe the Hazards: (Include obstructions, locations, dimensions etc.)
Type of Fall Arrest or Restraint Equipment

☐ Lanyard C/W Shock Absorber ☐ Vertical Lifeline ☐ Anchor Connectors
☐ Carabiners ☐ Safety Net ☐ Retrieval Tripod
☐ Fixed Anchor ☐ Linesman Belt C/W Chocker ☐ Barricades
☐ Rope Grab ☐ Deceleration Device ☐
☐ Horizontal Lifeline ☐ Self retracting lifeline ☐
Anchorage Points To Be Used For Fall Arrest

Types of Anchors:
Location of Anchors:
Describe Procedure to Inspect, Maintain, Install of Fall protection Systems/ to be used and completed/attached Free Fall
Distance Form .
Identify the method of providing protection for workers who may be in or pass through the area below the overhead work
activity
☐ Barricading ☐ Catch Nets
☐ Warning Signs ☐ Other:
Rescuers (Trained)
1. 4.
2. 5.
3. 6.
Type of Rescue Procedure to be used: ☐ Pole Top Rescue ☐ Tower Rescue ☐ Bucket Rescue/Escape
System to be used to access Injured Worker
☐ Rescue Ladder ☐ Elevated Work Platform
☐ Climb Structure/Pole ☐ Aerial Equipment
☐ Crane Manbasket ☐ Other:
Critical Rescue Factors
Additional Anchor Point Required:
Landing Area:
Rescue Obstruction/Hazards:
Method used to remove Injured Worker:
Has the Rescue Equipment been inspected and is in good Condition? Yes ☐ No ☐
Is the Equipment Adequate for the Rescue Plan? Yes ☐ No ☐
Is a first-aider present who understands Suspension Trauma and the recovery positions? Yes ☐ No ☐
If working near or over water; is there approved flotation device available for the worker? Yes ☐ No ☐
If working near or over water, is there a boat available? Yes ☐ No ☐
Page 23 of 26
Free Fall Distance

Definitions:
L = Length of lanyard: Most Lanyards come in lengths of 4-6 feet and have an energy absorber built into
them.
DH = Height of the Dorsal D-ring: This height is measured from the worker’s feet to the point where the
D-ring is positioned between there shoulder blades. Most D-rings will sit at five (5) feet high on some
one that is six feet tall, when properly wearing a harness; this height may increase the taller the
worker is. The value that a competent person uses for DH is either specific to each employee or
chosen based on the employee with the tallest D-ring height.
A = Height of Anchorage: This is measured from the working surface of the worker (where his feet are
positioned on climbing structure) to the point of where his fall arrest is attached to his anchor point.
FFD = Free Fall Distance = L + DH – A: The vertical distance a worker travels between the onset of a
fall until just prior to the point where the Fall Arrest System begins to arrest the fall.
DD = Deceleration Distance: The vertical distance a worker travels between the activation of the Fall
Arrest System and final fall arrest. This is found in the manufacturer’s Instructions or on the
label. This number will be the maximum deployment length of the energy absorber during the course
of the fall. Most energy absorbers have a maximum Deceleration Distance of four (4) feet.
DS = D-ring Slippage: This variable accounts for the relative change in position of the rear dorsal D-ring
when fall arrest forces are applied to the harness. When a properly adjusted non-elastic full-body
harness supports a worker’s weight, the D-ring attachment point generally shifts up the body by no
more than one (1) foot. Therefore, it is common for competent persons to use a distance of one (1)
foot in fall-clearance calculations to account for harness effects.
TFD = Total Fall Distance = FFD + DD + DS: Total Fall Distance is the distance required to fully arrest a
fall.
SM = Safety Margin: Since DD already accounts for harness displacement, a competent person might
choose to use two (2) feet for a SM. In the event that an abbreviated version of the required
clearance calculation is used; one that does not have separate variables for harness effects and
vertical elongation; then the safety factor may need to be as much as three (3) feet. Deciding which
value to use is part of the analysis needed for fall-clearance calculations and often requires both
research and expertise.
CR = Clearance Requirement = TFD + DH + SM: Fall Clearance Requirement (distance) is defined as
the height at which a worker must attach to an anchorage to avoid contact with a lower level. This
important calculation may help in the selection of which fall protection system may work the best for
your workplace duties.
Page 24 of 26
7(a) Free Fall Distance Calculating Form

Legend
A Height of Anchorage Free Fall Distance FFD = L + DH – A
CR Clearance Requirement
DD Deceleration Distance
Total Fall Distance TFD = FFD + DD + DS
DH Height of D-ring
DS D-ring Slippage
FFD Free Fall Distance Clearance Requirement CR = TFD + DH + SM
L Length of Lanyard
SM Safety Margin
TFD Total Fall Distance
Free Fall Distance Calculation
+ - =
L DH A FFD
+ + =
FFD DD DS TFD
+ + =
TDF DH SM CR
Calculations by:
(Print Name)
Signature:
Date:
Page 25 of 26
By signing below, I acknowledge that I have read and agree to abide by all aspects of this Fall Protection Plan. I
further understand that if there are any changes in the conditions that were identified from the initial plan, a new Fall
Protection Plan (FPP) and Free Fall Calculation will be required.
Name (please print) Fall Protection Equipment Insp. Signature Date
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Page 26 of 26
Document Description Cold Weather Work
26.029 COLD WEATHER WORK
PURPOSE
To prevent cold-related injuries/stresses in the work environment, by providing guidance

in the types, recognition, evaluation and control of potentially cold conditions.
DEFINITIONS
To better understand local / site weather forecast and or bulletins, it is important to have
some knowledge and understanding of the more common meteorological terms, used by
weather forecasters.
Blizzard – A severe storm lasting 3 or more hours, with low temperatures, strong winds
and poor visibility due to blowing snow.
Freezing Drizzle / Rain – Freezes on impact, forms a coat of ice on the ground and
objects they strike. They occur when the air temperature is below zero Celsius near the
ground, but above zero Celsius higher up.
Frost - Water vapour, which deposits directly on a surface colder than the surrounding
air.
Hail – Precipitation in the form of lumps of ice, larger than ice pellets usually the size of
peas and or cherries however, may be as large as oranges.
Ice Pellets – Frozen rain drops, snow flakes and or snow encased in ice, which bounce
when impacting the ground.
Ice Crystals – Tiny sprinkles that hang in the air and sparkle.
Snow – Precipitation of significant duration and extent.
Snow, Blowing – Lifted by the wind from the earth’s surface to a height of 2 meters or
more.
Snow, Drifting – Blown to a height of less than 2 meters.
Snow Flurry or Shower – Snow fall that suddenly stops and starts, changing rapidly in
intensity; the accumulation and extent of which are limited.
Snow Squall - Strong winds, flurries and poor visibility.
Wind - Horizontal movement of air relative to the earth’s surface and is caused by
variations in temperature and pressure. Wind direction is the direction from which the
wind is blowing. For example, a north wind comes from the north and blows towards the
south.
WIND CHILL
• Expresses the combined effect of wind and air temperature on body heat loss.
• Humans do not sense the temperature of the air directly. Wind chill describes a
sensation, the way we feel as a result of the combined cooling effect of temperature
and wind.
Page 1 of 7
• This feeling can't be measured using an instrument, so scientists have developed a

mathematical formula that relates air temperature and wind speed to the cooling
sensation we feel on our skin.
Studies show that when your skin is wet, it loses heat much faster than when it is dry. As
wind increases, heat is carried away from the body at an accelerated rate.
Wind Speeds (Inland):

Light - (0 to 9 KM/H)
Moderate - (10 to 40 KM/H)
Strong / Windy - (41 to 60 KM/H)
Very Strong / Gales - (61 to 90 KM/H)
Very Strong / Storm Force - (over 91 KM/H)
Hurricane Force - (over 115 KM/H)
Wind Chill Index (Revised November 2001)

Wind chill is an index not a physical quantity. In other words, it is calculated, not
measured. Since the wind chill index represents the feeling of cold on your skin, it is not
actually a real temperature, so it is given without the degree sign. For example, "Today
the temperature is -10°C, and the wind chill is -20. "
New wind chill index features:
• Uses wind speed calculated at the average height of a human face (about 1.5
metres)
• Based on model of a human face, incorporates modern heat transfer technology
• Estimates the risk of getting frostbite (a severe injury caused by cold).
Page 2 of 7
ROLES / RESPONSIBILITIES
The Site Management Team shall monitor area weather forecasts and existing site
weather conditions, to better plan and execute construction activities during the winter
construction season. However, the continuous monitoring of employees for signs and
symptoms of cold-related injuries/stresses rests with the employees and their respective
front line supervisor.
• Area Supervisor: Assures that these guidelines are implemented and administered
to the extent feasible on the project.
• Safety Advisor: Provides employee training, program evaluation, and guidance to
the Superintendent.
• Front-Line Supervisor
a. Typically knows their employees' work-related capabilities and limitations, and it
is paramount that they monitor on a regular basis the condition of each employee
assigned to them. They should pay particular attention to the employee's task,
environment, and clothing, as well as any engineering and administrative controls
and personal protective equipment in use.
Page 3 of 7
b. Often as a day-to-day role model for other workers, they must be aware that their
actions and behaviour may influence their subordinates. This is particularly true
for employees just arriving at the project site. These employees may not be fully
acclimated to cold conditions.
Employees: Every person tolerates cold differently. Since no empirical measure can
determine when an individual begins to sense cold-related injuries/stresses,
the primary responsibility for the prevention of cold related-injuries/stresses
should be the appropriately trained employee's determination of his/her
condition.
EMPLOYEE AWARENESS AND PREVENTION

Cold injury/stress prevention awareness shall be provided at least once a year
(preferably during the fall) to all project personnel. This awareness shall include:
Types, warning signs /symptoms and first aid for cold-related injuries/stresses.
Frostnip:
A mild form of frostbite, where only the skin freezes
• Susceptible body parts – Extremities such as fingers, toes, ear lobes and or tip
of the nose.
• Symptoms - Painful tingling or burning sensation. Skin appears yellowish or
white, but feels soft to the touch.
• First aid - Do not rub or massage the area. Warm area gradually –use body
heat. Report to medical clinic for evaluation / treatment.
Frostbite:
Skin and underlying tissue (fat, muscle, bone) are frozen
• Susceptible body parts – Extremities such as fingers, toes, ear lobes and or tip
of the nose.
• Symptoms – Skin appears white and waxy, and is hard to the touch. No
sensation, the area is numb.
• First aid – Immediately seek medical attention. Do not rub or massage the
area, warm slowly, use body heat.
Hypothermia:
Feeling cold over a prolonged period of time can cause a drop in core body
temperature (below 37 degrees Celsius).
• Symptoms – Shivering, confusion and loss of muscular control can occur. Poor
performance; irrational decisions, not mentally alert. Can progress to a life-
threatening condition where shivering stops, the person loses consciousness,
and cardiac arrest may occur
• First Aid – Immediately seek medical attention! Get the person indoors. Lay
person down, avoid rough handling, particularly if the person is unconscious.
Page 4 of 7
Gently remove wet clothing if applicable. Warm person gradually, using

available heat source.
1) Employee responsibilities in avoiding cold-related injuries/stresses.
• Know individual limitations
• Pre work stretching (Body Mechanics)
• Know warning signs / symptoms
• Limit exposed skin
• Wear multiple layers
• Maintain hydration
• Buddy system
• Follow work warm-warm-up schedule
2) Dangers of dehydration
• Loss of body fluid changes flow of blood to extremities, increasing risk of
cold stress.
• Coffee intake should be limited due to diuretic & circulatory effects.
3) Employee measures to maintain hydration
• Drink warm sweet drinks and soups, which provide high caloric intake and
fluid.
4) Dangers of the use of drugs, including prescription and over the counter
medicines, and alcohol that inhibits the body’s response to the cold or impairs
judgement.
5) Proper use of engineering and administrative (work practice) controls
6) Proper use of personal protective equipment
7) Measures employees can take to prevent cold-related injuries/stresses:
•Pre work stretches (Body Mechanics)
•Employee remain hydrated
•Work pace
•Good nutritional habits
8) What to do during a Cold Awareness Condition
Page 5 of 7
WORKPLACE AND TASK EVALUATION

A thorough evaluation of the workplace may be necessary to identify tasks and
conditions that present a potential cold-related injury/stress hazard. This evaluation
should include observations, discussions with workers and supervisors.
1. Tailboard is the primary vehicle for evaluating and communicating cold injury
conditions on a task-specific basic. Information that can help to determine a cold
injury potential and appropriate control measures includes the following:
2. Job Location
• Analyze the specific locations of each task.
3. Work Duration and Schedule
• What are the frequencies at which the task must be performed?
• How much time is required to perform the work?
• How much time is required for preparation, setup, actual task performance, and
any normal breaks?
• Excessive overtime work, piecework, and machine-paced work are additional
factors to consider.
4. Clothing
Personal protective clothing -- perhaps the most important step in fighting the
elements is providing adequate layers of insulation from them. Wear several layers
(at least 3) of loose-fitting, lightweight, warm clothing. Trapped air between the
layers will insulate you. Layers may be removed to avoid sweating and
subsequent chill.
• Outer layer to break the wind and allow some ventilation
• Middle layer to absorb sweat and retain insulation
• Inner layer to allow ventilation (Polypro)
The body can loose a substantial amount (50%) of heat from the head.
Adequately covering the head and or face.
Cover your mouth to protect your lungs from extreme cold.
Feet and hands are equally important, wear good quality gloves (mittens, snug at
the wrist, are better than gloves).
Wear CSA approved winter work boots.
5. Environmental Conditions
Air temperature, humidity, and wind speed all affect cold-related-injury/stress
potential. If available, management may refer to and or use the Environment
Canada Computer Program “Wind Chill Calculator”; to assist in evaluating
prevailing environmental site conditions. This program is available on Environment
Canada’s Web Site at: [www. windchill.ec.gc.ca].
Page 6 of 7
CONTROLS TO HELP AVOID COLD- RELATED INJURY / STRESS

As with any hazard, feasible engineering controls should be the primary control
measure, followed by administrative (work practice) controls and PPE, in that order.
1. Engineering Controls:
• Use an on-site source of heat, such as Sun Dogs, steam heaters etc.
• Hoardings, windbreaks etc.
2. Administrative and Work Practice Controls:
• If possible, schedule cold-related injury/stress work when conditions are at their
minimum. Schedule cold work for the warmest part of the day.
• Implement a work warm-up schedule
v For Example: working in an unprotected environment with an ambient air
temperature of –26 C to –28 C, exposed to winds of 16 KM/H, but less than 24
KM/H, two warm-up breaks are recommended per 5 hour work period.
3. Special measures may be needed in some circumstances. For example, when
work must be done in isolated areas, the “buddy system” or reliable two-way
communication system should be used. Some vehicles may need to be equipped
with survival gear.
Work Warm-up Scheduling
These guidelines are not intended to replace established cold weather work
practices that provide workers with better protection.
The American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) established
Threshold Limit Values for utilization in cold work environments. These TLV’s apply to
any 5-hour shift (normal work period), with moderate to heavy work activity. Breaks are
15 minutes duration, in a warm location (warm-up shack / hoarding, etc.) It assumes
that normal work practice provides for breaks in warm locations every two and a half
(2.5) hours. In Alberta Occupational Exposure Limits (OEL) is used rather than (TLV)
All non-emergency work should stop by the time the wind chill reaches –51.
If shield or screens can provide effective protection against the wind, work modification
or other measures, the work warm-up schedule for “No Noticeable Wind” would apply.
Field Expedient Wind Speeds
If reliable weather reports are not available, use the following as a guide to estimate
wind velocity:
• An 8 km/h (5 mph) wind will move a light flag.
• A 16 km/h (10 mph) wind will fully extend the flag.
• A 24 km/h (15 mph) wind will raise a newspaper sheet.
• A 32 km/h (20 mph) wind will produce blowing and drifting snow.
Page 7 of 7
Document Description Helicopter Safety
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 4 Revised by: M. Brown Date: April 30, 2018
26.030 HELICOPTER ACTIVITIES

Purpose
Provide workers with a safe means of work activities around and with helicopters
including access and egress.
1. All work done by a helicopter that involves crews of Valard Construction LP must
be stipulated by written contract. The contract must state the following:
• A minimum pilot experience of 500 hours flying time as pilot-in-command of

helicopters.
• The type of helicopter and number of pilots.
• Aircraft lifting capacity, takings into account temperature, elevation, fuel
quantity, and weight of load to be lifted.
2. Employees are not permitted to fly beyond gliding distance off shore in a single
engine helicopter unless the helicopter operator is authorized to do so by Transport
Canada and adheres to the standard #722.20.
3. Helicopters that carry external loads must be equipped with both electrical, and
mechanical releases for releasing the load in an emergency.
Training
4. All employees on any job that involves helicopters must be fully briefed as per
Canadian Aviation Regulations and Valard AMP receive training appropriate to
t h e job before operations begin. Specific training is needed for work on
transmission towers, or for handling external loads. Refer to Valard Aviation
Management Plan for standard operating procedures. (Share point). All training
must be documented and signed.
5. Before helicopter operations start each day, and after any change of plan or
extended break, a tailboard discussion must be held which includes aircrews and
signed off by all parties.
6. All workers involved with helicopters must be familiar with hand and/or head signals,
depending on their task being performed. Workers when using radios they must be
familiar with correct voice procedures.
Communications
7. One person on site should be recognized as being in charge of each operation
involving a helicopter. This person will:
• Be decided upon before commencing the task

• Give direction to the pilot for placement of loads
• Be in two-way communications with the aircrew when necessary
Page 1 of 5
8. Work with helicopters must stop if two-way communications fail, except when
stopping the job would be unsafe or head and/or hand signals can be used as a
safe alternative.
Operational Safety
9. When possible a conspicuous wind monitoring device, such as a fluorescent

ribbon, may be tied near the job site where the pilot can see it.
10. No worker may be on any load or its rigging that is supported, or suspended from
a helicopter in flight. No worker may be in a helicopter that is carrying a external
load.
11. No worker should ever be underneath a suspended at any time for any reason.
12. Workers should be aware that static electricity may accumulate in external loads
depending on the aircraft, the load itself and weather conditions. If signs of static
are present, workers can request the load touch the ground or tower before
attempting to position the load.
• Grounding may also be achieved by touching the load with a grounded wand or
by lowering the load to ground before touching it by hand.
• Insulation can be achieved by placing an insulating link in the helicopter
slinging line or by touching the load only with insulated gloves until it touches
ground.
13. Personal protective equipment for helicopter operation include, as a minimum:

• Hard hat with chin strap fastened
• Ear protection
• Eye protection
• Dress for conditions. Always be prepared to spend the night in the bush.
14. Persons approaching or leaving a helicopter that is on the ground with rotors
turning shall:
• Keep within the pilot’s view, “If you can’t see him he cannot see you”
• Approach and depart from the front or sides in the pilot’s view
• If the ground is sloping, keep to the downhill side looking at the aircraft at all
times
• Carry no objects that extend above the waist
• Beware of flying dust, snow, or debris
• Beware of slippery ground
• Ensure personal items (i.e. lunch bags/Packs) are not blown away by the
downwash
15. Helicopter landing sites must be kept clear of debris and loose objects. On job
sites exposed to rotor downwash, equipment and tools must be secured.
Page 2 of 5
16. When workers are transported by helicopter to a remote site and left, they must
carry a two-way radio. A pre-arranged pick up must be arranged. If the expected
stay is more than four hours, there must be a means of providing a suitable
stretcher so that an injured worker may be airlifted to safety.
17. Signals: Valard uses both Hand and Head signals depending on the task
• for direction control point and give a distance (15 feet this way for
example) or continually release ad lower an out stretched arm bending at
the elbow in the direction the load is to go
• up, is one arm bent up at the elbow, hand and forearm in a full circular
motion
• down, is a hand flat over the head in a fore and aft motion
• level, or hold is one arm straight out
• release is a throat slash motion
• Abort is an x made with forearms pointed toward the pilot
• Head signal up is a head nod up and down
• Head signal down is a head motion side to side
• Head signal release is both arms out quickly in full slash
Line Stringing Operations
18. Observe the following guidelines described in SOH 102 in the aviation
Management Plan (AMP) regarding line stringing operations:
• Ground or barricade all tension and pulling equipment or consider it to be
energized.
• Ensure that all pulling and tensioning equipment has properly functioning
brake system.
• Use swivels between the helicopter and the line being pulled to prevent the
line from becoming twisted.
• Ensure that rope slings or cables do not twist around the cargo hook,
preventing proper operation of the hook or clean release when the hook is
opened.
• Place guards to preclude vehicular traffic from coming in contact with moving
line. Any movement of or over the sock line must be done with the
coordination of the pilot.
• During the pull, give consideration to any and all inactive sock lines in the
vicinity of the helicopter. No sag changes or line is to be pulled while the pilot
is stringing.
• Allow the pilot to make the initial decision about the order in which lines are
pulled to help keep the tail rotors and main rotors out of the lines behind and
above the helicopter.
• Do not attach the line at the base of a tower that is already threaded to the
helicopter. Consider using a long line if a tower base hookup is required.
Page 3 of 5
• Do not allow anyone or anything under the helicopter or sock line during the
course of a pull.
• Consider conductors and metal cables as energized until properly grounded
and caught off in that order.
Transferring
19. Observe the following guidelines when using a helicopter to transfer employees,
and the guidelines described in SOP H 103 in the Aviation Management Plan
(AMP).
• Employees transferring from a hovering helicopter to a structure or riding on
a suspended line underneath the helicopter must be trained and qualified in
the safe work practices for that operation.
• Employees riding on the skid of the helicopter must wear a full body harness
with a shock absorbing lanyard attached to the helicopter at all times when
riding from the ground to the structure.
• Employees riding on the skid of the helicopter must check the condition of
the positioning attachment device to ensure that the device is in proper
working condition.
• Employees transferring from the helicopter to a steel tower or other structure
must attach a shunt from the helicopter to the tower before transferring to the
tower.
• Employees transferring to a conductor or structure must disconnect their
lanyards from the helicopter and reattach the lanyard to the structure
immediately upon reaching the work location.
• Employees must transfer to and from the helicopter as smoothly as possible
and only by permission of the pilot.
• Employees must use caution when transferring to a structure with insulated

static. Employees must shunt the static with a ground lead that is attached to
the helicopter before stepping onto the structure. After the shunt is removed,
employees must use a hot stick to attach a personnel ground from the pole
bond to the static conductor before coming in contact with the conductor.
• To dissipate any possible static charge that might exist, employees
transferring from a helicopter to a steel structure must attach a shunt that is
also attached to the helicopter to the tower before coming in contact with the
tower.
• The Pilot may also gently touch the skid or platform to the tower when
possible to dissipate static build up.
Page 4 of 5
20. HELICOPTER DANGER AREA
Canadian Aviation Regulations

Part 604
Alberta
British Columbia
Yukon
Saskatchewan
Manitoba
Ontario
NWT
Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9) (10) –Instruction to Workers
Newfoundland/Labrador
OH&S Act
Part 5 (a) (b) (e)
Page 5 of 5
Document Description Excavations
26.031 EXCAVATIONS
PURPOSE
This procedure will outline the rules and regulations to prevent the risk of accidents,
identify and evaluate potential hazards, protect the environment and ensure the integrity
of underground installations during excavations. This manual is reviewed and applicable
changes will be addressed where the applicable legislation or client’s requirements are
revised.
Scope
Excavation procedure applies to the activities and processes under the Occupational
Health and Safety Act. All workers including the supervision involved in the excavation
shall be trained in Ground Disturbance 2. The implementation of the excavation
guidelines and government regulations will eliminate and prevent worker injuries,
equipment damages and production losses. This practice included directional drilling.
General
The Excavation Procedure applies to any ground penetration regardless of the depth.
Appropriate authorities (power, gas etc.) will provide an accurate description/plan of the
site; establish the necessary engineering, administrative and equipment controls
recommended by the Occupational Health and Safety Act (as per Provincial
requirements). A pre-job meeting will be held with all parties involved in the project and if
the worksite is on any client’s site, the client’s shall insure that a representative is
present. This meeting shall include; emergency procedures, safe work practices
approved, underground survey report from the applicable authority, hazard assessment
and a list of equipment to be available to complete the project. If any part of the buried
line is struck the appropriate owner shall be notified or if unable the applicable Provincial
One-Call must be notified of the incident. Upon completion of the project the client shall
inspect and approve the work and provide the approval for burial of the excavation.
In cases where it is identified that other owners of buried utilities are not on any
provincial First Call list then the Valard’s person in charge shall contact the owner and
request that they be present to identify the exact location of their buried lines. Workers
are not permitted to enter the excavation unless authorized by their supervisor who will
insure that the ground is stable shoring as per the code and all permits are signed,
hazard assessment is completed and a Tailboard/FLHA is completed, reviewed by all
workers and signed.
Definitions
Practice
1) Before any excavation is to take place, the existence and exact location of any
underground utilities and obstructions must be determined. This information will be
provided by applicable Provincial First Call and depending on the location and nature
of the project or as required in each province.
2) Prior to any excavation to be performed the following steps must be taken:
a. If the area is near any buried pipeline, the owner must be notified 48 hours prior
to the work commencing and permission must be granted to excavate the area.
The owner is to provide a representative on site prior to the work commencing.
Page 1 of 10
b. If there are buried lines that are not on the locator’s list such as certain counties,
towns, and private land owners, it is the foreman’s responsibility to call the
owners and request that they locate their lines in the presence of the Valard
foreman. The owner must be provided with sufficient time to provide this service.
A meeting must be held with Valard’s foreman and the owner to insure the
transfer of information and a copy of the discussion must be kept on file.
c. In cases where the exact location of the line is in any doubt, then the area must
be hydro-vaced to visually insure the exact location of the buried line.
d. All structures that may be affected by the excavation must be supported prior to
digging.
3) Once buried utilities have been located, a safe work permit can be issued. A Valard
Excavation Permit 26.031 is to be used (see page 8) except where Owner’s or
Provincial Permit is provided. The permit must include a complete description of the
excavation with the appropriate drawings and /or sketches attached. If day lighting is
required before conventional excavating, it should be clearly noted on the permit. A
copy of the Safe Work Permit will be kept in the excavator or drilling machine and a
copy will be kept at the site office. The permit must be reviewed and signed off by
Valard’s supervisor, the excavation contractor’s supervisor (if applicable), and the
operator of the excavation equipment.
4) Before excavation can begin, appropriate barricades (wood barricades, snow fence
etc.) must be obtained and readied for use. Barricades must be installed to protect
workers and the public form the hazards of the excavation or if the uncompleted
excavation will be left unattended.
5) Once all of the above controls are in place, excavation is allowed to begin. The
following is to be considered the minimum required standard for excavation. Some
basic are:
a) Spoil piles are to be a minimum of 1.2 m from the edge of the excavation.
b) Any excavation greater than 1.2 m deep must have it’s walls cut back so that the
height of the remaining vertical walls is not greater than 1.2 m or protective
structures must be installed to prevent the walls from caving in or moving.
c) Cutback must be a minimum of 30º in hard and compact soils (see definition) and
45º in other soils.
d) Protective structures must be installed and used as per the manufacturer’s
specifications.
e) Where wooden protective structures are to be built on site, they must comply with
the Act’s specifications.
f) Adequate access and egress must be provided for personnel and equipment.
Ladders, stairs and ramps may be used.
g) Water shall not be allowed to accumulate in excavations either through pumping
or trenching. If there is a chance that water may enter the excavation the worker
must wear a harness that has attachment d-rings on each shoulder. This must
be connected to a rope capable of lifting the worker in case of an emergency.
h) If a worker is required to enter and work in an excavation deeper than 3 m (10 ft.)
Valard will insure that the support structure is designed, certified and installed,
maintained, constructed and dismantled in accordance with the professional
engineer’s specifications.
Page 2 of 10
6) Excavations shall be inspected daily by a competent worker prior to entry to ensure
that they are stable and safe. In addition, excavations shall be reassessed during
and after any rainfall or extreme weather conditions.
All excavations over 4feet (1.3m) must be either cut back or sloped so that the remaining
vertical height is no more than 1.5 metres above the floor of the excavation.
Shoring
Temporary protective structures such as the trench shields shown, or a combination of
these methods is acceptable to use. The following drawing shows the options that are
acceptable.
Examples of trench shields
Cutting back walls

If the walls of an excavation are to be cut back:
• The following design specifications (following diagram) must be followed. Since the
specifications are based on a subjective interpretation of soil type, a professional
engineer shall be consulted whenever there is a question of doubt related to the soil
type and potential risk to workers.
• For hard and compacted soil the following diagram shows the sloping required
which must be within 1.5 metres of the bottom of the excavation at an angle of not
less than 30º measured from the vertical.
Page 3 of 10
Soft, sandy or loose soil
As shown in the following diagram, the walls must be sloped from the bottom of the
excavation at an angle of not less than 45º measured from the vertical.
Spoil piles
The distance between the edge of the excavation and the leading edge of any spoil pile
must be at least 1 m. The slope of the spoil pile cannot exceed 45º from the horizontal.
These measures are intended to reduce the possibility of the spoil pile slumping into the
excavation and loose materials rolling down the pile into the excavation. Spoil pile
materials may roll into excavations due to natural settling and daytime warming of frozen
excavated material. Spoil piles must be located away from the edge of an excavation
because the weight of excavated materials can exert unnecessary pressure on the walls
of the excavation. Such pressure can cause excavation walls to collapse.
Safe entry and exit
The following methods can be used for access and egress
• Ladder,
• Scaffold
• Mechanical device such as a stairway.
• Appropriate sloping of the ground or soil so that a worker can safely walk into or out of
the excavation.
If the trench is more than 1.5 metres deep the following must be provided:
• A safe point of entering and leaving must be no more than 8 metres from the worker.
• The trench walls located between the worker and the safe point of entering and
leaving must be supported or sloped as required.
Temporary protective structures
In an excavation, 3 metres or less deep, the type of temporary protective structures used
shall be;
• Prefabricated from steel,
• Built in place from wood materials for shoring, stringers and bracing.
• Be designed and certified by a professional engineer. The engineer’s specifications
must indicate all details related to the design, including the type and grade of
materials to be used and the calculated loads the structure is designed to support.
Page 4 of 10
Where an excavation could affect an existing foundation, the foundation must be
supported by a temporary protective structure. The structure must be designed,
constructed and installed in accordance with the specifications of a professional
engineer.
Alternative to temporary protective structures
Shoring, stringers and bracing constructed of lumber (see next diagram) shall complies
with Schedule 9, or alternate materials, in trenches 1.5 metres to 6 metres deep. If
alternate materials are used, they must possess equal or greater properties than those
of lumber.
Exterior grade plywood can be installed as a substitute for 38-millimetre shoring
elements if the plywood meets the requirements of either of the two-referenced CSA
Standards.
Mechanical devices such as screw jacks and hydraulic equipment can be used in place
of the shoring, stringers or bracing described in Schedule 9. The devices must be at
least equivalent in strength and reliability to the shoring, stringers or bracing. The use of
stringers in trenches less than 2.4 metres deep in “hard and compact soil” is optional.
Installation of shoring, stringers or bracing

Steps:
1. Workers must use a ladder to install shoring, stringers or bracing downward from
the top of the trench,
2. Install each brace in descending order.
3. Progress downward until the bottom of the trench is reached.
Removal of shoring, stringers or bracing
Steps:
1. Ladder must be used
2. Must work in a sequence that is the reverse of the installation sequence.
3. Removal sequence upwards from the bottom of the trench to keep workers
above any possible trench wall collapse.
Page 5 of 10
Note: If ground conditions deteriorate to the point that it is unsafe to remove shoring,
stringers or bracing, the following removal method must be used that does not require
the worker to be in the trench.
• Removal methods could involve use of equipment such as a crane, backhoe or
other lifting/excavating equipment rigged or equipped, as necessary, to complete the
job safely.
Access for powered mobile equipment
• All excavations to be flagged and marked to prevent workers or equipment from
falling into the opening.
• The access route that is used by powered mobile equipment to enter and leave the
excavation must be flagged and marked.
• The following can be used as a berm:
o Large wooden barricades
o Concrete blocks
o Pile of excavated material
Schedule 9 Shoring Components Dimensions ( all measurements in Metric)
Uprights Stringers Cross-braces
Minimum dimensions
Width of trench
Soil Type Depth of Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Less than 1.8 to 3.7 Vertical Horizontal
excavation dimensions Horizontal dimensions Vertical 1.8 metres
spacing spacing metres
1.5 to 3.0 38 x 235 1800 89 x 140 1200 89 x89 140 x140 1200 1800
140 x
3.0 to 4.5 38 x 235 1200 89 x 140 1200 89 x 140 1200 1800
Hard and 140
Compact
140 x 140 x
4.5 to 6.0 38 x 235 10 140 x 140 1200 1200 1800
184 184
140 x
1.5 to 3.0 38 x 235 1200 89 x 140 1200 89 x 140 1200 1800
140
Likely to
crack or 140 x 140 x
3.0 to 4.5 38 x 235 900 140 x 140 1200 1200 1800
crumble 140 184
140 x 140 x
4.5 to 6.0 38 x 235 10 140 x 184 1200 1200 1800
184 184
140 x 140 x
1.5 to 3.0 38 x 235 10 140 x 140 1200 1200 1800
140 184
Soft
sandy or 140 x 184 x
3.0 to 4.5 38 x 235 10 140 x 184 1200 1200 1800
loose 184 184
140 x 184 x
4.5 to 6.0 38 x 235 10 184 x 184 1200 1200 1800
184 235
Excavation near Buried Cables and High Pressure Pipeline

1. All buried cables must be considered energized and all buried pipes must be
considered pressurized unless the appropriate Guarantees of Isolation, etc. are in
place.
Page 6 of 10
2. Before excavation commences, the intention must be reported to
a) Alberta 1st Call (1-800-242-3447)
b) Manitoba Call Before you dig MB (1-800-940-3447)
c) , or other authority appropriate to the work site. The specified location of
existing underground cables and pipes must be ascertained from the
authority. Their actual location must be determined using an accurate
detection device.
a) 5 m rule applies to pipeline locating as per pipeline regulations (hand exposure
not using equipment)
b) Danger signs and markings
3. If a buried pipeline is exposed the owner of the pipeline must be contacted and
provided a minimum of 24 hrs. of notice before any backfilling is performed. If there
is either no response or if unable to make contact with the pipeline owner a detailed
record of all contact attempts and inspections (including photos) of all activities done
prior to backfilling are to be kept and sent to the Edmonton office for record keeping.
This is to prove that all everything was performed as expected.
4. If a buried cable or pipe is damaged, the crew must ensure that appropriate
authorities are informed. Make the site safe for the crew and general public until the
utility arrives for repair.
5. Mechanical digging equipment must not be used within 1m of any energized cable or
pressurized pipe. Hand tools must expose such cables and pipes and hand tools
must remove all material within 1m before mechanical equipment may be used within
the 1m zone
6. Shovels and other hand tools must be used carefully and with forces that will not
damage any cable or pipe that is contacted.
7. If frozen ground prohibits the use of hand tools, it must be thawed. An alternative is
to use a Hydro-vac or another non-mechanical digging technique.
8. If the digging conditions are such that excavation is impossible without mechanical
digging equipment, energized cables must be de-energized and grounded before
digging begins. Similarly pressurized pipes must be turned off and relieved of
pressure.
9. Any excavation that contains exposed and energized cables must not be left
unattended. A wooden or steel structure or a substantial layer of soil must cover
such cables.
Trenching Around Poles
1. The person-in-charge at the site is responsible for deciding if support is needed to
prevent a pole from falling.
2. Support must be installed when digging more than 1m down beside a pole. The
person-in-charge shall decide on using support at lesser depths if:
a) The soil is loose, wet or otherwise abnormal.
b) The design of the power line compounds the need of support.
c) There is any other reason to doubt that the pole will remain steady.
3. The options for support are:
a) Temporary mechanical support such as a digger boom or pike pole.
Page 7 of 10
b) Temporary guy wire.
c) Permanent overhead guy wire.
d) Foundation anchor.
MANITOBA SPECIFIC EXCAVATION PROCESS:

1. When excavating in Manitoba and the depth exceeds 1.5 n (5ft), workers must register at
the Safework Manitoba Workplace website
https://www.gov.mb.ca/labour/safety/excavation.html and provide a Notice of
Excavation and receive a and serial number. You must provide them with Valard’s
Excavation #: RE-BBAE-9eBJKR in order to receive the permit number. This document
must be posted on the worksite location or office.
2. Either email clickbeforeyoudigmb.com or call (1800-940-3447) to arrange a locate.
Locates are only valid for 14 days after located date.
3. Egress and access ladder must be positioned no more that 3 m (10 ft.) from the worker.
Page 8 of 10
Document Description Excavation Permit
Area: Date:
Location: Permit #:
PART 1:
Valard Representative Responsible for Excavation

1 Proposed Start
Expected Completion Date:
. Date:
2
Company Executing Work
.
3 Method of
Digger: Yes No Hydrovac: Yes No
. Penetration
4
Type: Backhoe: Yes No Hand dig: Yes No
.
5
Other (Name):
.
6
.
7 Purpose of
. Excavation:
8
Signature of Valard’s supervisor: Date:
.
1. Is Tailboard Completed? Yes: No:
2. Does Tailboard indicate compliance with regulations? Yes: No:
3. Has Provincial One-Call been notified and copy attached? Yes: No:
4. Has the ground condition been checked? Yes: No:
5. Is the trench over 4 feet deep? Shoring or Cutback provided? Yes: No:
6. Shoring or Cutback provided? Yes: No:
7. Access Ladders provided? Yes: No:
8. Workers trained in Excavations? Yes: No:
PART 2: SAFETY
PART 3: EMERGENCY PLAN:

What Emergency Response Contingency Plan is in Place
1. (Describe):
Approval Valard Representative: Date:

Date:
NOTE: Copy of Applicable Provincial One Call must

be attached to Permit
Page 9 of 10
Alberta
Part 32- Excavations and Tunnelling - all Sections
British Columbia
Part 20 – Construction, Excavations, and Demolition – Section 20.28-20.95 –
Excavations
Yukon
Part 10 – Construction and Building Safety – Section 10.62- 10.72
Saskatchewan
Part XVII – excavations, Trenches, Tunnels, and Excavated Shafts – All Sections
Manitoba
Part 26 – Excavations and Tunnels – All Sections
Ontario
Part III – Excavations –All Sections
NWT
Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 396-432 - Excavations
Page 10 of 10
Document Description Lockouts
26.032 LOCK-OUT PRACTICE

POLICY
This policy is designed to ensure the protection of personnel working on or around any
equipment and/or energy source and to prevent damage of equipment. This policy is to
be understood and used by all contractors and employees operating on Valard’s
Construction sites. All workers are to be trained in the company’s lockout procedure prior
to be permitted to work on any equipment requiring a lockout process. All equipment that
is energized will fall in this category.
Lockout requirements must be followed whenever there is construction, repairs,

maintenance or other work on or about a machine, equipment, process, or system,
which represents a potential hazard to personnel safety of health and property. It
applies to the positive isolation of all energy sources (i.e. electricity, compressed
air/gases, hydraulics, steam, mechanical, gravity, pipelines and vacuum.) All energy
sources must be turned off, disconnected, and/or released before maintenance is
performed. If the unexpected energization or startup of machinery or equipment or the
unexpected release of an energy source could cause injury, the energy source must be
isolated and effectively controlled.
This policy and procedure is intended to supplement but not replace the regulations set
out by the Occupational Health and Safety Regulations and the contractor's contractual
requirements.
When circumstances require the applications of lockout procedures, the isolating device
shall be secured in the inoperative position by the use of scissors and locks. Such
locks shall be marked and tagged to identify the person applying them, as well as the
contractor. A logbook must be maintained with the lock number and to whom it is
issued. Each contractor must maintain contact arrangements would the need arise to
have the lock removed. When a piece of equipment must be worked on by the shop
mechanics, they will remove the key from the ignition and hang a “DO NOT OPERATE”
tag on the steering wheel, and must keep the key in his/her pocket until such time as the
work is completed.
Failure to adhere to these procedures will result in disciplinary action, potentially

including dismissal.
DEFINITIONS
Zero Energy State:
All hazardous energy sources must be isolated and locked out to prevent any injury or
damage Sources such as: electrical, compressed gas or steam, chemical, hydraulic,
tensioned spring, mechanical or elevated object that could release and endanger a
worker or damage equipment.
Energy Isolating Device

A device that prevents the supply of energy to machinery, equipment or specific
systems, but is not limited to switches, circuit breakers, valves and clutches.
Page 1 of 5
Push Button Electrical Switches and Check Valves are not considered to be
isolating devices. DO NOT USE THEM AS SUCH.
Lockout
The placing of locks, lockout devices or an isolating device, in accordance with the lock-
out procedure, to control hazardous energy or other related hazards.
Personal Lock
A key type padlock issued to a worker intended only for locking energy sources in an
inoperative or safe position. The only keys for a personal lock are in the possession of
the worker to whom the lock was issued.
Scissor system: for use for group lockouts.

A multi-hole clamp device which is connected to a lock-out point and then the personal
locks are applied to the holes in the scissor. Never put a personal lock in the last hole of
a scissor, always attach another scissor and then put the lock in the new scissor.
Tag
A tag used to convey information about the equipment or process that is locked out. The
tag must be attached to the personal lock. Tags without locks do not constitute lock out.
Log Book
A log book or Binder with the Lockout Log Sheets shall be kept indicating the following
information for every lock put into service:
• Date of lock-out installed

• Equipment identification including number where possible
• Name of individual
• Signature of applicant
• Lock number
• Name and date when lock is removed
PRACTICE
1. No personnel will work on any equipment that represents a safety hazard unless that
equipment is properly locked-out.
2. The contractor's supervisors are to determine what needs to be locked-out before

proceeding with any work.
3. The electrical and mechanical contractors responsible in each area will designate a
responsible employee to assist all other trades in locating the necessary switches
drives or piping which must be locked out. The designated responsible employee of
the electrical or mechanical contractor in each area will physically isolate the
equipment/system.
Page 2 of 5
4. The supervisor responsible for the personnel who will be working on the
equipment/system install scissor and lock with lock-out permit tag on the isolating
device, immediately assuring the equipment will not operate by which ever means
necessary, i.e.: local jog button, start/stop switch.
With equipment, activate the control button or switch two (2) times to ensure that the
equipment is de-energised.
5. All personnel who will be working on the equipment are required to place their
own lock with tag on isolating devices. This includes all engineering staff and
vendor representatives.
5.1 Locks used for lockout procedure will not be used for any other purpose and
shall be permanently numbered.
5.2 All keys will be under the control of the area supervisor/Superintendent or
construction manager.
5.3 A logbook entry will be made for each lock issued. Each individual requiring a
lock shall sign the logbook or Lockout Log Sheet for their lock. This will be kept
in the Superintendent’s possession at all times.
5.4 No person shall work under another person’s lock.
6. Lock-out tags are to be attached to advise others that the pieces of equipment
have been isolated and locked-out. Tags will have the name of the contractor,
supervisor, worker, date and brief description recorded on them.
7. Each worker who works on machinery, equipment or system, which is shut down
for construction, maintenance or repair, will ensure:
a) Any equipment that is held up by fluid or air pressure is securely blocked.

b) Air rams are completely bled off.
c) Lock(s) are applied to power, not control circuits.
d) Blinding or blanking is in place if that is the required isolation.
e) That their lock and tag is removed when they leave the site of the work or are
no longer working on the equipment.
f) Lines may be locked out using a double block with a bleed between to 2
block valves. The valve operators will be locked out using the approved
system as stated in this section.
8.) When the work is completed and after all personal locks have been removed, the
supervisor will make a final check of the equipment before removing his lock to
assure that it is safe to operate and that all guards are in place before proceeding
with clearing of lock-out. Workers are not permitted to energize any equipment in
order to do any checks.
9.) Locks
Page 3 of 5
a) A master key for all personal locks shall be kept by the contractor in a secure
location and shall only be used by a designated delegate, following proper
procedures.
b) No one shall remove any personal lock other than his own except as noted in
the lock removal by others procedure.
c) If the worker has left site (quit, discharged or injured), his/her personal locks
must be removed by others procedure.
d) Locks and Keys must be returned to the proper authority immediately
following completion of work.
10.) Lock Removal by Others
a) The owner of the personal lock must be positively identified.

b) All reasonable efforts have been made to contact the worker who placed the
lock, i.e. camp, motel, home, and have them return to site and remove their
lock.
c) If the worker cannot be contacted or is incapable of removing the lock, the
contractor representative must ensure that no other workers will be
endangered if the lock is removed and that no process or machinery will be
damaged.
d) A representative of the project safety department should be present when
locks are removed.
e) Lock removal should be done with the master key, with cutting of the lock or
scissors being the last resort.
f) All information regarding the personal lock removal must be documented on
the lockout log sheet form.
Any employee, whose lock has to be removed by other authorities, is subject

to disciplinary action.
11.) If you are in doubt about lock-out or lock-out procedures, contact your supervisor
or the project safety supervisor.
12.) Each supervisor will verify strict compliance with this procedure through periodic
inspections. The supervisor must ensure each affected employee is instructed in
the purpose and use of this procedure via tailboard meetings, on-the-job training
and through supervisors and pre-job planning meetings.
13.) All workers who are not involved in the work such as Pigging in pipelines shall
not enter the work area until the area is deemed safe. Valard employees do not
enter/work in areas where this work is performed.
Page 4 of 5
Alberta
Part 15- Lock Out – All Sections
British Columbia
Part 10- De-energization and Lock Out- All Sections
Yukon
Part 3 – Lock Out- All Sections
Saskatchewan
Part X – Machine Safety – Section 139 – Locking Out
Manitoba
Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.14-16.18 – Locking Out
Ontario
Part II – General Construction – Section 188-189 – Lock Outs
NWT
Part V- Construction and Maintenance – Section 141-149
Page 5 of 5
Document Description Boosting Vehicles
26.033 BOOSTING VEHICLES

PURPOSE:
The purpose of this procedure is to ensure boosting is done in a safe manner.
PRACTICE
Vehicle batteries contain sulphuric acid. Improper boosting may cause batteries to
rupture or explode. It is important to follow the following procedure.
1. Turn off the ignition and all accessories in both vehicles.
2. Put both vehicles in park or neutral with parking brakes set. The vehicles must not
touch each other.
3. Attach one end of the positive booster cable to the positive terminal of the booster
battery. Attach the other end of the positive booster cable to the positive terminal of
the dead battery. Good metal-to-metal contacts are necessary. Warning: Do not
allow the ends of both cables to touch while attached to the batteries; sparks
and short circuits will result.
4. Then attach one end of the negative cable to the negative terminal of the booster
battery, be certain that the opposite end of the negative cable is not contacting either
the positive cable or any part of either vehicle.
5. Connect the remaining end of the negative cable to the engine block or thick metal
frame of the vehicle with the dead battery. The connection should be made at a level
lower than the battery and as far away from it as possible, but still under the hood.
This will reduce the possibility of igniting any hydrogen gas that may be present
above the dead battery. Ensure the cable will not contact any moving parts.
6. Start the engine of the vehicle that has the booster battery. Let it run for a few
minutes with the cables attached. Then start the engine of the vehicle with the dead
battery. After the boosted engine has been started, disconnect the booster cable
connections in the reverse order of attaching them.
a) The negative cable from the block or frame.
b) The negative cable from the booster battery.
c) The positive cable from the dead battery.
d) Finally, the positive cable from the booster battery.
7. If vent caps were removed from the boosted battery, replace them.
8. Use the accessories on the boosted vehicle sparingly until the battery is fully
charged. If the engine should stop before the battery is charged up, it may need
another boost.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Boosting Vehicles
Alberta
British Columbia
Yukon
Saskatchewan
Manitoba
Ontario
NWT
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Operating Nodwell
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 3 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: April 29, 2013
26.034 OPERATING FLEXTRAC NODWELL

PURPOSE: To insure the safe operation on the equipment as well as its limitations.
PRACTICE: All employees who are to operate this equipment must be trained.
STARTING:
Prior to starting this equipment the following checks must be made:
• Crankcase oil
• Coolant level
• Handbrake set- ON
• Gear selector in neutral (standard transmission) or park (if auto transmission)
• Power take-off in neutral
Engine must be allowed to warm up prior to moving the equipment.
RUNNING:
Clutch must be used to start or stop equipment while engine is running.
NOTE: Vehicle must NOT be ALLOWED to roll in gear with the clutch disengaged. If it is
to be put into gear on a slope, precautions must be taken to prevent it from rolling
forwards or backwards.
If the vehicle is to be operated on terrain, which is not level, a dozer or other piece of
equipment must accompany the equipment and be connected to it in order to prevent it
from rolling uncontrolled.
Before commencing to climb any slope the appropriate gear must be selected.
NOTE: DO NOT SHIFT GEARS WHILE MOVING EITHER UP OR DOWNHILL.
STEERING:
Allow levers to go fully forward when steering action is not required. “Riding” the levers will
result in excessive steering brake band glazing and wear, as well as differential wear. Do not
hold the steering lever for any extended period of time. If a long turn is to be made, make it in
short stages. It will avoid heat build up and minimize wear and tear on the vehicle. Always allow
vehicle to start rolling before attempting to steer.
OPERATING:
SIDE HILLING: Ground projections and hollows must be avoided. Problem with side hilling for
any length of time, is overheating and glazing of the steering brake bands on the uphill side of
the crossbar.
MUSKEG: When operating in muskeg be on the lookout for protruding trees and bushes which
can tangle up in underside of the vehicle and cause damage to hydraulics lines, fans, belts or
radiator, etc. Avoid returning on a path already travelled. Beware of large stretches of water
unless the depth is known.
MUD: Drive slowly through mud and allow the vehicle to follow its own course.
Page 1 of 3
SNOW: In deep snow allow the vehicle to find its own path. Too much control or steering will
make it dig down. Use short pulls on the steering levers to prevent track slippage.
TREES AND SHRUBS: As with muskeg watch for tree limbs they could get caught up in the
vehicle. Do not try to drive over trees of more than four (4) inches in diameter, either cut them
down or drive around them. Avoid a situation, which requires backing up over trees and shrubs.
SALVAGING MATERIAL: During any salvage operations material must be placed on a trailer,
which is to be attached to the Nodwell’s hitch. No material is to be placed on the deck, which
can impede either access or visibility to operate the equipment.
LOADING OF NODWELL: This equipment must be loaded with the following followed:
• Tailboard must be completed
• Trailer must be level
• Only trained personnel to load the equipment
• Trailer deck must be clean.
• Equipment to be secured as per Alberta Transportation's requirements
VACATING THE VEHICLE: Always set the hand brake when vacating the cab of the
vehicle.
Alberta
British Columbia
Yukon
Saskatchewan
Manitoba
Ontario
Part II- General Construction- Sections 93-105
NWT
Page 2 of 3

Page 3 of 3
Document Description Bonding and Grounding
26.036 BONDING AND GROUNDING PRACTICE

Purpose:
To provide the worker with guidelines and a practice on the accepted process in which work
activities on electrical systems are performed in a safe and reliable manner.
Bonding:
Is a method of physical interconnecting conductive parts to maintain a common potential.
Bonding is performed in order to avoid harmful shock currents by minimizing any potential
difference across the workers body. A jumper is to be used to tie the conductor/circuit to a
bonding point such as an equipotential band, ground mat/grid below the workers feet.
Grounding:
Is a method of connecting an isolated conductor to a low resistance ground, in order to trip the
circuit as quickly as possible and minimize voltage rise on the circuit. Grounding, by itself,
does not protect the worker from harmful shock currents.
Bonding Application Procedure:

Acceptable equipotential bonding methods must be used when a worker is within the limits of
approach of an isolated electrical circuit and there is a possible source of energization. Bonding
is also required when working on an isolated circuit, which runs parallel to an energized circuit
(induction)
* SEE LIMITS OF APPROACH TABLES IN HS&E MANUAL SWP 26.002*
The following considerations must be applied when bonding;

1) Bonds to phases, neutrals, and shield wires must be applied with a hot stick
Note: Does not include down leads.
If the neutrals or shield wires are interconnected with the phases at another location,
then all the wires must be treated as phase conductors.
2) Bonds between pole bands and down leads can be made by hand. There is no practical
means of avoiding down leads while climbing; planning the amount of exposure time
must be minimized before the equipotential zone is set up
3) On wooden poles without down leads, a jumper to a pole band must be used. The pole
band is to be positioned low enough to protect the worker climbing and high enough to
protect the ground man as well.
4) On poles with down leads, there are two (2) options for setting up equipotential zones.
• The preferred method is to use a pole band bonded to the conductors and down
lead.
• An equipotential zone can be created above bonded through-bolts by bonding
the down lead to the conductors. If work is to be performed below all of the
bonded bolts a pole band must be used.
Do not rely on the connection between the shield wire/neutral to down leads to provide
bonding. When in doubt install a bonding jumper between the overhead and the down
lead.
Page 1 of 19
5) A through-bolt on a pole is an acceptable alternative to a pole band if the following are

performed;
• The bolt is bonded to the conductors
• The bolt is tight and snug-fitting
• A worker can work comfortably above the bolt
• Do not permit a small gauge bonding wire for hardware to become in series
with the tripping circuit
6) All conductive paths must be bonded together to form an equipotential zone.
7) To ensure the maintaining equipotential zones, the phases and neutral/shield wires must
be bonded together either at the site.
8) There is some level of grounding when bonded to concrete and wooden poles with down
leads.
Grounding Application Procedure:

1) Grounds are applied in order to trip the circuit, minimize voltage rise in back feed
situations, or minimize static induction.
2) During the application of grounding the following must be considered; connecting a
circuit to ground does not mean the voltage will be “zero”. If a conductor becomes
energized at 14,400 volts the voltage at the ground probe will also be 14,000 v. because
they are tied together. Step and touch potential hazards will exist any time there is a
source of energy, including induction.
3) A ground is always required to trip circuits when accidentally energized.
4) The circuit must be connected to the best possible grounding point.
Grounding alternatives are listed below in order of effectiveness:

i. Substation Ground grids (less than 1 ohm, high capacity)
ii. Systems neutral/shield wires (3-6 ohms, Medium capacity)
iii. Deep driven ground rods/tower legs (3-10 ohms, Med. Capacity)
iv. Equipment or single rod grounds (17-25 ohms, Med. Capacity)
v. Temporary ground rods (10-20,000 ohms, very low capacity)
Note: When using a substation ground grid be aware of the operating condition
of the substation at the time it is being used.
Typically temporary grounds must have no more than 30 ohms to be effective trip
grounds.
5) Temporary ground rods are to be used as a last resort.
6) If a good grounding point is not available at the work site a ground can be installed
remotely. Insure that there are no possible open points between the site and the
grounding location. Note: conductor adds additional resistance to the tripping
circuit and reduces the effectiveness.
Page 2 of 19
7) When induction is a consideration, the installation of two (2) or more grounding points
can cause circulating currents. Large circulating currents can create step and touch
potential hazards around the grounding points.
8) When attaching to the single ground rod at a structure an additional ground probe must
be used to insure integrity of the system, which may be insufficient due to corrosion and
deterioration.
BONDING AND GROUNDING GUIDELINES:

1) If guy wires, grounds or neutrals are involved, they must be bonded into the zone.
2) Be aware of the step and touch potentials for the ground man when there is a vehicle or
piece of equipment tied to the zone.
3) When stringing over energized lines, arrange your work in order that the work is
performed in the least amount of time and for the shortest distance.
4) If work is to be done on a rural transformer pole, avoid work on the meter base when
there is a zone established on the top of the pole.
5) Remove the equipment or vehicle as soon as possible after completing the task
associated with it/them. This reduces the hazard to the ground man.
6) Install all bond leads with a hot stick as isolated conductors and equipment are tied into
the zone. A sequencing of work steps can be done so that there is not a need for a hot
stick when attaching to down leads, guy wires, anchor rods, vehicles and bands.
7) Be aware of bad connections, which may produce a voltage drop in a zone that could be
harmful.
8) Ground chains must be inspected yearly for contaminated connection or clamp.
9) A suitable jumper across the switch should be applied when working on a structure with
a fused disconnect.
10) Insure that there are no fused disconnects between the work area and the tripping
ground.
STRUCTURAL WORK GUIDELINES:

1) A zone must be produced on the structure being worked on. Most effective means is
with a rated pole band.
2) Produce a zone on a wood or concrete pole using a rated pole band. Ensure that the
rebar in the concrete structures is bonded into the zone.
3) A steel tower or pole can be bonded into the zone by using the appropriate clamp
attached directly to the structure or an appropriate stud.
4) Climbing over the band with a bonding jumper(s) in place must be done quickly to
minimize the possibility of the hazard. Best means is to remove the bonding jumper
before climbing over the band. In these cases, make sure that the zone is built in a way
that only one jumper needs to be removed.
5) When approaching conductive structures such as steel, or structures that have
conductive components like guy wires or down leads, there is a risk of step and touch
potentials.
Page 3 of 19
6) Handling conductors possess more risk than working on a structure. The risks include
step and touch potentials. Approved equipotential methods are:
a. Conductive platforms such as a bonding mat or the deck of a truck, with all of the
conductors and the platform bonded together.
b. If a bond mat or platform is not feasible then all handling of the conductors must
be with rubber gloves.
REMEMBER: There is still the possibility of step potential, avoid contact between
conductors and other parts of your body.
SPLICING CONDUCTORS GUIDELINES:

• Always jumper conductors across the break to avoid dangerous potential differences.
Even if a conductor is grounded on both sides of a break, each side can be at different
potentials from induction or some other energy source.
• A bond across the break can be achieved in different ways.
A sample of creating bonds is shown below in the drawing.
• If possible avoid splicing on the ground.

• Means to minimize risk when splicing conductors to find a reliable way to protect worker
are;
1. Use bond mat whenever conductor is handled on the ground.
2. Use the deck of the truck as a ground mat by bonding the truck to the
conductor.
3. Perform the work up from the structures in the equipotential zones by:
Page 4 of 19
• Equipotential Method:
a. Cutting the span of conductor out
b. Use a new section of wire
c. Perform splices from the structure in the equipotential
zones
• Isolated and Grounded Method (not a equipotential method)
If the Equipotential method can not be used the following must be considered:
A. Equipotential method must still be used when working on structures.
B. Job must be planned to minimize exposure time on the ground.
C. Care must be taken when creating isolation points.
D. If an equipotential zone cannot be established then rubber gloves must be
worn.
E. If rubber gloves are being used to splice on the ground that the risk increases
with the time to perform the task.
F. Rubber gloves may be adequate for automatic splice, but when a two piece
compression splice is done, equipotential methods must be used.
G. When working on the ground, be aware of possible risks including step and
touch potentials if the lines become energized.
H. Conductors are to be handled with rubber gloves only.
POLE/STRUCTURE REPLACEMENT GUIDELINES:
A. Electrical connections required to bond conductors together can be achieved away from
the actual work site.
B. The sequence of the replacement must be planned to minimize the number of times
jumpers need to be connected and disconnected.
C. Rubber gloves must be used when handling poles that will be coming within the limits of
approach of the isolated and grounded conductor(s).
D. Steel and concrete poles, or wood poles with down leads and guy wires could directly
transfer hazardous voltage to workers handling the pole on the ground. Either move the
pole out of the limits of approach or move the conductors out of the way.
E. Once the poles are in the hole but still within the limits of approach of the isolated and
grounded conductors, rubber gloves may be removed when contacting poles.
The possibility of step and touch potential still exists.
F. For poles with down leads and guy wires without rated guy strain insulators, make
connections between the ground rod and anchor rod before they are bonded in with the
other wires on the structure; otherwise a continuity jumper must be placed across the
open point. This prevents the worker from becoming the path for current flow from any
source of energy, including induction.
Page 5 of 19
CONDUCTOR/EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL ENTERING OR LEAVING THE

EQUIPOTENTIAL ZONE:
A. Hand lines should be kept as clean and dry as possible to avoid leakage currents which
could cause a shock hazard. Where it is possible, hang the hand line on wood products
such as cross arms or poles.
B. Be careful of the possible hazard that may be transferred to the vehicle. Operators
should remain on the truck or a bonded ground mat.
C. Bond hydraulic and electric tools where hoses/wires extend outside the zone.
D. Conductors that are being brought into or removed from a zone, must be bonded to the
zone (i.e. hanging slack span or new tap)
E. Material and wire being sent or used within the zone (i.e. a coil of wire) do not have to be
bonded unless they are extending outside the zone.
WORKING FROM A BUCKET:
1. Electrically (voltage) Rated and Tested Boom;

• The boom or truck does not need to be tied into the zone.
• Conductors to be worked on must have a trip ground on them.
• The cover must be removed from the boom.
• The boom must be treated the same as a hot stick and wiped down before use.
• Within limits of approach of the structure, an equipotential zone must be created on
the structure.
• The zone is required since the worker in the bucket could come in contact with the
conductor and structure at the same time.
• All tested insulated sections must be visible when the vehicle is in the zone.
• Limits of Approach must be maintained from adjacent phases.
2. Using Un-rated Booms;

• The boom or truck must be tied into the equipotential zone.
• When the vehicle is tied into the equipotential zone, the workers must be made
aware of the hazards of touching or stepping on and off the truck.
• If the boom has insulated sections, bonding above the insulation will reduce the risk
to workers on the ground.
CUTTING OPEN WIRE OR JUMPERS:

• Any time you cut open a conductor or jumper, you must insure you have continuity by
bonding the two sides together to prevent voltage differences across the break.
Page 6 of 19
Work on Keep most of the

Structure #2 jumpers away from the
work site.
If jumpers will be opened,
both sides must be
bonded.
Only require pole band

2 and bond to one phase
(two bonds if jumpers will
be opened).
Bonding to protect
workers.
Grounding to trip the

circuit.
1
WORKING PROCEDURES FOR BONDED AREA:
• SINGLE, TWO AND THREE PHASE LINES WITH SYSTEM NEUTRAL GUIDELINES;
All Single Phase system with a neutral ground will require all conductors and Guy
Wires to be bonded together to a band on each structure that is being worked on.
• BONDED SECTIONS 2 OR 3 PHASE LINE GUIDELINES:
1. Bonded Area- No Guys, Neutrals, Grounds or Taps

• Ground at a preferred location
• Install bonds at any location where there is a power system source.
• Place a band at an appropriate location and bond to one phase at the structures
where the work is performed.
2. Bonded Area-With Guys and Grounds.

• Produce a bonded area as required
• Ground at a preferred location.
Page 7 of 19
• Place a band at the appropriate location on the structure that work is being done.
• Bond to all phase conductors, guy wires, equipment grounds, lightning arrestors,
return “A” ground, or any grounded point on these structures.
• POTENTIAL BACKFEED GUIDELINE:

• Bond all phases of the main line or line being worked on where a tap(s) enters the
bonded area and the tap is classified as power system source. Remember that you
cannot rely on switches/fuses to maintain electrical continuity between bonds
and grounds.
• If a tap entering a bonded area is deemed a power system source because it has
a 100 kVA or greater per phase transformer, it can be managed by:
• bonding all phases together as required
• removing secondary cables from bushings in such a manor that they cannot
make contact with bushings and tag
• opening, visibly identifying opening, tagging and locking, with a company lock,
the main secondary breaker
• Produce zone on structure you are working on.
TWO AND THREE PHASE SYSTEMS WITH A CONTINUOUS NEUTRAL/SHEILD WIRE(S)

This type of job is one of the more complicated and difficult to use equipotential practices.
The Risk:
If the line becomes accidentally energized, the neutrals/shield wires cause currents to flow
in a way that can result in large voltage differences between conductors and a hazard for
the lineman.
Managing the Risk:

The person responsible for the job must decide on the best strategy for managing the risks
in discussion with the crew, before proceeding.
• The normal method of dealing with these systems is to use equipotential practices by
bonding all conductors and neutrals/shield wires on every pole where you are working.
You are accountable to explore the feasibility of equipotential practices before
considering other alternatives.
• If the complexities of the job make normal equipotential practices unworkable you must
use the following practices to manage the risks:
o Limit the length of your work area to 1 km.
o Bond and ground all conductors together at all power system sources.
o Identify job sites where there is a possibility of backfeed and take additional
precautions to eliminate this hazard (i.e. Remove secondaries, or ground
primaries or secondaries.)
• When working on a structure you must go from the band to the neutral and to all phases.
If you are changing or replacing conductors, bond to one of the new conductors to make
it easier to remove the old ones.
Page 8 of 19
The risk has been reduced but if the line does become energized there will still be
voltage differences between some conductors which could be hazardous.
POWER SYSTEM SOURCE

Definition: A *power system source is a generator of electricity with high voltage and has the
capacity to deliver a hazardous current flow, including:
another power line that could become connected to your circuit through:
• A switching error (normal and loop feeds)
• Line crossings
• Overbuilt or under built circuits
• Parallel lines (leaned lines, others circuits in the same corridor)
• Energized cables in the same trench
• One single transformer of 100 kVA per phase or larger. This assumes there could be
some form of back-up generation at these sites that would have the capacity to produce
a hazardous current flow in the bonded area.
• A line that extends more than 8 km from a bonded area
• Atmospheric conditions
• Independent power producers
STRINGING OR SALVAGING CONDUCTOR

Equipotential Bonding and Grounding methods shall be used when stringing or salvaging
conductors.
Page 9 of 19
STRINGING OR SALVAGING CONDUCTOR (cont’d)

• There are often many alternatives to stringing lines. Choose the methods that will
minimize your exposure to risks. You may have to develop some new methods or use
different equipment; be creative.
• Conductors must be bonded and grounded before they are pulled.
• Use tension stringing whenever possible, to minimize or control hazards on the ground.
• When handling conductors on the ground, use a bond mat or an approved conductive
platform, such as the deck of a truck, bonded to all conductors to create an equipotential
zone whenever possible.
• If after completing a hazard assessment an equipotential zone can not be produced to
handle conductor on the ground, you must use rubber gloves.
• Do not handle the conductors when they are moving or being pulled.
• There must be a person, who is deemed competent and understands the risks &
hazards involved with the task, observing the reel(s) at all times while stringing
conductor.
• Limit the handling of the conductors on the ground when conductor is being hung.
• If, after completing a hazard assessment, it is determined that the line cannot
become energized by any means and connected one ground to drain static, you
may string, hang and tie-in the conductor without equipotential bonding and
grounding providing the length of the line is less than 3 km.
Stringing or Salvaging Conductor Parallel to an Energized Line

• Equipotential Bonding and Grounding methods shall be used when stringing or
salvaging conductors.
• Choose the methods that will minimize your hazards. You may have to develop some
new methods or use different equipment; be creative.
• Conductors and equipment must be bonded and grounded before stringing begins.
• Use tension stringing whenever possible, to minimize or control hazards on the ground.
• When handling conductors on the ground, use a bond mat or an approved conductive
platform, such as the deck of a truck, bonded to all conductors to create an equipotential
zone whenever possible.
• After completing a hazard assessment, an equipotential zone cannot be produced to
handle conductor on the ground, you must use rubber gloves.
• Do not handle the conductors when they are moving or being pulled.
• There must be a person, who is deemed competent and understands the risks &
hazards involved with the task, observing the reel(s) at all times while stringing
conductor.
• Limit the handling of the conductors on the ground when conductor is being hung.
• If conductors are left unattended, long term or over night on stringing dollies or other
attachments to the wood pole they must:
Page 10 of 19
• Be attached at a height that maintains the proper ground clearance according to the
ECUC at the intended operating voltage of the circuit that the conductor is part of.
• Not be within 150 mm of any hardware on the structure.
• Maintain 500 mm or be insulated from any neutral, ground wire, grounded hardware
or guy wire.
• If a bonded zone has been produced on the ground, provisions for safe exit and entry
must be provided. For example, a raised platform covered with rubber mats.
Butt Down/Tie Down Locations
Caution!
Always consider electrical and mechanical protection at locations where a conductor
is handled by an employee or where contact could be made by the public, regardless
of whether there is any possibility of accidental energization.
• Electrical Protection refers to the steps to manage electrical hazards, including

induction, by using proper ground clearances, trip grounds, insulation and equipotential
zones.
• Mechanical Protection refers to barricades, flagging or supervision, to prevent staff or
public from contacting the conductors.
Butt Down/Tie Down Locations cont’d
The strategy and practices you apply will depend upon whether you are dealing with:
• temporary situations (within the workday)
• longer term situations (overnight or longer)
• the two options for tying conductors off are at:
• ground level
• overhead
Butt Down/Tie-Down Temporary Situations – Ground Level
Risks of Tying Conductors Off At Ground level

In the past people and livestock have been killed and injured and grass fires have resulted
due to conductors being tied off at ground level and/or inadequate grounding installed and
left for extended periods. The cause has mainly been induction but can occur from any form
of accidental energization.
The following work procedures shall be followed.

• Control the situation at the butt down location, realizing that at times you could be a
kilometer or more away from that location, while the stringing continues.
Page 11 of 19
• Flag, barricade or supervise the conductors at the butt down location if there is any
possibility of the public coming in contact with the conductors.
• If the conductors can become accidentally energized these precautions must also be
followed:
o Bond and ground all conductors at the butt-down and/or on the trailer to
prevent a potential difference between conductors.
o Move trip ground closer to butt down location before handling conductors on
the ground. If there is an energized parallel line a large loop will produce a
circulating current. If possible, avoid large loops.
o Keep the trip ground close but out of the job site to prevent step potential
problems, ideally a span away or no closer than 10 meters to the work
location.
o Use a bond mat bonded to the conductors or after a hazard assessment
rubber gloves can be used when handling the conductor.
o Remember there is still a possibility of step potential.
• When stringing parallel to an energized line the hazard increases due to induction.
Butt Down/Tie-Down Temporary Situations – Overhead

• Use an equipotential zone when handling conductors on the pole.
• No marking or barricading is required if the conductors maintain proper Electrical and
Communication Board (ECUC) clearances for isolated wires and the land use
classification.
• If clearances are not maintained with the wires, you must consider flagging, barricading
and/or supervision, depending upon the location, job practices and your assessment of
the hazard to public or worker.
Butt Down/Tie-Down Long Term Situations – Ground Level

Control the situation at the butt down location.
• Barricade or supervise the conductors if there is any possibility of the public coming in
contact with the conductors. Barricades should extend sufficiently to properly protect the
conductors and should be made of a non-conductive material. (i.e. plastic snow fence.)
followed:
• When handling conductors use a bond mat bonded to the conductors. If after a
hazard assessment rubber gloves must be used.
• The conductors will have rated insulation cut in at a height that the insulation cannot
be reached by unqualified persons.
• All temporary grounds will be removed if conductors are isolated from the ground.
• If insulation cannot be cut into the conductors they must be protected mechanically with
appropriate fencing so that absolutely no access can be obtained by unqualified
persons.
Page 12 of 19
• Fencing should be of a non-conductive material and danger signs installed warning

of the possible electrical danger that exists and all conductors will be bonded
together and grounded by a 10-ohm ground.
• There will be only one ground left on the conductors at the fenced location to
eliminate static voltage and not permit a circulating current.
Butt Down/Tie-Down Long Term Situations – Overhead

• Maintain proper ECUC clearances for isolated wires and the land use classification.
followed:
• An equipotential zone must be produced on the pole before handling the conductors.
• The tails or ends of conductors that could reach the ground will be coiled up and
attached in a safe elevated position.
• Conductors dead ended without insulators require ground and bonded to the butt
end of the pole.
• Conductors dead ended with insulators then no ground is required.
Restoration
The following information is to give you guidelines for restoration of overhead lines during
emergency or none standard work. EB&G methods are to be followed at all times. Use this
information to support the work required in sometime difficult situations.
Broken Conductor
• Ground both sides of work location
• Produce equipotential zone or use rubber gloves when handling the conductors (
• If poles are leaning an excessive amount they must be supported
• Use digger truck
• Use conductors to support structures
• Take tension on one of the broken conductors
• Jack conductors together as much as possible and splice
• Check structures to ensure they are safe to climb
• Work from one structure continuing to jack conductors to straighten poles
• Use bucket truck to eliminate climbing structures
• Sag conductors as required
• Equipotential zone will be produced on all structures worked on
Broken Structures With No Neutral

• Produce a situation to eliminate all power system sources
Page 13 of 19
• Ground both sides of work area in order to handle conductors with rubber gloves
if no Equal potential zone is created.
• Clear conductors by cutting or rolling out of the work location
• Consider the publics access to the work site
• Conductors would be repaired, hung, sagged and tied in using EB&G methods or
rubber gloves and conductors must have jumper installed.
Broken Structures With Neutral

• Grounds must be attached at all Power System Sources
• If after a tailboard discussion, it is determined that EB&G will be in-effective,
produce a construction clearance by removing all Power System Sources
• Using EB&G methods remove a span of wire at all Power System Sources
• Do not leave phase conductors bonded to the system in work zone or where
accessible by the public
• Maintain system neutral
• Remove bond leads from neutral to phase conductors before work proceeds.
This is done to isolate the neutral from the system primary
• Eliminate all possible back feed situations
• Complete all pole replacement and hanging of new conductor as new
construction
• Replace bond lead between neutral and phase conductors
• When bringing originally removed spans of wire back to normal EB&G methods
must be used
• Grounds should be installed on both sides, try to equalize the zone and if not
able to, rubber gloves must be used
Changing Transformers (where GOI is taken from same structure)
The need for EB&G to change transformers is not required when the conditions have been
met for the two situations below where a GOI is taken from the same structure.
Changing Transformer with No Primary Switch’s (Rural Farm Service)

• Remove the secondary load (trip breaker if applicable)
• Create visual open on primary by removing the riser and put it back on itself
• While maintaining limits of approach create visual open on secondary to
eliminate all possible sources of backfeed
• Potential test the primary circuit(s) and install “Men at Work” Isolation Log/Tag.
• Maintain limits of approach and change transformer
Page 14 of 19
Changing Transformer with Primary Switch’s on Same Structure
• Remove the secondary load (trip breaker if applicable)

• Create visual open on primary by opening the disconnects and removing the riser
• While maintaining limits of approach create visual open on secondary to
eliminate all possible sources of backfeed
• Potential test and install “Men at Work” Isolation Log/Tag.
• Maintain limits of approach and change transformer
Substation Grounding and Bonding Requirements:

Applying Grounding
A temporary protective ground must be installed to trip the circuit in case of accidental
energizing also to, minimize voltage rise and to bleed off capacitive charge.
When applying the grounds, consider the following:
• A temporary protective ground is always needed to trip circuits when accidentally
energized. Connect the circuit to the station grid. Remember, any type of
grounding connection to the earth has some impedance and will limit the amount
of current that can be handled safely.
Attach Grounds Directly to the Station Ground Grid

Ground connections, when practicable, must be connected directly to the ground grid rather
than the steel structure. Clean connection points of all paint, oxidation and contaminants
before applying ground clamp.
CAUTION!
Ensure that there are no devices that will open under fault conditions between the temporary
protective grounds and the worksite.
Solid blade switches and gang switches must be checked, locked and tagged in the closed
position when used in the tripping circuit.
When installing temporary protective grounds on bundle conductor all sub conductors must
be grounded at that point either with a ground jumper or an aluminium nema path.
Bonding a Bundled Conductor
When grounding a bundled conductor, a spacer is not considered an electrical
connection and therefore bonding of the Bundle will be required.
Single Ground Set

A single safety ground installed within 30cm2 of an electrical terminal connected to a current
carrying yoke may bee bonded to the remainder of the bundle via the yoke.
Page 15 of 19
APPLYING THE BONDING

Equipotential bonding methods must be used when the equipment being worked on can
become energized. The application of bonding is to protect workers from harmful
shock currents.
When Applying bonding, consider the following:
• Bonds to phased, neutrals, and shield wires must be applied with a hotstick. The
reason for using the hotstick is to protect the worker in the event any of the wires
are or may become energized.
• Standard practice is to bond all three phases at work locations (NOTE: All paths
that current can follow must be bonded)
• The Safe Work Plan should determine the risks when working on or touching the
grid.
Examples:
• When working in a trench with feet below the grid and touching the grid
• When working around transformer neutrals or neutral reactors
• When splicing grid conductors.
All Conductive paths must be bonded together to form an equipotential zones, the
phases, concentric neutrals, shield wires, guy wires and steel winch lines etc. must be
bonded together.
PRACTICES
Steps to implement hazard control for various jobs:
• Test for potential
• Temporary protective grounds must be installed
• Bond all phases using a hotstick
• Tie excess ground cable to the structure securely to reduce mechanical stress
(Do Not Coil)
Ground Sets Should Be Kept as Short As Possible

Working on Ground:
• Protect all workers from step and touch potential
• Produce an equipotential zone with the use of a rated ground mat or other approved
conductive platform.
• Examples:
o Equipment outside the station fence and connected to the station grid
o Step & touch potential which can develop inside the station.
• Use approved protective equipment such as rubber gloves, rubber boots, hotsticks
and rubber mats to handle the conductor.
Page 16 of 19
CAUTION!
Be aware and guard against step and touch potential when using protective equipment
instead of a ground mat, Avoid contact between the conductor and unprotected parts of your
body.
Be aware of conditions that will render the insulating devices useless such as wet or
contaminated conditions and sharp objects.
Splicing or Terminating Underground:
When working on an underground cable equipotential bonding and grounding methods must
be applied. All possible sources of potential and all possible ground paths must be
considered. Rubber gloves must be used until a equipotential zone is established.
Ensure that all conductors are bonded to the equipotential zone
Splicing on the ground:
• Bond conductors across the break to avoid dangerous
potential differences.
1. Note: The use of an insulated access mat should be determined from a Safe
Work Plan
Note: Alternatives to a ground mat include:
• Working from the deck of the truck or trailer bonded to the conductor and
equipment.
CAUTION!
Be aware Penetrox™ is conductive and petroleum based and will render rubber based
insulation devices useless.
When working on the bus:
• When working from the structure or from an aerial device, ensure all conductive
paths are bonded, including fibreglass ladders.
Equipment/Material Entering or Leaving the Equipotential Zone:
• Use hand lines to transport equipment and material in or out of the equipotential
zone ensure handline is not attached to the worker or conductors. Extra
precautions are required when the rope is wet.
• Bond truck chassis, boom or steel winch lines into the equipotential zone.
Operators are to remain on the truck or a bonded ground mat while the winch line
is in the equipotential zone.
• Bond any conductive path that may extend outside the equipotential zone.
Working from a Bucket supported by an Unrated Boom:
• Bond the boom, bucket or truck chassis into the equipotential zone.
CAUTION!
There is a risk of touch and step potential when stepping on or off the truck that is
bonded into the equipotential zone. The truck and ground could be at different
potentials.
Page 17 of 19
Cutting open a conductor or working across an open switch:

Bond across the work location where there will be gap in the continuity of the circuit,
for example, working on an open switch, removing a riser or cutting a conductor. This
will prevent a potential difference across the two open ends.
THIS IS THE MOST IMPORTANT PART OF EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING
AND GROUNDING
Disconnect With a Jumper across Possible opening
Any possible gap (break) in the continuity of a conductor requires bonding across such
a location. Examples of this are switches and breakers. Be careful not place body in
series when applying a jumper.
Vehicle working outside a substation fence, extending inside the fence.
• If vehicle is located outside the fence and the extension has to cross the substation
fence it must be grounded to the substation ground grid
• Once the vehicle is grounded to the station grid, all ground personnel must stay clear
of the vehicle.
• Operation of the boom equipment must be done from ON the vehicle if possible. If
not possible, portable bond mats shall be placed along the vehicle to protect the
operator when operating or when stepping on or off the vehicle or anyone near the
vehicle, accessing tool bins tec. Workers should limit time stepping on or off the
portable ground mats. If portable bond mats are not used the vehicle must be
flagged off until the crane or bucket is clear of the equipotential zone.
• Personnel within the substation may receive material only when the vehicle is
grounded to the substation grid.
Boom truck outside the substation with personnel off-loading equipment.
NOTE:
Degassifier unit, mobile substations and other similar equipment must be grounded or
bonded to the station grid when installed. Care should be taken to insure the station
grid protects the area. If the station grid does not extend to the required setup location
a temporary perimeter ground must be installed. Step and touch potential should be
noted in the safe work plan and daily tailboard discussions.
Vehicle working inside a Substation extending outside the fence.
• The vehicle in the station must be grounded to the station grid.
• All outside personnel located outside the fence working with loads from the vehicle
must work from a ground mat (unless a certified non-conductive sling is used with no
chance of contacting boom hook.) The mat must be bonded to the station ground
grid.
Page 18 of 19
Regulatory References:
Alberta
Part 40- Electrical
British Columbia
Part 19 -Electrical Safety
Yukon
NWT/Nunavut
Section 96
Manitoba
Part 38 -Electrical Safety
Saskatchewan
Part XXX- Additional Protection for Electrical Workers- Sections 450-467
Ontario
Part II – General Construction- Electrical Hazards Sections 181-195.3
Page 19 of 19
Document Description Hydrovacing Practice
26.038 OPERATING OF HYDRO-VAC EQUIPMENT
This Safe Work Practice is applied to both trailer and permanent truck equipment.
Hydro-vac equipment operator must be trained in its use. Training documentation must
be presented to Valard’s Safety Department prior to operating equipment. Must
understand the limitations as well as the Safety requirements of the equipment.
Training:
• H²S Training
• CSTS
• Log Book
• Load Securement
• Pre & post trip inspections
Personal Protective Equipment:
The following equipment must be worn at all times while operating hydro-vac equipment.
• CSA approved hardhat, Hearing protection
• Eye protection (safety glasses)
• Face Protection (face Shield)
• Safety Footwear
• Long sleeved shirt or jacket. No short sleeved permitted.
Signage required:
The following signs are required to perform this task at all locations.
• Hearing Protection Required sign. (This is mandatory no exceptions, not
even in the woods. All workers visitors etc. must be warned of the noise.)
• Road signage as per Alberta’s Transportation’s Requirements must be met.
Site Preparation:
• Work area must be accessible for the hydro vac equipment.
• Landowner’s permission must be received if required.
Hydrovacing:
• All areas must be identified using Alberta-one-call or approved locators.
• When hydrovacing these areas, the following must be addressed
o When locating lines insure the line locate.
o If not located in area, hydrovac till the area that is required to be dug
must be exposed to insure line is there. ( a minimum of 1 Metre must
be hyrovaced in each direction or until line is exposed)
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Hydrovacing Practice
o If unable to locate line in work area photo must be taken with a

measuring tape in the photo showing exact distance exposed. DO
NOT write the distance and not provide this picture.
o Expose area perpendicular to the line to be located to verify its exact
position.
Alberta
British Columbia
Excavations
Yukon
Saskatchewan
Manitoba
Ontario
NWT
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Camp/Site Trailer Setup Practice
26.039 CAMP FACILITIES/ SITE TRAILERS SETUP AND REMOVAL
Valard Construction has developed a procedure in order that the environment is

protected at all times, this process must be adhered to at all times.
• Location must be chosen so that the camp is not setup where there is a
possibility that contaminant may run or leak down to any waterways.
• The right-of-way shall be maintained in an orderly condition, free of accumulated
waste products, debris, and litter. All garbage and construction debris shall be
removed on a daily basis, and disposed of at a landfill site.
• Liquid waste containment for both the washrooms and kitchens will be drained
into a holding tank which shall be pumped out regularly to prevent it from
overflowing.
• Waste holding tank must be equipped with an overflow alarm, this is to be tied
into the water pressure system so that it will shut down if alarm is activated due
to a high level. This must be setup to alarm below the overflow tube.
• Waste Containers will be provided and a waste disposal company will be
contracted to maintain it. This applies to the garbage from the rooms and
kitchen. (Does not apply to any hazardous material).
• Fuelling and servicing of equipment will be setup so that there will not happen
within a 100 meters of the high water mark of any watercourse or standing
water body.
• The fueling station will be placed in an area that is not close to vehicular traffic.
• Fuel containers shall be double walled.
• 20 Lb. ABC Fire Extinguishers must be placed approximately 10-20 ft from fuel
tanks area. Must be placed at a distance that the flames will not prevent worker
form being able to access it.
• Jersey barriers must be placed in a position that prevents vehicles from coming
into contact with any fuel, propane, waste water and water containers.
• Equipment maintenance will be restricted to designated and approved areas to
prevent contamination of soils by accidental spills of toxic or hazardous material;
this area will be checked to insure compliance to this.
• All contaminated soil and vegetation shall be excavated, and disposed of at an
approved location. Replacement soil and topsoil may have to be transported to
the site as a rehabilitation measure. This will be at the discretion of Valard
Construction.
• Oil spills involving Hydraulic oil, Gasoline, or Antifreeze shall be reported
immediately to the supervisor on site and receive instructions on the cleanup
method. The MSDS must be reviewed prior to any cleanup is started. (if its
performed by the appropriate waste disposal Company as per the applicable
Environmental cleanup regulations).
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Camp/Site Trailer Setup Practice
• If the spill is less than 5 litres then a spill kit with Absorbal rags or socks may be
used as long as the MSDS is checked first.
o Assess the situation and take appropriate measures to contain the spill.
o Use absorbal rags and floor dry to clean up the spill.
o Contact your supervisor to report spill and receive further instructions.
o If spill is less than 5 litres report it to Valard Construction.
o If spill is larger than 5 litres the Alberta Environmental Protection Branch
must be notified. On spills of this size it is very important to contain the
spill as soon as possible.
o Complete the environmental spill release form and fax to the office and to
Environment Canada
The following list is for reportable quantities for common substances.

Oils (hydraulic, used, non PCB). ≥ 5 litres
Gasoline, Diesel, or Glycol ≥- 50 litres
PCBs ≥ 50 ppm
• All debris (e.g., trade waste, oil, filters, grease cartridges, lubrication containers,
kitchen garbage) shall be collected, and disposed of at a designated and
approved facility. All large drums shall be returned to the vendor, or washed,
crushed, and disposed of at an approved facility. Due care and attention shall be
taken to prevent accidental spills of residual contents during transport and
disposal.
• All debris and waste materials shall not be buried on-site, or burned in open
barrels
• All garbage and any waste must be cleaned up regularly and a complete area
cleanup must be performed as soon as the camp is dismantled.
• All hazardous, toxic, contaminated, and dangerous wastes shall be stored,
transported, and disposed of in conformance with the Hazardous Chemicals Act,
WHMIS guidelines, and Hazardous Waste Regulations for the Province of
Alberta as well as Federal Regulations
When the camp is not required and is to be removed, all material must be removed
including any waste as well as the ground must be restored to it original state if it is
required.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Vehicle Extrication
26.040 VEHICLE/EQUIPMENT EXTRICATION PRACTICE.
Valard Construction has from time to time had to pull equipment that are stuck in mud
and snow. Valard has developed this practice in order that the when they are to be
towed that there will be minimal environmental and equipment damage when it must be
performed.
Equipment to be recovered Recovery Equipment Sling Size

Digger Truck Dozer, Loader, Trackhoe, 3” X 20’
Digger
Loader Dozer, Loader, Trackhoe 2” X 20’
Backhoe Dozer, Loader, Trackhoe, 3” X 20’
Digger
Trackhoe Dozer, Loader, Trackhoe 4” X 20’
Boom Truck Dozer, Loader, Trackhoe, 4” X 20’
Digger
1 ton Truck Digger, Dozer, Loader, 2” X 20’
Trackhoe
Pickup Pickup or 1 ton pickup 2” X 20’
• Appropriate sized attaching equipment is to be used.
• When performing this on or near a roadway additional flag personnel shall be
positioned in order to warn and control traffic till the recovery is completed.
• When any nylon sling is used to pull on equipment, that sling will be labeled as a
tow sling only and not ever used for rigging purposes.
• The signal person shall stand a minimum distance of 20 feet to the side of the
pull, in case the sling breaks. This will minimize the person signaling from getting
struck by the broken sling.
• No one is permitted to stand between the two pieces of equipment during this
activity, they must be positioned a minimum of 30 feet from the sling area.
• Equipment towed out will be inspected for damage and if there is no damage
then it may return back into service. Damaged equipment must be repaired prior
to returning to the site.
• It is not permitted to backup and take a run with the sling in a slack
position in order to try to jolt the stuck unit out.
Alberta
British Columbia
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Vehicle Extrication
Yukon
Saskatchewan
Manitoba
Ontario
NWT
Page 2 of 2
Document Description All Terrain Vehicles
26.041 USE OF ALL TERRAIN VEHICLES (ATV/ UTV/ ARGO)

ALL PERSONNEL THAT ARE TO OPERATE ANY ALL-TERRAIN - VEHICLE MUST BE
TRAINED IN ITS USE.
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:

• DOT/Snell/ANSI approved helmets only (hardhats are not approved)
• Safety Footwear with 6” uppers.
• High Visibility vest or outerwear.
• Long sleeved clothing
• Gloves
• Safety glasses if helmet has no face shield.
• Clothing must be worn to provide protection from the cold due to increased wind chill
at high speeds while operating equipment
• Do not wear scarves or loose clothing because of potential entanglement with moving
parts.
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:
• Level 1 First Aid Kit
• Minimum 10 lb. mounted Fire Extinguisher
• Pulaski, Shovel and Water Can
• Air horn (to repel bears)
• Amber light
• Buggy Whip required to access Mine Site
PROPER RIDING POSTURE

Riding an ATV correctly allows the operator to operate and control the machine more easily,
and react more quickly to changes in terrain and environment.
Proper riding posture includes:
• Head and eyes up, looking forward;
• Shoulders relaxed, with elbows bent slightly;
• Hands on the handlebars; knees in toward the gas tank
• Feet on the footrests, toes pointing straight ahead.
LOADING/UNLOADING
• A trailer is to be used to transport ATV; Truck deck is only to be used if a trailer is
not available.
• Trailer must have a tilting deck.
• Worker must be in a sitting position when driving up or off deck. Before
dismounting ATV the brake must be set or the unit must be secured with ratchet
straps ATV.
Page 1 of 4
• If loading onto a truck deck approved ramps must be used.

When unloading/ loading unit on or off a truck deck a winch (mechanical or electrical)
must be used
PRE RIDE INSPECTION
1. Tires- Check condition and pressures.
2. Fuel and oil level- Fill both tanks to their proper levels.
3. All brakes- Check operation and adjustment.
4. Throttle pedal- Check for free operation.
5. Brake lights- Check for proper operation.
6. Engine Ignition switch- Check for proper operation.
7. Horn button- Check for proper operation.
8. Bach Up safety beeper (if equipped)- Check for proper operation.
9. Seat position correctly and latch fully engaged.
10. All guards and covers are properly installed and fastened.
11. Wheels- Check for tightness of wheel nuts and axle nuts; check that axle nuts are
secured by cotter pins.
12. Air cleaner element- Check for dirt; clean or replace.
13. Steering- Check for free operation noting any unusual looseness in any area.
14. Loose parts- Visually inspect vehicle for any damaged components or loose
nuts/bolts or other fasteners.
15. Driving gear- Wear a helmet, goggles or safety glasses, boots, long sleeved shirt,
long pants, and other protective clothing that may be required.
SAFE OPERATION – ATV GENERAL

• Do a pre-ride inspection before using any ATV.
• To turn an ATV, keep most of your body weight on the outside foot peg and lean
your upper body into the turn.
• When climbing hills, shift your body weight forward by leaning to keep the front
wheel(s) on the ground.
• If stopped while going uphill, do not apply the rear brake. Get off the machine
and turn it around to proceed down the hill.
• When going down hills, keep the engine running and in gear, apply the rear
brake and avoid sharp turns.
• Avoid "side hill" situations. When they are unavoidable, lean into the hill.
• As a last resort to avoid an impending collision, roll off the vehicle and kick
yourself free of it.
• Do not allow extra riders on the ATV.
• All equipment shall be operated in a safe manner and under safe
environmental conditions.
• Only trained and competent Personnel shall operate ATV’s;
Page 2 of 4
• Wear appropriate PPE, i.e., helmets with goggles, gloves, boots (with ankle
supports);
• Never attempt to climb a hill too steep for your ability or the performance of the
ATV;
• Avoid riding across slopes whenever possible.
• No passengers are allowed on ATV’s
• Load/unload ATV from a ramp or bank.
• Follow OEM operator’s manual.
• It is illegal to operate an ATV on public roads.
SAFE OPERATION – UTV GENERAL

• Do a pre-ride inspection before using any UTV. This inspection should include
checking tires, throttle cable, front and rear brakes, lights and switches, oil and
fuel, chain, and the chassis for any defects or wear.
• Avoid "side hill" situations. When they are unavoidable, lean into the hill.
• All equipment shall be operated in a safe manner and under safe
environmental conditions.
• Only trained and competent Personnel shall operate UTV’s;
• Do not operate on hills steeper than 15 degrees 15°.
• Do not carry more than one passenger.
• Always wear your seat belt, the cab frame is not designed or intended to
provide rollover protection.
• Operate slowly in reverse- avoid sharp turns or sudden braking.
• Make sure the passenger reads and understands all safety labels.
• Watch for branches or other hazards that could enter the vehicle.
Note: Loss of vehicle control causes most accidents. When the operator encounters a
change of terrain or swerves to avoid an obstacle, it causes an abrupt change of
balance and loss of control.
Collisions with automobiles on public roads are the most common cause of fatal All Terrain
Vehicle accidents.
Regulatory Requirements
Alberta
Part 9- Powered Mobile Equipment – Section 282- ATV and Snow Vehicles
British Columbia
Part 16 – Mobile Equipment – Section 16.49-16.55- All Terrain Vehicles
Yukon
Part 6- Mobile Equipment – Section 6.45-6.48
Saskatchewan
Part XI-Powered Mobile equipment
Page 3 of 4
Manitoba
Part 22 – Powered Mobile Equipment
Page 4 of 4
Document Description Housekeeping
26.043 HOUSEKEEPING
Good housekeeping is a basic part of incident prevention. It is the responsibility of all
employees and cannot be accomplished by periodic cleanups.
Housekeeping shall be maintained by the following practices:

• Access to emergency exits must be kept clear.
• Ensure that all machinery, equipment, workplace and storage facilities are inspected
on a regular basis and kept in a safe manner.
• All working areas shall be kept clean and free from loose or unstable objects, oil,
grease, and other materials at all times.
• Every work area shall be kept clean and free from any slipping or tripping hazard.
• Truck cabs must be kept clean of food waste and other garbage, including empty
pop/coffee containers.
• Oil or other spillage shall be cleaned up will the job is in progress.
• Ensure that all tools are kept clean, in proper working order and placed in their
proper storage area upon completion of their use. It will be the supervisor's or
Forman's responsibility to see this practice is undertaken.
• Never place loose parts, tools or equipment on stair treads.
• Material is not to be stored in aisles.
• Rubbish, garbage and paper shall be placed in metal containers.
• Any material, garbage, or empty containers that are to be discarded must be done
so in accordance with WHMIS, Manufacturer and site requirements.
• Only approved solvents are to be used for cleaning purposes.
• Flammable liquids, toxic or harmful substances shall be stores in safe and approved
containers and properly identified. (See Section 12 for additional WHMIS
information.
• Fire extinguishers in shops shall be attached to the wall with signs showing their
locations.
• Racks for storage shall be adequately secured and stable.
Alberta
Part 12 – General Safety Precautions – Section (185)- Housekeeping
British Columbia
Part 20 – Construction, Excavation, and Demolition – Section (20.39) – Housekeeping
Yukon
Part 10- Construction and Building Safety – Section (10.23) - Housekeeping
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Housekeeping
Ontario
Part 2- General Construction – Sections (35-48) – Housekeeping
NWT
Part 1- Accident Prevention –Sections (23-29) - Housekeeping
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Operating Mulcher
26.044 OPERATING MULCHER
This procedure is to identify the steps to complete this task in a safe and efficient
manner.
o Hard hat
o Safety glasses
o Boots
o Leather gloves
o Hi-visibility vest
Required training:
1. Operators are to be trained in the equipment which is being used.
2. Dangerous Tree Control Course
3. H2S Aware (if required by client)
If energized lines are in the vicinity, a signal person must be used and identified
including the Limits of Approach and identified on the tailboard. Limits of Approach
must be maintained at all times.
Steps:
Operator role and responsibilities:
1. Only trained operators are to operate a mulcher.
2. Operator must wear the appropriate wear outside the equipment, (Glasses, hardhat,
Safety boots and hi-visibility outerwear).
3. The operator must perform regular walk-around inspections throughout the workday.
4. Windows must be checked for cracks and kept clean.
5. Operator must be aware of all other workers or other people that are near the mulcher
while it's in operation.
6. Operator must wear a seat belt when operating the mulcher.
7. The mulcher must be escorted when accessing public roads.
8. Passengers are not to ride either in or on the mulcher when it is in motion.
9. The mulcher must be blown out regularly with an air hose to remove dust and debris.
10. The operator must ensure that any tree sustaining partial or full damage to the main
trunk from the mulching operation will be felled by the mulcher or marked as a hazard.
11. All hazards must be communicated to the supervisor.
12. All known hazards must also be communicated immediately to those persons that may
be affected by the hazard.
Page 1 of 3
Mulcher Setup
1. When a mulcher is cutting (i.e. drum is spinning), no person should be allowed within
100 metres or 2 tree lengths, whichever is greater, in any direction of the machine.
2. Mulchers must display visible signage requiring that all persons keep away at least 100
metres away while the machine is at work.
3. Mulchers must display signage requiring that hearing protection must be worn past the
sign. This sign must be 100 metres from the work area.
4. Mulchers must be fitted with a positive air shutoff device and a backup alarm.
5. Mulchers must be fitted with a secondary escape system (e.g. escape hatch).
6. Mulchers without this escape hatch are not permitted in British Columbia.
7. Mulchers must be equipped with fire fighting equipment during fire season. See Safe
Work Practice 26.013.
8. Mulchers must be equipped with a radio that contains a channel with the same
frequency as that of the crew.
9. Mulchers that are equipped with a factory installed fire suppression system can only be
operated when the system is functional.
10. All emergency shut-off systems must be functional at all times.
Mulcher Operation:
1. A tailboard must be completed with all personnel that are working within close proximity
of the mulcher identified with their roles identified and communicated to all workers. This
must contain an emergency rescue plan and the work site must be inspected for any
additional hazards and included in this tailboard.
2. Doors are to remain closed during normal operations to prevent the operator from being
struck by flying debris.
3. Operator must avoid cutting trees that are too large, as per manufacturer's specifications
for the mulcher being used.
4. If slashers are required to cut a tree, they must follow all applicable provincial legislation.
5. When a "dog leg" needs to be cut, the slahers must first cut a line of sight, then retreat to
a safe area (100 metres away) before mulching operations can resume.
6. Slashers and operators must follow the industry recommended practice for " dangerous
tree control"
7. When a person is to approach a mulcher from any direction, that person must notify the
operator by radio/phone so that the operator is aware of their presence. Operator must
acknowledge the person and the machine must be put on standby mode (drum
disengaged) before any close approach. NO EXCEPTIONS!!
8. Operators are to make regular radio checks with workers in the area as well with the
Medic. If the communication system breaks down the work must cease till repairs are
completed and communication is restored. If workers are to be working alone then
Section 24 of the HS&E Policy will be implemented and followed.
Page 2 of 3
9. When doing any repairs or maintenance on the units, the key for the power plant must
be removed from the ignition to prevent the drum from rotating. This key is to remain in
the person doing the repairs or maintenance activities are completed.
10. Keys must be marked, identifying what they control.
Alberta
British Columbia
Excavations
Yukon
Saskatchewan
Manitoba
Ontario
NWT
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Use of Circular Saws
26.046 USE OF CIRCULAR SAWS

The circular saw is one of the most popular tools in the workplace, but it is potentially
very dangerous.
The following are the minimum required practices to be used with this equipment:
Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with
supervision of a worker who is qualified.
• Hard Hat
• Safety Glasses
• Leather Gloves
• Safety Boots
• Dust Mask
GENERAL SAFETY RULES:
• DANGER! Keep hands away from cutting area and the blade. Keep your
second hand on auxiliary handle or motor housing. If both hands are
holding the saw, they cannot be cut by the blade.
• Do not reach underneath the work piece. The guard cannot protect you
from the blade below the work piece.
• Adjust the cutting depth to the thickness of the work piece. Less than a
full tooth of the blade teeth should be visible below the work piece.
• Never hold piece being cut in your hands or across your leg. Secure the
work piece to a stable platform. It is important to support the work properly
to minimize body exposure, blade binding, or loss of control.
• Hold tool by insulated gripping surfaces when performing an operation
where the cutting tool may contact hidden wiring or its own cord.
Contact with a “live” wire will make exposed metal parts of the tool “live” and
shock the operator.
• When ripping, always use a rip fence or straight edge guide. This
improves the accuracy of cut and reduces the chance of blade binding.
• Always use blades with correct size and shape (diamond versus round)
of arbor holes. Blades that do not match the mounting hardware of the saw
will run eccentrically, causing loss of control.
• Never use damaged or incorrect blade washers or bolt. The blade
washers and bolt were specially designed for your saw for optimum
performance and safety of operation.
Page 1 of 7
• If the power supply cord is damaged, it must be replaced only by the

manufacturer or by an authorized service center to avoid risk.
CAUSES AND OPERATOR PREVENTION OF KICKBACK:

Kickback is a sudden reaction to a pinched, bound, or misaligned saw blade, causing
an uncontrolled saw to lift up and out of the work piece toward the operator. When
the blade is pinched or bound tightly by the kerf closing down, the blade stalls and
the motor reaction drives the unit rapidly back toward the operator.
If the blade becomes twisted or misaligned in the cut, the teeth at the back edge of
the blade can dig into the top surface of the wood causing the blade to climb out of
the kerf and jump back toward the operator. Kickback is the result of saw misuse
and/or incorrect operating procedures or conditions and can be avoided by taking
proper precautions, as given below:
• Maintain a firm grip with both hands on the saw and position your arms
to resist kickback forces. Position your body to either side of the blade,
but not in line with the blade. Kickback could cause the saw to jump
backwards, but kickback forces can be controlled by the operator, if proper
precautions are taken.
• When blade is binding, or when interrupting a cut for any reason, release the
trigger and hold the saw motionless in the material until the blade comes to a
complete stop. Never attempt to remove the saw from the work or pull the
saw backward while the blade is in motion, or kickback may occur.
Investigate and take corrective actions to eliminate the cause of blade
binding.
• When restarting a saw in the workpiece, center the saw blade in the kerf
and check that saw teeth are not engaged into the material. If saw blade
is binding, it may walk up or kickback from the workpiece as the saw is
restarted.
• Support large panels to minimize the risk of blade pinching and
kickback. Large panels tend to sag under their own weight. Supports must
be placed under the panel on both sides, near the line of cut and near the
edge of the panel.
• Do not use dull or damaged blades. Unsharpened or improperly set blades
produce narrow kerf causing excessive friction, blade binding and kickback
• Blade depth and bevel adjusting locking levers must be tight and secure
before making cut. If blade adjustment shifts while cutting, it may cause
binding and kickback.
• Use extra caution when making a “plunge cut” into existing walls or other
blind areas. The protruding blade may cut objects that can cause kickback
• Check lower guard for proper closing before each use. Do not operate saw if
lower guard does not move freely and close instantly. Never clamp or tie the
lower guard into the open position. If saw is accidentally dropped, lower
guard may be bent. Raise the lower guard with the retracting handle. Make
Page 2 of 7
sure it moves freely and does not touch the blade or any other part, in all
angles and depths of cut.
• Check the operation of the lower guard spring. If the guard and the spring are
not operating properly, they must be serviced before use. Lower guard may
operate sluggishly due to damaged parts, gummy deposits, or a buildup of
debris.
• Lower guard should be retracted manually only for special cuts, such as
“plunge cuts” and “compound cuts.” Raise lower guard by retracting handle.
As soon as blade enters the material, the lower guard must be released. For
all other sawing, the lower guard should operate automatically.
• Always observe that the lower guard is covering the blade before placing saw
down on bench or floor. An unprotected, coasting blade will cause the saw to
walk backwards, cutting whatever is in its path. Be aware of the time it takes
for the blade to stop after switch is released.
• Know your power tool. Read operator’s manual carefully. Learn its
applications and limitations, as well as the specific potential hazards related
to this power tool.
• Always wear safety glasses with side shields.
• Protect your lungs. Wear a face or dust mask if the operation is dusty. Protect
your hearing. Wear hearing protection during extended periods of operation.
ADDITIONAL SAFETY RULES

• Check damaged parts. Before further use of the tool, a guard or other part
that is damaged should be carefully checked to determine that it will operate
properly and perform its intended function. Check for alignment of moving
parts, binding of moving parts, breakage of parts, mounting, and any other
conditions that may affect its operation. A guard or other part that is damaged
should be properly repaired or replaced by an authorized service center.
Following this rule will reduce the risk of shock, fire, or serious injury.
• Inspect for and remove all nails from lumber before using this tool.
• Do not operate tool while under the influence of drugs, alcohol, or any
medication.
OPERATING THE SAW

• It is important to understand the correct method for operating the saw. Refer
to the figures in this section to learn the correct and incorrect ways for
handling the saw.
• When lifting the saw from the workpiece, the blade is exposed on the
underside of the saw until the lower blade guard closes. Make sure the lower
blade guard is closed before setting the saw down.
Page 3 of 7
• To make sawing easier and safer, always maintain proper control of the saw.
Loss of control could cause an accident resulting in possible serious injury.
To make the best possible cut:

• Hold the saw firmly with both hands.
• Avoid placing your hand on the work piece while making a cut.
• Support the work piece so that the cut (kerf) is always to your side.
• Support the work piece near the cut.
• Clamp the work piece securely so that the work piece will not move
during the cut.
• Always place the saw on the work piece that is supported, not the “cut off”
piece.
• Place the work piece with the “good” side down.
• Draw a guideline along the desired line of cut before beginning your cut.
DEPTH OF CUT ADJUSTMENT

Always keep correct blade depth setting. The correct blade depth setting for all cuts
should not exceed 1/4 in. below the material to be cut. More blade depth will
increase the chance of kickback and cause the cut to be rough. One blade tooth
below the material to be cut works best for most efficient cutting action.
Page 4 of 7
TO ADJUST BLADE DEPTH

• Disconnect power source to saw.
• Loosen the depth adjustment lever.
• Hold the base flat against the workpiece and raise or lower the saw until the
required depth is reached.
• Tighten the depth adjustment lever securely.
USING AN EDGE GUIDE

• Use an edge guide (not included) when making long or wide rip cuts with the
saw.
• Remove the battery pack from the saw.
• Place the edge guide through the holes in the saw base
• Adjust the edge guide to the width needed.
• Tighten the wing screw securely.
• When using an edge guide, position the face of the edge guide firmly against
the edge of work piece. This makes for a true cut without pinching the blade.
The guiding edge of the work piece must be straight for your cut to be
straight. Use caution to prevent the blade from binding in the cut.
Page 5 of 7
To make the best possible cut:

• Hold the saw firmly with both hands.
• Avoid placing your hand on the work piece while making a cut.
• Support the work piece so that the cut (kerf) is always to your side.
• Support the work piece near the cut.
• Clamp the work piece securely so that the work piece will not move during
the cut.
• Always place the saw on the work piece that is supported, not the “cut off”
piece.
• Place the work piece with the “good” side down.
• Draw a guideline along the desired line of cut before beginning your cut.
Alberta
OH&S Code Part 25 Section 376(1) (2)
OH&S Act Sections 14(1) and 15(1)
OH&S Code Part 25 Section 375 (1) (2) (3) (4)
British Columbia
Reg. Part 12 Tools, Machinery and Equipment Sections 12.72 and 12.73
Yukon
Part 4 Hand Tools and Power Driven Portable Tools/
Page 6 of 7
Manitoba
Part 16 Machines, tools and Robots Division 1
Saskatchewan
Part X Machine Safety Sections 146(1) and 146(2)
Ontario
Reg. 145/00 Section 29 Training of Worker and Sections 112(1)(2)(3) inclusive
Page 7 of 7
Document Description Arc Flash Protection
26.047 ARC FLASH PROTECTION AND PRACTICES
This procedure is to identify the steps to complete these tasks in a safe and efficient
manner.
• Hard hat
• Safety glasses
• Boots
• Leather gloves
• Fall Arrest Harness or Lineman belt
• Face shield (cal rated)
• FRC rated for work may include Arc Flash Suit (see chart and calculations for ARC
Flash potential)
Required tools and equipment:
• Cover ups (certified within 3 years)
• Insulated Rubber Gloves (certified within 6 Months).
• Hotsticks (certified within 1 year).
Scope:
Identifies safe work practice for working on or near exposed electrical conductors or
circuit parts in workplaces.
Purpose:
This practice is intended to provide for employee safety relative to electrical hazards.
Responsibility:
This practice shall be implemented by the employees. The employer provides this
practice and the training of the employees.
Establishing an Electrical Safe work Condition:
An electrical safe work condition shall be achieved and verified by the following process:
a) Determine all possible sources of electrical supply to the specific equipment. Check
applicable up-to-date drawings, diagrams, and identification tags.
b) After properly interrupting the load current, open the disconnecting device(s) for each
source.
c) Wherever possible, visually verify that all blades of the disconnecting are fully open
or that drawout-type circuit breakers are withdrawn to the fully disconnected position.
d) Apply lockout/tagout devices in accordance with SWP 26.032.
Page 1 of 5
e) Using an adequately rated voltage detector, test each phase conductor or circuit part
both phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground. Before and after each test, determine
that the voltage detector is operating satisfactorily.
f) Where there is a possibility of induced voltage or stored electrical energy, ground the
phase conductors or circuit parts before touching them. If it is a possibility that the
conductors or circuit parts could contact other exposed energized conductors or
circuit parts, apply ground-connecting devices rated for the available fault duty.
Working on or near de-energized Electrical Conductors or Circuit Parts that have
Lockout/Tagout/Devices applied.
a) General. All electrical circuit conductors and circuit parts shall be considered
energized until the source(s) of energy is (are) removed, at which time they shall
be considered de-energized. All electrical circuit conductors and circuit parts
shall not be considered in electrically safe condition until all sources of energy
are removed, the disconnecting means is under lockout/tagout, the absence of
voltage is verified by an approved voltage testing device, and where exposure to
energized facilities exists, are temporary grounded.
b) Employee Involvement. Each person who could be exposed directly or
indirectly to a source of electrical energy shall be involved in the Lockout/Tagout
process.
Note: An example of direct exposure is the qualified electrician who works on the
motor starter control, the power circuits or the motor. An example of
indirect exposure is the person who works on the coupling between the
motor and compressor.
c) Control of energy. All sources of electrical energy shall be controlled in such a
way to minimize employee exposure to electrical hazards.
Working on or near Live Parts
a) Live parts to which employee might be exposed to shall be put into an electrically
safe work condition before an employee works or near them, unless the
employer can demonstrate that de-energizing introduces additional or increased
hazards or is infeasible due to equipment design or operational limitations.
Approach Boundaries to Live Parts
a) Shock Hazard Analysis. A shock hazard analysis shall determine the voltage to
which personnel will be exposed, boundary requirements, and the personal
protective equipment necessary in order to minimize the possibility of electrical
shock to personnel.
b) Shock Protection Boundaries. The shock protection boundaries identified as
Limited, Restricted, and Prohibited Approach Boundaries are applicable to the
situation in which approaching personnel are exposed to live parts. See table on
Page 4 table for the distances associated with various system voltages.
Note: In certain instances, the Flash Protection might be a greater
distance from the exposed live parts than the Limited Approach Boundary.
Page 2 of 5
Arc Flash Hazard Analysis.

An arc flash hazard analysis shall determine the Arc Flash Protection Boundary and the
personal protective equipment that people within
the Arc Flash Protection Boundary shall use. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be
updated when a major modification or renovation takes place. It shall be reviewed
periodically, not to exceed five years, to account for changes in the electrical distribution
system that could affect the results of the arc flash hazard analysis. The arc flash hazard
analysis shall take into consideration the design of the overcurrent protective device and
its opening time, including its condition of maintenance.
Exception: An arc flash hazard analysis shall not be required where all of the following
conditions exist:
(1) The circuit is rated 240 volts or less.
(2) The circuit is supplied by one transformer.
(3) The transformer supplying the circuit is rated less than 125 kVA.
Note: Improper or inadequate maintenance can result in increased opening time of the
overcurrent protective device, thus increasing the incident energy.
Arc Flash Protection Boundary.

a) Voltage Levels Between 50 Volts and 600 Volts. In those cases where detailed
arc flash hazard analysis calculations are not performed for systems that are
between 50 volts and 600 volts, the Arc Flash Protection Boundary shall be 4.0 ft,
based on the product of clearing time of 2 cycles (0.033 sec) and the available
bolted fault current of 50 kA or any combination not exceeding 100 kA cycles
(1667 ampere seconds). When the product of clearing times and bolted fault
current exceeds 100 kA cycles, the Arc Flash Protection Boundary shall be
calculated.
b) Voltage Levels Above 600 Volts. At voltage levels above 600 volts, the Arc Flash
Protection Boundary shall be the distance at which the incident energy equals 5
J/cm2 (1.2 cal/cm2). For situations where fault-clearing time is equal to or less than
0.1 sec, the Arc Flash Protection Boundary shall be the distance at which the
incident energy level equals 6.24 J/cm2 (1.5 cal/cm2). For clearing times and
bolted fault currents other than 300kA cycles, or under engineering supervision, the
Flash Protection Boundary shall alternatively be permitted to be calculated in
accordance with the following general Formula:
Flash Protection Boundary for systems that are 600 volts or less, the Flash Protection
Boundary shall be 4.0ft, based on the product of clearing times of 6 cycles (0.1
Second) and the available bolted fault current of 50 KA or any combination not
exceeding 300 kA cycles (5000 ampere seconds). For clearing times and bolted fault
currents other than 300 kA cycles, or under engineering supervision, the Flash
Page 3 of 5
Protection Boundary shall alternatively be permitted to be calculated in accordance

with the following general formula:
Dc = [2.65 x MVAbf x t]1/2 or Dc = [53 x MVA x t]1/2
Where:
Dc = distance in feet from arc source for a second –degree burn
MVAbf = bolted fault capacity available at point involved (in mega volt-amps)
MVA = capacity rating of transformer (mega volt-amps). For transformers with MVA
ratings below 0.75 MVA, multiply the transformer MVA rating by 1.25
t = Time of arc exposure (in seconds)
APPROACH BOUNDARIES TO LIVE PARTS FOR SHOCK PROTECTION

Nominal System Exposed Exposed Fixed Restricted Approach Prohibited
Voltage Movable Circuit Part Boundary; Includes Approach
Inadvertent Boundary
Range, Phase to Conductor
Movement Adder
Phase
(Unqualified (qualified worker)
worker)
Less than 50 Not specified Not Specified Not specified Not Specified
50 to 300 3.05m (10ft 0in.) 1.07m (3ft 6in.) Avoid Contact Avoid Contact
301 to 750 3.05m (10ft 0in.) 1.07m (3ft 6in.) 304.8mm (1ft 0in.) 25.4mm (0ft 1in.)
751 to 15kV 3.05m (10ft 0in.) 1.53m (5ft 0in.) 660.4mm (2ft 2in.) 177.8mm (0ft 7in.)
15.1 kV to 36 kV 3.05m (10ft 0in.) 1.83m (6ft 0in.) 787.4mm (2ft 7in.) 254 mm (0ft 10in.)
36.1 kV to 46 kV3.05m (10ft 0in.) 2.44m (8ft. 0in.) 838.2mm (2ft 9in.) 431.8mm (1ft 5in.)
46.1 kV to 72.5 3.05m (10ft 0in.) 2.44m (8ft 0in.) 965.2mm (3ft 2in.) 635mm (2ft 1in.)
kV
72.6 kV to 121 kV 3.25m (10ft 8in.) 2.44m (8ft 0in.) 991 mm (3ft 3in.) 812.8mm (2ft 8in.)
138 kV to 145 kV 3.36 m (11ft 0in.) 3.05m (10ft 0in.) 1.093m (3ft 7in.) 939.8mm (3ft 1in)
161 kV to 169 kV 3.56m (11ft 8in) 3.65m (11ft 8in.) 1.22m (4ft 0in.) 1.07m (3ft 6in.)
230 kV to 242 kV 3.97m (13ft 0in.) 3.97m (13ft 0in.) 1.6m (5ft 3in.) 1.45m (4ft. 9in.)
345 kV to 362 kV 4.68m (15ft 4in) 4.68m (15ft 4in.) 2.59m (8ft 6in.) 2.44m (8ft 0in.)
500 kV to 550 kV 5.8m (19ft 0in.) 5.8m (19ft 0in.) 4.43m (11ft 3in.) 3.28m (10ft 9in.)
756kV to 800 kV 7.24m (23ft 9in.) 7.24m (23ft 9in.) 4.55m (14ft 11in) 4.4m (14ft 5in.)
Page 4 of 5
Protective Clothing and Other Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for Application with
an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis.
Where it has been determined that work will be performed within the Arc Flash Protection
Boundary identified by 130.3(A), one of the following methods shall be used for the selection of
protective clothing and other personal protective equipment:
Incident Energy Analysis.
The incident energy analysis shall determine, and the employer shall document, the incident
energy exposure of the worker (in calories per square centimeter). The incident energy
exposure level shall be based on the working distance of the employee’s face and chest areas
from a prospective arc source for the specific task to be performed. Arc-Rated FR clothing and
other personal protective equipment (PPE) shall be used by the employee based on the incident
energy exposure associated with the specific task. Recognizing that incident energy increases
as the distance from the arc flash decreases, additional PPE shall be used for any parts of the
body that are closer than the distance at which the incident energy was determined.
Page 5 of 5
Document Description Augering Footing Practice
26.048 AUGERED FOOTING PRACTICE

2. Fall Arrest equipment and temporary barriers

1. Texoma augering machine
2. Rebar cage
3. Various formworks depending on soil conditions e.g. masonite sheets, sonotube, corrugated
steel culverts, casings, etc.
4. Footing framework and anchor bolt template
5. Slings
Steps:
2. If hold off is required, make sure switching is in place.
3. Setup augering machine and crane at site, level complete with outrigger pads
4. If working near existing power lines the crane must grounded.
is utilized.
Page 1 of 4

1. GRAVITY
• Suspended loads
• Hoisting equipment
2. MECHANICAL
• Working near rotating machinery

• Crew member duties
Before augering is to begin gas, electrical and other services in and near the area to be
excavated must be accurately located and marked. A Dig Monitor shall be identified to
observing the digging operation.
When working under or in the vicinity of live conductors, all equipment must be grounded and
the safe limits of approach to the live conductor must be maintained at all times. A qualified
dedicated observer and signal the operator whenever the equipment approaches these
specified distances as per provincial legislation.
Particular care is to be given to moving parts such as the kelly bar and auger of the digging
machine. The swing area of the auger machine must be clearly identified and workers are to be
kept clear at all times.
A level area extending at least 1m (3 ft.) from the upper edge of the excavation must be kept
clear of equipment, excavated soil, and rock and construction material.
Before starting work, visual barriers must be installed to identify clearly the safe work area(s) for
the worker, and/or to identify hazardous area(s) for people not involved in the work.
If a person could fall into an excavation that is more than 2.4 m (8 ft.) deep, a temporary barrier
or a protective cover must be installed.
The barrier must be at least 1.1 m (3.5 ft.) high and a minimum 1.8 m (6 ft.) from the edge.
Access within this area will be permitted only with the use of an approved fall protection system.
See sketches below for approved anchorages of the fall arrest equipment.
Page 2 of 4
Furthermore, no worker shall enter an augered excavation that is deeper than 1.2 m (4 ft.)
unless they are wearing approved fall protection and a steel liner is installed.
The steel liner must extend a minimum of 0.6 m (2 ft.) above ground level, be supported on two
sides by steel wire rope, extend to within 1.2 m (4 ft.) of the point where work is to be done, and
the distance between the liner and perimeter of the hole must not be greater than 100 mm (4
in.).
In addition no worker shall enter an augered hole unless a competent person is above ground in
close proximity at all times and a means to rescue (a documented rescue plan is required) the
worker from the caisson is readily available.
If protective covering is used it must completely cover the opening, be securely fastened,
identified as covering an opening and be capable of supporting all loads it may be subjected to.
The following steps combined with the use of the framework will allow for the safe installation of
the tower foundations. The framework is used for securing the anchor bolts and the circular
form. It consists of a main frame, a small frame, an anchor bolt template and a bolt support
plate. The template is bolted or nailed to the bottom of the small frame, which in turn is fastened
to the main frame by means of clamps. The main frame is generally located and supported on
four stakes (Peg anchors). The frame set must be properly designed to ensure that the
elevation of the anchor bolts is right with respect to the finished concrete.
1. Auger the footing hole to the required depth in accordance with the design. All workers to
maintain a safe distance from the rotating shaft and auger.
2. Install the main frame in accordance with the procedure. Check its horizontal and vertical
location.
Page 3 of 4
3. Install formwork. The form is set flush with the top of the main frame, which usually
coincides with the top of concrete; and extended 0.3 m to 1.3 m (12 in. to 4ft.), into the
ground depending upon the soil conditions. When masonite sheets are used, the circular
length is pre-calculated and the nailing positions marked. The sheets are nailed to the main
frame at eight locations to form a circle. The joints of the sheets are overlapped approx. 0.3
m to 0.4 m (12 in. to 16 in.).
4. Sling the crane to the attachment points on the rebar cage and install the rebar cage.
Maintain specified concrete cover and secure it in position.
5. Install the small frame and the anchor bolt template.
6. Install the hopper at the augered hole and pour the concrete. The hopper is usually hung on
the concrete truck chute. Pour the concrete up to approx.1/3 hole depth then back fill the
space between the form and the ground with soil. Continue pouring until the concrete level
reaches approx. 0.6 m to 0.9 m (2 ft. to 3 ft.) below finished grade.
7. Installation of two to four anchor bolts, push the bolts vertically into the concrete through the
template. The anchor bolts are held in place by either the template or the bolt support plate
8. Check that the elevation and center of anchor bolts are correct.
9. For anchor tower footings, where a large number of anchor bolts are used, the small frame,
template, bolt support plate and anchor bolts are pre-assembled as a whole set. Pour
concrete to the elevation near the bottom of anchor bolts; install the small frame set, and
protect the bolt threads from concrete spatters, then bring the concrete to grade to grade.
10. Finish the concrete surface using a wooden or magnesium trowel. Do not over finish, as it
will bring a layer of mortar to the surface, which is not desirable. The concrete under the
template, where the shoe footing is to be seated, should be level and flat. In the other areas
the concrete should be sloped away from the edges of the template to facilitate drainage.
Page 4 of 4
Document Description Installing Power Installed Anchors
26.049 INSTALLING POWER INSTALLED ANCHORS

1. Digger truck c/w outrigger pads
2. Anchor attachment head and anchor installation wrench
3. Power Installed Anchor (PISA)
Steps:
2. Setup digger at site, level complete with outrigger pads. Operator must be trained and
competent.
3. If working near existing power lines the digger must grounded.
4. Remove earth auger from the Kelly bar.
5. Install anchor wrench attachment head to the Kelly bar
6. Attach anchor installation wrench to head and load PISA and guide to anchor location.
7. Digger operator to begin installation (all crew members must be clear of area).
8. Install PISA to proper depth and digger operator lifts installation wrench bar slowly out. While
lifting the wrench out the operator must adjust the boom to limit the amount of swing when the
wrench clears the PISA. All crewmembers must be clear of swing area.
9. If no further anchor installation required, reinstall the earth auger and stow the equipment.
Worker is Proper distance.

too close.
Page 1 of 1
Document Description Manual Lifting and Handling
Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Dec. 4, 2015
26.050 LIFTING AND HANDLING LOADS

Manual handling can cause serious, long-term disabling musculo-skeletal injuries. The
following techniques are a minimum practice to help eliminate the possibility of an injury.
Workers who are working in an office environment shall have them and their workstations
evaluated in order that their body positions are such as to prevent any injuries such as
Carpal Tunnel etc.
Valard will implement control measures to reduce the risk of musculoskeletal injuries. It
must eliminate or, if that is not practicable, minimize the risk of MSI to workers. Personal
protective equipment may only be used as a substitute for engineering or administrative
controls if it is used in circumstances in which those controls are not practicable.
All workers shall receive training on all types of work positions in order that they are aware
of their body and the work environments impact on them. The following lifting hazard identify
the correct positioning.
o Hard hat
o Safety glasses
o Boots
o Leather gloves
o Hi-visibility vest
Lifting Hazards:
• Awkward / Sustained posture - Improper lifting technique is the largest cause of lower
back injuries. For example, bending at the waist, or twisting while holding anything
greatly increases the stress on the muscles and joints of the back.
• Forceful exertions - There is a limit to the amount of weight the back can lift; this limit is
different for each person. Know and respect your limits. Use mechanical aids wherever
possible, i.e. cranes, carts, dollies, etc.
• Repetitive movements - Repeated actions cause fatigue; fatigue reduces the amount
of weight the body can safely lift. Be sure to give the back adequate rest between lifts.
Page 1 of 3
Proper Lifting Techniques:

• Test the weight of the load.
o If it feels to heavy ask for help, or use a machanical lifting device.
o It is your legal right to refuse to refuse lifting anything that may be a danger.
• Position the body close to the load.
• Take a wide stance, with the load between the knees if possible.
• Bend your Knees.
• Bending at the waist should never be permitted
o Never try to catchh a falling load
• Keep the lower back straight, the risks of injury increases when the lower back is
rounded.
• Keep your head up, the more vertical your posture, the lower your risk of injury.
• Breath out as you begin to lift
o This increases tention from your abdominal muscles.
o Do not hold your breath during a lift; this increases pressure in the abdomen.
• Always keeping your shoulders in line with your feet
o Twisting significatnly increase the risk of injury.
o Never twist while lifting or carrying anything, even light objects.
o No twisting!
• Proper lowing is as important as proper lifting
o Dropping or throwing loads is hazardous.
o Bend the knees, keep the back straight, and breath out as you begin to lower.
Page 2 of 3
Alberta
OH&S Code Part 14, Sections- 209, 210, 211
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Hot Weather Work
26.052 HOT WEATHER WORK

PURPOSE
To prevent heat-related injuries/stresses in the work environment, by providing guidance in the
types, recognition, evaluation and control of potentially hot conditions.
Is there a temperature at which work becomes dangerous and should be
stopped?
The short answer is yes. Both very cold and very hot temperatures could be dangerous to your
health.
Excessive exposure to heat is referred to as heat stress and excessive exposure to cold is
referred to as cold stress.
In a very hot environment, the most serious concern is heat stroke. In absence of immediate
medical attention, heat stroke could be fatal. Heat stroke fatalities do occur every summer. Heat
exhaustion and fainting (syncope) are less serious type’s illnesses that are not fatal but interfere
with a person's ability to work.
What are the warning signs of heat stroke?

The victims of heat stroke and hypothermia are unable to notice the symptoms, and therefore,
their survival depends on co-workers' ability to identify symptoms and to seek medical help.
While symptoms can vary from person to person, the warning signs of heat stroke can include
complaints of sudden and severe fatigue, nausea, dizziness, lightheadedness, and may or may
not include sweating. If a co-worker appears to be disorientated or confused (including
euphoria), or has unaccountable irritability, malaise or flu-like symptoms, the worker should be
moved to a cool location and seek medical advice.
Many Canadian occupational health and safety regulations specify upper and lower temperature
limits for work performed inside buildings that are normally heated (see Table 3).
The weather broadcast service of Environment Canada uses the humidex scale to inform the
public about hot weather conditions. The Humidex scale quantifies human discomfort due to
perceived heat taking into account the effect of air temperature and relative humidity. For a
given temperature, the Humidex increases as the relative humidity (moisture content) of the air
becomes higher. The following table gives ranges of Humidex for various degrees of thermal
effect on people.
Table 2 Humidex and Thermal Comfort
Humidex Range (°C) Degrees of Comfort
20 - 29 Comfortable
30 - 39 Varying degrees of discomfort
40 - 45 Uncomfortable
46 and Over Many types of labour must be restricted
Page 1 of 8
The Treasury Board Secretariat (TBS) of Canada uses Humidex as measure of thermal
conditions in office accommodations. "An unsatisfactory condition is deemed to exist when the
Humidex reading exceeds 40°C [inside the building - not based on "weather information" or
outdoor air temperatures] or when the air temperature (dry bulb) falls below 17°C. In these
cases, operations shall be stopped and employees released from the workplace if relocation is
not practicable. Direct comparison between WBGT and Humidex is not possible - there are no
standard conversion tables or mathematical formulas to do such conversions.
How can I measure occupational heat exposure?
Feeling of hot or cold depends on:
• Air temperature
• Relative humidity of air
• Presence of hot or cold objects in the surrounding area
• Presence of air movement (breeze, ventilation)
• Physical exertion
• Clothing
Control measures that can be used to reduce the effects of heat?
The risk of heat-related illnesses can be reduced by:
1. Engineering controls to provide a cooler workplace
2. Safe work practices to reduce worker exposure
3. By training employees to recognize and prevent heat illnesses.
Table 3 (below) provides a summary of these controls.
Engineering Controls
Engineering controls are the most effective means of reducing excessive heat exposure. The
examples, which follow, illustrate some engineering approaches to reducing heat exposure.
Reducing Metabolic Heat Production (heat produced by the body): Automation and
mechanization of tasks minimize the need for heavy physical work and the resulting buildup of
body heat.
Reducing the Radiant Heat Emission from Hot Surfaces: Covering hot surfaces with sheets
of low emissivity material such as aluminum or paint that reduces the amount of heat radiated
from this hot surface into the workplace.
Insulating Hot Surfaces: Insulation reduces the heat exchange between the source of heat
and the work environment.
Shielding: Shields stop radiated heat from reaching work stations. Two types of shields can be
used. Stainless steel, aluminum or other bright metal surfaces reflect heat back towards the
source. Absorbent shields, such as a water-cooled jacket made of black-surfaced aluminum,
can effectively absorb and carry away heat.
Ventilation and Air Conditioning: Ventilation, localized air conditioning, and cooled
Page 2 of 8
observation booths are commonly used to provide cool workstations. Cooled observation booths
allow workers to cool down after brief periods of intense heat exposure while still allowing them
to monitor equipment.
Reducing the Humidity: Air conditioning, dehumidification, and elimination of open hot water
baths, drains, and leaky steam valves help reduce humidity.
Personal Protection
Ordinary clothing provides some protection from heat radiated by surrounding hot surfaces.
Specially designed heat-protective clothing is available for working in extremely hot conditions.
In hot and humid workplaces, light clothing allows maximum skin exposure and efficient body
cooling by sweat evaporation.
Eye protection that absorbs radiation is needed when the work involves very hot objects, such
as molten metals and hot ovens.
Work that requires the wearing of impermeable clothing presents an added heat burden as the
clothing reduces the body's ability to dissipate heat. Under such circumstances, it is often
necessary to reduce the exposure limit values of WBGT to levels below those appropriate for
workers wearing light clothing.
Table 3 Summary of Control Measures
Method of Control Action
Engineering controls
Reduce body heat production Mechanize tasks.
Stop exposure to radiated heat from hot objects Insulate hot surfaces. Use reflective
shields, aprons, remote controls.
Reduce convective heat gain Lower air temperature. Increase air speed
if air temperature below 35°C. Increase
ventilation. Provide cool observation
booths.
Increase sweat evaporation Reduce humidity. Use a fan to increase air
speed (movement).
Clothing Wear loose clothing that permits sweat
evaporation but stops radiant heat. Use
cooled protective clothing for extreme
conditions.
Administrative controls
Acclimatization Allow sufficient acclimatization period
before full workload.
Duration of work Shorten exposure time and use frequent
rest breaks.
Rest area Provide cool (air-conditioned) rest-areas.
Water Provide cool drinking water.
Pace of Work If practical, allow workers to set their own
pace of work.
First aid and medical care Define emergency procedures. Assign one
person trained in first aid to each work
shift. Train workers in recognition of
symptoms of heat exposure.
Page 3 of 8
Becoming acclimatized to hot environments?

The body adapts to a new thermal environment by a process called acclimatization. Complete
heat acclimatization generally takes six to seven days, but some individuals may need longer.
Loss of acclimatization occurs gradually when a person is moved permanently away from a hot
environment. However, a decrease in heat tolerance occurs even after a long weekend. As a
result of reduced heat tolerance, it is often not advisable for anyone to work under very hot
conditions on the first day of the week.
New employees should acclimatize before assuming a full workload. It is advisable to assign
about half of the normal workload to a new employee on the first day of work and gradually
increased on subsequent days.
Although well-trained, physically fit workers tolerate heat better than people in poor physical
condition, fitness and training do not substitute for acclimatization.
The longer you work in a hot environment, the better your body becomes at adjusting to the
heat. This is called “acclimatization”. If you are ill or away from work for a week or so you
can lose your acclimatization.
To become acclimatized, the following may be considered:
If you are experienced on the job, you should limit your time in hot working conditions to 50
per cent of the shift on the first day, 60 per cent of the shift on the second day, and 80 per
cent of the shift on the third day. You should work a full shift the fourth day. If you are not
experienced on the job (if you are, for example, a new employee), you should start off
spending 20 per cent of the time in hot working conditions on the first day and increase your
time by 20 per cent each subsequent day.
Instead of reducing the exposure times to the job in a hot environment, you can become
acclimatized by gradually increasing the physical demands of the job over a week or two.
When there is a potential exposure to heat stress, control measures must be taken to
prevent heat exposure in the workplace. These include engineering controls, administrative
controls and protective clothing. Selection of appropriate workplace controls will vary,
depending on the type of workplace and other factors.
Some medications interfere with acclimatization. For example, hypotensives (drugs causing low
blood pressure); diuretics, antispasmodics, sedatives, tranquilizers, antidepressants and
amphetamines decrease the body's ability to cope with heat. Workers should seek a doctor's
advice on the suitability of a medication for them if they work in hot environments. Consumption
of alcohol also interferes with acclimatization.
How to prevent heat related illnesses?

If practical, workers in hot environments should be encouraged to set their own work and rest
schedules. Infrequent or irregular tasks such as emergency repairs of hot process equipment
often result in heat exposure. Experienced workers can often judge heat strain and limit their
exposure accordingly. Inexperienced workers may need special attention as they may continue
to work beyond the point at which signs of heat strain appear.
People are generally unable to notice their own heat stress related symptoms. Their survival
depends on their coworker's ability to recognize these symptoms and seek timely first aid and
medical help.
Page 4 of 8
Salt and Fluid Supplements: A person working in a very hot environment loses water and salt
through sweat. This loss should be compensated by water and salt intake. Fluid intake should
equal fluid loss. On average, about one litre of water each hour may be required to replace the
fluid loss. Plenty of cool (10-15°C) drinking water should be available on the job site and
workers should be encouraged to drink water every 15 to 20 minutes even if they do not feel
thirsty. Alcoholic drinks should NEVER be taken as alcohol dehydrates the body.
An acclimatized worker loses relatively little salt in their sweat and, therefore, the salt in the
normal diet is usually sufficient to maintain the electrolyte balance in the body fluids. For
unacclimatized workers who may sweat continuously and repeatedly, additional salt in the food
may be used. Salt tablets are not recommended because the salt does not enter the body
system as fast as water or other fluids. Too much salt can cause higher body temperatures,
increased thirst and nausea. Workers on salt-restricted diets should discuss the need for
supplementary salt with their doctor.
Drinks with alcohol or caffeine should never be taken, as they dehydrate the body. For most
people, water is the most efficient fluid for re-hydration.
Emergency Action Plan: In extreme environments, an emergency plan is needed. The plan
should include procedures for providing affected workers with first aid and medical care.
More information is available in OSH Answers Working in Extreme Hot or Cold Temperature
Conditions.
This can happen to anybody—even the young and fit. In Ontario, heat stress is usually a
concern during the summer. This is especially true early in the season, when people are not
used to the heat.
Heat exposure may occur in many workplaces. Significant sources of heat can be found in
workplaces such as foundries, smelters, chemical plants, bakeries and commercial
kitchens. For outdoor workers, direct sunlight is usually the main source of heat. In mines,
geothermal gradients and equipment contribute to heat exposure. Humidity in workplaces
also contributes to heat stress.
How We Cope With Heat
Your body is always generating heat and passing it to the environment. The harder your
body is working, the more heat it has to lose. When the environment is hot or humid or has
a source of radiant heat (for example, a furnace or the sun), your body must work harder to
get rid of its heat.
If the air is moving (for example, from fans) and it is cooler than your body, it is easier for
your body to pass heat to the environment.
Workers on medication or with pre–existing medical conditions may be more susceptible to
heat stress as some medication may impair the body’s response to heat. These workers
should speak to their personal physicians about work in hot environments.
Page 5 of 8
Heat Stress–Related Disorders

A summary of heat stress–related disorders, causes, symptoms, treatment and prevention
is presented in the table below.
Cause Symptoms Treatment Prevention
Heat Rash Hot humid Red bumpy rash with Change into dry clothes Wash regularly to keep
environment; plugged severe itching. and avoid hot skin clean and dry.
sweat glands. environments. Rinse skin
with cool water.
Heat Heavy sweating from Painful cramps Move to a cool area; Reduce activity levels
Cramps strenuous physical commonly in the most loosen clothing, gently and⁄or heat exposure.
activity drains a worked muscles (arms, massage and stretch Drink fluids regularly.
person's body of fluid legs or stomach) which affected muscles and Workers should check on
and salt, which occur suddenly at work drink cool salted water (¼ each other to help spot
cannot be replaced or later at home. to ½ tsp. salt in 1 litre of the symptoms that often
just by drinking water. water) or balanced precede heat stroke.
Cramps occur from Heat cramps are commercial fluid
salt imbalance serious because they electrolyte replacement
resulting from failure can be a warning of beverage. If the cramps
to replace salt lost other more dangerous are severe or don't go
from heavy sweating. heat-induced illnesses. away after salt and fluid
replacement, seek
medical aid. Salt tablets
are not recommended.
Fainting Fluid loss and Sudden fainting after at GET MEDICAL Reduce activity levels
inadequate water least two hours of work; ATTENTION. Assess and⁄or heat exposure.
intake and standing cool moist skin; weak need for CPR. Move to a Drink fluids regularly.
still, resulting in pulse. cool area; loosen Move around and
decreased blood flow clothing; make person lie avoid standing in one
to brain. Usually down; and if the person is place for too long.
occurs in conscious, offer sips of Workers should check
unacclimatized cool water. Fainting may on each other to help
persons. also be due to other spot the symptoms
illnesses. that often precede heat
stroke.
Heat Fluid loss and Heavy sweating; cool GET MEDICAL Reduce activity levels
Exhaustion inadequate salt and moist skin; body ATTENTION. This and⁄or heat exposure.
water intake causes a temperature over 38°C; condition can lead to heat Drink fluids regularly.
person's body's weak pulse; normal or stroke, which can kill. Workers should
cooling system to low blood pressure; Move the person to a check on each other
start to break down. person is tired and cool shaded area; loosen to help spot the
weak, and has nausea or remove excess symptoms that often
and vomiting; is very clothing; provide cool precede heat stroke.
thirsty; or is panting or water to drink; fan and
breathing rapidly; vision spray with cool water. Do
may be blurred. not leave affected person
alone.
Heat Stroke If a person's body has High body temperature CALL AMBULANCE. Reduce activity levels
used up all its water (over 41°C) and any This condition can kill a and/or heat exposure.
and salt reserves, it one of the following: the person quickly. Remove Drink fluids regularly.
will stop sweating. person is weak, excess clothing; fan and Workers should check
This can cause body confused, upset or spray the person with on each other to help
temperature to rise. acting strangely; has cool water; offer sips of spot the symptoms that
Heat stroke may hot, dry, red skin; a fast cool water if the person is often precede heat
develop suddenly or pulse; headache or conscious. stroke.
may follow from heat dizziness. In later
exhaustion. stages, a person may
pass out and have
convulsions.
Page 6 of 8
Managing Heat Stress Induced by Hot Weather
Most workplaces do not have “hot processes”, but working in hot weather can pose health
risks to their workers. For hot work environments due to hot weather, a hot weather plan is
appropriate. A hot weather plan is a simplified heat stress control plan. A hot weather plan
should establish the implementation criteria, or “triggers”, to put the plan into effect. The
criteria may include weather⁄environmental indicator triggers such as:
o Humidex reaching or exceeding 35
o Environment Canada Humidex advisory (air temperature exceeding 30ºC and
Humidex exceeding 40);
o Environment Canada weather reports;
o Heat waves (three or more days of temperatures of 32ºC or more) and/or
Ontario Ministry of the Environment smog alert.
Generally, plans related to hot weather should be in place between May 1 and September
30 of each year.
The following websites have information on Humidex, weather reports and smog alerts:
Environment Canada http://www.msc.ec.gc.ca/contents_e.html
Environment Canada Fact Sheet: Summer Severe

Weather http://www.on.ec.gc.ca/severe-weather/summer.html
Environment Canada Weather Office http://www.weatheroffice.ec.gc.ca/canada_e.html
Air Quality Ontario Smog Advisories http://www.airqualityontario.com/
Other Resources
Additional information on methods to monitor and manage workplace heat exposures may
be found in the following resources:
WSIB Prevent Heat Stress
The Prevent Heat Stress website provides links to information and tools on heat stress
awareness, monitoring and control measures.
ROLES / RESPONSIBILITIES
The Site Management Team shall monitor area weather forecasts and existing site weather
conditions, to better plan and execute construction activities during the summer construction
season. However, the continuous monitoring of employees for signs and symptoms of heat-
related injuries/stresses rests with the employees and their respective front line supervisor.
Page 7 of 8
• Area Supervisor: Assures that these guidelines are implemented and administered to the
extent feasible on the project.
• Safety Coordinator: Provides employee training, program evaluation, and guidance to the
Superintendent.
• Front-Line Supervisor
a. Typically knows their employees' work-related capabilities and limitations, and it is
paramount that they monitor on a regular basis the condition of each employee assigned to
them. They should pay particular attention to the employee's task, environment, and
clothing, as well as any engineering and administrative controls and personal protective
equipment in use.
b. Often as a day-to-day role model for other workers, they must be aware that their actions
and behaviour may influence their subordinates. This is particularly true for employees just
arriving at the project site. These employees may not be fully acclimated to hot conditions.
• Employees
Every person tolerates heat differently. Since no empirical measure can determine when an
individual begins to sense heat-related injuries/stresses, the primary responsibility for the
prevention of heat related-injuries/stresses should be the appropriately trained employee's
determination of his/her condition.
EMPLOYEE AWARENESS AND PREVENTION

Heat injury/stress prevention awareness shall be provided at least once a year (preferably
during the spring) to all project personnel. This awareness shall include:
o Review of this Safe Work Practice.
o How to prevent heat stress
o Signs of heat stress
o How to cope with heat stress.
o Review Heat Stress–Related Disorders Chart
Page 8 of 8
Document Description Stringing Practice
26.053 STRINGING PRACTICE
3. Fire Resistant Clothing c/w long sleeves
4. Insulated Hot Sticks
5. Ground Chains an appropriate amount for the particular job requirements.
Working with Tensioning Conductors

Calculating Conductor Weight in a Span
1. On level terrain, the weight of a conductor=
Conductor Weight in lbs/ft. (kg/m) X (1/2 Span A + ½ Span B)
2. When the bottom of the sag is midspan, as seen in next diagram, the weight of a
conductor=,
Conductor Weight in lbs./ft. (kg/m) X
(Length to Lowest Sag Point in span A + Length to Lowest Sag Point in Span B)
• An aerial lift can be overloaded when consideration is not given to lifting a

conductor from a structure on a hill or lifting a conductor to a higher position.
• A conductor’s weight doubles when it is lifted to its maximum height, which occurs
when the lowest point of sag reaches an adjacent structure. Therefore, as a
conductor is lifted with an aerial device or live-line tools to a higher location, the
weight increases as the lowest sag point moves farther away.
Calculating Conductor Tension

Conductor Tension=
Conductor Weight in lbs./ft. (kg/m) X Span Length in Ft. (m)
8 X Sag in ft. (m)
Page 1 of 4
Rules of Thumb for Conductor Tension

• The tension on a conductor is generally the heaviest weight dealt with by powerline
workers.
• On distribution lines:
o Line tension will be less than 500 pounds (225 kg) for 3/0 or smaller and less
than 750 pounds (340 kg) for 3/0 and larger aluminum conductor.
o Line tension will be less than 750 pounds (340 kg) for 3/0 or smaller and less
than 1000 pounds (450 kg) for 3/0 and larger copper conductor.
• At temperatures below freezing, the conductor tension increases 20 percent for each
20° F (10°C) drop in temperature.
• At temperatures above freezing, the conductor tension increases 10 percent for each
20°F (10°C) drop in temperature.
• When pulling up on a conductor, the tension increases as the sag decreases. Line
tension is doubled when one-half of the sag is removed. Line tension is tripled when
two-thirds of the sag is removed.
Calculating Tension on a Loaded Down Guy
Where H = Height of the guy attachment

L = Length of the guy lead
T = Tension of the conductors held by the down guy
Example of calculating guy tension
Page 2 of 4
Calculating Vertical Load Applied by a Down-Pull

The vertical load applied to a crossarm, snatch block, or a stringing block by a down-pull (see
Diagram below) can be excessive when stringing conductor or temporary dead-ending
conductor to the ground. A short lead will exert a high vertical weight, which could overload a
structure or its components.
Vertical Weight on a Structure = TX H

L
T = 1.000, H= 50 Ft., and L = 100 Ft.
Therefore, the vertical weight on the crossarm = (1,000X50) / 100 – 500 pounds. It is best to
keep the length (L) as long a practical during stringing in the preceding example because the
vertical weight would be only 100 pounds if the length (L) were increased to 500 feet.
Measuring the Line Angle in the Field

A line angle must be known to conform the proper framing for the structure, as well as be
capable of calculating the bisect tension involved in handling a conductor. To measure an
actual line angle in the field, measure out 57 feet in two directions (as shown in the next
diagram). The length of Line X represents the line angle. This method is reasonably curate
up to 45 degrees.
For example if Line X is 30 feet, the line angle is 30 degrees, (for metrics, measure 6 metres
in each direction. The line ngle is the length of Line X in metres X 10. For example, if Line x
is 3 metres, the line angle is 10 X 3 = 30 degrees.)
Page 3 of 4
Calculating the Bisect Tension of a Conductor at a Corner

Bisect tensions should be known when a conductor is lifted or relocated on a corner
Structure. The approximate bisect tensions of a conductor can be calculated using the
following Table.
Table Factor to Calculate Bisect Tensions.

The table shows how the factors are used to calculate the bisect tensions various angles
given 1,000 pounds line tension. Using the Table, an actual line tension can be inserted in
the proper row to calculate a bisect tension.
Line Angle Degrees Bisect Tension (lbs. or kg) = Line Tension X Factor
90 1,500 1,000 1.5
75 1,250 1,000 1.25
60 1,000 1,000 1.0
45 750 1,000 0,75
30 500 1,000 0.50
15 250 1,000 0.25
If a more accurate calculation of the bisect tension is needed, the bisect tension can be
calculated as follows:
Bisect Tension = Line Angle X Line Tension

60
Note: The bisect tensions on the snatch blocks in SWP 26.006 (page 17 of 28 Snatch
Blocks) mat appear different; however, the angle of the rope is measured inside the block,
while line angles tend to be measured as shown in the diagram on the same page in SWP
26.006.
Moving a Conductor into a Corner

The sag and tension of a conductor can change very quickly when moving a conductor into a
corner. The tension and sag increase can cause a midspan contact with live overhead
conductors, a broken jib, or bucket truck instability. Calculating the bisect tension ahead of time
is complex. Keeping a close watch on the sag as the conductor is moved in and out of the
corner is the most practical way to prevent excess tensions
Page 4 of 4
Document Description Rubber Glove Practice
Created By: B. Szumik Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.054
Date: Jan. 7, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 3, 2012
26.054 RUBBER GLOVE PRACTICE
Introduction
During live line rubber glove work the only line of defense from energized equipment are rubber
gloves and any additional rubber protective equipment and barriers that are used. Where
exposed equipment poses a hazard of inadvertent contact approved cover-up equipment
must always be used.
Description of Rubber Gloves
The exposed cuff distances from the protective cover to the glove bead as a minimum
should be:
Glove Class Cuff Exposed Distances

Class 1 2.54 cm or 1 “
Class 2 5.08 cm or 2”
Safety Note:
The Valard standard is to use Class 3 gloves and sleeves for any voltage levels up
to 25 kV.
Matching rubber gloves to the leather protective covers is equally important as maintaining this
cuff distance when replacing leather protective covers, as protective covers come in various
lengths to suit the rubber glove class category.
The work area is the portion of the glove that begins at the cuff area and extends down toward the
forearm, wrist, palm and fingers area.
Minor scuffs, abrasions and cuts to the outer black surface of the glove is permitted in the
work area provided that there is no visible protrusion of the inner surface area identified by the
Page 1 of 5
contrasting color. The external or black layer of the rubber glove represents 20% of the composition
where as the contrasting inner surface area represents the remaining 80% layer.
Conversely, any break in the inner surface area on the inside portion of the rubber glove, renders
the glove to be defective and must be removed from service. For these reasons, it is imperative to
complete a thorough daily inspection of the rubber gloves before use.
INSPECTING RUBBER GLOVES

Prior to use a daily visual and air test is to be performed to ensure that gloves have not been
damaged.
Steps to follow for inspection:
• Turn glove inside out and carefully inspect for any cuts, splits, or wear spots paying particular
attention to the fingertips and thumb areas.
• Flip or reverse the glove back to the original side and inspect the surface area in the same
manner as the above step.
• Twirl glove to fill with air and trap it by rolling the glove cuff.
• With the free hand, squeeze the glove in various places.
• Flip or reverse the glove back to the original side and inspect the surface area in the same
manner as the above step.
• While the glove is inflated, hold it up to the face to feel or hear if there is any air leaking through
a puncture. * Inflating the glove this way will amplify any small damaged spots which might
not be found by ordinary visual inspection
Rubber gloves must never be used when:

• There is any break or puncture in the surface area of the glove
• Any hard spot or foreign material is visible in the rubber composition
• Any contrasting inner or outer color is visible through a cut or wear area from the
opposite side
• The glove is beyond its expiry date (6 months) stamped on the cuff portion of the glove
All defective or suspect gloves shall be returned to the work center for replacement.
Page 2 of 5
CARE OF RUBBER GLOVES

The following precautions should be noted in caring for rubber gloves:
• Rings, watches and other jewelry should be removed to avoid electrical stresses.
• Rubber gloves should not be stored in a folded or creased position with objects lying on
top of them. They should be stored in a rubber glove bag hanging in an upright
position with the cuffs pointing down and flap closed
• Rubber gloves should not be stored in locations where there is the possibility of corona
discharge or ozone concentrations. This phenomenon causes rapid breakdown of the
rubber’s molecular structure rendering it defective. It is the beginning of corona cutting
deterioration.
• Rubber gloves should never be stored inside out as this subjects the natural lay of the
rubber to stress checks. Any ozone, fluorescent lights or ultraviolet radiation exposure
causes compounded stressing to occur even more quickly.
• In the field rubber gloves shall only be cleaned with clean water. Commercial soaps,
detergents or cleaning agents may damage the rubber
• Only cornstarch or an approved powder is to be used to aid in putting on rubber
gloves. Baby powder should not be used as there are chemical compounds that
accelerate deterioration of the rubber.
• Grease or oils should be avoided as these substances seriously damage the rubber
compounds of the glove
Protective Covers
Protective covers act as a mechanical protection barrier from slivers, sharp objects, ties, grease
and other foreign substances, which may cause damage to the natural rubber. These protective
covers are sized to fit over rubber gloves of the same size. The cuff portion of the cover should
not be relied upon for electrical protection.
Inspection and care of leather protective covers

Glove covers along with the rubber gloves shall be inspected at least once a day before
use. They should be inspected for signs of splinters, or foreign objects that may have
punctured the leather glove and possibly into the rubber. Leather covers should be replaced if
they are impregnated with penetrox, oil, the stitching is separating or the glove appears to
have excessive wear.
To help prevent the possibility of current leakage while performing rubber glove work the
cuff portion of the protective covers should be kept clean at all times. The protective covers
should never be used as a replacement for regular work gloves.
When to us Rubber Gloves

Appropriate class rubber gloves shall be used when:
• Installing line hose, hoods, blankets or other protective devices by hand for rubber glove
applications,
• Controlling poles using tools such as a cant hook / ropes when installing in an energized
circuit,
• When performing switching, pruning, live line tool work under adverse weather
conditions,
Page 3 of 5
• Stringing or sagging conductors, or when installing or removing guys, hardware,

equipment while in the ‘4 foot vicinity’ of circuits energized above 750 v phase to
ground,
• When operating gang operated/air break switches in conjunction with a ground gradient
control mat,
• As an option, performing switching operations with live line tools on live-front padmount
transformers and switching kiosks/terminals,
• When working on any energized secondary equipment,
• The supervisor or the employee deems it necessary.
Rubber Glove Work in Adverse Weather

During adverse weather conditions rubber glove work shall not be started or carried out. If the
work has begun and weather conditions deteriorate, the job should be placed in a safe condition
and completed when conditions improve. Rubber glove work must be suspended/discontinued
immediately in the event of an electrical storm.
Baby Powder should not be used as the chemical composition of the powder will
eventually deteriorate the synthetic rubber.
Page 4 of 5
Testing Frequency
Protective Maximum Use Voltage Retest
Equipment Phase to Phase Frequency
Rubber Gloves & Sleeves
Class 00 500 V 6 months
Class 0 1,000 V 6 months
Rubber Blankets, Line Hose, Couplers and Hoods

Class 0 1,000 V 1 year
Page 5 of 5
Document Description Operating Snowmobiles
Date: Feb. 22, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan 3, 2012
26.068 USE OF SNOWMOBILES
ALL PERSONNEL THAT ARE TO OPERATE SNOWMOBILES MUST BE TRAINED IN IT’S

USE.
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:

• DOT/Snell/ANSI approved helmets only (hardhats are not approved).
• Safety Footwear with 6” uppers.
• High Visibility vest or outer wear.
• Long sleeved clothing.
• Warm gloves
• Eye protection (snow goggles or safety glasses).
• Clothing must be worn to provide protection from the cold due to increased wind chill at high
speeds while operating snowmobiles.
• Do not wear scarves or loose clothing because of potential entanglement with moving parts.
TRANSPORTATION
A single snowmobile may be transported in the box of an appropriately sized pickup box. If transporting
more than one snowmobile, they must be transported using a trailer or “sled deck” designed for
transporting snowmobiles. Secure the rear of the snowmobile with a ratchet-type tie-down strap.
If using a trailer, ensure you have all the proper equipment to attach your trailer to your vehicle, including:
safety chains, proper size hitch ball, proper electrical connections and lights that are in working condition.
• Trailers and sled decks will come equipped with a rod or a bar to secure the snowmobile to the
trailer. A rod will go across the skis and is held in place at the outside end by a snap pin. A bar
will go across the skis and be screwed into the trailer’s deck at a preset receptacle at the center
of the snowmobile trailer bed.
INSPECT YOUR SNOWMOBILE BEFORE YOU RIDE

Always inspect your snowmobile before each ride to detect problems that could cause an accident.
• Always set the parking brake first.
• Consult your owner’s manual for items that may need to be lubricated, tightened, adjusted,
aligned, or checked for wear.
Front-to-Back Inspection Process

Complete a thorough inspection of your snowmobile by starting at the front and finishing at the back.
Skis • Check the overall condition and spacing/position.
• Check the skag/wear bar condition.
• Check the suspension condition and adjustment.
Cowling • Test the front headlights–both high and low beams.
• Check for cracks and other damage.
Engine • Check the drive belt’s condition and tension. Carry a spare drive belt.
• Check the condition of the exhaust.
• Check fuel levels–gasoline, oil, and, if applicable, coolant.
Handlebars • Test that the handlebars turn smoothly.
• Check all of the controls on the handlebars.
o The throttle should move easily and snap back.
o The brake lever should feel firm, not touch the handgrip, and snap back.
o Test the engine’s stop switch.
Page 1 of 6
Mid-Section • Examine the tracks for rips, tears, ice, and/or debris.
• Check the condition of the high-fax/slide rail.
• Check the bogie wheel condition.
• Check suspension condition/adjustment.
Rear • Test that the brake light and taillight are working.
• Make sure that you have a tool kit, operator’s manual, and spare parts.
LOADING/UNLOADING
When loading/unloading ensure you are wearing a helmet. The semi-kneeling riding position will allow
you to respond the fastest if a problem while loading or unloading occurs. Load/unload snowmobiles from
a ramp or bank.
Loading With a Ramp

• Double check the ramp to be sure it is secure, drive the snowmobile at a moderate speed up the
ramp, letting off the throttle as the skis reach the bed at the top of the ramp. Slowly drive the
snowmobile forward until it is over the location where it will be secured and set the brake.
Unloading with a Ramp
• Remove the rod or bar and tie downs securing the snowmobile, ensure the ramp is secure and
stable and then slowly back the snowmobile off the deck.
STARTING THE ENGINE

Try not to flood the engine when starting the snowmobile. If the choke is used and the engine hesitates to
start, stop before too much gas is used. Wait a minute or two, and then try to start the engine again.
• Point the snowmobile in a safe direction

• Be ready to start it by kneeling or sitting on the machine
• Check the throttle by depressing it at least once to be sure it isn’t frozen. When released it should
return quickly to the idle position
• Check all important switches like key and safety switches, which should be in the “on” position
• Depending on the machine, choke or prime the engine if it is cold
• If your machine starts electrically, turn the key to the ”start” position and release the choke as
soon as the engine starts
• If your machine is a manual start, pull the recoil starter cord until you feel resistance, then pull
vigorously, but don’t let the handle snap back
PROPER RIDING POSTURE

Riding a snowmobile correctly allows the operator to operate and control the machine more easily, and
react more quickly to changes in terrain and environment.
Positioning Yourself for Safer Riding

Learn to position your body properly as you maneuver through various types of terrain. Mastering the
basic riding positions is the key to safe snowmobiling.
Page 2 of 6
Sitting: Safest and Most Stable
• Sitting is the most common position. It provides

the lowest center of gravity for maximum stability
and safety.
• This is the only position recommended for carrying
passengers if the snowmobile is designed for that
purpose.
• Keep your feet firmly on the running boards and in
the foot wells.
Semi-kneeling: Best for Easy Weight Shifting
• Semi-kneeling lets you lean uphill or shift your

body weight easily.
• Use this position for crossing a road or moving
around congested areas.
• Switching from sitting to kneeling helps you avoid
fatigue at low speeds.
• Novice riders should practice semi-kneeling.
Standing: Best for Seeing Ahead
• Standing gives you maximum visibility.

• In areas with obstructions, this position can help
you look over an obstacle to see if another is
behind it.
• At road crossings, this position provides the
longest line of sight.
• Standing lets you shift your weight quickly in any
direction and change riding positions.
Posting
• This crouching position uses your feet and legs to

absorb any shocks, which helps avoid
uncomfortable bumps.
• It’s also useful when climbing steep hills, crossing
creeks and streams, and encountering other
difficult situations.
• Since this is the most tiring position to maintain,
use posting only when necessary and for short
periods.
RIDING BEHAVIOURS
Page 3 of 6
Safe snowmobilers know that they are responsible for their snowmobile and for their behaviour while
operating it. They demonstrate responsibility by learning about their snowmobile and by improving their
riding skills. In doing this, they begin to exhibit the six traits of a safe snowmobiler, who:
• Understands the mechanics of the snowmobile.
• Respects both its capabilities and its limitations.
• Maneuvers skillfully through a variety of operating conditions.
• Knows and observes the laws governing snowmobiles.
• Uses good judgment.
• Respects others and the environment.
Examples of poor riding behaviour includes carelessness, speeding, following too close and riding on ice.
Carelessness
Careless operation is a leading cause of snowmobile deaths. Always drive defensively, at safe speeds,
and as if you would encounter a careless driver or another hazard at any time. Careless snowmobiling
operation comes in many forms, including but not limited to:
• Hugging the inside corners on curves.
• Speeding, particularly when near non-motorized trail users, trailheads, buildings, livestock or
wildlife.
• Over riding headlights
• Riding too fast in foggy or snowy conditions.
• Riding your snowmobile on prohibited roads.
• Failure to obey signs and regulations.
• Riding on the wrong side of the trail.
• Following other snowmobiles too closely.
• Passing on corners and blind hills.
• Approaching blind hills at excessive speeds.
Speed
Speed is a major factor in many snowmobile accidents, many of them being at night.
• Always keep the speed of the snowmobile slow enough to ensure they are in control of it and
operating safely. Never exceed speed limits that are posted on trails or roadways, including those
posted for roadways when you are operating in a road ditch.
• At night, the headlights illuminate your path about 200 feet in front of the snowmobile. Be careful
not to over ride the headlights.
Following too close

Following too close is another common cause of crashes. Many happen when the lead rider has applied
the brake and the person behind could not react fast enough to stop.
When riding in a group, there are a few guidelines you should know:
• Snowmobiles should ride single file and not side-by-side. Some trails are not wide enough for two
snowmobiles. This will also help when there is two-way traffic on a snowmobile trail.
• Follow the snowmobile in front of you at a safe distance that would allow you to stop or slow
down in a safe manner. A good rule to follow is the 3-second rule.
3-Second Rule
When the person in front of you passes an object, note where it is and start counting. By the time you
arrive at that same object, you should have counted no less than three seconds. With the weight of the
snowmobile, there can be a deadly outcome from the force of impact during a crash. Always allow more
distance between riders when riding in whiteouts from snow dust, fog, wind, and snowstorms or when
night riding.
Page 4 of 6
Riding on Ice
The safest snowmobiling rule is to never cross lakes or rivers since it can never be guaranteed that ice of
any thickness will support a snowmobile.
• Besides the danger of plunging through the ice, you have far less traction for starting, turning, and
stopping on ice than on snow.
• If you go through the ice, stay calm. Extend your arms out forward in front of you on the unbroken
ice surface to catch yourself. Kick your feet to propel you onto the ice, like a seal. If the ice keeps
breaking, continue moving toward shore or the direction from which you came.
GETTING STUCK
Knowing the type of snow you are riding on can help avoid getting stuck. Your machine can easily sink if
the snow is loose, light, deep or powder. When these snow conditions occur, keep your RPM’s and power
high enough to keep momentum but don’t overpower the machine; it can quickly dig the snowmobile’s
track into the loose snow and result in getting stuck.
If you get stuck be extremely cautious when trying to move your snowmobile. Over-exerting can lead to
back injuries and even a heart attack. Have friends from your riding group help move your machine very
carefully. Do not get on your machine and rev up the engine to drive it out of the situation. This may
cause your machine to sink even further.
When stuck on flat ground:

• With your feet on the running boards, rock the snowmobile slowly from side to side while gently
feathering the throttle
• Shut off the engine, clear the loose snow from the track and try to pack the snow under the track
for a firm base
• Try walking ahead of the machine and trampling a path in the snow to help reduce drag on the
machine
• If you are carrying an avalanche shovel or small folding shovel, use the shovel to dig snow out
from around and beneath the snowmobile, as well as to shovel a path in front of the machine
When stuck going uphill

Your machine may get stuck while you are riding uphill in certain snow conditions.
• Shut off the machine and get off on the uphill side
• You will need to turn the snowmobile around, so assess which direction is the safest and easiest
to turn it downhill
• Trample the snow on the side of the snowmobile you choose to turn it toward and dig out the ski
loop on that side if needed to gain a good hand-hold
• Grasp the ski loop on the side of the snowmobile you are turning toward and begin pulling the
snowmobile around
• Continue to turn the sled 180 degrees until it’s facing downhill. Use caution when on steep slopes
so the machine does not roll over on you or take off downhill in an uncontrollable manner
• Start the snowmobile and drive it back down the hill
TOWING A DISABLED SNOWMOBILE

Towing a disabled snowmobile behind your snowmobile calls for extreme caution to
avoid injuries and damage to either snowmobile.
• Always remove the drive belt from the machine that will be towed
• It is recommended you use a rigid tow bar instead of a rope or chain
• If you must tow the disabled snowmobile with a tow rope or chain, tie the left ski of the disabled
sled tight against the tow snowmobile’s hitch or right rear to keep it from wandering into oncoming
traffic on the trail
• Passengers may need to ride on the machine being towed to help steer and brake during towing.
• Passengers should keep their feet on the running boards at all times.
Page 5 of 6
• Always be certain the rear snow flap on the tow snowmobile is in place and properly functioning
to avoid injury to the passenger
• When crossing a road, passengers should get off the towed machine and walk across.
• The driver of the snowmobile must be very cautious at all times and should always operate at
slow speeds
• Use reflectors or flags on both machines while towing to warn others that you are towing/being
towed
SAFE OPERATION – GENERAL

• Do a pre-ride inspection before using a snowmobile.
• To start a cold engine, you may need to choke or prime it. However, don’t choke or prime the
engine if it’s warm. You may flood the engine with too much fuel, making it difficult or impossible
to start.
• To turn a snowmobile, keep most of you body weight on the outside running board and lean your
upper body into the turn.
• When climbing hills, shift your body weight forward by leaning to keep the front skis on the
ground.
• If stopped while going uphill, do not apply the rear brake.
• When going down hills, keep the engine running and in gear, apply the rear brake and avoid
sharp turns.
• Avoid “side hill” situations. When they are unavoidable, lean into the hill.
• As a last resort to avoid an impending collision, fall off the vehicle and kick yourself free of it.
• Do not allow extra riders unless the snowmobile you are riding is designed for passengers (two
up seat).
• Be careful when crossing roads. Come to a complete stop and make absolutely sure no traffic is
approaching from any direction. Then cross at a right angle to traffic.
• All equipment shall be operated in a safe manner and under safe environmental conditions.
• Only trained and competent Personnel shall operate snowmobiles.
• Wear appropriate PPE at all times during vehicle operation.
• Never attempt to climb a hill too steep for your ability or the performance of the snowmobile.
• Avoid riding across slopes whenever possible.
• Load/unload snowmobiles from a ramp or bank.
• Follow OEM operator’s manual.
• It is illegal to operate a snowmobile on public roads.
Note: Loss of vehicle control causes most accidents. When the operator encounters a change of terrain
or swerves to avoid an obstacle, it causes an abrupt change of balance and loss of control.
Regulatory Requirements
Alberta
Part 9 – Powered Mobile Equipment – Section 282-ATV and Snow Vehicles
British Columbia
Part 16 – Mobile Equipment
Yukon
Part 6 – Mobile Equipment
Saksatchewan
Part XI-Powered Mobile Equipment
Manitoba
Part 22 – Powered Mobile Equipment
Page 6 of 6
Document Description Working Around Lightning
VALARD Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number SWP 26.070
Date: Jan. 10, 2014 Revision: Revised by: Date:
Purpose:
To Protect workers from the hazards of a lightning strike which may travel for miles
Scope:
10 people are killed each year in Canada due to lightning strikes. Another 70-150 are seriously
injured. This standard address the best practice policy to mitigate the risk associated with
lightning strikes. As line work involves liner conductive construction, line strikes on non-isolated
lines become a complicated concern. Valard does not expect employees to work during
lightning conditions at any time including restoration.
General Information:
1) The best place to be during lightning storm activity is a well-constructed building or metal
topped vehicle.
2) A lighting strike can travel as far as 8km laterally from origin.
3) If you cannot find shelter (remote patrol), set up camp away from trees and find low-lying
areas.
4) Avoid using landlines or anything connected that can carry an electrical charge.
5) The safe standard for resuming activity outdoors is 30 minutes after the last rumble of
thunder.
6) If lightning strikes a person it is safe to immediately after render first aid.
7) If you require access to WeatherSenry, you will need to obtain a user name and password
and download the App.
Note: WeatherSentry has a dedicated Valard account whereby a person can use a smart
phone to access real-time weather information and lightning strike data. Lightning strike
data can be obtained across Canada and will send alerts for (caution, and clear)
depending on the programmed parameters.
8) Each second between a flash and thunderclap represents 300 meters. If you hear thunder
up to 30 seconds after, you are within direct striking distance.
Consider the following when working on lines:
· 1 minute between flash/thunderclap is 18km away
· 5 minutes between flash/thunderclap is 90km away
· 10 minutes between flash/thunderclap is 180km away
Anything beyond 10 minutes is usually out of audible range without specialized sonic meters.
Procedure
The following principles apply to all work sites under potential conditions for lightning storms.
The foreman is responsible to assess the daily conditions and apply work restrictions as per the
policy.
1: During the initial review scope of work for the day, identify the type of work and specific work
location(s). Reference Environment Canada website, local weather cast, and WeatherSentry
for a forecast. If lightening is imminent, prepare to stand down until conditions are safe.
2: Review the current and forecast conditions with the crew. If this is day one with the crew or
new workers are at the site, ensure you review this standard with them so that clear
expectations are outlines.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Working Around Lightning
VALARD Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number SWP 26.070
Date: Jan. 10, 2014 Revision: Revised by: Date:
3: If the scope of work is working is not part of a line or the isolation point (open) is within visual
range, you must stop all work once rumble or lightening is confirmed. Work is not to resume
until 30 minutes after the last confirmation of lightning or rumble.
4: If the scope of work is on grounded lines of which the known open points are not at the
immediate work area, expand your weather and lightening search parameters to include the
lines that are part of your bonded work zone. Two methods can be used to obtain an all clear
for work:
a) Using WeatherSentry, monitor the lightning strikes (km) radius from your bonded
worksite to the last lightning strike that could have potentially struck the line being worked
on up or downstream. After the last strike, 30 minutes must pass prior to work resuming
(All Clear). WeatherSentry will send a notification of all clear after 30 minutes.
b) If using visual and audible (lightening & thunder) method only, after the last rumble or
strike observed, wait 45 minutes prior to work resuming (All Clear)
5. As the day progresses and there are changing conditions (periods of clear and stand
down), plan your work accordingly. If you are using cranes and complex lifts, assess how
long it will take you to stand down to a safe location if you were fully engaged in the work.
If weather patterns are changing rapidly, plan less demanding work on the ground that
does not use personal lift devices, cranes, or line trucks.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Use Portable Generator
Created By: D. Lebedynski Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.071
Date: Oct. 15. 2014 Revision: Revised by: Date:
26.071 USE OF PORTABLE GENERATORS
General
1. Always inspect portable generators prior to use for damage or loose fuel lines
that may have occurred during transportation or handling.
2. Keep the generator dry and DO NOT operate in wet/raining conditions.
3. Maintain and operate portable generators in accordance with the manufacturer’s
use and safety instructions.
4. Never attach a generator directly to the electrical system of a structure
(home, office, trailer) unless the generator has a properly installed transfer switch
because this creates a risk of electrocution for utility workers.
5. Always plug electric tools and appliances into the generator using the
manufacturers supplied cords.
6. Use undamaged heavy duty extension cords that are grounded (three pronged).
7. Use ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCI’s) as per the manufacturer’s
instructions.
8. Never start or fuel a generator while it is located inside a building/ structure
or the box of a truck.
9. Never place a generator outdoors in close proximity to doors, windows or vents
of a building/structure.
10. Never store fuel in close proximity to a running generator or a generator that has
not cooled down completely after use.
11. To reduce the risk of fire, keep at least 5 feet of clearance on all sides of
generator including overhead. DO NOT operate the generator near combustible
materials.
Major Causes of Injuries and Fatalities
- Shocks and electrocution from improper use of power or accidentally
energizing other electrical systems.
- Carbon Monoxide from a generators exhaust.
- Fires from improperly refueling the generator or inappropriately storing fuel.
Regulatory reference
Alberta
British Columbia
Yukon
Part 1- General Section 1.06- Training of Worker
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Use Portable Generator
Created By: D. Lebedynski Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.071
Date: Oct. 15. 2014 Revision: Revised by: Date:
Saskatchewan
Manitoba
Ontario
NWT
Page 2 of 2

Document Description Use of Striking Tools
Created By: S. Henderson Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.074
Date: Nov 9, 2015 Revision: 1 Revised by: S. Henderson Date: Dec 24, 2015
26.074 Use of Striking Tools
Purpose
The following are the minimum required practices to u s e with striking tools.
Tool and Worker Certification:
Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience
to use this tool without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is qualified.
Hard Hat (If the risk of head injury exists)
Safety Glasses or Goggles, and Face Shield
Safety Boots
Gloves and/or Hand Protection
Hearing Protection (Recommended)
Page 1 of 5

Use:
• Read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions and warning labels.

• Use the correct tool for the job. Use tools for their intended purpose (ex. never use screwdrivers as
chisels).
o Do not use cold chisels for cutting or splitting stone or concrete.

o Do not use a drift pin punch (also called an aligning punch) as a pin punch intended for driving,
removing, or loosening pins, keys, and rivets.
• Use the tools only if they are good condition. Refer to maintenance practices below if repair is
necessary.
o Do not use struck tools if the cutting edge is dull or chipped or if the point of a punch is slanted
or damaged.
o Do not use struck tools if the struck end is chipped or mushroomed.
o Do not use a hammer with a loose or damaged handle.
o Do not use a handle that is cracked, broken or loosely attached to the head.
o Do not use a hammer head with cracks, chips, mushrooming or excessive wear.
o Do not use a hammer with cracks in the claw or eye section.
• Ensure the work area is clear of debris.

• Ensure there is adequate lighting in the work area.
• Ensure that the piece being worked on, is held securely in vice (if loose or not attached to the vehicle).
• Keep your fingers away from the striking area.

• Use tongs or a holder to guide the striking tool, to take the workers hand out of the line of fire.
• Protectors can be attached to tools as well, to guard the workers hand from hammer blows.
Page 2 of 5

Use continued:
• Never carry hand tools such as chisels and screwdrivers in a pocket; they can cause injury when you
bend over or in the event of a fall.
• When carrying tools protect the cutting edges and carry the tools in such a way that you will not
endanger yourself or others.
• Hold the chisel, for shearing and chipping, at an angle, which permits the bevel of the cutting edge to
lie flat against the shearing plane.
• When using a hammer to strike another metal tool, such as a punch or chisel, aim the blow or cut
away from your body.
• Do not allow bull point chisels to be hand-held by one employee and struck by another.
• Check the material/stock for any foreign objects such as nails, staples or screws.
• Get a firm grip on the handle, this will ensure that you don’t lose your hold on the hammer.
• Hold the hammer at the end of the handle with your dominant hand. You will get maximum leverage,
and the best balance and control holding it this way.
• Keep your wrist straight and use your whole forearm to lift and drop the tool.
• Check before you swing, keep your workspace clear, and check that nobody is standing behind you or
too near.
• Watch the object you are hitting.
• Hold the hammer with your wrist straight and your hand firmly wrapped around the handle.
• Strike a hammer blow squarely with the striking face parallel to the surface being struck. Always avoid
glancing blows and over/under strikes.
Page 3 of 5

Maintenance/Repair:
• “If a tool is defective in some way, DO NOT USE IT.” (SWP 26.002 - Defective Tool Practice)
• Any tools that are unsafe due to damage should be removed from service. Follow procedure in the
HS&E Manual (17.3 - Removal of Defective Tools, Equipment and Machinery).
• Repairs can be performed by a competent worker or trained repair technician.
• Striking Tools:
o Redress striking tools with burred or mushroomed heads.
o Redress the point or cutting edge to its original shape. Grind to a slightly convex cutting edge.
The point angle of the chisel should be 70° for hard metals, 60° for soft.
o Do not apply too much pressure to the head when grinding a chisel. The heat generated can
remove the temper. Immerse the chisel in cold water periodically when grinding.
Hammers:
• If a hammer shows dents, cracks, chips, mushrooming or excessive wear, do not try to re-grind it to
shape.
• If a hammer is worn out and dangerous - discard it! Discard any that exhibit even the slightest hairline
fracture.
Page 4 of 5

Alberta
Act Section 2 (2) - Obligations of workers
Regulation P a r t 1 , Section 1(g) Definition of “ Competent Worker”, Section 14 - Duties of Workers,
Section 15 - Safety Training
Code Part 18 - Personal Protective Equipment
British Columbia
Part 2 - Application - Section 2.2 - General Duties
OH&S Regulation - Part 8 - Personal Protective Clothing & Equipment
Saskatchewan
Part I - Preliminary Matters - Section 2(1) (m) Definition “Competent”, Section 19 - Training of worker
Part VII - Personal Protective Equipment
Manitoba
Part 1 - Definition and General Matters - Definition “Competent”
Part 6 - Personal Protective Equipment
Part 16 - Machines, Tools, and Robots - Division 1
NWT
Act 1 - Definition of “Competent
Part 3 - Section 12, General Duties of Employers
Part 5 - Construction and Maintenance
NL
Part I - Definition of “Competent Worker” (i)(ii)
Ontario
Part I - General - Section 1 - Definition “Competent Worker” (a, b, c)
Part XII - Safety Materials, Equipment, Devices and Clothing
Yukon
Act 1 - Definition of “Competent Person”
Part 1 - General - Section 1.06 - Training of Worker
Part 1 - General - Section 1.08 - Personal Protective Equipment
Page 5 of 5
Document Description Working Over and Near Water
26.076 Working Over or Near Water
This Safe Work Practice applies to all workers who perform work over or near any body
of water.
OBJECTIVE:
SAFETY EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:

1. Safety Glasses
2. Hard Hat (with chinstrap)
3. Safety Boots
4. Lifebuoys
5. Personal Floatation Device
TRAINING
All Workers working over or near water shall be trained in their responsibilities, the safe
work practices and procedures.
STEPS:
1. Prior to any work commences a Hazard assessment must be completed to identify all
hazards and all workers associated with the job shall review it and sign the last page.
2. A tailboard must be competed prior to any work commencing.
3. Employees when working over or near water wear where the danger of drowning
exists shall wear a Canadian Coast Guard or Canada Department of Transport
approved life jacket or personal floatation device.
4. Life jacket or personal floatation device must be checked prior to each use in case
there are defects or damaged which could alter the devices’ strength or buoyancy.
5. Lifebuoys or buoyant heaving line must be provided for emergency rescue use.
6. Ring buoys shall have a minimum or 90 feet to a maximum of 200 feet.
7. When the job is completed all equipment must be stored in a clean dry location.
Note:
Employees, who will be performing work over or near water, where the danger of
drowning exists, are not permitted to work alone at any time.
Page 1 of 1

Document Description Use of Gloves – Tools, Materials & Cutting
Date: Aug. 2, 2017 Revision: 2 Revised by: D. Flohr Date: Oct. 17, 2017

26.080 Use of Gloves for Handling Material and Cutting Tools
Purpose:
The purpose of this safe work practice is to set the standard for the proper selection and use of gloves
during work activities on all project sites.
Each worksite shall maintain an adequate supply of proper gloves for the type of work that may be
encountered.
Glove Selection when Handling Materials or Tools:
Employees shall wear the proper gloves to protect their hands from injury as specified by the below
Glove Use Guideline. However, if a cutting hazard is present please see Glove Selection when
Working with Cutting Tools or Materials with a Potential Cutting Hazard below.
As a minimum, heavy leather gloves with a cut resistant (CR) level 2 rating are good for providing
general protection while handling materials, working in excavations, abrasive blasting, housekeeping,
rigging, and grinding.
Page 1 of 8


Glove Selection when Working with Cutting Tools or Materials with a Potential
Cutting Hazard:
When a task requires the use of a cutting tool or handling materials with a potential cutting hazard,
refer to Table 1 below to determine what tool is appropriate for the task and to determine whether
CR gloves are required. When CR gloves are required, at least Level 3 CR gloves must be used
or as otherwise specified below.
Table 1 - Guideline for Selection of Cutting Tools

Category of Application Cutting Tool Comments
Office and
Use Opening envelopes Scissors, mail opener No CR gloves required
general
use Cutting paper Scissors, paper cutter No CR gloves required
Opening packages Scissors No CR gloves required
Cutting thin cardboard boxes Scissors No CR gloves required

Cutting rope or twine
Cutting plastic, polyethylene, or
shrink wrap
Field – electrical Small gauge / data wire Side cutters No CR gloves
Wire strippers required
Wire smaller than #10 AWG Wire strippers No CR gloves required
gauge
Wire #10 AWG gauge or larger Skinning knife (e.g., Klein Level 3 or greater CR
KT- 46037) gloves
Stripping knife (1000 V
Insulated)
Stripping control cables Skinning knife (e.g., Klein Level 3 or greater CR
Tech cables KT- 46037) gloves
Power cables Stripping knife (1000 V
Insulated)
Cable jacket skinners
Cutting copper and aluminum Ratcheting cable cutters No CR gloves required
cables Non-insulated cable
Field - Cleaning gasket material from cutter scrapper
Gasket Level 3 or greater CR
mechanical flange Retractable razor gloves
Cutting gaskets scrapper
Gasket cutting tool No CR gloves
Shearing scissors required
Retractable safety knife Level 3 or greater CR

(e.g., Martor® Megasafe # gloves
116001)
Page 2 of 8


Field material Moving, installing or salvaging Level 3 or greater CR
handling glass or porcelain insulators or gloves
(including other material with sharp edges
warehouse) or potentially sharp edges if the
material was to break
Cutting boxes Box cutter Level 3 or greater CR
Cutting heavy rope Retractable safety knife gloves
(e.g., Martor® Megasafe # 116001)
Cutting heavy/large plastic
Table 2 below gives examples of some recommended cutting tools for the various applications listed. This is
not an exclusive list; other manufacturer’s cutting tools can be used, as long as the correct tool is used for the
task.
Table 2 – Examples of Recommended Cutting Tools
Cutting Picture Application
Box cutters Tools Cardboard
Boxes
Typical
example: Level 3 or greater CR gloves
Martor® required
Handy 444
Retractable blade Cutting boxes;

cutting rope or twine;
Typical example: cutting plastic, polyethylene, or
Martor® Megsafe #116001 shrink wrap; gaskets
Level 3 or greater CR gloves

required
Retractable razor scraper Cleaning gasket material from

flange, removing decals from
glass surface

required
Page 3 of 8


Cable skinning knife Skinning control
cables; tech cables;
Typical examples: Klein KT- power cables
46037 - kit
(when fixed blade is
required)

required
Cable jacket skinners Skinning control

cables
Typical example: Ideal industries
No CR Gloves required
Wire strippers and cutters Cutting wire under

# AWG 10 gauge
Strips wire sizes #10, 12, 14, 18
and 20 AWG No CR gloves required
Typical examples:
PROTO professional®, Ideal
Industries
Insulated wire and cable cutters Cutting wire over

AWG #10 gauge
Typical example: Klein
No CR Gloves required
Ratcheting cable cutters manual Cutting copper

and electric operated Typical and aluminum cables
examples:
Greenlee, Homac®, Ideal No CR Gloves required
Industries
Non-insulated cable cutter Cutting copper

and aluminum cables
Typical examples: Klein, Ideal
Industries No CR Gloves required.
Page 4 of 8


The gloves displayed in Table 3 below are typical examples of cut resistant gloves. It is not an exclusive list and
the images may not be representative of the gloves available. The level of glove required is job dependent;
personal preference is considered as long as the gloves meet the minimum requirements for the job being
performed.
Table 3 - Protective Glove Examples
Typical Level 3 or Greater Protective Glove To Be Worn With Typical Examples
Cutting Tools
GLOVE KEVLAR NITRILE COATED ASTM 4
Kevlar(R)/Fiberglass String Knit with Nitrile Palm Coat Glove. Cut-resistant.

13- gauge knit is highly dexterous yet provides stellar cut protection.
Composite blended Kevlar(R) fiber provides ASTM Level 4 cut protection.
Kevlar Gloves

GLOVE FLAME RESISTANT CUT
13 g composite yarn liner with black foam neoprene palm coating. All
components inherently flame resistant (FR). EN (European Standard) cut
resistance (CR) Level 3 or greater.
Kevlar gloves
FR Rated Gloves
GLOVE GRAY CUT RESISTANT DYNEEMA
The world's strongest fiber. Fifteen times stronger than steel by weight.
Resistant not just to cuts but also abrasion and chemicals. Excellent heat
transfer, allowing you to stay cooler without itching. Re-usable, machine
washable and have the highest abrasion rating for longevity. CE Standard
cut resistant Level 3.

Black Rhino® Stainless Steel Wire Core Slash Resistant Safety

Gloves
These gloves are knit from a high-tech yarn, which consists of a stainless-
steel core wrapped with tough Dyneema® man-made fiber. These gloves
give exceptional protection against cuts from sharp-edged materials and
knives. Stand up to repeated washings. ASTM cut resistant Level 5.
Page 5 of 8


Cut Resistant Glove Rating And Task
Typical Material Used
Level 5 Extreme cutting hazards:

Metal Mesh, Hexarmor • Heavy metal plate stamping
• Handling plate glass
Level 4 High cutting hazards:
Fibre-metal blend (Kevlar Steels, • Handling heavy broken insulators or sharp edged objects.
Dyneema Fibreglass) • Handling heavy glass.
Level 3 Moderate cutting hazards:

Kevlar, Vectan, Twaron, Dyneema, • Using an open blade knife or cutting tool.
leather reinforced with Kevlar • Skinning cables.
• Skinning wire greater in size than #10 AWG.
• Cutting boxes, cutting rope, twine, plastic, polyethylene,
shrink wrap, or gaskets (box cutter, retractable blade, or
skinning knife).
• Handling light broken insulators or sharp edged objects.
• Handling light glass.
Level 2 Low cutting hazard:

Heavy leather, polyester, nylon, multiply • Regular lineman activities.
layers • Regular substation activities.
• Automotive applications.
• General maintenance and construction activities.
Page 6 of 8


Manufacturers typically use the ASTM F-1790 standard for measuring the cut protection performance of
protective apparel. This test method uses force-distance testers to determine how resistant a material is to cuts
when exposed to a cutting edge under specific loads. This method provides data to differentiate the cut resistance
of common material such as cotton, leather and high performance fibers. Results are provided in terms of grams
of weight applied to the specific material being tested. Another testing agency which rates fabric and cut
resistance can be seen Table 4 below, ANSI/ISEA (American National Standards Institute)/(International Safety
Equipment Association).
Table 4 - ANSI/ISEA 105-2005 Mechanical Ratings
Cut Cut Cut Cut Cut Cut

Rating Cut Level 6
Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5
Abrasion < 100 ≥ 100 ≥ 500 ≥ 1000 ≥ 3000 ≥ 10000 ≥ 20000
Resistance*
(Cycles)
Cut Resistance < 200 ≥ 200 ≥ 500 ≥ 1000 ≥ 1500 ≥ 3500 -
(Grams)**
Puncture Resistance < 10 ≥ 10 ≥ 20 ≥ 60 ≥ 100 ≥ 150 -
(Newtons)
* Abrasion ratings 0 through 3 are based on measurement with a 500-gram load. Levels 4 through 6
are measured with a 1,000-gram load.
** Weight needed to cut through material with 25 mm of blade travel
Page 7 of 8


Regulatory References:
Alberta
Act Section 2 (2) - Obligations of workers
Regulation P a r t 1 , Section 1(g) Definition of “ Competent Worker”, Section 14 - Duties of Workers,
Section 15 - Safety Training
Code Part 18 - Personal Protective Equipment
British Columbia
Part 2 - Application - Section 2.2 - General Duties
OH&S Regulation - Part 8 - Personal Protective Clothing & Equipment
Saskatchewan
Part I - Preliminary Matters - Section 2(1) (m) Definition “Competent”, Section 19 - Training of worker
Manitoba
Part 1 - Definition and General Matters - Definition “Competent”
Part 16 - Machines, Tools, and Robots - Division 1
NWT
Act 1 - Definition of “Competent
Part 3 - Section 12, General Duties of Employers
Part 5 - Construction and Maintenance
NL
Part I - Definition of “Competent Worker” (i)(ii)
Ontario
Part I - General - Section 1 - Definition “Competent Worker” (a, b, c)
Part XII - Safety Materials, Equipment, Devices and Clothing
Yukon
Act 1 - Definition of “Competent Person”
Part 1 - General - Section 1.06 - Training of Worker
Part 1 - General - Section 1.08 - Personal Protective Equipment
Page 8 of 8
Document Description Working Around Drilled Holes
Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number SWP 26.082
Date: Sept. 20, 2017 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Nov. 20, 2017
26.082 Working Around Drilled Holes

Purpose
This Safe Work Practice provides guidance for improving safety when working around drilled
holes on distribution, transmission and Substation projects and includes all subcontractors who
may be providing this service for Valard. Foremen and Supervisors have the responsibility to put
in place those measures that best protect employees. This Safe Work Practice represents the
soundest methods for reducing incidents and ensuring employee safety, based on experience
and other learnings.
Pier or Direct Embed Foundations based on some unique features of the working
environment or project, Supervision must analyze and carefully document the measures that will
be utilized, ensuring that they provide as much protection to the workplace and employees as
possible.
Objective
To more effectively eliminate, mitigate or control hazards associated when working around
drilled holes on distribution, transmission and substation projects.
Scope
This Safe Work Practice applies to crews tasked with working around drilled holes on
distribution, transmission and substation projects greater than 30 inches in diameter, with depth
greater than 6 feet, for pier or direct embed foundations. For spread footing foundations, follow
applicable excavation requirements.
Definitions
Anchorage - a secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or deceleration devices.
Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment shall be independent of any
anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms and capable of supporting at least
5,000 pounds per employee attached.
Full-body harness - an approved device using straps secured in a manner that will distribute
forces over the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching it to other
components of a fall arrest system.
Restricted Access Zone (RAZ) - an area around the drilled hole that is restricted to those
employees performing necessary tasks. The RAZ should be established a minimum of six (6)
feet from the edge of the drilled hole. Should it become necessary for an employee to enter
within the restricted access zone, the employee shall wear a full-body harness and be tied off to
a suitable anchorage utilizing a leading edge self-retracting lifeline.
Self-retracting lifeline - an approved deceleration device containing a wire rope with a swivel
snap hook, an in-line shock absorber for leading edges and a drum-wound line which can be
slowly extracted from, or retracted onto, the drum under slight tension during normal worker
movement, but at the onset of a fall automatically locks the drum and arrests the fall.
Procedure for Drilling Process (Holes Greater than 30" up to 48" in Diameter)
1. Locate drill site and confirm structure number. Verify the presence of a current Underground
Utility Locate Ticket. Survey the area to identify and confirm the presence of any potential
underground and/or overhead encumbrances that could impact the job set-up. Confirm the
presence of any known or suspected underground utility.
1.1 If performing work in an existing substation site, it is required that prior to any
mechanical excavation, all underground utilities or hazards must be identified. An
Page 1 of 10
excavation checklist is recommended to be used to identify and document these

hazards.
2. Evaluate the work area ground conditions and surrounding environment. Ensure adequate
ground stability where equipment will be stationed or positioned.
3. A specific Job Tailboard or Job Safety Analysis (JSA) for drilled holes must be completed.
Roles and responsibilities of all crew members will be listed on the form. Updated Tailboards
or Job Safety Analysis (JSA) must be completed any time the working conditions or job
activities change in a significant way from the original plan.
4. Perform and document all necessary equipment inspections.
5. Position digger/drill rig and all other associated equipment at the designated drill location.
6. Prior to start-up of the drill rig, effectively place a warning line system around the swing radius
of the drill rig. To increase awareness, employees should be wearing high visibility clothing or
a minimum of Class 2 reflective vests around the drilling operation. Warning line system can
be established by using:
• Cones (with rope, chain or some additional barrier between the cones)
• Snow/construction fencing
• Ropes
• Chains
• Caution/Warning tape
• Combination of the above

7. Place a Restricted Access Zone (RAZ) a minimum of six (6) feet from the edge of the drilled
hole before it reaches six (6) foot in depth. The RAZ can be established by using:
• Guardrail System
• Hi-Cones (with rope, chain or some other additional barrier between the cones)
• Ropes
• Chains
Page 2 of 10
(Example RAZ with Swing Radius Protection)
A warning sign will be placed on or near the entrance to the RAZ noting job site hazards and the
need for fall protection. Should it become necessary for an employee to enter within the RAZ,
the employee shall be wear a full-body harness and be tied off to a suitable anchorage utilizing
a leading edge self-retracting lifeline. There must be a sufficient number of anchorages to not
allow the leading edge self-retracting lifeline to cross over the hole.
(Sample Wording)
NOTE #1: All full-body harnesses used for when working around drilled holes for
structure foundations, direct embed distribution and transmission poles and in
substationsmust be specifically selected and approved for this type of work. The
harnesses are designed for rescue in a horizontal position.
NOTE #2: No one shall enter within the RAZ system without having received a job
briefing on the work being performed, wear all appropriate personal protective
equipment (PPE) and received the required training.
8. Signage should be placed at the entrance to the jobsite warning all other employees,
customer/client and the general public of the work taking place and the specific hazards
associated with the task. All signage used on the jobsite shall be in the language(s) according to
the make-up of the crew.
Page 3 of 10
(Sample Wording)
9. Measurements - Employees periodically take depth measurements during the drilling process.
When it becomes necessary to enter inside the RAZ, to take measurements, employees are
required to wear a full-body harness and be tied off to a suitable anchorage utilizing a leading
edge self-retracting lifeline. The ground conditions around the hole should be evaluated to
determine if extra footing (mats, boards, etc.) needs to be in place for the person evaluating the
hole. There should be a sufficient number of anchorages to NOT allow the leading edge self-
retracting lifeline to cross over the hole. Only authorized employees should be in the area during
drill operations. No employee shall be within the RAZ while the drill rig is in the proves of drilling.
10. All employees wearing fall protection shall be trained on how to properly use, care for and
inspect their fall protection equipment.
11. If the hole(s) will be left unattended or not under construction, cover open hole with a proper
cover. A proper cover should entirely cover the hole and be able to withstand twice (2x) the
weight of employees, equipment and materials that may be imposed on the cover at any time. If
the hole cannot be completely covered or backfilled to ground level due to an obstruction, a
barricade must be installed around the hole.
All covers shall be secured or of adequate weight when installed so as to prevent accidental
displacement by the weather, equipment or employees.
Steps should be taken to identify when a hole cover is in use, so that it is not inadvertently
removed. All unused covers should be stored in a designated location.
The hole cover should be marked with the word “HOLE” or "COVER".
Once the hole has been covered the RAZ can be removed. The RAZ may have to be
temporarily moved during the process of setting the cover. If the RAZ is moved during this
process, employees that are outside of a piece of equipment within 6’ from the edge of the hole
are required to be wearing a full-body harness and tied off to a leading edge self-retracting
lifeline until the hole is covered.
Prior to removing the hole cover, it is recommended that the RAZ be (re)established. However,
if the RAZ cannot be (re)estblished prior to removing the hole cover because it will hinder the
removal process, any employees outside of a piece of equipment that is within 6’ from the edge
of the hole are required to be wearing a full-body harness and tied off to an anchorage utilizing a
leading edge self-retracting lifeline. Once the hole cover has been removed, the RAZ must be
Page 4 of 10
(re)established and any employees inside the RAZ are required to be wearing a full-body
harness and tied off to an anchorage utilizing a leading edge self-retracting lifeline.
A designated safety watch should be temporarily assigned to observe an uncovered hole, to
identify and react to any hazards while the RAZ is being (re)established. The safety watch
cannot have any other duties while monitoring the open hole. The safety watch must maintain
continuous surveillance until the RAZ is (re)established.
of Hol
(Example of Hole Cover)
TRAINING
All employees shall be trained on:
Best Practice: Drilled Holes - Pier or Direct Embed Foundations
o How to properly set-up the guardrail system.
• Fall Protection
o How to properly use, care for and inspect their fall protection equipment.
o When it is necessary to wear a full-body harness.
o How to properly use, care for and inspect the full-body harness.
o When it is necessary to wear a full-body harness and be tied-off.
• Anchorage Points
o What constitutes a proper anchorage point.
o When more than one anchorage point is needed.
• Leading Edge Self-Retracting Lifeline

o How to properly use, care for and inspect the leading edge self-retracting lifeline.
o When/why it is necessary to be tied off with a leading edge self-retracting lifeline.
• Job-site set-up
o Guarding the swing radius of the drill rig.
o Proper method for establishing proper access/egress for the drill rig operator.
o Set-up of warning signs in the work area.
• Proper set-up of a Restricted Access Zone

o Entry limitations/requirements.
.
Page 5 of 10
• Rescue Training and Plan

o Training on preforming a rescue (work team to review rescue plan)
o Review of the rescue plan
Drilled Shaft Entry

The practice of entering drilled shafts for activities such as hand cleaning, visual inspection
and/or equipment retrieval should be undertaken only after a determination by a qualified
person that there are no less-hazardous alternative methods to accomplish the work. Entry is
only permitted in fully cased holes.
NOTE: A detailed entry procedure is required to be completed and approved prior to entry.
RESCUE PLAN
A “Rescue Kit” must be available on-site that is capable of retrieving a person who has fallen
into a drilled hole. The Rescue Kit must allow the crew to handle the various types of rescue
situations they could likely face. These scenarios include:
1. Situation 1 - A person falls down a hole, is wearing a full body harness, and their
retractable is connected.
Retrieval Method - Hook up the wire rope grab with the carabiner and endless sling to
the crane and raise the employee from the hole.
2. Situation 2 - A person falls down a hole, wearing a full body harness, is conscious, and
able to use their arms.
Retrieval Method - Lower the Rescue Rope and Carabiner for the employee to attach
to their d-ring on their harness and raise employee from the hole.
3. Situation 3 - A person falls down a hole, wearing a full body harness, but is not
conscious, or can’t use their arms.
Retrieval Method - Lower the Rescue Stick with carabiner and rescue rope attached.
Attach carabiner to employee d-ring and pull to release the carabiner and rescue rope
from the rescue stick. Raise employee from the hole.
4. Situation 4 - A person falls down a hole, not wearing a full body harness, is conscious,
and able to use their arms.
Retrieval Method - Lower the Buckingham Harness for the employee to put on. Then
lower the rescue rope and carabiner for the employee to attach to their d-ring on their
harness and raise employee from the hole.
5. Situation 5 - A person falls down a hole, is not wearing a full body harness, and is
unconscious.
Retrieval Method - Wait for properly trained rescue personnel to arrive. Do Not Enter
Hole!
Page 6 of 10
The Rescue Kit should include the following items: • Endless Sling & Carabiner

• Buckingham Harness Wire Rope Grab

• Rope Grab
Page 7 of 10
Appendix A
Procedure - Drilling Process (Holes Greater than 48" in Diameter)
The Restricted Access Zone (RAZ) around holes greater than 48" in diameter can be
established by using a guardrail system. The guardrail system must be capable of withstanding
a force of at least 200 pounds applied within 2 inches of the top edge in any outward or
downward direction and be at least 42 inches in height.
Note: For special situations where guardrails cannot be used, such as steep terrain or in an
energized substation, the RAZ (see Example 1 p. may be established by using the other
acceptable methods specified in this document.
Guardrails should be placed a minimum of six feet (6') from the edge of the hole. If Guardrails
are placed closer than six feet, an additional warning system shall be placed at six feet or
greater to establish the RAZ. An adequate number of guardrail sections, per manufacturer
recommendations, must be used to adequately secure the work zone and protect employees.
The actual number of sections used will depend on the size of the hole. Guardrails may not
have to be placed completely around the hole. (Reminder: Full body harness with self-
retracting life line must be worn prior to entering the RAZ)
Sample Guardrail Configuration
A system is defined as a rail (a & b) and a base (c&d).

You can utilize as many danger side rail systems (b)
hooked together as you need to protect the size hole.
These sections are available in various sizes.
At each end of the (b) danger side railings, install a
minimum of a 5' outrigger system (a) away from the
danger side to properly support the danger side
railing.
Toeboards (e) are optional and not required when
drilling holes.
A warning sign will be placed on or near the entrance to the guardrail system noting job site
hazards and the need for fall protection. Should it become necessary for an employee to enter
within the guardrail system, the employee shall be wear a full-body harness and be tied off to a
suitable anchorage utilizing a self-retracting lifeline. There must be a sufficient number of
anchorages to not allow the self-retracting lifeline to cross over the hole.
All other requirements contained in Procedure - Drilling Process (Greater than 30" up to 48"
in Diameter) remain in place for holes greater than 48" in diameter.
Page 8 of 10
Example 1
Page 9 of 10
Appendix B
1. Once the drilling process is completed and the process of setting the rebar cage, setting direct
embed poles, setting forms, pouring concrete, placing anchor bolts, etc begins, the guard rail
system can be removed. However removal of the guardrail system in order to facilitate these
tasks. Removal of the guardrail system during the performance of these tasks does not
eliminate the requirement for a Restricted Access Zone (RAZ). The RAZ should be
established a minimum of six feet (6') from the edge of the hole. The fall protection and RAZ can
be removed once the fall hazard has been eliminated.
The Restricted Access Zone can be established by using:

• Cones (with rope, chain or some additional barrier between the cones)
• Ropes
• Chains
• Other
(Example RAZ set-up)
2. Entering Within the Restricted Access Zone (RAZ) - Employees will periodically enter within
the RAZ to perform tasks such as setting the rebar cage, setting the direct embed poles, setting
forms, pouring concrete, placing anchor bolts, etc. The ground conditions around the hole
should be evaluated to determine if extra footing (mats, boards, etc.) needs to be in place for
the person working around the drilled hole. Employees that enter inside the RAZ are required to
wear a full-body harness and be tied off to a suitable anchorage utilizing a leading edge self-
retracting lifeline. There should be a sufficient number of anchorages to NOT allow the leading
edge self-retracting lifeline to cross over the hole.
Note: If there is a break in the barricade and the hole cover is removed then a safety
watch must be present in order that no one enters the area without fall arrest equipment
and connected to an anchor point.
Page 10 of 10
Document Description Operation and Use of Portable Light Towers
Created By: K. Hickey Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.083
Date: Nov. 15, 2014 Revision: Revised by: Date:
26.083 OPERATION AND USE OF PORTABLE LIGHT TOWER

PURPOSE: To ensure the safe operation on the equipment as well as its limitations.
PRACTICE: All employees who are to operate this equipment must review the SWP and
Operator’s manual.
Transport and Towing:
• Always use the proper trailer hitch and safety chains – check that the hitch and coupling
on the towing vehicle are rated equal to or greater than the trailers “gross vehicle weight
rating”. Connect safety chains in a crossing pattern under the tongue and attach the
breakaway cable to the rear bumper of the towing vehicle.
• Check tires for wear, inflation (50 psi) and condition prior to transporting.
• Ensure directional and brake lights on the trailer are connected and working properly
• Recommended Manufacturer speed when towing:
o 80 KM/H or less on highway
o 20 KM/H or less off-road conditions
• Stand clear of traffic when starting or checking the unit along the road.
• Check the fuel tank, oil pan, and fuel and oil lines for leaks that would spill fuel or oil on
the road.
• Check fasteners and mounting brackets periodically to ensure all are tight and nothing is
in danger of falling off during transit.
• Use the lifting eye or forklift pockets on the tower for lifting the trailer and tower.
• Make sure any tie-downs at the bottom of the trailer are released, and the cradle
retaining pin is inserted and secured, prior to lifting.
•
Set-Up:
Move the light tower to desired location keeping the following in mind:
• The light tower should not be placed where those working under the light are either:
forced to look into the light regularly, or forced to work with their backs to the light
(shadows will block the light from the work area).
• The area where the tower is positioned should be relatively level for safe and proper
operation of the unit.
• The light tower should be located on the same level or on ground higher than the
work area.
• Use tire chocks in front of and behind each tire wherever possible. Always use tire
chocks on an incline.
Unhitch from the towing vehicle as follows:
• Rotate the tongue jack into position (90 degrees), release the hitch pin and raise the
tongue off the towing vehicle.
Level the trailer, using the jacks as follows:
• Extend the front outriggers until the outrigger pins lock into place. Rotate the jack on
each outrigger into vertical position and lock into place.
• Rotate the rear jack and lock into the vertical position.
• Start at the highest jack position. Rotate the jack handle until the jack foot touches the
ground.
• Raise the other jacks to level the trailer.
Connect a ground/ground rod to the grounding stud on the trailer.
Page 1 of 3
• Drive the rod into the ground and secure the grounding wire to the lug located on the
trailer frame.
Raise the tower as follows:
• Remove the tower travel locking pin and/or safety pin
• Remove the tower locking pin from the tower base. Using the winch, raise the tower to
the vertical position. Secure mast with locking and/or safety pin
• Beware of pinch points when erecting the tower.
• Do not attempt to lean the tower down below 45 degrees when it is extended – serious
damage may occur.
• Under no circumstances should the tower be repositioned when the boom is in vertical
position.
• Towers can extend up to 30 Ft. Ensure the area above the trailer is open and clear of
overhead wires.
• If for any reason part of the mast hangs up or winch cable develops slack while raising
or lowering tower, STOP immediately and contact supervisor and mechanic.
• Never remove safety pin and/or pull mast locking pin while the tower is up.
Starting:
• Ensure the light switches and breakers are turned “off”. This prevents the engine from
starting under load and prevents electrical equipment from being damaged.
• Unlock and open the access doors.
• Check the oil, fuel, and coolant levels.
• Check that the tower has been properly grounded.
• Place the key into the ignition switch and preheat the unit for 10-30 seconds. Never
preheat for more than 30 seconds; damage may be done to the heating elements.
• Turn the key switch towards the start side of the key switch.
• Start the engine and listen for any unusual sounds or vibrations.
• Once the engine has been started and running smoothly, place the light switches in the
“ON” positions, one at a time.
• Contact supervisor and mechanic if any issues out of the norm occur when starting or if
the engine will not start.
Light Tower Auxiliary Power:

• Total auxiliary power cannot exceed main circuit breaker rating.
• Before plugging in auxiliary cords; feed them up through the trailer frame and attach to
receptacles. Close the cabinet doors to protect control panel and other components from
weather.
Shutdown Procedures:
• Place all light switches into their “off” position.
• Allow the engine to run for 1 to 5 minutes under no load, and then turn the unit “OFF”.
• Never shut the unit down while under load. The AC generator may become damaged.
• After being shut down, the lights must be allowed to cool down before trying to restart
the lights. This cool down period can be between 10-25 minutes, depending on the
ambient temperature.
• Shut the engine down if any of the following conditions exist during operation:
Page 2 of 3
1. Noticeable change in engine speed

2. Loss of electrical output
3. Equipment connected to the generator overheats
4. Sparking Occurs
5. Engine misfires or there is excessive engine/generator vibration
6. Protective covers are loose or missing
7. If the ambient temperature is greater than 43 degrees Celsius
Lowering the Tower:

• Bulbs become extremely hot when in use – be sure to allow them to cool.
• Using the upper telescoping winch, telescope the tower down to its fully retracted
position.
• Loosen the rotational lock and rotate the tower into its nesting position. The upper
telescoping winch should be pointed forward, towards the tongue.
• Remove the travel and/or tower locking pin.
• Using the lower pivot winch, lower the tower into the cradle.
• Verify that all locking and safety pins are “latched” or hooked over the tower cradle. This
prevents the tower sections from telescoping out while traveling.
• Replace the travel locking pin.
• If required, remove the light fixtures and crosshead assembly.
• Secure all locking pins and verify that components are properly latched.
• Close and lock both doors.
Fueling:
• Always handle fuel with care.

• Stop engine before refueling. Fill fuel tank outdoors.
• Be sure the fuel supply has a positive shut-off valve.
• Do not replace fuel lines with materials different from those supplied as original
equipment.
• Do not refuel the engine when it is hot, while smoking, or when near open flames or
sparks.
• Use secondary containment when fueling and when light tower is operating.
Newfoundland and Labrador
Part V General Health and Safety Requirements Sect. 36 “Illumination”
Page 3 of 3
Document Description Operating Equipment near Energized Facilities.
Created By: K. Curley Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.084
26.084 OPERATING EQUIPMENT NEAR ENERGIZED FACILITIES.

PURPOSE: To ensure the safe operation or Equipment near energized Equipment during the
course or moving and operating the equipment in a safe manner to prevent any contact.
PRACTICE:
Whenever practicable, facilities should be de-energized and isolated when travelling below or
working nearby with equipment that has the ability to reach within the limits of approach.
It is imperative that adequate controls are in place whenever equipment is travelling below or
working near or below energized facilities. Electrical system owners must be contacted and
issue approval for Valard to proceed as per this SWP.
Valard and sub-contractor must have a system in place to adequately manage the hazards of
operating equipment near energized facilities. The system must contain the following elements:
• A means to determine the voltage and subsequent limit of approach. If the voltage is
unknown, the limit of approach is seven metres.
• A means to determine the conductor height above ground, accounting for potential
change in ground conditions and conductor sag.
• A means to determine the traveling height of equipment moving under an energized
circuit or working under.
• Positive methods of control to ensure the limits of approach are not breached. Examples
are:
o Signage.
o Goal posts.
o Spotter(s).
• A method to communicate the hazards and subsequent controls to all involved in the
work area.
• Training to ensure all involved personnel know what to do in the event of contact to
avoid injury due to step/touch potential. Minimum training requirement 7 Steps Electrical
Awareness or equivalent training approved by Valard.
When a spotter is used, he or she must not be assigned any other tasks. The spotter must
understand the hazards and the controls, and must have an audible means of contact with the
equipment operator (e.g., radio communication, air horn). The minimum course requirement
Spotting near Energized Power Lines (Valard’s in house training) or equivalent training
approved by Valard.
Examples of acceptable means of control are:
• Equipment with boom (e.g., crane, track-hoe, backhoe) crossing below an energized
power line off road.
o Signage.
o Goal posts
o Equipment height stowed
o Conductor height above ground
o Hazard assessment and controls understood by all involved.
Page 1 of 2
Document Description Operating Equipment near Energized Facilities.
Created By: K. Curley Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.084
• Equipment with boom (e.g., crane, trackhoe, backhoe) working near or below an
energized power line.
o Signage
o Spotter(s)
o Equipment height stowed or equipment reach
o Hazard assessment and controls understood by all involved.
• Equipment without a boom (e.g., dump truck, tractor-trailer) travelling below an
energized power line.
o Signage
o Equipment height above ground
o Hazard assessment and controls (e.g.; assurance that all implements are
lowered before approaching line) understood by all involved.
The employer is responsible to ensure that the traffic is controlled to ensure worker
protection. The workers must be visible and / or physically protected from traffic and the
following are the minimum required practices for signalers.
All other employees must wear a high visibility vest at all times when working either near
a highway/roadway or on any site that Valard is working on.
Page 2 of 2
Document Description Pulling Rope Maintenance and Use
26.087 Pulling Rope Maintenance and Use
This safe work practice is to prevent rope failure while pulling wire rope during stringing
operation using fibre rope, this rope shall meet SWP 26.088 Rope Selection for Stringing
Puller.
Rope shall be Inspected for wear, tearing, abrasion, elongation (uneven diameter),
melted fibres and cut strands.
Storage and use of Rope while on a puller.

• Rope must be covered to not expose it to the Sun, road grim, debris or severe
weather conditions.
• When storing all rope must be covered up.
Rope Inspection Procedure:

1. Prepare Inspection Record Sheets/ Rope Log Book. Fill in known rope information, such
as: type, diameter/circumference, fiber material, length, manufacturer, type of service.
2. A log book must be kept on a document which is located to the Puller unit, it must
contain all puller loads as indicated on the Readout. This must include the date as well
as the load that maximum load applied.
3. While using the rope a visual inspection should be make especially on the first 30 meters
including the swivel and the loop for wear.
4. Annually a minimum of the initial 10 meters of the rope is to be cut and sent out for
testing. Test results must be recorded in the Rope logbook. If there is a failure at a
significant number less that the working load (+10%), then another 10 meters must be
cut and sent for testing. These results must also be recorded.
5. All test results are to be identified in the Logbook.
6. Ropes that are purchased by All Power for Valard. (See Rope specs on pages 2 and 3
Other areas may purchase ropes made by other manufacturers. These rope types are
to be identified in the Log Book including the specs if available. If there are no specs
then the stringing crew must follow Consult Yale Cordage for guidelines for working
loads.
7. Check braided ropes for hardness. Pushing on the rope should cause the braids to
open. Braided ropes should be supple and bend easily. They should flatten slightly when
compressed laterally.
8. Check jacketed ropes or double braids for core breaks. This is manifested by sudden
reduction in diameter and can be felt by running hands over the rope. (See pages 4-7
for identifying rope defects)
Page 1 of 6
UNITREX ROPE
SPECIFICATIONS
Average Spliced Minimum Spliced Maximum Working**

Diameter Weight
Break Strength* Break Strength Load 4:1
Inches (mm) Lbs Kg Lbs Kg Lbs Kg Lbs/100ft Kg/100m
0.44 (11) 20,000 9,080 18,000 8,172 5,000 2,270 6.7 10.0
0.53 (13) 26,000 11,800 23,400 10,620 6,500 2,950 9.2 13.7
0.58 (15) 34,000 15,435 30,600 13,892 8,500 3,859 11.4 17.0
0.63 (16) 42,000 19,295 38,250 17,366 10,625 4,824 13.5 20.1
0.71 (18) 50,500 22,925 45,450 20,663 12,625 5,731 16.9 25.2
0.84 (21) 73,500 33,365 66,150 30,029 18,375 8,3411 24.2 36.0
1.00 (25) 100,000 45,400 90,000 40,860 25,000 11,350 32.4 48.2
1.15 (29) 125,000 56,750 112,500 51,075 31,250 14,188 42.4 63.1
1.25 (32) 158,000 71,730 142,200 64,557 39,500 17,933 52.5 78.2
1.40 (36) 195,000 88,530 175,500 79,677 48,750 22,133 64.9 96.6
1.75 (44) 264,000 119,855 237,600 107,870 66,000 29,964 92.6 137.9
1.94 (49) 310,000 140,740 279,000 1216,666 77,500 35,185 98.8 147.1
1.99 (51) 360,000 163,440 324,000 147,096 90,000 40,860 113.3 168.7
22.0 (56) 430,000 195,220 387,000 175,698 107,500 48,805 144.0 214.4
* Knots and abrupt bends significantly reduce the strength of all ropes and lower maximum
working load.
** Working load is based on static or moderately dynamic lifting/pulling operations.
Instantaneous changes in load, up or down, in excess of 10% of the rope’s rated working
load constitute hazardous shock load and would void the normal working-load
recommendation. Consult Yale Cordage for guidelines for working loads and the safe use
of rope. (See SWP. 088)
Page 2 of 6
STATIC -12™ DS (Double Strand) Rope
Static - 12™ DS is a double Strand variant of the 12 strand Rope. It has low stretch and is
abrasive resistant. This construction gives the highest strength to weight ratio for Polyester
and is easy to spice and can be coated for even greater durability.
Product Material: 100% Polyester
Characteristics
• High Strength
• Low Stretch
• Abrasion resistant
• Easy to Splice
Diameter Circumference Weight Tensile Average
Inches Metric (mm) inches Metric (mm) Lbs/100 ft. Kg/100 M Lbs KG
3/16” 5mm 9/16” 15mm 1.2 lbs 1.8kg 1.200 lbs 540kg
1/4” 6.5mm 3/4” 20mm 2 lbs 3kg 2,200 lbs 1,000kg
5/16” 8mm 1” 25.5mm 3 lbs 4.5kg 3.200 lbs 1,450kg
3/8” 9.5mm 1-3/16” 30mm 4 lbs 6kg 6,000 lbs 2,700kg
7/16” 11mm 1-3/8” 35mm 6.2 lbs 9kg 8,000 lbs 3,600kg
1/2” 13mm 1-9/16” 40mm 8.3 lbs 12kg 11,000 lbs 5,000kg
5/8” 16mm 2” 51mm 13 lbs 19kg 16,000 lbs 7,200kg
3/4” 19mm 2-1/4” 57mm 17 lbs 25kg 21,000 lbs 9,500kg
7/8” 22mm 2-3/4” 70mm 26 lbs 38kg 30,000 lbs 13,600kg
1”” 25mm 3-3/16” 80mm 34 lbs 51kg 36,500 lbs 16,600kg
1-1/8” 29mm 3-1/2” 90mm 43 lbs 64kg 48,500 lbs 22,000kg
1-1/4” 32mm 3-15/16” 100mm 52 lbs 78kg 56,000 lbs 25,500kg
1-5/16” 33mm 4-1/8” 105mm 60 lbs 89kg 65,000 lbs 29,500kg
1-1/2” 38mm 4.3/4” 120mm 71 lbs 106kg 82,000 lbs 37,200kg
1-5/8” 41mm 5” 127mm 90 lbs 134kg 98,000 lbs 44,500kg
1-3/4” 45mm 5-1/2” 140mm 104 lbs 155kg 110,000 lbs 50,000kg
Page 3 of 6
Rope Defects
Cut Strands
Single Braided Ropes: Cut strands can significantly degrade the strength of a rope. In 12-strand
ropes, two cut strands in proximity necessitates that the rope be either repaired by cutting out
the damaged section and re-splicing, or the rope must be retired. For 8-strand and 3-strand
single braids, a single cut strand indicates that the rope must be repaired or retired.
Double Braided Ropes: In these ropes the cover is often composed of multiple yarns arranged
in groups of two or three in a weave of the cover. Each group of yarns is considered a single
strand of the cover braid. In standard double braids where the cover and core share the load,
three or more cut strands in proximity indicate repair or retirement.
In core-dependent double braided ropes, 100% of the ropes strength is carried by the core. The
cover functions as protection. While cover damage does not affect the ropes strength, a
damaged cover can allow the strength bearing core to be subjected to damage from abrasion or
other mechanisms leading to reduction in strength. Covers should be repaired when damage is
evident.
Compression
Often seen on winch drums, compression is caused by fibre molding itself to the contact surface
while under a radial load. Compression can be identified by a visible sheen and stiffness that
can be reduced by flexing the rope. Compression is not a permanent characteristic and should
not be confused with melted or glazed fibres.
Pulled Strand
Strands that are pulled away from the body of the rope, not cut or otherwise damaged, are
usually caused by snagging on equipment or rough surfaces. This is not a permanent condition.
Pulled strands can be carefully worked back into position in the braid by following the strand
through the braid pattern and equalizing the tension to that of the surrounding strands.
Page 4 of 6
Double braid with pulled strand 12-strand with pulled strand
Melted Fiber/ Glossy or Glazed Areas

Glossy or glazed areas are signs of heat damage. The strength loss may be more than the
amount of melted fibre indicates, as fibres adjacent to the melted areas are probably damaged
from excessive heat even though they appear normal. The melted fibre will have likely damaged
an equal amount of adjacent un-melted fibre.
If possible, remove affected section and re-splice with a standard end-for-end splice. If re-
splicing is not possible, retire the rope.
Double braid melted fibre 12 strand melted fibre
Discoloration
With use, all ropes get dirty. Be on the lookout for areas of discoloration that could be caused by
chemical contamination. Determine the cause of the discoloration and replace the rope if it is
brittle or stiff.
If possible, remove affected section and re-splice with a standard end-for-end splice. If re-
splicing is not possible, retire the rope.
Discoloration on double braid Discoloration on 12 strand
Inconsistent Diameter
Inspect for flat areas, bumps or lumps. This can indicate core or internal damage from
overloading or shock loads and is usually sufficient reason to replace the rope. Inconsistent
texture or stiff areas can indicate excessive dirt or grit embedded in the rope or shock load
damage and is usually reason to replace the rope.
Double braid inconsistent diameter
Page 5 of 6
Abrasion
When a single braid rope is first put into service, the outer filaments of the rope will tend to
abrade and fuzz up. This is the result of these filaments breaking, which actually forms a
protective cushion and shield for the fibers underneath. In most applications, this condition
should stabilize, not progress. If the surface roughness increases, excessive abrasion takes
place and strength is lost.
When inspecting the rope, look closely at both the inner and outer fibres. When either is worn,
the rope may be degrading.
Open the strands and look for powdered fibre, which is one sign of internal wear. Estimate the
internal wear to estimate total fibre abrasion. If total fibre loss is 20%, then it’s safe to assume
that the rope has lost 20% of its strength as a result of abrasion.
To determine the extent of fibre damage from abrasion, a single yarn in all abraded areas
should be examined. The diameter of the abraded yarn should then be compared to a portion of
the same yarn or an adjacent yarn of the same type that has been protected by the strand
crossover area and is free from abrasion damage.
As a general rule for braided ropes, when there is 25% or more wear from abrasion, or the fibre
is broken or worn away, the rope should be retired from service. For double braid ropes, 50%
wear on the cover is the retirement point and with 3 strand ropes, 10% or more wear is the
retirement point.
For core-dependent double braid ropes, if no damage to the core has occurred, the jacket can
be repaired.
Page 6 of 6
Document Description Walking in Field Conditions
Created By: A. Buss Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.089
Date: Feb. 1, 2016 Revision: 0 Revised by: R. Hiscock Date: Feb. 14, 2019
26.089 Walking in Field Conditions
The purpose of this practice is to establish a minimum safety standard for walking in the
field and to identify some common hazards associated with field work.
Overview
Walking in Field Conditions – Hazard Summary
A site hazard assessment is mandatory before beginning work to identify and mitigate any
site specific hazards not identified in this practice.
Practice
1. Avoid areas of tall grass. If it is necessary to walk in areas of tall grass, slow your
pace, taking deliberate and cautious strides. The purpose for this is to avoid falling
into potholes, tripping over obstacles, getting caught on sharp tree stubs and avoiding
small animals such as snakes all can be very difficult to see in tall grass.
2. If possible, walk on an established path (to minimize damage to terrain).
3. Wear rubber boots on wet days for protection, traction and comfort. Rubber boots will
allow you to walk through puddles and small streams instead of trying to jump over
them.
4. Use a stake to help identify the depths of small streams and puddles and to identify the
type of bottom under the water, before you step in.
5. On construction sites you should be aware of waste lumber containing nails.
a) Puncture wounds from nails can be painful, difficult to heal and become infected
easily.
b) If working after a fresh snow fall in a construction area, watch for nails and other
sharp objects that could be laying under the snow.
6. Deadfall – Dead Slow
a) Allow extra time to negotiate areas where trees are blown and/or burnt. If you
proceed at a normal pace in a deadfall area, you could slip on fallen logs.
7. Traffic and Heavy Equipment
a) Remember to be seen (make eye contact with operator)
b) Be careful around farm yards, machinery and livestock
c) Remember traffic is a danger even on minor country roads
8. Be aware of the consequences of changes in the weather and check the forecast
Walking in Cold Weather

Use these tips to prepare yourself and take care when out walking in icy or
snowy conditions. For additional information see SWP 26.029 Cold Weather Work
1. Concentrate on your walking and take small steps – walking at a slower pace than
normal increases your traction and can greatly reduce your chances of falling.
2. Be aware of where you are going – always watch for hazards and dangers such
as ice on steps, pavements, and pathways.
3. Always be aware of the possibilities of ice and water in muskeg and marsh areas.
Avoid this area where possible and carry up to date mapping.
4. Carry emergency equipment for rescue.
5. When a water hazard is identified, working on ice training must be provided.
Page 1 of 3
6. Watch for cracks of ice or snow on top of areas with the potential for water, avoid
areas with signs of cracking.
7. When traveling on foot or by vehicle watch for signs of avalanches. If you see
small avalanches on small slopes, chances are the same conditions exist on
larger slopes.
8. Don’t Rush. Move at a speed that feels comfortable and remember to shorten
your stride. Give yourself lots of time to get where you are going.
9. Keep one hand free for your balance. Use handrails when available for going up
or down steps and take care to plant your feet firmly on each step.
10. Wear good footwear with treads – these are designed to provide a better grip in
wet and slippery conditions. Alternatively, you can try shoe chains or ice grippers
which are designed to provide traction on ice and snow; however they are not
suitable for walking on normal surfaces because the chain links provide unstable
footing.
11. Stay alert – look out for icicles hanging from trees, sheets of ice on sloping roofs
that may be melting if the sun is out.
12. Don’t carry a heavy backpack as this will alter your center of balance, reducing
your stability.
13. Brighten up your outer gear by wearing a safety vest; this makes you more visible
to drivers.
14. If the sun is bright, wear safety sunglasses. They help you see better through any
glare and avoid hazards, and also protects eyes from harsh sunlight.
15. Give yourself the equivalent of four legs by using walking poles, which will reduce
the chances of slips and give you extra stability in extremely icy conditions.
16. Remember that it is important to keep your head warm when walking in cold
winter weather – you can lose about 20% of your body heat from your head. Hats
also shield your head from the sun, and the visor will protect your face from both
the sun and rain.
Walking in Hot Weather

Walking in the heat can have dangerous consequences. For additional
information see SWP 26.052 Hot Weather Work
Water:
1. When walking in warm weather it is very important to take plenty of water
with you. Drink small amounts of water often. Even if you don’t feel thirsty
you should still have a drink at least every 15 minutes.
2. Remember that approximately 68% of your body is made up of water.
You only have to lose 2% of your body weight in fluids and you will start to
feel hot and your heart rate increases.
3. Heat stroke and heat exhaustion potentially are very serious so if you get
a headache or feel dizzy, stop walking immediately, have a rest, a drink of
water and try to cool down.
Clothing:
1. A hardhat with a brim is essential for providing protection against sunburn
and sunstroke. Protect your eyes with safety sunglasses that block UVA
and UV rays.
2. Wear clothes that are light coloured as this helps to reflect the sun’s heat.
Page 2 of 3
3. Ideally, wear a fabric that wicks away moisture from your skin to the
outside of the material, where it will evaporate.
4. Don’t wear tight clothing – go for a loose top and lightweight trousers and
a cool long sleeved shirt to protect you from the sun’s rays.
5. Don’t forget your sunscreen. Wear SPF 15 or above, and reapply
frequently if you are sweating heavily.
6. Drink enough water to keep you hydrated but being aware that too much
water can cause water poisoning. While working, drink about 250 ml (1
cup) of water every 15-20 minutes and during more physically demanding
work drink at least 1litre an hour.
7. Water should come from a clean uncontaminated source. Drinking water
from unknown natural water sources can cause illness and further
dehydration.
Page 3 of 3

C00029-5 C8 Appendix 1d - Valard JSA SOP SWP Procedures - A6V3L9

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

C00029-5 C8 Appendix 1d - Valard JSA SOP SWP Procedures - A6V3L9

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

APPENDIX 1d:

Job Safety Analysis (JSA), Safe Operating Procedures (SOP)

Hazard Review on change of process Critically examine the areas of

2.3 Ensure workers are

3.2 Damaging the 3.2 Obtain appropriate

3.3 Falling of persons, 3.3 Fence or barricade

3.5 Access and egress. 3.5 Stair case, ladder or

3.6 Spoil Management. 3.6 Spoil piles must be

3.7 Water Management 3.7 Hydro vac, pumps, dikes

NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY

2 2 4 6 8 10 4-6 Investigate engineering 12-25 Cease work until interim controls

1.2 A clear walkway must be

Potential (source of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard Post Mitigation

Potential (source of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard Post Mitigation

NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY

2.2 Hands, fingers or 2.2 Work gloves and other

2.3 Rigging fails. 2.3 Inspect all rigging prior to

2.4 Equipment contacts 2.4 Identify all energized

2.5 Slips, trips, falls. 2.5 Observe work area for

2.6 Equipment tips over. 2.6 Crane leveled as

2.7 Strains, sprains and 2.7 Keep proper body

3.2 Personnel struck by 3.2 Operator to maintain

3.3 Hydraulic system 3.3 Establish the best work

4. 2 Hands, fingers and 4.2 Designate a flagger for

4.3 Test equipment 4.3 Check specified torque

5.2 Personnel struck by 5.2 Guard and/or barricade

NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY

1.3 Existing Line 1.3 Ensure operators and

NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY

Hazard Review on change of Critically examine the areas of

2 2 4 6 8 10 4-6 Investigate engineering 12-25 Cease work until interim controls

Potential (source of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard Post Mitigation

NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY

Hazard Review on change of Critically examine the areas of

2 2 4 6 8 10 4-6 Investigate engineering 12-25 Cease work until interim controls

Potential (source of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard Post Mitigation

NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY

Hazard Review on change of Critically examine the areas of

2 2 4 6 8 10 4-6 Investigate engineering 12-25 Cease work until interim controls

Potential (source of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard Post Mitigation

NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY

Hazard Review on change of

2 2 4 6 8 10 completion of all agreed actions.

NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY

Hazard Review on change of Critically examine the areas of

2 2 4 6 8 10 4-6 Investigate engineering 12-25 Cease work until interim controls

NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY

2.2 Steel bundle falling 2.2 Check banding on

3.2 Taking poor route 3.2 Know route beforehand

3.3 Right of way 3.3 Check for any road

5.2 Front end loader 5.2 Check weight of bundle

5.3 Steel bundle falling 5.3 Check banding on

5.4 Striking vehicles or 5.4 Workers clear of load,

NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY

3.2 Steel bundle falling 3.2 Check banding on

3.4 Improper secured 3.4 Position steel bundles on

3.5 Slipping, tripping, 3.5 Trailer deck to be clear of

3.6 Ensure blocking is of

NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY

2.2 Steel bundle falling 2.2 Check banding on

2.3 Striking vehicles or 2.3 Workers clear of load,

2.4 Improper secured 2.4 Position steel bundles

3.2 Taking poor route 3.2 Know route beforehand

4.2 Other vehicular / 4.2 If needed barrier area or